TM 1-70-23

CHAPTER 1
AIRCRAFT GENERAL
CHAPTER OVERVIEW

SECTION TITLE

1-1 General Information

1-2 Equipment Description and Data

1-3 Servicing

1-4 Cleaning

1-5 Lubrication

1-6 Ground Handling

1-7 Periodic/Special Inspections

1-8 Retirement Schedule

1-1/(1-2 Blank)
 TM 1-70-23

SECTION 1-1

GENERAL INFORMATION

SECTION OVERVIEW

PARAGRAPH TITLE

1-1-1 General

1-1-1/(1-1-2 Blank)
PARA 1-1-1 TM 1-70-23

1-1-1 GENERAL.
1-1-1.1 Scope. the No. 1 and No. 2 junction boxes, check for
adequate clearance between these components and
This manual contains complete description the wire harnesses routed close to them. All wiring
information and maintenance procedures. should be checked for proper clamping and for
installation of sufficient harness ties to avoid wire
1-1-1.2 Maintenance Forms, Records, and chafing.
Reports.
Forms, records, and reports are to be used per local 1-1-1.6 Airworthiness of Components.
command directives.

1-1-1.3 Preparation for Storage or Ship- WARNING

ment.

Refer to Appendix E for instructions on preparation

Injury to personnel and damage to
for storage or shipment.
equipment will result if components
1-1-1.4 Connection of Electric Connectors. from helicopters involved in crashes/
accidents are installed on your
a. Self-locking threaded connectors, MIL-C-5015 helicopter. Components from
and MIL-C-83723, will not connect with their helicopters involved in crashes/accidents
receptacles unless properly torqued. The may be offered for sale and use on
coupling rings must be hand-torqued until the airworthy helicopters. Please be advised,
tabs on the locking devices align with the whenever a part is subjected to stresses,
center of the groove. thermal effects, or damage outside of
normal operating parameters, some
b. Bayonet coupling connectors, MIL-C-26482 adverse change in that part may occur.
and MIL-C-38999, will not connect with their Such change may not be visually detect-
receptacles unless properly torqued. The able and may therefore require destruc-
coupling rings must be hand-torqued until the tive testing to determine airworthiness.
bayonet pins can be seen, heard, and felt snap- Unless stresses, thermal effects, and
ping into the holes of the coupling rings. other damage to which parts are
subjected as a result of a crash/accident
c. Threaded connectors not using a locking
can be evaluated and determined to be
mechanism will not connect with their
within design parameters, any part that
receptacles unless properly torqued. These con-
m a y a ff e c t s a f e o p e r a t i o n o f t h e
nectors are identified by a 1/2-inch red dot
helicopters shall be assumed to be da-
located on the structure adjacent to the connec-
maged beyond acceptable limits and
tor receptacles. Connectors of this type must be
shall not be reused on airworthy
hand-torqued and lockwired.
helicopters. It is necessary that the
1-1-1.5 Routing and Clamping of Wire Har- integrity of crash damaged part be as-
nesses. sessed by the operator before flight.

Upon reinstallation of components such as the left

and right relay panels, the No. 3 relay panel, and

1-1-1-1/(1-1-1-2 Blank)
 TM 1-70-23

SECTION 1-2

EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION AND DATA

SECTION OVERVIEW

PARAGRAPH TITLE

1-2-1 Aircraft General

1-2-2 Flight Safety Critical Aircraft Parts (FSCAP) Program

1-2-1/(1-2-2 Blank)
PARA 1-2-1 TM 1-70-23

1-2-1 AIRCRAFT GENERAL.

1-2-1.1 Aircraft Description. receptacles where necessary. Components
susceptible to electromagnetic radiation are
a. Helicopters are twin turboshaft engine aircraft. internally modified with filters and gaskets.
The helicopters are powered by two T700-GE- The instrument panel and other mounting
700, T700-GE-701A, or T700-GE-701C surfaces for EMEP components are metal with
engines, mounted above the mid-fuselage. a chemical conversion coating conforming to
(Figure 1-2-1-1, Sheet 1). Their primary mis- MIL-C-5541, Class 3, or use bonding straps to
sion is the transportation of passengers, litter provide low resistance to airframe ground. The
patients, and equipment. The crew consists of a following list identifies those components hav-
pilot, copilot, and crewchief. The main rotor ing pin filter adapters and pin filter connectors:
group consists of a four-bladed, fully-
articulated, elastomeric rotor. The tail rotor (1) B l a d e D e i c e T e s t P a n e l ( p i n fi l t e r
group consists of a canted crossbeam tail rotor adapter).
with two continuous composite spars running
from blade tip to blade tip, crossing each other (2) B l a d e D e i c e C o n t r o l l e r ( p i n fi l t e r
at the hub to form the four tail rotor blades. adapter).
Forward, rear, lateral, and vertical flight is
done by the main rotor system, while the tail (3) Copilot’s HSI (pin filter adapter).
rotor system counteracts torque from the main
rotor and provides directional control. Power to (4) Pilot’s HSI (pin filter adapter).
drive the main rotor is supplied from engine
(5) SAS/FPS Computer (pin filter adapter).
torque transmitted by drive shafting to the
input module of the main transmission. The tail
(6) Rate Gyro (pin filter adapter).
rotor is driven by drive shafting extending from
the main module of the main transmission (7) No. 1 Generator Control Unit (pin filter
through the intermediate gear box to the tail adapter).
gear box. Three separate hydraulic systems are
used in the helicopter. The No. 1 and No. 2 (8) No. 2 Generator Control Unit (pin filter
hydraulic systems provide power for the main adapter).
rotor servos and the pilot-assist servos. The No.
3, or backup, hydraulic system provides (9) Copilot’s VSI (pin filter adapter).
backup power for the No. 1 and No. 2
hydraulic systems and recharges the APU start (10) Pilot’s VSI (pin filter adapter).
subsystem. The backup hydraulic system also
provides power for ground checks without (11) C a u t i o n / A d v i s o r y P a n e l ( p i n fi l t e r
operation of the main transmission. Basic adapter).
electrical power is supplied by two AC genera-
tors mounted on the accessory module. AC (12) APU Generator Control Unit (pin filter
power is converted to DC power for operation adapter).
of certain systems.
(13) No. 1 Lateral Accelerometer (pin filter
b. EMEP Electrical wiring and components are adapter).
hardened for electromagnetic environment
protection (EMEP) for eliminating abnormal (14) No. 2 Lateral Accelerometer (pin filter
responses to external electromagnetic radiation. adapter).
Electrical wiring for selected systems and
components of EMEP helicopters are equipped (15) 70583−702374 Battery Conditioner/
with pin filter adapters, connectors, and Analyzer (pin filter adapter).

1-2-1-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-2-1

(16) Pilot’s HSI/VSI Mode Select Panel (pin (29) No. 2 Stabilator Amplifier (pin filter
filter adapter). adapter).

(17) Copilot’s HSI/VSI Mode Select Panel (30) VOR/ILS Receiver (pin filter adapter).
(pin filter adapter).
(31) CIS Processor (pin filter adapter).
(18) Yaw Trim Servo (filtered connector).
(32) Air Data Transducer (pin filter adapter).
(19) Pilot’s Master Warning Panel (filtered
(33) C o m p a s s C o n t r o l P a n e l ( p i n fi l t e r
connector).
adapter).
(20) Copilot’s Master Warning Panel (filtered
(34) Doppler SDC (pin filter adapter).
connector).
(35) Doppler Computer Display Unit (pin filter
(21) Radar Altimeter Receiver Transmitter adapter).
(pin filter adapter).
1-2-1.2 Principal Dimensions.
(22) Airspeed Transducer (pin filter adapter).
a. Principal dimensions of the helicopter are
(23) No. 1 Signal Data Converter (pin filter shown in Figure 1-2-1-2.
adapter).
b. Stations, waterlines, and buttlines (in inches)
(24) No. 2 Signal Data Converter (pin filter are used as an accurate method of locating or
adapter). installing equipment in the airframe. See
Figure 1-2-1-3 for stations, waterlines, and but-
(25) No. 1 Stabilator Actuator (pin filter tlines for this helicopter.
adapter).
1-2-1.3 Access and Inspection Provisions.
(26) No. 2 Stabilator Actuator (pin filter
adapter). Access and inspection provisions consist of access
doors, covers, panels, platforms, screens, and open-
(27) Roll Trim Servo (pin filter adapter). ings used for maintenance, inspection, and servic-
ing of the helicopter and its components. Principal
(28) No. 1 Stabilator Amplifier (pin filter access and inspection openings are shown in Figure
adapter). 1-2-1-4 and Table 1-2-1-1.

1-2-1-2
PARA 1-2-1 TM 1-70-23

ELECTRICAL TAIL
POWER ROTOR
UPPER GENERATOR
MAIN CUTTER
ROTOR MAIN
ROTOR TAIL
BLADE
HEAD GEAR
FLIGHT BOX
CONTROLS
MAIN
CUTTER TRANSMISSION
ASSEMBLY
TAIL
TRANSMISSION DRIVE
AVIONICS OIL COOLER SHAFT
EQUIPMENT APU

FLIR MAIN
(SEE NOTE 3) LANDING FUEL INTERMEDIATE
GEAR SYSTEM GEAR BOX
TAIL TAIL
RDR 1400C LANDING LANDING LANDING
WEATHER GEAR PASSENGER ENVIRONMENTAL GEAR GEAR
DEFLECTOR LANDING SEAT CONTROLS DEFLECTOR
RADAR GEAR (SEE NOTE 1) SYSTEM
(SEE NOTE 2) CUTTER

NOTES

1. PASSENGER SEATS CAN BE REMOVED

TO ACCOMMODATE LITTER KIT
INSTALLATIONS.
2. WEATHER RADAR NOT INSTALLED ON
ALL HELICOPTERS.
3. FLIR NOT INSTALLED ON ALL
HELICOPTERS.
4. S70−I
ENGINES ARE T700−GE−700, 701A
5. S70−II
ENGINES ARE T700−GE−701C
6. AUXILIARY SEARCHLIGHT NOT
INSTALLED ON ALL HELICOPTERS. FB2149_1B
SA

FIGURE 1-2-1-1. GENERAL ARRANGEMENT (SHEET 1 OF 2)

1-2-1-3
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-2-1

HEAT AND MAIN ROTOR

AVIONICS VENT SYSTEM HEAD
EQUIPMENT
RESCUE (SEE NOTES 4, 5) FIRE
PYLON TAIL
HOIST PROTECTION
FOLD HINGE ROTOR
SYSTEM

AUXILIARY TAIL DRIVE INTERMEDIATE TAIL GEAR

POWER UNIT SHAFT GEAR BOX BOX
COCKPIT FLIGHT TRANSMISSION
CONTROLS OIL COOLER

AUXILIARY
SEARCHLIGHT
(SEE NOTE 6)

FB2149_2C
SA

FIGURE 1-2-1-1. GENERAL ARRANGEMENT (SHEET 2 OF 2)

Table 1-2-1-1. Access Panels and Fairing

PANEL NO. TYPE OF SIZE TYPE OF ACCESS TO

PANEL (INCHES) FASTENERS

1B-2B-1 Nose Door 37-1/4 x 70 2 Latches Electronics

(Hinged)

4B-26 Access Panel 6x7 1 Latch External Power

3T-3 Access Panel 13-1/2 x 33-1/2 2 Latches Shock Strut

4T-4 (Hinged) 12 Screws

1-2-1-4
PARA 1-2-1 TM 1-70-23

Table 1-2-1-1. Access Panels and Fairing (Cont)

PANEL NO. TYPE OF SIZE TYPE OF ACCESS TO

PANEL (INCHES) FASTENERS

3B-30 Access Panel 23 x 25 18 Screws Shock Strut

4B-31 (2 Parts)

3T-4T-2 Sliding Cover 64 x 81 2 Camlocs Controls/Accessories

(On Tracks) 12 Dzus

3T-7 Engine Cowl- 26 x 50 2 Latches Engine

4T-8 ing
(Hinged)

3T-5 Access Panel 6 x 15 4 Screws Anti-Icing

4T-6 Valve

4B-24 Access Cover Cargo Hook

3T-25 Access Panel 14 x 22 2 Latches Oil Cooler

(Hinged)

3T-27 Access Panel 12 x 40 2 Latches APU

(Hinged)

4T-28 Access Panel 12 x 40 2 Latches Fire-Extinguishers

(Hinged)

3T-22 Access Panel 8 x 10 1 Latches Gravity Fuel

4T-22 (Hinged)

3T-3B-23 Access Panel 12 x 16 2 Latches Pressure Fuel

(Hinged)

3T-3B-21 Access Panel 7 x 10 Latch Pneumatic Ground Start

(Hinged)

3B-3T-20 Access Panel 7 x 10 10 Screws Magnetic Flux Valve

5T-6T-9 Access Panel 9 x 80 4 Dzus Drive Shaft

(Hinged)

5T-6T-10 Access Panel 9 x 79 4 Dzus Drive Shaft

(Hinged)

5T-6T-17 Intermediate 19 x 32 12 Screws Intermediate Gear Box

Gear Box Fair-
ing

1-2-1-5
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-2-1

Table 1-2-1-1. Access Panels and Fairing (Cont)

PANEL NO. TYPE OF SIZE TYPE OF ACCESS TO

PANEL (INCHES) FASTENERS

5T-6T-11 Pylon Drive 14 x 79 9 Dzus Drive Shaft

Shaft Cover/#1
FM Antenna

5T-5B-18 Access Panel 12 Screws Pylon Fold

6T-6B-32 Hinge Bolts

5T-6T-12 Tail Gear Box 1 Flat-Tip Tail Gear Box

Fairing Fastener 11
Phillips-Head

5T-6T-15 Fairing 20 x 23 26 Screws Pylon Trailing Edge

5B-6B-16 Fairing 16 Screws Lower Pylon

4 Bolts

5B-45 Cover 4x7 4 Screws Stabilator

6B-46 Attach Fittings

5B-5T-19 VOR/LOC 4 Screws

6B-6T-19 Antenna

5T-6T-13 Portable VHF 31 Screws

FM Antenna

4B-33 Access Panel 20 x 27 2 Latches Transition Avionics

(Hinged) Compartment

3T-33 Fairing & 6 Camlocs ESSS Maintenance

4T-34 Platform 19 Screws Crane Attachment
(2-Part Hinged)
(See Note 1)

3T-35 Cap Fairing 14 Camlocs ESSS

4T-36 (See Note 1)

3T-3B-37 Access Panel 3 Camlocs Step/Shock

4T-4B-38 (Hinged) (See 7 Screws Strut
Note 1)

3B-39 Access Panel 14 Screws Shock Strut

4B-40 (See Note 1)

1-2-1-6
PARA 1-2-1 TM 1-70-23

Table 1-2-1-1. Access Panels and Fairing (Cont)

PANEL NO. TYPE OF SIZE TYPE OF ACCESS TO

PANEL (INCHES) FASTENERS

3B-41 Lower Fairing 6 Camlocs ESSS

STA 295.0
(See Note 1)

3B-42 Lower Fairing 4 Camlocs ESSS

STA 308.0
(See Note 1)

4B-43 Lower Fairing 6 Camlocs ESSS

STA 295.0
(See Note 1)

4B-44 Lower Fairing 4 Camlocs ESSS

STA 308.0
(See Note 1)

4T-47 Access Panel 2 Latches Oil Cooler

(Hinged)

NOTES

1. ESSS

2. Number codes for panels and fairings:

1 - left side cockpit

2 - right side cockpit

3 - left side cabin

4 - right side cabin

5 - left side tail cone and pylon

6 - right side tail cone and pylon

T - Top above WL 232.0

B - Bottom below WL 232.0

1-2-1-7
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-2-1

1-2-1.4 Steps, Handholds, and Walkways. Figure 1-2-1-5. Work areas are shown in Figure
1-2-1-6.
Steps, handholds, and walkways aid in inspection
and maintenance of the helicopter are shown in

1-2-1-8
PARA 1-2-1 TM 1-70-23

7’ 9"
FUSELAGE
WIDTH

BL
24
BL
0 14’ 4"
BL
24

BL
MAC 42
53’ 8"
MAIN ROTOR DIAMETER BL
86.3

29’ 11.2"
STA
700.12

11’ 0"
STA STA TAIL ROTOR
700.12 732
DIAMETER
STA
341.215

WL
32’ 6.8" STA
315 3O 2.8" 339.75

STA
334
STA
PILOT’ S EYE 229 STA
664.376 8O 16’ 10" STA
324.729
WL
5’ 9" 257
12’ 4" FUSELAGE WL
STA
244.4
7’ 7" HEIGHT 40O 319.633
6’ 6"
WL STA
200 WL 700.12
184.00
STATIC GROUND LINE
10.6" 5.0" 12.0" 26.2" WHEEL BASE 28’ 11.75"
2.19" 25.65"
ROLLING RADIUS STA 9.81"
297.43 LANDING GEAR
LENGTH-ROTORS AND PYLON FOLDED 41’ 4" COMPRESSED
FUSELAGE LENGTH 50’ .75"

OVERALL LENGTH 64’ 10"

STA
162

EFFECTIVITY
W/O ESSS

NOTE

WEATHER RADAR AND FLIR NOT

INSTALLED ON ALL HELICOPTERS.
FB2150_1B
SA

FIGURE 1-2-1-2. PRINCIPAL DIMENSIONS (SHEET 1 OF 4)

1-2-1-9
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-2-1

BL BL
14 0

20O
BL BL
30 30

WL
278

8’ 10.2"
THREAD

9’ 8.1"
FOLDED WIDTH
EFFECTIVITY MAX OVERALL HEIGHT
W/O ESSS AIR TRANSPORT CONFIGURATION
8’ 9" (INCLUDING 1/2" PAD) FB2150_2B
SA

FIGURE 1-2-1-2. PRINCIPAL DIMENSIONS (SHEET 2 OF 4)

1-2-1-10
PARA 1-2-1 TM 1-70-23

7’ 9"
FUSELAGE
WIDTH

BL
24
BL
0 14’ 4"
BL
24

BL
MAC 42
53’ 8"
MAIN ROTOR DIAMETER BL
86.3

29’ 11.2"
STA
700.12

11’ 0"
STA STA TAIL ROTOR
700.12 732
DIAMETER
STA
341.215

WL
32’ 6.8" STA
315 3O 2.8" 339.75

STA
334
STA
PILOT’ S EYE 229 STA
664.376 8O 16’ 10" STA
324.729
WL
5’ 9" 257
12’ 4" FUSELAGE WL
STA
244.4
7’ 7" HEIGHT 40O 319.633
6’ 6"
WL STA
200 WL 700.12
184.00
STATIC GROUND LINE
10.6" 5.0" 12.0" 26.2" WHEEL BASE 28’ 11.75"
2.19" 25.65"
ROLLING RADIUS STA 9.81"
297.43 LANDING GEAR
LENGTH-ROTORS AND PYLON FOLDED 41’ 4" COMPRESSED
FUSELAGE LENGTH 50’ .75"

OVERALL LENGTH 64’ 10"

STA
162

EFFECTIVITY
ESSS FB2150_3A
SA

FIGURE 1-2-1-2. PRINCIPAL DIMENSIONS (SHEET 3 OF 4)

1-2-1-11
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-2-1

EFFECTIVITY
22’ 2"
ESSS FB2150_4A
SA

FIGURE 1-2-1-2. PRINCIPAL DIMENSIONS (SHEET 4 OF 4)

1-2-1-12
PARA 1-2-1 TM 1-70-23

90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10 BL BL
0 0 0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90

0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 750 800

STA
732
STA
341.2

350
WL
WL 324.7
315
300
REFERENCE DATUM

COCKPIT
250 FLOOR
WL
215

200 STATIC
WL
206.7
GROUND
LINE
150 CABIN STA
187
FLOOR
0 STA STA STA STA STA STA STA STA
162 247 288 343 398 485 644.62 762.75

100 50 0 50 100

BL BL
30 30

EFFECTIVITY
W/O ESSS
BL BL
86.3 86.3
NOTE BL
BL 0 BL
55.0 55.0
WEATHER RADAR AND FLIR NOT
INSTALLED ON ALL HELICOPTERS.
FB2151_1B
100 50 0 50 100 SA

FIGURE 1-2-1-3. STATIONS, WATERLINES AND BUTTLINES (SHEET 1 OF 2)

1-2-1-13
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-2-1

90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10 BL BL
0 0 0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90

0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 750 800

STA
732
STA
341.2

350
WL
WL 324.7
315
300
REFERENCE DATUM

COCKPIT
250 FLOOR
WL
215

200 STATIC
WL
206.7
GROUND
LINE
150 CABIN STA
187
FLOOR
0 STA STA STA STA STA STA STA STA
162 247 288 343 398 485 644.62 762.75

100 50 0 50 100

BL BL
30 30

BL BL
86.3 86.3
BL
EFFECTIVITY BL 0 BL
55.0
55.0

ESSS
FB2151_2A
100 50 0 50 100 SA

FIGURE 1-2-1-3. STATIONS, WATERLINES AND BUTTLINES (SHEET 2 OF 2)

1-2-1-14
PARA 1-2-1 TM 1-70-23

3T−5 3T−22
4T−6 4T−22 5T−6T−9 5T−6T−10 5T−6T−11 5T−6T−12

5T−6T−13

5T−6T−15

5B−45
6B−46

1B−2B−1 4B−26 3B−30 3T−3 4B−24 3T−3B−23 3T−3B−21 3B−4B−29 3B−3T−20 5T−5B−18 5T−6T−17 5B−6B−16
RH ONLY 4B−31 4T−4 6T−6B−32

4T−8 4T−28 6B−6T−19

3T−4T−2 3T−7 3T−25 3T−27 5B−5T−19

6T−36 4T−4B−34

NOTE
6B−35
4B−33
WEATHER RADAR AND FLIR NOT
INSTALLED ON ALL HELICOPTERS.
FB2152_1B
SA

FIGURE 1-2-1-4. ACCESS AND INSPECTION PROVISIONS (SHEET 1 OF 2)

1-2-1-15
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-2-1

3T−33
4T−34

3T−35
4T−36

3T−3B−37
4T−4B−38

3B−39
4B−40

3B−42
4B−44

3B−41
4B−43

CHANNEL
CHANNEL
AND
AND
INSERT
INSERT

FB2152_2A
SA

FIGURE 1-2-1-4. ACCESS AND INSPECTION PROVISIONS (SHEET 2 OF 2)

1-2-1-16
PARA 1-2-1 TM 1-70-23

WALK
STEP AREA HANDHOLD NO STEP

STEP NO STEP WALK

AREA STA
STA 762.75
STA
485
162
STA
TOP 732

UPPER
HANDHOLD CUTTER

WALK
AREA

STEP STEP
LEFT SIDE

TAIL PYLON
EFFECTIVITY STEP
W/O ESSS
STA
NOTES 762.75

1. WEATHER RADAR AND FLIR NOT

INSTALLED ON ALL HELICOPTERS. STEP
2. ROLL FB2153_1B
SA

FIGURE 1-2-1-5. STEPS, HANDHOLDS AND WALKWAYS (SHEET 1 OF 2)

1-2-1-17
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-2-1

NO STEP

HANDHOLD

WALK AREA

NO STEP
(SEE NOTE 2)

STEP
NO STEP

NO STEP

STEP
NO STEP

STA
485
WALK AREA STA
762.75
NO STEP TOP
(SEE NOTE 2)
STA
732

STA
162

STEP
HANDHOLD

STEP

WALK AREA

STEP
LEFT SIDE

TAIL PYLON
STEP

STA
762.75

STEP
EFFECTIVITY
ESSS
FB2153_2B
SA

FIGURE 1-2-1-5. STEPS, HANDHOLDS AND WALKWAYS (SHEET 2 OF 2)

1-2-1-18
PARA 1-2-1 TM 1-70-23

EFFECTIVITY
W/O ESSS

NOTE

WEATHER RADAR AND FLIR NOT

INSTALLED ON ALL HELICOPTERS.
FB2154_1B
SA

FIGURE 1-2-1-6. WORK AREAS (SHEET 1 OF 2)

1-2-1-19
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-2-1

EFFECTIVITY
ESSS

FB2154_2A
SA

FIGURE 1-2-1-6. WORK AREAS (SHEET 2 OF 2)

1-2-1-20
PARA 1-2-2 TM 1-70-23

1-2-2 FLIGHT SAFETY CRITICAL AIRCRAFT PARTS (FSCAP) PROGRAM.

1-2-2.1 Flight Safety Critical Aircraft Parts cal characteristics not introduced during
(FSCAP) Program. manufacturing but critical in terms of
assembly/installation (e.g. proper torque) are
a. A flight safety part (FSP) or a flight safety criti- termed installation critical characteristics.
cal aircraft part (FSCAP) is defined as a part,
assembly or installation procedure with one or
d. Table 1-2-2-1 identifies parts, assemblies, or
more critical characteristics that, if not
installations under the FSCAP program requir-
conforming to the design data or quality
ing special handling during maintenance.
requirements, could result in the serious injury
Throughout the maintenance procedures warn-
or death of crew members and/or serious dam-
ings appear emphasizing critical instructions to
age to the helicopter. It should be noted that
be followed. These warnings are identified as
references to the FSP or FSCAP are
"FSCAP" warnings and are inserted whenever
interchangeable. The FSP program is the
and wherever necessary.
predecessor of the FSCAP program.
b. A critical characteristic is any dimension, toler- e. Torque stripes are used to identify all fasteners
ance, finish, material manufacturing, assembly with critical characteristic torque or installation
or inspection process, or other feature which, if procedures. Torque stripes are a painted on
nonconforming or missing, could cause failure stripe that is applied to either end of a fastener.
or malfunction of the FSCAP. Torque stripes are similar to slippage marks,
however, they are not used to show relative
c. Critical characteristics produced during the
motion of fasteners. Refer to PARA 2-6-5 for
manufacturing process are termed
the correct application of torque stripes.
"manufacturing critical characteristics". Criti-

Table 1-2-2-1. Flight Safety Critical Aircraft Parts

COMPONENT PART NUMBER

Main Rotor Spindle 38023-10371-101

Main Rotor Spindle and Liner Assy 38023-10374-041, -042

Horizontal Stabilator Instl 70000-07050-011

Rotor Head/Transmission Instl 70000-08000-016, -017, -018

Rotor Head/Transmission Assy 70000-08000-042, -043, -044

Engine Instl 70000-10100-011, -012, -013, -014, -017, -018,

-021, -022

Engine Instl 70000-10101-011, -012, -013, -014, -015, -016

Tail Rotor Instl 70000-11100-011, -012, -013, -014, -015

Main Rotor Spindle Assy 70070-10030-041, -042, -043, -044, -045, -046, -047

Slotted Oil Cooler Sleeve, Mod Kit 70070-35139-011

1-2-2-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-2-2

Table 1-2-2-1. Flight Safety Critical Aircraft Parts (Cont)

COMPONENT PART NUMBER

Main Rotor Shaft, Mod Kit 70070-35141-011, -012, -014

Sleeve, Rad and Fan, Mod Kit 70070-35143-011

Trim and Balance, Mod Kit 70070-35145-011

Mixer Links, Retrofit Kit 70070-40033-011, -041, -042, -043, -044

Shaft Instl, Mod Kit 70070-40036-011, -012

Linkage Instl, Mod Kit 70070-40037-015, -016, -042

Mixer Assy, Mod Kit 70070-40046-011

Linkage Instl, Mod Kit 70070-40053-014, -015, -016, -017, -042

Spindle Assy, Mod Kit 70083-10001-011, -041

Hub Assy, Mod Kit 70083-10001-012, -042

Main Rotor Spindle Assy 70083-10001-045

Shaft and Oil Cooler Instl 70083-35003-011

Rotor Brake Instl, Mod Kit 70083-35006-012

Rod End 70101-08202-041, -043

Tail Rotor Blade Assy 70101-11200-042, -043, -044

Spar Assy, Tail Rotor Blade 70101-11201-041, -042

Main Rotor Horn 70102-08012-105, -106

Main Rotor Spindle Forging 70102-08101-001

Main Rotor Spindle Detail 70102-08101-103

Main Rotor Spindle Nut 70102-08105-102

Main Rotor Horn Assy 70102-08111-043, -044, -045, -046, -047

Main Rotor Spindle Assy 70102-08200-041, -042, -043, -044, -045, -046,
-053, -054, -055, -056, -057, -063, -065, -068, -069

Main Rotor Spindle and Liner Assy 70102-08216-041, -042, -045, -046

1-2-2-2
PARA 1-2-2 TM 1-70-23

Table 1-2-2-1. Flight Safety Critical Aircraft Parts (Cont)

COMPONENT PART NUMBER

Main Rotor Hub Forging 70103-08101-001, -002

Main Rotor Hub 70103-08101-101, -104

Main Rotor Blade Expandable Pin 70103-08107-101, -102

Main Rotor Hub Sub-Assy 70103-08112-041, -042, -047, -048

Main Rotor Hub Assy 70103-08200-041

Swashplate Assy 70104-08000-043, -044, -045, -046, -049, -050

Main Rotor Swashplate 70104-08002-102

Stationary Swashplate 70104-08011-103

Swashplate Expandable Pin 70104-08015-102

Scissors Assembly 70104-08020-044, -045

Main Rotor Blade Assy 70150-09100-041, -043

Main Rotor Blade Sub-Assy 70150-09101-041, -043

Main Rotor Blade Spar 70150-09103-101, -103

Tip Cap Assy, Main Rotor Blade 70150-09107-041, -042, -046, -049, -051, -054, -055

Tip Cap Fairing, Main Rotor Blade 70150-09107-101

Cuff Assy, Main Rotor Blade 70150-09109-041

Cuff, Main Rotor Blade 70150-09109-101

Spar Tube, Main Rotor Blade 70150-09122-102

Spar Ground Sheet, Main Rotor Blade 70150-09123-101

Rolled Plate, Main Rotor Blade Rolled Plate 70150-09124-001

Cuff Forging, Main Rotor Blade 70150-09127-001

Pylon/Tail Cone Joining Instl 70200-06051-011, -012

External Stores Support System Instl 70200-42400-011, -015, -016, -017, -018, -019

1-2-2-3
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-2-2

Table 1-2-2-1. Flight Safety Critical Aircraft Parts (Cont)

COMPONENT PART NUMBER

External Stores Support System Assy 70200-42400-051, -052

External Fuel System 70200-42404-011

Volcano Rack Assy 70200-42500-041, -042, -050, -051

Stabilator Plating Instl 70203-27000-014

Spar Fitting Assy, TRB Stabilator Attach 70209-06052-041, -043, -044, -046

Spar Fitting, TRB Stabilator Attach 70209-06052-101, -103

Support Fitting Assy, TRB Stabilator Actuator 70209-06054-044

Support Fitting Assy, Stabilator Actuator 70209-07053-043, -044

Support Fitting, Stabilator Actuator 70209-07053-103

Right Attach Bolts, Stabilator 70209-07057-101

Right Attach Bolts, Folding Stabilator 70209-07058-101

Servo Beam Fitting Assy 70209-22103-049, -050, -051, -052, -053, -054,
-055, -056, -065, -067, -069, -071

Servo Beam Fitting 70209-22103-105, -106, -107, -108

Stabilator Centerbox Fwd Spar Attach Fitting Assy 70209-27001-045

Spar Attach Fitting , Stabilator Centerbox Fwd 70209-27001-105

Spar Attach Fitting Assy, Stabilator Centerbox Aft 70209-27002-042

Spar Attach Fitting, Stabilator Centerbox Aft 70209-27002-102

Actuator Attach Fitting Assy, Stabilator Centerbox 70209-27003-044, -045

Actuator Attach Fitting, Stabilator Centerbox 70209-27003-102

Folding Stabilator Attach Bolts 70209-27007-102, -104

Servo Beam Fitting Assy 70219-02134-045, -046, -047, -048, -049, -050,
-051, -052

Servo Beam Fitting 70219-02134-105, -106, -107, -108

1-2-2-4
PARA 1-2-2 TM 1-70-23

Table 1-2-2-1. Flight Safety Critical Aircraft Parts (Cont)

COMPONENT PART NUMBER

Bulkhead Fitting Assy, Tail Cone Canted Hinge 70219-05001-043, -044, -045

Bulkhead Fitting, Tail Cone Canted Hinge 70209-05001-105, -107

Volcano Strut Assy 70219-42505-041, -042

Main Landing Gear Drag Beam 70250-12062-101, -102, -104

Shaft and Cooler Instl 70350-03000-012, -013

Tail Drive Shaft Instl 70350-05000-012, -013

Transmission Instl, Pylon 70350-06000-012, -014

Input Module, Main Gear Box 70351-08001-043, -045, -046, -047, -049

Main Module Assy, Main Gear Box 70351-08100-053, -054, -055, -056, -057, -058,
-059, -060, -061, -062, -063, -064, -065, -066, -067,
-068, -069, -070, -071, -072, -073, -074

MGB Housing Assy, Matched Set 70351-08110-044, -045

MGB Main Housing Casting 70351-08111-002

MGB Main Housing 70351-08111-103

Main Rotor Shaft 70351-08131-044, -045, -046, -047, -048, -102,

-103, -107, -108

Shaft Extension Forging 70351-08186-002

Shaft Extension Assy 70351-08186-043, 044

Shaft Extension 70351-08186-103

Input Flange Assy 70351-08206-041

Input Flange 70351-08206-101, -102

Swashplate Guide 70351-08228-101

Main Gear Box Dowel Pin 70351-08404-101, -102, -103, -104

MGB Housing Assy, Matched Set 70351-28110-043, -044

MGB Main Housing 70351-28111-002

1-2-2-5
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-2-2

Table 1-2-2-1. Flight Safety Critical Aircraft Parts (Cont)

COMPONENT PART NUMBER

Take-Off Pinion 70351-28151-101

Dowel Pin, MGB 70351-28404-101

Rotor Brake Instl 70351-28500-011, -013

MGB Housing Assy, Matched Set 70351-38110-043, -044, -045

MGB Main Housing Casting 70351-38111-002

Main Rotor Shaft Assy 70351-38131-042

Main Rotor Shaft 70351-38131-102

Dowel Pin, MGB 70351-38404-101

Main Module Assy 70351-48100-041

Main Module Assy 70351-78100-041, -043, -046, -048

Output Assy, Tail Gear Box 70358-06603-041, -042, -043, -045

Center Housing, Tail Gear Box 70358-06608-001

Inboard Retention Plate Forging, Tail Gear Box 70358-06612-001, -002

Inboard Retention Plate, Tail Gear Box 70358-06612-102

Output Gear, Tail Gear Box 70358-06620-101, -102

Tail Rotor Gear Box and Servo Assy 70358-06800-041, -042, -043, -047

Tail Drive Section I Shaft Assy 70361-03001-044

Axial Fan, Main Gear Box 70361-03005 -104, -105, -106, -107

Axial Fan, Main Gear Box 70361-03700-101

Tail Drive Section II Shaft Assy 70361-05001-049, -052

Tail Drive Section III Shaft Assy 70361-05002-044

Tail Drive Section III Shaft Assy 70361-06002-044, -048

Engine Drive Shaft Assy 70361-08004-043

1-2-2-6
PARA 1-2-2 TM 1-70-23

Table 1-2-2-1. Flight Safety Critical Aircraft Parts (Cont)

COMPONENT PART NUMBER

Directional Cable Instl 70400-00510-011, -013

Cockpit Controls Instl 70400-01100-011

Cockpit Cyclic Instl 70400-01200-012

Cockpit Push Rod Assy 70400-01250-052, -053, -054

Cockpit Push Rod Assy 70400-01255-103, -104

Collective Control Instl, Cockpit 70400-01400-012

Directional Instl, Cockpit 70400-01600-012, -013

Pedal Pivot Assy 70400-01601-042, -043, -044, -046

Pedal Adjustor Assy 70400-01613-049, -050

Controls Instl, Center Section 70400-02000-012

Torque Shaft Instl 70400-02108-011, -013

Push Rod Instl 70400-02108-012

Push Rod Assy 70400-02252-120, -123, -124, -128, -129, -130,

-131, -132, -133, -134

Push Rod Assy 70400-02258-048

Push Rod Assy 70400-02264-051, -060

Push Rod Tube 70400-02265-102, -103, -104, -105, -106, -112,

-114, -115, -116, -117

Mixer Assy 70400-02300-041, -043, -044, -045, -046, -048, -050

Controls Instl, Lower Cabin 70400-02500-012

Control Assy, Lower Cabin 70400-02500-041, -042

Directional Lever Instl 70400-02625-011

Controls Instl, Upper Deck 70400-02700-011, -012, -013

Tail Rotor Servo/Quadrant Instl 70400-06100-011

1-2-2-7
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-2-2

Table 1-2-2-1. Flight Safety Critical Aircraft Parts (Cont)

COMPONENT PART NUMBER

Tail Rotor Servo Coupling Assy 70400-06100-041, -042

Horizontal Stabilator Actuator Instl 70400-06636-012, -013, -014

Actuator Assy, Horizontal Stabilator 70400-06637-043, -044, -045, -046, -047, -049,
-051, -052

Push Rod Tube 70400-06700-101, -102, -103, -106

Link Assy, Tail Rotor Servo 70400-06701-042

Link, Tail Rotor Servo 70400-06701-102

Stabilator Position Sensor Instl 70400-06712-011

Bolt, Horizontal Stabilizer Actuator 70400-06802-101

Bellcrank Assy, Forward Longitudinal 70400-08101-044, -045, -046, -047

Bellcrank, Forward Longitudinal 70400-08101-104

Bellcrank Assy, Aft Longitudinal 70400-08102-044, -045

Bellcrank, Aft Longitudinal 70400-08102-105

Walking Beam Assy, Aft Longitudinal 70400-08104-044, -045, -046, -047, -048, -049

Walking Beam, Aft Longitudinal 70400-08104-106, -107

Swashplate Link Assy, Forward Longitudinal 70400-08110-047, -053, -060

Swashplate Link Assy, Aft Longitudinal 70400-08110-048, -054, -061

Forward Longitudinal Swashplate Link 70400-08110-108

Swashplate Link, Aft Longitudinal 70400-08110-109

Tie Rod Assy, Aft Longitudinal 70400-08111-041, -042, -043, -044

Tie Rod, Aft Longitudinal 70400-08111-101, -103

Support Fitting Assy, Aft Longitudinal Tie Rod 70400-08112-044, -045, -046, -047

Support Fitting, Aft Longitudinal Tie Rod 70400-08112-107, -109

Right Tie Rod Assy 70400-08114-047, -048, -049, -050, -051, -052

1-2-2-8
PARA 1-2-2 TM 1-70-23

Table 1-2-2-1. Flight Safety Critical Aircraft Parts (Cont)

COMPONENT PART NUMBER

Right Tie Rod 70400-08114-111

Left Tie Rod Assy 70400-08115-043, -045, -046, -047

Left Tie Rod 70400-08115-103

Support Assy, Forward Swashplate Bellcrank 70400-08116-045, -046, -047, -048

Support, Forward Swashplate Bellcrank 70400-08116-115

Support Assy, Aft Bellcrank 70400-08117-046, -047, -048, -049, -050, -051

Support, Aft Bellcrank 70400-08117-103, -113

Lateral Bellcrank Assy 70400-08150-043, -044, -045, -046

Lateral Bellcrank 70400-08150-103

Link Assy, Lateral Swashplate 70400-08151-045, -046, -047, -048, -050, -060, -061

Link, Lateral Swashplate 70400-08151-106

Rod Assy, Forward Main Rotor Servo Output 70400-08155-049, -053

Push Rod Assy, Aft Longitudinal 70400-08155-050, -054

Rod Assy, Aft Main Rotor Servo Output 70400-08155-051, -055

Rod Assy, Lateral Main Rotor Servo Output 70400-08155-052, -056

Rod, Forward Main Rotor Servo Output 70400-08155-109

Push Rod, Aft Longitudinal 70400-08155-110

Rod, Aft Main Rotor Servo Output 70400-08155-111

Rod, Lateral Main Rotor Servo Output 70400-08155-112

Support, Aft Longitudinal 70400-08158-101, -102

Bolt, Special, Self-Retaining 70400-08159-101, -102, -103, -104 ,-105, -106,

-107, -108

Support Assy, Forward Swashplate Bellcrank 70400-08162-041, -042

Support, Forward Swashplate Bellcrank 70400-08162-101

1-2-2-9
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-2-2

Table 1-2-2-1. Flight Safety Critical Aircraft Parts (Cont)

COMPONENT PART NUMBER

Support Assy, Aft Longitudinal Bellcrank 70400-08163-043, -044

Support, Aft Bellcrank 70400-08163-102

Right Tie Rod Assy 70400-08165-042, -043

Right Tie Rod 70400-08165-101

Lateral Bellcrank Assy 70400-08166-041, -042

Lateral Bellcrank 70400-08166-101

Controls Instl, Swashplate 70400-08200-011, -012, -013

Controls Instl, Swashplate 70400-08200-041, -042, -043, -044

Pedal Adjustor Assy 70400-21613-041, -042

Push Rod Assy 70400-22258-043, -044

Actuator Assy, Roll SAS 70410-02450-043, -048, -049

Actuator, Pitch Trim 70410-02561-102, -104, -105

Actuator Assy, Pitch Trim 70410-02561-112, -114

Servo Assy, Pitch Trim 70410-02760-044, -045, -046, -047

Primary Servo, Main Rotor 70410-02800-105, -106, -107, -111, -112, -113,
-114, -116

Primary Servo Assy, Main Rotor 70410-02820-044, -045, -046, -050, -051, -052,
-053, -054

Servo, Yaw Boost 70410-02900-126

Servo Assy, Yaw Boost 70410-02910-047, -051, -053, -059, -060, -065, -067

Servo, Tail Rotor 70410-06500-105, -107, -108, -110

Servo Assy, Tail Rotor 70410-06520-043, -044, -045, -046

Bearing Assy, Main Rotor Shaft 70952-08557-043

Bearing, Tail Rotor Drive Shaft SB1138-101, -102

1-2-2-10
PARA 1-2-2 TM 1-70-23

Table 1-2-2-1. Flight Safety Critical Aircraft Parts (Cont)

COMPONENT PART NUMBER

Bearing SB1162-102

Bearing SB5201-1

1-2-2-11/(1-2-2-12 Blank)
 TM 1-70-23

SECTION 1-3

SERVICING

SECTION OVERVIEW

PARAGRAPH TITLE

1-3-1 Servicing Requirements

1-3-2 Service Main Landing Gear Shock Struts

1-3-3 Service Main Landing Gear Tires

1-3-4 Service Tail Landing Gear Shock Strut

1-3-5 Service Tail Landing Gear Tire

1-3-6 Service/Drain Engine

1-3-7 Service Engine Starter

1-3-8 Service Hydraulic Pump Modules

1-3-9 Service/Drain APU

1-3-10 Service APU Accumulator

1-3-11 Service Winterization Kit APU Accumulator

1-3-12 Service/Drain Main Transmission

1-3-13 Service/Drain Intermediate Gear Box

1-3-14 Service/Drain Tail Gear Box

1-3-15 Service Main Rotor Head Damper

1-3-16 Service Tail Rotor Drive Shaft Viscous Damper Bearings

1-3-17 Pressure Refuel Main Tanks

1-3-18 Gravity Refuel Main Tanks

1-3-19 Closed Circuit Refuel

1-3-20 Pressure Defuel Main Tanks

1-3-1
TM 1-70-23

PARAGRAPH TITLE

1-3-21 Gravity Defuel Main Tanks

1-3-22 Transfer Defuel Extended Range Tanks

1-3-23 Preserve Main Fuel Cell Tank

1-3-24 Gravity Refuel Extended Range Tanks

1-3-25 Adapter Defuel Extended Range Tanks

1-3-26 Clean and Preserve Extended Range Tanks

1-3-27 Environmental Control System - Service

1-3-28 Environmental Control System Compressor - Service

1-3-29 Service Main Rotor Blade BIMt System

1-3-30 Service Hydraulic Rescue Hoist

1-3-31 Service Electric Rescue Hoist

1-3-2
PARA 1-3-1 TM 1-70-23

1-3-1 SERVICING REQUIREMENTS.

1-3-1.1 Scope. ing may need to increase to make sure of safe
flight.
This section contains servicing procedures. Servic-
ing intervals may be dependent upon 1-3-1.2 Work Platforms.
environmental conditions or specific time intervals.
When unusual local conditions of environment, Work platforms located on engine cowlings
utilization, mission, experience of flight crew and provide access to the engines. Each platform is
maintenance personnel, or periods of inactivity are capable of supporting a static weight of 400
encountered, the scope and/or frequency of servic- pounds.

1-3-1-1/(1-3-1-2 Blank)
PARA 1-3-2 TM 1-70-23

1-3-2 SERVICE MAIN LANDING GEAR SHOCK STRUTS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-3-2.1 Service Main Landing 1-3-2-2

Gear Shock Struts

INITIAL SETUP • Lockwire, Item 197, Appendix D

Tools • Machinery Towel, Item 211, Appendix D

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit • Nitrogen, Item 221, Appendix D

• Petrolatum, Item 234, Appendix D

• Beaker, 800 ml
• Rags
• Container, 1-Quart
• Tubing, Nonmetallic, Item 344, Appendix D
• Hydraulic Fluid Dispenser, AF5
• Union
• Nitrogen Servicing Unit, 901002
References
• Torque Wrench, 30 - 150 in. lbs
• Appendix D
Materials/Parts
• PARA 1-6-3
• Hydraulic Fluid, Item 154, Appendix D • PARA 2-4-95
• Hydraulic Fluid, Item 155, Appendix D • PARA 2-4-96
• Leak Detection Fluid, Item 189, Appendix D • PARA 3-4-7

1-3-2-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-2

1-3-2.1 Service Main Landing Gear Shock NOTE

Struts.
Improper servicing will result if tire is
NOTE allowed to touch the ground.

• If both upper and lower struts require b. Jack front of helicopter until main landing gear
servicing, service upper stage first. is fully extended and tire clears the ground.
Install jacks under drag beam supports (PARA
• If installed, external fuel tanks must be 1-6-3).
defueled and removed prior to servicing
struts. c. Remove cap from upper air valve (Figure 1-3-
2-1, Detail B).
• Servicing of left and right main landing
gear shock struts is the same.
WARNING
1-3-2.1.1. Service Upper Stage Strut.

• Injury to personnel and damage to

equipment will result if area under
WARNING helicopter is not clear prior to servicing
landing gear.
Injury to personnel and damage to
equipment will result if jacks are not in- • Helicopter will settle up to 16 inches.
stalled under drag beam fuselage sup- Look under helicopter and make sure
port before servicing upper stage strut. area is clear of personnel and equip-
Helicopter can settle up to 16 inches if ment.
upper stage is depressurized and
• Injury to personnel and damage to
helicopter is unsupported. Damage will
equipment will result if all nitrogen
occur to external brake lines on drag
pressure is not released prior to remov-
beam. Rear lower hard point will contact
ing air valves. Shock strut is under high
and damage drag beam.
pressure. Make sure all nitrogen pres-
sure is released prior to removing
CAUTION valves.

d. Release nitrogen pressure from strut upper

stage as follows:
• To prevent damage to helicopter, refer
only to procedure in this manual for (1) Slide nonmetallic tubing, Item 344, Ap-
proper charge pressure. Disregard all pendix D, over end of air valve. Place free
other labels attached to the helicopter end in 1-quart container to collect
concerning charge pressure. hydraulic fluid discharge, if any, when
valve is opened.
• A strut needing service should be care-
fully checked for hydraulic leakage. (2) S l o w l y t u r n o u t e r h e x n u t
Repeated nitrogen servicing of a leaking counterclockwise until you hear nitrogen
strut without servicing with hydraulic hissing from air valve.
fluid can lead to a completely nitrogen-
inflated strut, causing internal damage. (3) When nitrogen pressure is completely
released from shock strut, measure col-
a. Remove upper and lower main landing gear lected hydraulic fluid, if any, using 800
fairings (PARA 2-4-95 and PARA 2-4-96). ml beaker.

1-3-2-2
PARA 1-3-2 TM 1-70-23

(a) IF DISCHARGE OF HYDRAULIC • Floating piston is bottomed when a dull

FLUID FROM VALVE IS thud is heard.
GREATER THAN 200 MIL-
LILITERS (CUBIC CENTIME- (4) Slowly release pressurized fluid from
TERS), REPLACE STRUT (PARA fluid dispenser into shock strut until float-
3-4-7). ing piston bottoms. DO NOT EXCEED
100 PSI HYDRAULIC PRESSURE.
(b) IF DISCHARGE IS BETWEEN
100 AND 200 MILLILITERS (5) Release pressure from dispenser.
(CUBIC CENTIMETERS), STRUT
CAN BE CONTINUED IN f. Bleed strut upper stage as follows:
SERVICE AND REQUIRES REIN-
SPECTION AT NEXT 200 NOTE
FLIGHT HOURS.
Place machinery towels, Item 211, Ap-
(c) IF DISCHARGE IS LESS THAN pendix D, under upper bleeder plug to
100 MILLILITERS (CUBIC CEN- catch surplus hydraulic fluid when upper
TIMETERS), STRUT CAN BE bleeder plug is removed.
CONTINUED IN SERVICE AND
REQUIRES INSPECTION AT (1) Remove upper bleeder plug from strut up-
NEXT 500 HOURS. per stage.

(4) Remove tube from air valve. (2) Install union with packing in bleeder port.
Connect overflow line to union.
(5) Turn inner hexnut counterclockwise and
remove upper air valve. (3) Place overflow line from upper bleeder
port into 1-quart container to catch
e. Using hydraulic fluid dispenser, bottom float- overflow of fluid.
ing piston in upper stage strut as follows:
(4) Place jack underneath jack pad on drag
NOTE beam (PARA 1-6-3).
Under emergency conditions, hydraulic (5) Slowly fully compress upper stage by
fluid, Item 155, Appendix D, may be jacking on drag beam until no more than
used to service struts. However, reser- 3/4 inch of chrome piston is visible.
vice struts with hydraulic fluid, Item
154, Appendix D, as soon as convenient. (6) Watch fluid flowing from overflow line.
(1) Service hydraulic fluid dispenser with
(7) If fluid contains bubbles do the following:
hydraulic fluid, Item 154, Appendix D.

(2) Connect fluid dispenser to upper stage (a) Install upper bleeder plug and pack-
kneeling valve quick-disconnect fitting ing. TIGHTEN BLEEDER PLUG
(Figure 1-3-2-1, Detail A). 1/6 TO 1/3 TURN PAST POINT
WHERE SHARP RISE IN
(3) Turn upper stage kneeling valve knob to TORQUE IS FELT.
OPEN.
(b) Remove jack from under drag beam
NOTE jacking pad (PARA 1-6-3).

• If fluid dispenser pressure drops below (c) Slowly release pressurized fluid
10 psi, recharge fluid dispenser. from fluid dispenser into shock strut

1-3-2-3
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-2

UPPER
UPPER STAGE
CYLINDER NUT KNEELING
VALVE

PACKING
A MS28778−4

QUICK−
DISCONNECT
FITTING

UPPER STRUT−
BLEEDER PLUG UPPER STAGE
C (SEE NOTE)

STRUT−
LOWER STAGE

EXPOSED 3/4
PISTON TO
16 1/2
DRAG BEAM
ASSEMBLY
B
LOWER A
VALVE DIM X
UPPER
AIR VALVE
PACKING
MS28778−4 LOWER
STAGE
KNEELING
VALVE
QUICK−
DISCONNECT
STRUT
FITTING
ATTACHMENT

LOWER
B BLEEDER PLUG
(SEE NOTE)
STRUT−
LOWER STAGE
OUTER
HEXNUT
(TORQUE 50−70
IN. LBS) C
B
AIR
VALVE

LOWER
PACKING AIR VALVE
CAP

INNER HEXNUT
(TORQUE 100−110 IN. LBS)

NOTE
TIGHTEN BLEEDER PLUG 1 / 6 TO 1 / 3
TURN PAST POINT WHERE SHARP RISE FC4136
IN TORQUE IS FELT. SA

FIGURE 1-3-2-1. SERVICE MAIN LANDING GEAR SHOCK STRUTS

1-3-2-4
PARA 1-3-2 TM 1-70-23

until shock strut is fully extended. (20) Stop pumping fluid. HANDTIGHTEN
When strut is fully extended a sharp BLEEDER PLUG.
rise in pressure will occur. DO NOT
EXCEED 100 PSI HYDRAULIC (21) Turn upper stage kneeling valve knob to
PRESSURE. CLOSE. Lockwire, Item 197, Appendix
D, knob to hole in upper stage kneeling
(d) Repeat step e. (5) through step f. (6). valve housing.

(8) Stop when bubbles are no longer seen in (22) TIGHTEN BLEEDER PLUG 1/6 TO 1/3
fluid and strut is fully compressed. Turn TURN PAST POINT WHERE SHARP
upper stage kneeling valve knob to RISE IN TORQUE IS FELT. Lockwire,
CLOSE. Item 197, Appendix D, bleeder plug to up-
per cylinder.
(9) Remove overflow line, union, and pack-
ing from upper bleeder plug port. (23) Disconnect fluid dispenser from upper
stage kneeling valve quick-disconnect fit-
(10) Install new packing lubricated with ting.
petrolatum, Item 234, Appendix D, on up-
per bleeder plug. (24) Install new packing lubricated with
petrolatum, Item 234, Appendix D, on up-
(11) Install upper bleeder plug and packing per air valve (Figure 1-3-2-1, Detail B).
into strut upper cylinder.
HANDTIGHTEN BLEEDER PLUG. (25) Screw upper air valve and packing into
strut upper stage. TORQUE INNER
(12) Turn upper stage kneeling valve knob to HEXNUT TO 100 - 110 INCH-POUNDS.
OPEN.
(26) Remove jack from under drag beam jack-
(13) Remove jack from under drag beam jack- ing pad (PARA 1-6-3).
ing pad (PARA 1-6-3).
g. Service upper strut with nitrogen as follows:
(14) Slowly release pressurized fluid from
fluid dispenser into upper stage until strut (1) Attach servicing chuck from a regulated
begins to extend. DO NOT EXCEED 100 nitrogen servicing unit to upper air valve.
PSI HYDRAULIC PRESSURE.

(15) Release pressure from fluid dispenser. CAUTION

(16) Place rags around upper bleeder plug.

Loosen bleeder plug. Damage to strut will result if overpres-
surized during servicing. Internal dam-
(17) Place jack underneath jack pad on drag age or strut failure will result. Do not
beam (PARA 1-6-3). overpressurize strut during servicing.

(18) Slowly fully compress upper stage by NOTE

jacking on drag beam until no more than
3/4 inch of chrome piston is visible. Improper servicing will result if tire is
allowed to touch the ground.
(19) Slowly release pressurized fluid from
fluid dispenser into shock strut and moni- (2) Slowly apply pressure using nitrogen,
tor flow of oil until air bubbles are no Item 221, Appendix D, to fully extend up-
longer seen. per strut. Continue until gage on nitrogen

1-3-2-5
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-2

cylinder assembly reads 730 - 750 psig. m. If lower stage will not be serviced, install upper
DO NOT EXCEED 1000 PSIG MAXI- and lower main landing gear fairings (PARA
MUM PRESSURE. 2-4-95 and PARA 2-4-96).

(3) Full extend measurement on upper strut is 1-3-2.1.2. Service Lower Stage Strut with
16-1/2 inches as shown in Figure 1-3-2-1, Helicopter on Jacks.
Detail A.

(4) Tire must not touch ground when upper CAUTION

strut is fully extended.
• To prevent damage to helicopter, refer
(5) TORQUE OUTER HEXNUT TO 50 - 70
only to procedure in this manual for
INCH-POUNDS.
proper charge pressure. Disregard all
other labels attached to the helicopter
(6) Disconnect servicing chuck from air
concerning charge pressure.
valve.
• A strut needing service should be care-
h. Apply leak detection fluid, Item 189, Appendix fully checked for hydraulic leakage.
D, to upper air valve and make sure valve does Repeated nitrogen servicing of a leaking
not leak. strut without servicing with hydraulic
fluid can lead to a completely nitrogen-
i. If bubbles appear, do this: inflated strut, causing internal damage.
(1) Determine if packing or air valve is leak- NOTE
ing.
Servicing lower stage strut with
(2) Replace air valve or packing as required helicopter on jacks is the preferred
(PARA 3-4-7). method of servicing strut.

(3) Repeat step g. and step h. a. Remove upper and lower main landing gear
fairings (PARA 2-4-95 and PARA 2-4-96).
j. Install air valve cap.
NOTE
k. If lower stage is being serviced, proceed to Improper servicing will result if tire is
PARA 1-3-2.1.2. allowed to touch the ground.
NOTE b. Jack front of helicopter until landing gear is
fully extended and tire clears the ground.
If lower stage is to be serviced, do not Install jacks under drag beam supports (PARA
remove jacks from drag beam supports. 1-6-3).

l. If lower stage will not be serviced, remove c. Remove cap from lower air valve (Figure 1-3-
jacks from drag beam supports (PARA 1-6-3). 2-1, Detail B and Detail C).

1-3-2-6
PARA 1-3-2 TM 1-70-23

(4) Remove tube from air valve.

WARNING
(5) Turn inner hexnut counterclockwise and
remove lower air valve.
Injury to personnel and damage to
equipment will result if all nitrogen e. Using hydraulic fluid dispenser, bottom float-
pressure is not released prior to remov- ing piston in lower stage strut as follows:
ing air valves. Shock strut is under high
pressure. Make sure all nitrogen pres- NOTE
sure is released prior to removing
valves. Under emergency conditions, hydraulic
fluid, Item 155, Appendix D, may be
d. Release nitrogen pressure from strut lower used to service struts. However, reser-
stage as follows: vice struts with hydraulic fluid, Item
154, Appendix D, as soon as convenient.
(1) Slide nonmetallic tubing, Item 344, Ap-
pendix D, over end of air valve. Place free (1) Service hydraulic fluid dispenser with
end in 1-quart container to collect any hydraulic fluid, Item 154, Appendix D.
hydraulic fluid discharge, if any, when
valve is opened. (2) Connect fluid dispenser to lower stage
kneeling valve quick-disconnect fitting
(2) S l o w l y t u r n o u t e r h e x n u t (Figure 1-3-2-1, Detail A).
counterclockwise until you hear nitrogen
hissing from air valve. (3) Turn lower stage kneeling valve knob to
OPEN.
(3) When nitrogen pressure is completely
released from shock strut, measure col- NOTE
lected hydraulic fluid, if any, using 800
• If fluid dispenser pressure drops below
ml beaker.
10 psi, recharge fluid dispenser.
(a) IF DISCHARGE OF HYDRAULIC
• Floating piston is bottomed when a dull
FLUID FROM VALVE IS
thud is heard.
GREATER THAN 200 MIL-
LILITERS (CUBIC CENTIME- (4) Slowly release pressurized fluid from
TERS), REPLACE STRUT (PARA fluid dispenser into shock strut until float-
3-4-7). ing piston bottoms. DO NOT EXCEED
100 PSI HYDRAULIC PRESSURE.
(b) IF DISCHARGE IS BETWEEN
100 AND 200 MILLILITERS (5) Release pressure from dispenser.
(CUBIC CENTIMETERS), STRUT
CAN BE CONTINUED IN f. Bleed strut lower stage as follows:
SERVICE AND REQUIRES REIN-
SPECTION AT NEXT 200 NOTE
FLIGHT HOURS.
Place machinery towels, Item 211, Ap-
(c) IF DISCHARGE IS LESS THAN pendix D, under lower bleeder plug to
100 MILLILITERS (CUBIC CEN- catch surplus hydraulic fluid when lower
TIMETERS), STRUT CAN BE bleeder plug is removed.
CONTINUED IN SERVICE AND
REQUIRES INSPECTION AT (1) Remove lower bleeder plug from strut
NEXT 500 HOURS. lower stage.

1-3-2-7
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-2

(2) Install union with packing in bleeder port. (12) Turn lower stage kneeling valve knob to
Connect overflow line to union. OPEN.

(3) Place overflow line from lower bleeder (13) Remove jack from under drag beam jack-
port into 1-quart container to catch ing pad (PARA 1-6-3).
overflow of fluid.
(14) Slowly release pressurized fluid from
(4) Place jack underneath jack pad on drag fluid dispenser into lower stage until strut
beam (PARA 1-6-3). begins to extend. DO NOT EXCEED 100
PSI HYDRAULIC PRESSURE.
(5) Slowly fully compress lower stage by
jacking on drag beam until no more than (15) Release pressure from fluid dispenser.
1/2 inch of chrome piston is visible.
(16) Place rags around lower bleeder plug.
(6) Watch fluid flowing from overflow line. Loosen bleeder plug.

(7) If fluid contains bubbles do the following: (17) Place jack underneath jack pad on drag
beam (PARA 1-6-3).
(a) Install lower bleeder plug and pack-
(18) Slowly fully compress lower stage by
ing. TIGHTEN BLEEDER PLUG
jacking on drag beam until no more than
1/6 TO 1/3 TURN PAST POINT
1/2 inch of chrome piston is visible.
WHERE SHARP RISE IN
TORQUE IS FELT. (19) Slowly release pressurized fluid from
fluid dispenser into shock strut and moni-
(b) Remove jack from under drag beam
tor flow of oil until air bubbles are no
jacking pad (PARA 1-6-3).
longer seen.
(c) Slowly release pressurized fluid (20) Stop pumping fluid. HANDTIGHTEN
from fluid dispenser into shock strut BLEEDER PLUG.
until shock strut is fully extended.
When strut is fully extended a sharp (21) Turn lower stage kneeling valve knob to
rise in pressure will occur. DO NOT CLOSE. Lockwire, Item 197, Appendix
EXCEED 100 PSI HYDRAULIC D, knob to hole in lower stage kneeling
PRESSURE. valve housing.

(d) Repeat step e. (5) through step f. (6). (22) TIGHTEN BLEEDER PLUG 1/6 TO 1/3
TURN PAST POINT WHERE SHARP
(8) Stop when bubbles are no longer seen in RISE IN TORQUE IS FELT. Lockwire,
fluid and strut is fully compressed. Turn Item 197, Appendix D, bleeder plug to
lower stage kneeling valve knob to lower cylinder.
CLOSE.
(23) Disconnect fluid dispenser from lower
(9) Remove overflow line, union, and pack- stage kneeling valve quick-disconnect fit-
ing from lower bleeder plug port. ting.
(10) Install new packing lubricated with (24) Install new packing lubricated with
petrolatum, Item 234, Appendix D, on petrolatum, Item 234, Appendix D, on
lower bleeder plug. lower air valve (Figure 1-3-2-1, Detail B).

(11) Install lower bleeder plug and packing (25) Screw lower air valve and packing into
into strut lower cylinder. strut lower stage. TORQUE INNER
HANDTIGHTEN BLEEDER PLUG. HEXNUT TO 100 - 110 INCH-POUNDS.

1-3-2-8
PARA 1-3-2 TM 1-70-23

(26) Remove jack from under drag beam jack (5) Disconnect servicing chuck from air
pad (PARA 1-6-3). valve.

g. Service lower stage strut with nitrogen as h. Apply leak detection fluid, Item 189, Appendix
follows: D, to lower air valve and make sure valve does
not leak.
(1) Attach servicing chuck from a regulated
nitrogen servicing unit to the lower air i. If bubbles appear, do this:
valve.
(1) Determine if packing or air valve is leak-
ing.
CAUTION
(2) Replace air valve or packing as required
(PARA 3-4-7).
• Damage to strut will result if overpres-
surized during servicing. Internal dam- (3) Repeat step g. and step h.
age or strut failure will result. Do not
overpressurize strut during servicing. j. Install lower air valve cap.

• To prevent damage to helicopter, check k. Lockwire, Item 197, Appendix D, lower air
part number on shock strut before valve to piston.
servicing; then refer to procedure in this
manual for proper charge pressure. l. Remove jacks from drag beam supports
Disregard all other labels attached to the (PARA 1-6-3).
helicopter.
m. Make sure area is clean and free of foreign
NOTE material.

Improper servicing will result if tire is n. Install upper and lower main landing gear fair-
allowed to touch the ground. ings (PARA 2-4-95 and PARA 2-4-96).

(2) Slowly apply pressure, using nitrogen, 1-3-2.1.3. Service Lower Stage Strut on
Item 221, Appendix D, to fully extend Ground.
lower strut. Continue until gage on
nitrogen cylinder assembly reads as
CAUTION
follows:

SHOCK STRUT
• To prevent damage to helicopter, refer
PART NUMBER PRESSURE (PSIG)
only to procedure in this manual for
proper charge pressure. Disregard all
70250-12051-042 275 to 325
other labels attached to the helicopter
70250-12051-043, 190 to 240 concerning charge pressure.
-044, or -045
• A strut needing service should be care-
fully checked for hydraulic leakage.
Repeated nitrogen servicing of a leaking
(3) Tire must not touch ground when lower strut without servicing with hydraulic
strut is fully extended. fluid can lead to a completely nitrogen-
inflated strut, causing internal damage.
(4) TORQUE OUTER HEXNUT TO 50 - 70
INCH-POUNDS. a. Set parking brake.

1-3-2-9
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-2

b. Remove upper and lower main landing gear (a) IF DISCHARGE OF HYDRAULIC
fairings (PARA 2-4-95 and PARA 2-4-96). FLUID FROM VALVE IS
GREATER THAN 200 MIL-
LILITERS (CUBIC CENTIME-
WARNING TERS), REPLACE STRUT (PARA
3-4-7).

Injury to personnel and damage to (b) IF DISCHARGE IS BETWEEN

equipment will result if area under 100 AND 200 MILLILITERS
helicopter is not clear prior to servicing (CUBIC CENTIMETERS), STRUT
landing gear. Helicopter will settle up to CAN BE CONTINUED IN
7 inches. Look under helicopter and SERVICE AND REQUIRES REIN-
make sure area is clear of personnel and SPECTION AT NEXT 200
equipment. FLIGHT HOURS.

c. Remove cap from lower air valve (Figure 1-3- (c) IF DISCHARGE IS LESS THAN
2-1, Detail B). 100 MILLILITERS (CUBIC CEN-
TIMETERS), STRUT CAN BE
CONTINUED IN SERVICE AND
WARNING REQUIRES INSPECTION AT
NEXT 500 HOURS.

Injury to personnel and damage to (4) Remove tube from air valve.
equipment will result if all nitrogen
pressure is not released prior to remov- (5) Turn inner hexnut counterclockwise and
ing air valves. Shock strut is under high remove lower air valve.
pressure. Make sure all nitrogen pres-
sure is released prior to removing e. Using hydraulic fluid dispenser, bottom float-
valves. ing piston in lower stage strut as follows:

d. Release nitrogen pressure from strut lower NOTE

stage as follows:
Under emergency conditions, hydraulic
(1) Slide nonmetallic tubing, Item 344, Ap- fluid, Item 155, Appendix D, may be
pendix D, over end of air valve. Place free used to service struts. However, reser-
end in 1-quart container to collect any vice struts with hydraulic fluid, Item
hydraulic fluid discharge when valve is 154, Appendix D, as soon as convenient.
opened.
(1) Service hydraulic fluid dispenser with
(2) S l o w l y t u r n o u t e r h e x n u t hydraulic fluid, Item 154, Appendix D.
counterclockwise until you hear nitrogen
hissing from air valve. (2) Connect fluid dispenser to lower stage
kneeling valve quick-disconnect fitting
(3) When nitrogen pressure is completely (Figure 1-3-2-1, Detail A).
released from shock strut, measure col-
lected hydraulic fluid, if any, using 800 (3) Turn lower stage kneeling valve knob to
ml beaker. OPEN.

1-3-2-10
PARA 1-3-2 TM 1-70-23

NOTE (8) Install new packing lubricated with

petrolatum, Item 234, Appendix D, on
• If fluid dispenser pressure drops below lower bleeder plug.
10 psi, recharge fluid dispenser.
(9) Install lower bleeder plug and packing
• Floating piston is bottomed when a dull into strut lower cylinder. TIGHTEN
thud is heard. BLEEDER PLUG 1/6 TO 1/3 TURN
PAST POINT WHERE SHARP RISE IN
(4) Release pressurized fluid into shock strut TORQUE IS FELT. Lockwire, Item 197,
until floating piston bottoms. DO NOT Appendix D, bleeder plug to lower
EXCEED 100 PSI. cylinder.

(5) Release pressure from dispenser. (10) Install new packing lubricated with
petrolatum, Item 234, Appendix D, on
f. Bleed strut lower stage as follows: lower air valve.

NOTE (11) Screw lower air valve and packing into

strut lower stage. TORQUE INNER
Place machinery towels, Item 211, Ap- HEXNUT TO 100 - 110 INCH-POUNDS.
pendix D, under lower bleeder plug to
catch surplus hydraulic fluid when lower g. Service lower stage strut with nitrogen as
bleeder plug is removed. follows:

(1) Remove lower bleeder plug from strut (1) Attach servicing chuck from a regulated
lower stage. nitrogen cylinder assembly, Item 221, Ap-
pendix D, to the lower air valve.
(2) Install union with packing in bleeder port.
Connect overflow line to union. (2) With shock strut stage fully compressed
(wheel on ground), do this:
(3) Place overflow line from lower bleeder
(a) Refer to Figure 1-3-2-1, Detail C,
port into 1-quart container to catch
and see where DIM X is measured
overflow of fluid.
from.
(4) Release pressurized fluid into strut and
watch fluid flowing from overflow line. CAUTION

(5) Stop when bubbles are no longer seen in

fluid. Turn lower stage kneeling valve Damage to strut will result if overpres-
knob to CLOSE. Lockwire, Item 197, Ap- surized during servicing. Internal dam-
pendix D, knob to hole in lower stage age or strut failure will result. Do not
kneeling valve housing. overpressurize strut during servicing.

(6) Disconnect fluid dispenser from lower (b) Slowly pressurize lower strut with
stage kneeling valve quick-disconnect fit- nitrogen. As soon as strut starts to
ting. extend, shut off pressure. DO NOT
EXCEED MAXIMUM PRESSURE
(7) Remove overflow line, union, and pack- FOR SHOCK STRUT AS
ing from lower bleeder plug port. FOLLOWS:

1-3-2-11
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-2

NITROGEN SERVICE CHART NITROGEN SERVICE CHART

EFFECTIVITY: HELICOPTERS WITH EFFECTIVITY: HELICOPTERS WITH
SHOCK STRUT PART NO. 70250−12051−042 SHOCK STRUT PART NO.
70250−12051−043, −044, −045
GAGE PRESSURE DIMENSION X TOLERANCE GAGE PRESSURE DIMENSION X TOLERANCE
TOLERANCE BETWEEN: −0.12 TO 0.12 IN. TOLERANCE BETWEEN: −0.12 TO 0.12 IN.
BETWEEN: −25 TO 25 (1/8 IN.) BETWEEN: −25 TO 25 (1/8 IN.)
PSI PSI
1255 4.2 (4−1/4) 914 4.25 (4−1/4)
1115 4.7 (4−3/4) 799 4.75 (4−3/4)
978 5.2 (5−1/4) 710 5.25 (5−1/4)
880 5.7 (5−3/4) 638 5.75 (5−3/4)
800 6.2 (6−1/4) 579 6.25 (6−1/4)
733 6.7 (6−3/4) 530 6.75 (6−3/4)
670 7.2 (7−1/4) 488 7.25 (7−1/4)
627 7.7 (7−3/4) 453 7.75 (7−3/4)
585 8.2 (8−1/4) 422 8.25 (8−1/4)
548 8.7 (8−3/4) 395 8.75 (8−3/4)
515 9.2 (9−1/4) 371 9.25 (9−1/4)
486 9.7 (9−3/4) 349 9.75 (9−3/4)
460 10.2 (10−1/4) 330 10.25 (10−1/4)
436 10.7 (10−3/4) 313 10.75 (10−3/4)
415 11.2 (11−1/4) 298 11.25 (11−1/4)
298 FULL EXTENSION 212 FULL EXTENSION
AA9551
SA

FIGURE 1-3-2-2. MAIN LANDING GEAR NITROGEN SERVICE CHART

SHOCK STRUT MAXIMUM (4) Disconnect servicing chuck from air

PART NUMBER PRESSURE valve.

70250-12051-042 1300 PSIG h. Apply leak detection fluid, Item 189, Appendix
D, to lower air valve and make sure valve does
70250-12051-043, 1000 PSIG not leak.
-044, or -045
i. If bubbles appear, do this:

(1) Determine if packing or air valve is leak-

(c) L o o k a t p r e s s u r e o n n i t r o g e n ing.
cylinder assembly gage.
(2) Replace air valve or packing as required
(d) Look in GAGE PRESSURE column (PARA 3-4-7).
of NITROGEN SERVICE CHART.
Find pressure closest to pressure (3) Repeat step g. and step h.
shown on nitrogen cylinder as-
sembly gage (Figure 1-3-2-2). j. Install lower air valve cap.

(e) Read across chart to DIM X column. k. Lockwire, Item 197, Appendix D, lower air
valve to piston.
(f) Add nitrogen to extend lower strut
until DIM X is obtained. l. Make sure area is clean and free of foreign
material.
(3) TORQUE OUTER HEXNUT TO 50 - 70
INCH-POUNDS (Figure 1-3-2-1, Detail m. Install upper and lower main landing gear fair-
B). ings (PARA 2-4-95 and PARA 2-4-96).

1-3-2-12
PARA 1-3-2 TM 1-70-23

n. Release parking brake.

1-3-2-13/(1-3-2-14 Blank)
PARA 1-3-3 TM 1-70-23

1-3-3 SERVICE MAIN LANDING GEAR TIRES.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-3-3.1 Service Main Landing 1-3-3-1

Gear Tires

INITIAL SETUP References

Tools
• Appendix D
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• PARA 3-4-11
• Nitrogen Servicing Unit, 901002
• Tire Inflator

Materials/Parts

• Leak Detection Fluid, Item 189, Appendix D

• Nitrogen, Item 221, Appendix D

1-3-3.1 Service Main Landing Gear Tires. NOTE

Servicing of both main landing gear

WARNING tires is the same.

• To prevent injury to personnel or dam- a. Use regulated nitrogen pressure source con-
age to equipment, check tire inflator as- nected to tire inflator. INFLATE TIRE TO 130
sembly to make sure that nitrogen - 140 PSI with nitrogen, Item 221, Appendix D.
source is vented at 160 psi maximum.
b. After a 5 to 10 minute waiting period, check air
• To prevent injury to personnel, or dam- valve for leakage as follows:
age to equipment, do not inflate tire
above its rated inflation pressure. (1) Apply leak detection fluid, Item 189, Ap-
pendix D, to valve.
• To prevent injury to personnel, do not
use an unregulated nitrogen pressure
source to service tire. (2) If bubbles appear, replace valve packing,
valve core, or valve stem as required
• To prevent injury to personnel, never (PARA 3-4-11).
stand facing sidewall of tire being
serviced. Stand facing tire tread. c. Install valve cap on valve stem.

1-3-3-1/(1-3-3-2 Blank)
PARA 1-3-4 TM 1-70-23

1-3-4 SERVICE TAIL LANDING GEAR SHOCK STRUT.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE PAGE

1-3-4.1 Service Tail Landing Gear 1-3-4-2 1-3-4.2 Service Tail Landing Gear 1-3-4-10
Shock Strut with Helicop- Shock Strut with Helicop-
ter on Jacks ter on Ground

INITIAL SETUP • Lockwire, Item 197, Appendix D

Tools • Machinery Towel, Item 211, Appendix D

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit • Nitrogen, Item 221, Appendix D

• Petrolatum, Item 234, Appendix D

• Beaker, 800 ml
• Rags
• Container, 1-Quart
• Tubing, Nonmetallic, Item 344, Appendix D
• Hydraulic Fluid Dispenser, AF5
• Union
• Nitrogen Servicing Unit, 901002
References
• Torque Wrench, 30 - 150 in. lbs
• Appendix D
Materials/Parts • PARA 1-2-1
• Hydraulic Fluid, Item 154, Appendix D • PARA 1-6-3
• Hydraulic Fluid, Item 155, Appendix D • PARA 2-4-97
• Leak Detection Fluid, Item 189, Appendix D • PARA 3-4-22

1-3-4-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-4

1-3-4.1 Service Tail Landing Gear Shock

Strut with Helicopter on Jacks. CAUTION

NOTE
A strut requiring service should be care-
• Servicing tail landing gear strut with fully checked for hydraulic leakage.
helicopter on jacks is the preferred Repeated nitrogen servicing of a leaking
method of servicing strut. strut without servicing with hydraulic
fluid can lead to a completely nitrogen-
• If both upper and lower struts require inflated strut, causing internal damage.
servicing, service upper stage first.
d. Remove cap from upper stage air valve (Figure
• If installed, external fuel tanks must be 1-3-4-1, Detail B).
defueled and removed prior to servicing
struts.
WARNING
1-3-4.1.1. Service Upper Stage Strut with
Helicopter on Jacks.
• Injury to personnel and damage to
equipment will result if area under
CAUTION helicopter is not clear prior to servicing
landing gear.

• To prevent damage to helicopter, refer • Injury to personnel and damage to

only to procedure in this manual for equipment will result if all nitrogen
proper charge pressure. Disregard all pressure is not released prior to remov-
other labels attached to the helicopter ing air valve. Shock strut is under high
concerning charge pressure. pressure. Make sure all nitrogen pres-
sure is released prior to removing valve.
• A strut needing service should be care-
fully checked for hydraulic leakage. e. Release nitrogen pressure from strut upper
Repeated nitrogen servicing of a leaking stage as follows:
strut without servicing with hydraulic
fluid can lead to a completely nitrogen- (1) Slip nonmetallic tubing, Item 344, Ap-
inflated strut, causing internal damage. pendix D, over end of air valve. Place free
end in 1-quart container to collect any
a. Remove tail cone access panels 5T-5B-18 and hydraulic fluid discharge when valve is
6T-6B-32 (PARA 1-2-1). opened.

b. Remove tail landing gear fairing (PARA 2-4- (2) S l o w l y t u r n o u t e r h e x n u t

97). counterclockwise until you hear nitrogen
hissing from air valve.
NOTE
(3) When nitrogen pressure is completely
Improper servicing will result if tire is released from shock strut, measure col-
allowed to touch the ground. lected hydraulic fluid, if any, using 800
ml beaker.
c. Jack rear of helicopter until tail landing gear is
fully extended and tire clears the ground. (a) IF DISCHARGE OF HYDRAULIC
Install jack under jack pad at bottom of rear of FLUID FROM VALVE IS
tail cone (PARA 1-6-3). GREATER THAN 80 MIL-

1-3-4-2
PARA 1-3-4 TM 1-70-23

LILITERS (CUBIC CENTIME- (4) Slowly release pressurized fluid from

TERS), REPLACE SHOCK fluid dispenser into shock strut until float-
STRUT (PARA 3-4-22). ing piston bottoms. DO NOT EXCEED
100 PSI HYDRAULIC PRESSURE.
(b) IF DISCHARGE IS BETWEEN 40
AND 80 MILLILITERS (CUBIC (5) Release pressure from dispenser.
CENTIMETERS), RESERVICE
STRUT AND REINSPECT g. Bleed strut upper stage as follows:
SHOCK STRUT AT 200 FLIGHT
HOURS. NOTE

(c) IF DISCHARGE IS LESS THAN Place machinery towels, Item 211, Ap-
40 MILLILITERS (CUBIC CEN- pendix D, under upper bleeder plug to
TIMETERS), RESERVICE catch surplus hydraulic fluid when upper
STRUT AND REINSPECT bleeder plug is removed.
SHOCK STRUT AT 500 FLIGHT
HOURS. (1) Remove upper bleeder plug from strut up-
per stage.
(4) Remove tube from air valve.
(2) Install union with packing in bleeder port.
(5) Turn inner hexnut counterclockwise and Connect an overflow line to union.
remove upper air valve.
(3) Place overflow line from upper bleeder
f. Using hydraulic fluid dispenser, bottom float- port into 1-quart container to catch
ing piston in upper stage strut as follows: overflow of fluid.

NOTE (4) Place jack underneath tail landing gear

fork (PARA 1-6-3).
Under emergency conditions, hydraulic
fluid, Item 155, Appendix D, may be (5) Slowly fully compress upper stage by
used to service struts. However, reser- jacking tail landing gear fork until no
vice struts with hydraulic fluid, Item more than 1/2 inch of chrome piston is
154, Appendix D, as soon as convenient. visible.

(1) Service hydraulic fluid dispenser with (6) Watch fluid flowing from overflow line.
hydraulic fluid, Item 154, Appendix D.
(7) If fluid contains bubbles do the following:
(2) Connect hydraulic fluid dispenser to up-
per stage kneeling valve quick-disconnect (a) Install upper bleeder plug and pack-
fitting (Figure 1-3-4-1, Detail A). ing. TIGHTEN BLEEDER PLUG
1/6 TO 1/3 TURN PAST POINT
(3) Turn upper stage kneeling valve knob to WHERE SHARP RISE IN
OPEN. TORQUE IS FELT.

NOTE (b) Remove jack from under tail landing

gear fork (PARA 1-6-3).
• If fluid dispenser pressure drops below
10 psi, recharge fluid dispenser. (c) Slowly release pressurized fluid
from fluid dispenser into shock strut
• Floating piston is bottomed when a dull until shock strut is fully extended.
thud is heard. When strut is fully extended a sharp

1-3-4-3
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-4

UPPER STAGE
KNEELING NUT PACKING
VALVE
UPPER
STRUT− BLEEDER
UPPER STAGE PLUG
(SEE NOTE)

EXPOSED PISTON
QUICK−DISCONNECT
FITTING
QUICK−DISCONNECT
FITTING
B

LOWER STAGE
A KNEELING
VALVE
PACKING

STRUT−
LOWER STAGE

LOWER
A BLEEDER
C PLUG
(SEE NOTE)

NUT

C B

OUTER
HEXNUT
(TORQUE 50−70
IN. LBS)
STRUT
LOWER
STAGE AIR
VALVE

CAP
DIM X
PACKING

INNER HEXNUT
YOKE
(TORQUE 100−110 IN. LBS)

NOTE AIR VALVE

(TYPICAL)
TIGHTEN BLEEDER PLUG 1/6 TO 1/3
TURN PAST POINT WHERE SHARP RISE
IN TORQUE IS FELT. AB1110
SA

FIGURE 1-3-4-1. SERVICE TAIL LANDING GEAR

1-3-4-4
PARA 1-3-4 TM 1-70-23

rise in pressure will occur. DO NOT (20) Stop pumping fluid. HANDTIGHTEN
EXCEED 100 PSI HYDRAULIC BLEEDER PLUG.
PRESSURE.
(21) Turn upper stage kneeling valve knob to
(d) Repeat step f. (5) through step g. (6). CLOSE. Lockwire, Item 197, Appendix
D, knob to hole in upper stage kneeling
(8) Stop when bubbles are no longer seen in valve housing.
fluid and strut is fully compressed. Turn
upper stage kneeling valve knob to (22) TIGHTEN BLEEDER PLUG 1/6 TO 1/3
CLOSE. TURN PAST POINT WHERE SHARP
RISE IN TORQUE IS FELT. Lockwire,
(9) Remove overflow line, union, and pack- Item 197, Appendix D, bleeder plug to up-
ing from upper bleeder plug port. per cylinder.

(10) Install new packing lubricated with (23) Disconnect fluid dispenser from upper
petrolatum, Item 234, Appendix D, on up- stage kneeling valve quick-disconnect fit-
per bleeder plug. ting.

(11) Install upper bleeder plug and packing (24) Install new packing lubricated with
into strut upper cylinder. petrolatum, Item 234, Appendix D, on up-
HANDTIGHTEN BLEEDER PLUG. per air valve (Figure 1-3-4-1, Detail B).

(12) Turn upper stage kneeling valve knob to (25) Screw upper air valve and packing into
OPEN. strut upper stage. TORQUE INNER
HEXNUT TO 100 - 110 INCH-POUNDS.
(13) Remove jack from under tail landing gear
fork (PARA 1-6-3). (26) Remove jack from under tail landing gear
fork (PARA 1-6-3).
(14) Slowly release pressurized fluid from
fluid dispenser into upper stage until strut h. Service upper stage strut with nitrogen as
begins to extend. DO NOT EXCEED 100 follows:
PSI HYDRAULIC PRESSURE.
(1) Attach servicing chuck from a regulated
(15) Release pressure from fluid dispenser. nitrogen servicing unit to upper air valve.

(16) Place rags around upper bleeder plug.

Loosen bleeder plug. CAUTION

(17) Place jack underneath tail landing gear

fork (PARA 1-6-3). • Damage to strut will result if overpres-
surized during servicing. Internal dam-
(18) Slowly fully compress upper stage by age or strut failure will result. Do not
jacking tail landing gear fork until no overpressurize strut during servicing.
more than 1/2 inch of chrome piston is
visible. • To prevent damage to helicopter, check
part number on shock strut before
(19) Slowly release pressurized fluid from servicing; then refer to procedure in this
fluid dispenser into shock strut and moni- manual for proper charge pressure.
tor flow of oil until air bubbles are no Disregard all other labels attached to the
longer seen. helicopter.

1-3-4-5
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-4

NOTE m. If lower stage will not be serviced, remove jack

from jack pad at bottom of rear of tail cone
Improper servicing will result if tire is (PARA 1-6-3).
allowed to touch the ground.
n. If lower stage will not be serviced, install tail
(2) Slowly apply pressure using nitrogen, landing gear fairing (PARA 2-4-97).
Item 221, Appendix D, to fully extend up-
per strut. Continue until gage on nitrogen o. If lower stage will not be serviced, install tail
servicing unit reads as follows: cone access panels 5T-5B-18 and 6T-6B-32
(PARA 1-2-1).
SHOCK STRUT
PART NUMBER PRESSURE (PSIG) 1-3-4.1.2. Service Lower Stage Strut with
Helicopter on Jacks.
70250-13101-041 875 to 925

70250-13101-042, 1000 to 1050 CAUTION

-043, -044

• To prevent damage to helicopter, refer

only to procedure in this manual for
(3) Tire must not touch ground when lower
proper charge pressure. Disregard all
strut is fully extended.
other labels attached to the helicopter
(4) TORQUE OUTER HEXNUT TO 50 - 70 concerning charge pressure.
INCH-POUNDS.
• A strut needing service should be care-
(5) Disconnect servicing chuck from air fully checked for hydraulic leakage.
valve. Repeated nitrogen servicing of a leaking
strut without servicing with hydraulic
i. Apply leak detection fluid, Item 189, Appendix fluid can lead to a completely nitrogen-
D, to upper air valve and make sure air valve inflated strut, causing internal damage.
does not leak.
NOTE
j. If bubbles appear, do this:
Servicing tail landing gear strut with
(1) Determine if packing or air valve is leak- helicopter on jacks is the preferred
ing. method of servicing strut.

(2) Replace air valve or packing as required a. Remove tail cone access panels 5T-5B-18 and
(PARA 3-4-22). 6T-6B-32 (PARA 1-2-1).

(3) Repeat step h. and step i. b. Remove tail landing gear fairing (PARA 2-4-
97).
k. Install air valve cap.
NOTE
l. If lower stage is being serviced, proceed to
PARA 1-3-4.1.2. Improper servicing will result if tire is
allowed to touch the ground.
NOTE
c. Jack rear of helicopter until tail landing gear is
If lower stage is to be serviced, do not fully extended and tire clears the ground.
remove jack from bottom of rear of tail Install jack under jack pad at bottom of rear of
cone. tail cone (PARA 1-6-3).

1-3-4-6
PARA 1-3-4 TM 1-70-23

d. Remove cap from lower air valve (Figure 1-3- (4) Remove tube from air valve.
4-1, Detail B).
(5) Turn inner hexnut counterclockwise and
remove lower air valve.
WARNING
f. Using hydraulic fluid dispenser, bottom float-
ing piston in lower stage strut as follows:
Injury to personnel and damage to
equipment will result if all nitrogen NOTE
pressure is not released prior to remov-
ing air valve. Shock strut is under high Under emergency conditions, hydraulic
pressure. Make sure all nitrogen pres- fluid, Item 155, Appendix D, may be
sure is released prior to removing valve. used to service struts. However, reser-
vice struts with hydraulic fluid, Item
e. Release nitrogen pressure from strut lower 154, Appendix D, as soon as convenient.
stage as follows:
(1) Service hydraulic fluid dispenser with
(1) Slip nonmetallic tubing, Item 344, Ap- hydraulic fluid, Item 154, Appendix D.
pendix D, over end of air valve. Place free
end in 1-quart container to collect any (2) Connect hydraulic fluid dispenser to
hydraulic fluid discharge when valve is lower stage kneeling valve quick-
opened. disconnect fitting (Figure 1-3-4-1, Detail
A).
(2) S l o w l y t u r n o u t e r h e x n u t
counterclockwise until you hear nitrogen (3) Turn lower stage kneeling valve knob to
hissing from air valve. OPEN.

(3) When nitrogen pressure is completely NOTE

released from shock strut, measure col-
lected hydraulic fluid, if any, using 800 • If fluid dispenser pressure drops below
ml beaker. 10 psi, recharge fluid dispenser.

(a) IF DISCHARGE OF HYDRAULIC • Floating piston is bottomed when a dull

FLUID FROM VALVE IS thud is heard.
GREATER THAN 80 MIL-
(4) Slowly release pressurized fluid from
LILITERS (CUBIC CENTIME-
fluid dispenser into shock strut until float-
TERS), REPLACE SHOCK
ing piston bottoms. DO NOT EXCEED
STRUT (PARA 3-4-22).
100 PSI HYDRAULIC PRESSURE.
(b) IF DISCHARGE IS BETWEEN 40
(5) Release pressure from dispenser.
AND 80 MILLILITERS (CUBIC
CENTIMETERS), RESERVICE g. Bleed strut lower stage as follows:
STRUT AND REINSPECT
SHOCK STRUT AT 200 FLIGHT NOTE
HOURS.
Place machinery towels, Item 211, Ap-
(c) IF DISCHARGE IS LESS THAN pendix D, under lower bleeder plug to
40 MILLILITERS (CUBIC CEN- catch surplus hydraulic fluid when lower
TIMETERS), RESERVICE bleeder plug is removed.
STRUT AND REINSPECT
SHOCK STRUT AT 500 FLIGHT (1) Remove lower bleeder plug from strut
HOURS. lower stage.

1-3-4-7
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-4

(2) Install union with packing in bleeder port. (12) Turn lower stage kneeling valve knob to
Connect an overflow line to union. OPEN.

(3) Place overflow line from lower bleeder (13) Remove jack from under tail landing gear
port into 1-quart container to catch fork (PARA 1-6-3).
overflow of fluid.
(14) Slowly release pressurized fluid from
(4) Place jack underneath jack pad on tail fluid dispenser into lower stage until strut
landing gear fork (PARA 1-6-3). begins to extend. DO NOT EXCEED 100
PSI HYDRAULIC PRESSURE.
(5) Slowly fully compress lower stage by
(15) Release pressure from fluid dispenser.
jacking tail landing gear until no more
than 7/16 inch of chrome piston is visible. (16) Place rags around lower bleeder plug.
Loosen bleeder plug.
(6) Watch fluid flowing from overflow line.
(17) Place jack underneath tail landing gear
(7) If fluid contains bubbles do the following: fork (PARA 1-6-3).
(a) Install lower bleeder plug and pack- (18) Slowly fully compress lower stage by
ing. TIGHTEN BLEEDER PLUG jacking tail landing gear fork until no
1/6 TO 1/3 TURN PAST POINT more than 7/16 inch of chrome piston is
WHERE SHARP RISE IN visible.
TORQUE IS FELT.
(19) Slowly release pressurized fluid from
(b) Remove jack from under tail landing fluid dispenser into shock strut and moni-
gear fork (PARA 1-6-3). tor flow of oil until air bubbles are no
longer seen.
(c) Slowly release pressurized fluid
from fluid dispenser into shock strut (20) Stop pumping fluid. HANDTIGHTEN
until shock strut is fully extended. BLEEDER PLUG.
When strut is fully extended a sharp
(21) Turn lower stage kneeling valve knob to
rise in pressure will occur. DO NOT
CLOSE. Lockwire, Item 197, Appendix
EXCEED 100 PSI HYDRAULIC
D, knob to hole in lower stage kneeling
PRESSURE.
valve housing.
(d) Repeat step f. (5) through step g. (6). (22) TIGHTEN BLEEDER PLUG 1/6 TO 1/3
TURN PAST POINT WHERE SHARP
(8) Stop when bubbles are no longer seen in
RISE IN TORQUE IS FELT. Lockwire,
fluid and strut is fully compressed. Turn
Item 197, Appendix D, bleeder plug to
lower stage kneeling valve knob to
lower cylinder.
CLOSE.
(23) Disconnect fluid dispenser from lower
(9) Remove overflow line, union, and pack- stage kneeling valve quick-disconnect fit-
ing from lower bleeder plug port. ting.
(10) Install new packing lubricated with (24) Install new packing lubricated with
petrolatum, Item 234, Appendix D, on petrolatum, Item 234, Appendix D, on
lower bleeder plug. lower air valve (Figure 1-3-4-1, Detail B).
(11) Install lower bleeder plug and packing (25) Screw lower air valve and packing into
into strut lower cylinder. strut lower stage. TORQUE INNER
HANDTIGHTEN BLEEDER PLUG. HEXNUT TO 100 - 110 INCH-POUNDS.

1-3-4-8
PARA 1-3-4 TM 1-70-23

(26) Remove jack from under tail landing gear (3) Tire must not touch ground when lower
fork (PARA 1-6-3). strut is fully extended.

h. Service lower stage strut with nitrogen as (4) TORQUE OUTER HEXNUT TO 50 - 70
follows: INCH-POUNDS.
(1) Attach servicing chuck from a regulated
nitrogen servicing unit, Item 221, Ap- (5) Disconnect servicing chuck from air
pendix D, to lower air valve. valve.

i. Apply leak detection fluid, Item 189, Appendix

CAUTION D, to lower air valve and make sure valve does
not leak.

• Damage to strut will result if overpres- j. If bubbles appear, do this:

surized during servicing. Internal dam-
age or strut failure will result. Do not
(1) Determine if packing or air valve is leak-
overpressurize strut during servicing.
ing.
• To prevent damage to helicopter, check
part number on shock strut before (2) Replace air valve or packing as required
servicing; then refer to procedure in this (PARA 3-4-22).
manual for proper charge pressure.
Disregard all other labels attached to the (3) Repeat step h. and step i.
helicopter.
k. Lockwire, Item 197, Appendix D, lower
NOTE bleeder plug to lower strut.
Improper servicing will result if tire is
allowed to touch the ground. l. Install lower air valve cap.

(2) Slowly apply pressure, using nitrogen, m. Lockwire, Item 197, Appendix D, air valve to
Item 221, Appendix D, to fully extend piston.
lower strut. Continue until gage on
nitrogen servicing unit reads as follows: n. Make sure area is clean and free of foreign
material.
SHOCK STRUT
PART NUMBER PRESSURE (PSIG)
o. Install tail cone access panels 5T-5B-18 and
70250-13101-041 170 to 220 6T-6B-32 (PARA 1-2-1).

70250-13101-042, 250 to 300 p. Remove jack at bottom of rear of tail cone and
-043, -044 lower rear of helicopter (PARA 1-6-3).

1-3-4-9
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-4

1-3-4.2 Service Tail Landing Gear Shock area is clear of personnel and equip-
Strut with Helicopter on Ground. ment.

NOTE • Injury to personnel and damage to

equipment will result if all nitrogen
• If both upper and lower struts require pressure is not released prior to remov-
servicing, service upper stage first. ing air valve. Shock strut is under high
pressure. Make sure all nitrogen pres-
• If installed, external fuel tanks must be sure is released prior to removing valve.
defueled and removed prior to servicing
struts. d. Release nitrogen pressure from strut upper
stage as follows:
1-3-4.2.1. Service Upper Stage Strut with
Helicopter on Ground. (1) Slip nonmetallic tubing, Item 344, Ap-
pendix D, over end of air valve. Place free
end in 1-quart container to collect any
CAUTION hydraulic fluid discharge when valve is
opened.

• To prevent damage to helicopter, refer (2) S l o w l y t u r n o u t e r h e x n u t

only to procedure in this manual for counterclockwise until you hear nitrogen
proper charge pressure. Disregard all hissing from air valve.
other labels attached to the helicopter (3) When nitrogen pressure is completely
concerning charge pressure. released from shock strut, measure col-
lected hydraulic fluid, if any, using 800
• A strut needing service should be care-
ml beaker.
fully checked for hydraulic leakage.
Repeated nitrogen servicing of a leaking (a) IF DISCHARGE OF HYDRAULIC
strut without servicing with hydraulic FLUID FROM VALVE IS
fluid can lead to a completely nitrogen- GREATER THAN 80 MIL-
inflated strut, causing internal damage. LILITERS (CUBIC CENTIME-
TERS), REPLACE SHOCK
a. Remove tail cone access panels 5T-5B-18 and
STRUT (PARA 3-4-22).
6T-6B-32 (PARA 1-2-1).
(b) IF DISCHARGE IS BETWEEN 40
b. Remove tail landing gear fairing (PARA 2-4- AND 80 MILLILITERS (CUBIC
97). CENTIMETERS), RESERVICE
STRUT AND REINSPECT
c. Remove cap from upper stage air valve (Figure
SHOCK STRUT AT 200 FLIGHT
1-3-4-1, Detail B).
HOURS.

(c) IF DISCHARGE IS LESS THAN

WARNING 40 MILLILITERS (CUBIC CEN-
TIMETERS), RESERVICE
STRUT AND REINSPECT
• Injury to personnel and damage to
SHOCK STRUT AT 500 FLIGHT
equipment will result if area under
HOURS.
helicopter is not clear prior to servicing
landing gear. (4) Remove tube from air valve.
• Helicopter will settle up to 13.6 inches. (5) Turn inner hexnut counterclockwise and
Look under helicopter and make sure remove upper air valve.

1-3-4-10
PARA 1-3-4 TM 1-70-23

e. Using hydraulic fluid dispenser, bottom float- (2) Install union with packing in bleeder port.
ing piston in upper stage strut as follows: Connect an overflow line to union.

NOTE (3) Place overflow line from upper bleeder

port into 1-quart container to catch
Under emergency conditions, hydraulic overflow of fluid.
fluid, Item 155, Appendix D, may be
used to service struts. However, reser- (4) Release pressurized fluid into strut and
vice struts with hydraulic fluid, Item watch fluid flowing from overflow line.
154, Appendix D, as soon as convenient.
(5) Stop when nitrogen bubbles are no longer
seen in fluid. Turn upper stage kneeling
(1) Service hydraulic fluid dispenser with
valve knob to CLOSE. Lockwire, Item
hydraulic fluid, Item 154, Appendix D.
197, Appendix D, knob to hole in upper
(2) Connect hydraulic fluid dispenser to up- stage kneeling valve housing.
per stage kneeling valve quick-disconnect (6) Disconnect coupler and hydraulic fluid
fitting (Figure 1-3-4-1, Detail A). dispenser from upper quick-disconnect
fitting.
(3) Turn upper stage kneeling valve knob to
OPEN. (7) Remove overflow line, union, and pack-
ing from upper bleeder plug port.
NOTE
(8) Install new packing lubricated with
• If fluid dispenser pressure drops below petrolatum, Item 234, Appendix D, on up-
10 psi, recharge fluid dispenser. per bleeder plug.

• Floating piston is bottomed when a dull (9) Install upper bleeder plug and packing
thud is heard. into strut upper cylinder. TIGHTEN
BLEEDER PLUG 1/6 TO 1/3 TURN
(4) Release pressurized fluid into shock strut PAST POINT WHERE SHARP RISE IN
until floating piston bottoms. DO NOT TORQUE IS FELT. Lockwire, Item 197,
EXCEED 100 PSIG. Appendix D, bleeder plug to upper
cylinder.
(5) Release pressure from dispenser.
(10) Install new packing lubricated with
f. Bleed strut upper stage as follows: petrolatum, Item 234, Appendix D, on up-
per air valve (Figure 1-3-4-1, Detail B).
NOTE
(11) Screw upper air valve and packing into
strut upper stage. TORQUE INNER
Place machinery towels, Item 211, Ap-
HEXNUT TO 100 - 110 INCH-POUNDS.
pendix D, under upper bleeder plug to
catch surplus hydraulic fluid when upper g. Service upper stage strut with nitrogen as
bleeder plug is removed. follows:

(1) Remove upper bleeder plug from strut up- (1) Attach servicing chuck from a regulated
per stage. nitrogen servicing unit to upper air valve.

1-3-4-11
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-4

k. If lower stage is being serviced, proceed to

CAUTION PARA 1-3-4.2.2.

l. If lower stage will not be serviced, install tail

• Damage to strut will result if overpres- landing gear fairing (PARA 2-4-97).
surized during servicing. Internal dam-
age or strut failure will result. Do not m. If lower stage will not be serviced, install tail
overpressurize strut during servicing. cone access panels 5T-5B-18 and 6T-6B-32
(PARA 1-2-1).
• To prevent damage to helicopter, check
part number on shock strut before 1-3-4.2.2. Service Lower Stage Strut with
servicing; then refer to procedure in this Helicopter on Ground.
manual for proper charge pressure.
Disregard all other labels attached to the
helicopter. CAUTION

(2) Slowly apply pressure using nitrogen,

Item 221, Appendix D, to fully extend up- • To prevent damage to helicopter, refer
per strut. Continue until gage on nitrogen only to procedure in this manual for
servicing unit reads as follows: proper charge pressure. Disregard all
other labels attached to the helicopter
SHOCK STRUT concerning charge pressure.
PART NUMBER PRESSURE (PSIG)
• A strut needing service should be care-
70250-13101-041 875 to 925 fully checked for hydraulic leakage.
Repeated nitrogen servicing of a leaking
70250-13101-042, 1000 to 1050
strut without servicing with hydraulic
-043, -044
fluid can lead to a completely nitrogen-
inflated strut, causing internal damage.

(3) TORQUE OUTER HEXNUT TO 50 - 70 a. Remove tail cone access panels 5T-5B-18 and
INCH-POUNDS. 6T-6B-32 (PARA 1-2-1).

(4) Disconnect servicing chuck from air b. Remove tail landing gear fairing (PARA 2-4-
valve. 97).

h. Apply leak detection fluid, Item 189, Appendix

D, to upper air valve and make sure valve does
not leak. WARNING

i. If bubbles appear, do this:

Injury to personnel and damage to
(1) Determine if packing or air valve is leak- equipment will result if area under
ing. helicopter is not clear prior to servicing
landing gear. Helicopter will settle up to
(2) Replace air valve or packing as required 7 inches. Look under helicopter and
(PARA 3-4-22). make sure area is clear of personnel and
equipment.
(3) Repeat step g. and step h.
c. Remove cap from lower air valve (Figure 1-3-
j. Install air valve cap. 4-1, Detail B).

1-3-4-12
PARA 1-3-4 TM 1-70-23

(5) Turn inner hexnut counterclockwise and

WARNING remove lower air valve.

e. Using hydraulic fluid dispenser, bottom float-

Injury to personnel and damage to ing piston in lower stage strut as follows:
equipment will result if all nitrogen
pressure is not released prior to remov- NOTE
ing air valve. Shock strut is under high
Under emergency conditions, hydraulic
pressure. Make sure all nitrogen pres-
fluid, Item 155, Appendix D, may be
sure is released prior to removing valve.
used to service struts. However, reser-
d. Release nitrogen pressure from strut lower vice struts with hydraulic fluid, Item
stage as follows: 154, Appendix D, as soon as convenient.

(1) Service hydraulic fluid dispenser with

(1) Slip nonmetallic tubing, Item 344, Ap-
hydraulic fluid, Item 154, Appendix D.
pendix D, over end of air valve. Place free
end in 1-quart container to collect any (2) Connect hydraulic fluid dispenser to
hydraulic fluid discharge when valve is lower stage kneeling valve quick-
opened. disconnect fitting (Figure 1-3-4-1, Detail
A).
(2) S l o w l y t u r n o u t e r h e x n u t
counterclockwise until you hear nitrogen (3) Turn lower stage kneeling valve knob to
hissing from air valve. OPEN.
(3) When nitrogen pressure is completely NOTE
released from shock strut, measure col-
lected hydraulic fluid, if any, using 800 • If fluid dispenser pressure drops below
ml beaker. 10 psi, recharge fluid dispenser.

(a) IF DISCHARGE OF HYDRAULIC • Floating piston is bottomed when a dull

FLUID FROM VALVE IS thud is heard.
GREATER THAN 80 MIL-
LILITERS (CUBIC CENTIME- (4) Release pressurized fluid into shock strut
TERS), REPLACE SHOCK until floating piston bottoms. DO NOT
STRUT (PARA 3-4-22). EXCEED 100 PSIG.

(b) IF DISCHARGE IS BETWEEN 40 (5) Release pressure from dispenser.

AND 80 MILLILITERS (CUBIC
f. Bleed strut lower stage as follows:
CENTIMETERS), RESERVICE
STRUT AND REINSPECT NOTE
SHOCK STRUT AT 200 FLIGHT
HOURS. Place machinery towels, Item 211, Ap-
pendix D, under lower bleeder plug to
(c) IF DISCHARGE IS LESS THAN catch surplus hydraulic fluid when lower
40 MILLILITERS (CUBIC CEN- bleeder plug is removed.
TIMETERS), RESERVICE
STRUT AND REINSPECT (1) Remove lower bleeder plug from strut
SHOCK STRUT AT 500 FLIGHT lower stage.
HOURS.
(2) Install union with packing in bleeder port.
(4) Remove tube from air valve. Connect an overflow line to union.

1-3-4-13
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-4

(3) Place overflow line from lower bleeder age or strut failure will result. Do not
port into 1-quart container to catch overpressurize strut during servicing.
overflow of fluid.
• Damage to tail landing gear shock strut
(4) Release pressurized fluid into strut and will result if tail gear contact is not ma-
watch fluid flowing from overflow line. intained during servicing. Maintain tail
gear ground contact at all times when
(5) Stop when nitrogen bubbles are no longer
servicing tail landing gear shock strut.
seen in fluid. Turn lower stage kneeling
valve knob to CLOSE. Lockwire, Item (3) Slowly pressurize strut with nitrogen,
197, Appendix D, knob to hole in lower Item 221, Appendix D. DO NOT EX-
stage kneeling valve housing. CEED 1200 PSIG MAXIMUM PRES-
(6) Disconnect coupler and hydraulic fluid SURE WHEN RAISING LOWER TAIL
dispenser from lower quick-disconnect LANDING GEAR STRUT. As soon as
fitting. strut starts to extend, shut off pressure. If
strut does not extend, rock tail back and
(7) Remove overflow line, union, and pack- forth to overcome possible friction.
ing from lower bleeder plug port.
(4) Check strut pressure.
(8) Install new packing lubricated with
petrolatum, Item 234, Appendix D, on (5) Look in GAGE PRESSURE column of
lower bleeder plug. NITROGEN SERVICE CHART and find
pressure closest to pressure shown on
(9) Install lower bleeder plug and packing nitrogen servicing unit gage (Figure 1-3-
into strut lower cylinder. TIGHTEN 4-2).
BLEEDER PLUG 1/6 TO 1/3 TURN
PAST POINT WHERE SHARP RISE IN (6) Read across chart to DIM X column. Add
TORQUE IS FELT. Lockwire, Item 197, nitrogen pressure to extend lower strut
Appendix D, bleeder plug to lower until DIM X is obtained.
cylinder.
(7) TORQUE OUTER HEXNUT TO 50 - 70
(10) Install new packing lubricated with INCH-POUNDS (Figure 1-3-4-1, Detail
petrolatum, Item 234, Appendix D, on B).
lower air valve (Figure 1-3-4-1, Detail B).
(8) Disconnect servicing chuck from air
(11) Screw lower air valve and packing into valve.
strut lower stage. TORQUE INNER
HEXNUT TO 100 - 110 INCH-POUNDS. h. Apply leak detection fluid, Item 189, Appendix
D, to lower air valve and make sure valve does
g. Service lower stage strut with nitrogen as
not leak.
follows:
(1) Attach servicing chuck from a regulated i. If bubbles appear, do this:
nitrogen servicing unit to lower air valve.
(1) Determine if packing or air valve is leak-
(2) Look at Figure 1-3-4-1, Detail C, and see ing.
where DIM X is measured from.
(2) Replace air valve or packing as required
(PARA 3-4-22).
CAUTION
(3) Repeat step g. and step h.

• Damage to strut will result if overpres- j. Lockwire, Item 197, Appendix D, lower
surized during servicing. Internal dam- bleeder plug to lower strut.

1-3-4-14
PARA 1-3-4 TM 1-70-23

NITROGEN SERVICE CHART NITROGEN SERVICE CHART

EFFECTIVITY: HELICOPTERS WITH EFFECTIVITY: HELICOPTERS WITH
SHOCK STRUT PART NO. 70250-13101-041 SHOCK STRUT PART NO.
70250-13101-042, -043, -044
GAGE PRESSURE DIMENSION X TOLERANCE GAGE PRESSURE DIMENSION X TOLERANCE
TOLERANCE BETWEEN: -0.12 TO 0.12 IN. TOLERANCE BETWEEN: -0.12 TO 0.12 IN.
BETWEEN: -25 TO 25 (1/8 IN.) BETWEEN: -25 TO 25 (1/8 IN.)
PSI PSI
1309 0.50 (1/2) 1684 0.50 (1/2)
982 0.88 (7/8) 1293 0.88 (7/8)
785 1.25 (1-1/4) 1054 1.25 (1-1/4)
652 1.62 (1-5/8) 888 1.62 (1-5/8)
557 2.00 (2) 765 2.00 (2)
486 2.38 (2-3/8) 671 2.38 (2-3/8)
431 2.75 (2-3/4) 598 2.75 (2-3/4)
386 3.12 (3-1/8) 540 3.12 (3-1/8)
350 3.50 (3-1/2) 491 3.50 (3-1/2)
320 3.88 (3-7/8) 449 3.88 (3-7/8)
284 4.25 (4-1/4) 415 4.25 (4-1/4)
195 FULL EXTENSION 275 FULL EXTENSION

AA9552A
SA

FIGURE 1-3-4-2. TAIL LANDING GEAR NITROGEN SERVICE CHART

k. Install lower air valve cap. n. Install tail landing gear fairing (PARA 2-4-97).

l. Lockwire, Item 197, Appendix D, air valve to

o. Install tail cone access panels 5T-5B-18 and
piston.
6T-6B-32 (PARA 1-2-1).
m. Make sure area is clean and free of foreign
material.

1-3-4-15/(1-3-4-16 Blank)
PARA 1-3-5 TM 1-70-23

1-3-5 SERVICE TAIL LANDING GEAR TIRE.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-3-5.1 Service Tail Landing Gear 1-3-5-1

Tire

INITIAL SETUP References

Tools
• Appendix D
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• PARA 3-4-28
• Nitrogen Servicing Unit, 901002
• Tire Inflator

Materials/Parts

• Leak Detection Fluid, Item 189, Appendix D

• Nitrogen, Item 221, Appendix D

1-3-5.1 Service Tail Landing Gear Tire. • To prevent injury to personnel, never
stand beside tire being serviced. Stand in
front or behind tire.
WARNING
a. Use regulated nitrogen pressure source con-
nected to tire inflator. INFLATE TIRE TO 115
• To prevent injury to personnel, or dam- - 125 PSI with nitrogen, Item 221, Appendix D.
age to equipment check tire inflator as-
sembly to make sure that nitrogen b. After a 5 to 10 minute waiting period, check air
source will be vented at 145 psi. valve for leakage as follows:

(1) Apply leak detection fluid, Item 189, Ap-

• To prevent injury to personnel, or dam- pendix D, to valve.
age to equipment, do not inflate tire
above its rated inflation pressure. (2) If bubbles appear, deflate, disassemble,
and correct at point of leakage (PARA
• To prevent injury to personnel, do not 3-4-28).
use a high-pressure nitrogen source, or
an unregulated nitrogen pressure source. c. Install valve cap on valve stem.

1-3-5-1/(1-3-5-2 Blank)
PARA 1-3-6 TM 1-70-23

1-3-6 SERVICE/DRAIN ENGINE.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-3-6.1 Service/Drain Engine 1-3-6-1

INITIAL SETUP References

Tools
• Appendix D
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• SEI 671
• Container, 2-Gallon
Materials/Parts • TM 1-2840-248-23
• Lubricating Oil, Item 205, Appendix D
• Lubricating Oil, Item 208, Appendix D

1-3-6.1 Service/Drain Engine. This allows oil to drain back into oil
tank.
NOTE
• An empty engine will require 7 quarts of
Servicing/draining of both engines is the oil.
same, except as noted.
a. Look at oil level indicator on engine oil tank
1-3-6.1.1. Service. through engine air inlet scoop. If oil level is
NOTE below midpoint of sight glass, add oil in
1-quart quantities until level is at FULL line of
• Helicopter must be level to get accurate indicator.
oil tank readings. When helicopter is
parked on a slope, downslope engine b. Release latch and open engine cowling (Figure
will read higher oil level than actual, 1-3-6-1).
and upslope engine will read lower.
c. Remove cap from oil fill port on inner side of
• Do not check engine oil level until at No. 1 engine, or outer side of No. 2 engine
least 20 minutes after engine shutdown. (Figure 1-3-6-1, Detail A).

1-3-6-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-6

OIL FILL
PORT

LATCH
CAP

SIGHT ENGINE
GLASS COWLING FO0608
SA

FIGURE 1-3-6-1. SERVICE/DRAIN ENGINE

NOTE
CAUTION
• Do not use lubricating oil, Item 206, Ap-
pendix D, in engines. If lubricating oil,
To prevent overboard loss of oil,
Item 206, Appendix D, is inadvertently
properly secure the oil cap after servic-
added to the engines, drain and add the
ing.
correct oil. There is no need to flush the
system. e. To install cap on oil fill port, do this:

• Operation at temperatures below -29°F (1) W i t h l a t c h i n g l e v e r t u r n e d f u l l

(-34°C) will require use of lubricating counterclockwise (toward OPEN), seat
oil Item 208, Appendix D. If oils have cap in tank opening.
been mixed, drain and change oil to (2) T u r n l e v e r f u l l c l o c k w i s e ( t o w a r d
Item 208, Appendix D. CLOSE). Do not press lever now.

• When replacing contaminated oil, or (3) Check cap security by pulling vigorously
when changing oil from one oil upward on lever with thumb and
specification to another, use instructions forefinger. Cap will remain in tank with
in SEI 671 and TM 1-2840-248-23. locks engaged.
(4) Press latching lever and make sure lugs
d. Add lubricating oil, Item 205, Appendix D, or on lever are flush with top of cap.
Item 208, Appendix D, to engine oil tank until
oil level reaches FULL line of indicator. DO f. Make sure area is clean and free of foreign
NOT ADD OIL ABOVE FULL LINE. material.

1-3-6-2
PARA 1-3-6 TM 1-70-23

OIL DRAIN
PLUG
LATCH

A PACKING

FO0607
SA

FIGURE 1-3-6-2. DRAIN ENGINE OIL

g. Close and latch engine cowling (Figure 1-3-6- d. When largest amount of oil has been drained,
1). remove drain plug and allow oil to drain for at
least 10 minutes.
1-3-6.1.2. Drain.
e. Remove packing from oil drain plug (Figure
a. Release latch and open engine cowling (Figure 1-3-6-2, Detail A).
1-3-6-2). f. Install packing on oil drain plug. Install oil
drain plug. Tighten (15° wrench arc) plug as
b. Place 2-gallon container under fuselage at specified in SEI 671 and TM 1-2840-248-23.
drain line exit.
g. Service engine (PARA 1-3-6.1.1).
NOTE h. Remove oil container from under fuselage.

Do not completely loosen and remove i. With qualified pilot at controls, run up engine
oil drain plug, as extra oil may overflow and check for oil leaks.
normal drain area and run overboard.
j. Make sure area is clean and free of foreign
material.
c. Slowly loosen oil drain plug at the 6 o’clock
position on engine main frame and allow oil to k. Close and latch engine cowling (Figure 1-3-6-
drain without running overboard. 2).

1-3-6-3/(1-3-6-4 Blank)
PARA 1-3-7 TM 1-70-23

1-3-7 SERVICE ENGINE STARTER.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-3-7.1 Service Engine Starter 1-3-7-1

INITIAL SETUP • Machinery Towel, Item 211, Appendix D

Tools References
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• Appendix D
Materials/Parts
• SEI 671
• Lubricating Oil, Item 205, Appendix D
• Lubricating Oil, Item 208, Appendix D • TM 1-2840-248-23

1-3-7.1 Service Engine Starter. d. Service as follows:

NOTE NOTE

• Make sure helicopter is on level ground • Operations at temperatures below -40°F

when servicing starter on helicopter. (-40°C) will require use of lubricating
oil, Item 208, Appendix D.
• Do not service starter for at least 60
minutes after shutdown to allow for • Starter can be serviced while installed
cooling. on helicopter or while removed.
a. Release latch and open engine cowling if • When servicing new starter for first
starter is to be serviced on helicopter. time, flush oil cavity with lubricating
oil, Item 205, Appendix D, prior to final
CAUTION servicing.

(1) If starter is to be serviced off helicopter,

If changing from one oil specification to position starter similar to installed posi-
another or when replacing contaminated tion. Rest starter on drain plug using
oil, refer to SEI 671 and TM 1-2840- starter vent as top-dead-center reference
248-23. point.

b. Remove filler cap (Figure 1-3-7-1, Detail A). (2) Fill starter with lubricating oil, Item 205
Discard packing. or Item 208, Appendix D, until oil level is
just above machined step in fill port. DO
c. Place machinery towel, Item 211, Appendix D, NOT OVER FILL STARTER (Figure
under starter to catch any overflow. 1-3-7-1, Detail B).

1-3-7-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-7

(3) Lubricate packing with lubricating oil, e. Make sure area is clean and free of foreign
Item 205 or Item 208, Appendix D. objects.
(4) Install packing on filler cap (Figure 1-3-7-
1, Detail A). f. Close and latch engine cowling.

(5) Install filler cap on starter.

1-3-7-2
PARA 1-3-7 TM 1-70-23

ENGINE
STARTER

T
ON
FR

FILLER CAP

B
PACKING

FLAT MACHINED SURFACE

INSIDE FILL PORT AT
6 O’CLOCK POSITION

FULL

FULL

OIL FILL PORT

FB3365A
SA

FIGURE 1-3-7-1. SERVICE ENGINE STARTER

1-3-7-3/(1-3-7-4 Blank)
PARA 1-3-8 TM 1-70-23

1-3-8 SERVICE HYDRAULIC PUMP MODULES.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-3-8.1 Service Hydraulic Pump 1-3-8-1

Modules

INITIAL SETUP References

Tools
• Appendix D
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• PARA 1-6-16
• Container
Materials/Parts • PARA 7-2-1

• Hydraulic Fluid, Item 154, Appendix D • PARA 7-4-11

• Hydraulic Fluid, Item 155, Appendix D

1-3-8.1 Service Hydraulic Pump Modules. 3/8-inch into overfill zone is acceptable.
When piston moves more than 3/8-inch
NOTE into overfill zone, bleed system until
piston indicates 3/8-inch above full
• Wait at least 1 hour after operation to level.
check reservoirs, so that fluid will be at
outside air temperature.
• Servicing of both left and right
• After operation, hot hydraulic fluid will hydraulic pump modules is the same.
expand, causing piston movement into
overfill zone. Movement of piston up to a. Open main rotor pylon sliding cover.

1-3-8-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-8

Detail A). FILL RESV 1 is left pump

CAUTION module, FILL RESV 2 is right pump
module, FILL RESV 3 is backup pump
module, and FILL RESV 4 is rotor brake
Do not use unseparated gas-pressurized system.
hydraulic service equipment to fill
hydraulic handpump reservoir. This type (4) Place suitable container under drain hose
of equipment pumps air/gas into the at left landing gear shock strut, STA
reservoir. Air/gas trapped in the 308.0.
hydraulic system can cause stiffened/
sluggish flight control movement during (5) While holding selector valve handle
certain maneuvers. down, crank pump handle on handpump
clockwise. Fill desired hydraulic pump
NOTE module until forward end of piston in
reservoir window is past the green area of
• To prevent damage to helicopter during the reservoir decal and approximately
cold weather operations of -29°F 0.25-inch into the blue area of the
(-34°C) or below, hydraulic fluid must reservoir decal (Figure 1-3-8-1, Detail B).
be changed from Item 155, Appendix D Push in and turn bleed valve button, and
to Item 154, Appendix D (PARA 7-4- bleed air from pump module. Release
11). If fluids have been mixed, drain and bleed valve button when air-free fluid
change to hydraulic fluid, Item 154, Ap- shows, and the forward end of piston in
pendix D. reservoir window is at forward end of
green decal on reservoir housing.
• Handpump reservoir holds 1.3 quarts of
fluid. When fluid level is seen at refill (6) Check that reservoirs stay full (forward
mark in reservoir window, 0.3 quart of end of piston at forward end of green de-
fluid is left in reservoir. Add a quart of cal) when fluid is at ambient temperature
fluid to fill handpump. (1 hour after flight).

• Reservoir cover has a can opener to (7) Make sure area remains clean during
puncture fluid cans. procedure.

b. Service hydraulic pump module with hydraulic (8) Position pump handle in either 3 or 9
fluid, Item 155, Appendix D, as follows: o’clock position.

(1) Unscrew handpump reservoir cover and c. Turn on all electrical power (PARA 1-6-16).
pour in hydraulic fluid, Item 155, Ap-
pendix D, until reservoir is full (Figure d. Check that all three RSVR LOW lights are off
1-3-8-1). Make sure you can always see on caution/advisory panel.
fluid in sight gage while servicing, or you
will pump air into pump module’s e. If any caution lights are on and fluid level
reservoir. Keep filling reservoir. window shows full, check fluid quantity switch
(PARA 7-2-1).
(2) Make sure handpump reservoir cover is
clean; then screw cover on tight. f. Turn off all electrical power (PARA 1-6-16).

(3) Turn selector valve handle to desired g. Make sure area is clean and free of foreign
reservoir to be filled (Figure 1-3-8-1, material.

1-3-8-2
PARA 1-3-8 TM 1-70-23

BLEED VALVE
B
BUTTON

HYDRAULIC PUMP
MODULE (RIGHT
MODULE SHOWN)

HANDPUMP
RESERVOIR
COVER

A
O
N

P
E
T
S

FR
ON
SIGHT T
GAGE

HANDPUMP

PUMP HANDLE

SELECTOR
VALVE
FILL RESV 1 HANDLE
(LEFT PUMP MODULE)
B

FRONT NO. 1 NO. 2 AND BACKUP

HYDRAULIC PUMP MODULES
LEVEL INDICATOR

HYDRAULIC FLUID COLOR

SPEC MIL−H
FULL LEVEL CAPACITY 65 CU. IN. @ 70
REFILL LEVEL CAPACITY 35 CU. IN. @ 70 F

FILL RESV 2
(RIGHT PUMP MODULE)

RED GREEN BLUE

(REFILL) (FULL) (EXPANSION)

FILL RESV 4
(ROTOR BRAKE SYSTEM)
FILL RESV 3
(BACKUP PUMP MODULE)

FO0609
SA

FIGURE 1-3-8-1. SERVICE HYDRAULIC PUMP MODULES

1-3-8-3
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-8

correctly before closing main rotor

CAUTION pylon sliding cover. Position pump
handle in either 3 or 9 o’clock position
before closing cover.
Damage to hydraulic handpump handle
will result if handle is not positioned h. Close and latch main rotor pylon sliding cover.

1-3-8-4
PARA 1-3-9 TM 1-70-23

1-3-9 SERVICE/DRAIN APU.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-3-9.1 Service/Drain APU 1-3-9-1

INITIAL SETUP • Lubricating Oil, Item 208, Appendix D

Tools References
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• Appendix D
• Container, 2-Gallon

• Torque Wrench, 30 - 150 in. lbs • PARA 15-4-1

Materials/Parts

• Lockwire, Item 196, Appendix D

• Lubricating Oil, Item 205, Appendix D

1-3-9.1 Service/Drain APU. b. P r e s s d o w n o n fi l l e r c a p , t u r n 1 / 4 - t u r n

counterclockwise, remove from APU gear box
1-3-9.1.1. Service. sump, and check oil level on dipstick (Figure
1-3-9-1, Detail A).

WARNING
CAUTION

Injury to personnel could result from

servicing APU when hot. Allow at least • Lubricating oil Item 205, Appendix D,
one hour cool down time prior to servic- and lubricating oil, Item 208, Appendix
ing. D, shall not be mixed under any condi-
tion. Due to high detergent additives
a. Unlatch and open APU compartment access used in processing lubricating oils any
doors. mixture of oils shall be drained as soon
as possible. If contamination occurs
NOTE refill tank or sump with correct lubricat-
ing oil and then drain (this is now waste
To determine correct oil level, the oil), refill tank or sump with new oil.
helicopter should be on normal three-
point landing gear position on level • Never overfill oil sump. An overfull
ground, and not have been operated for sump will result in oil foaming, low oil
at least 1 hour. pressure, and abnormal gear wear.

1-3-9-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-9

NOTE b. Drain APU as follows:

Operation at temperatures below -29°F
(1) Remove APU (PARA 15-4-1).
(-34°C) will require use of lubricating
oil, Item 208, Appendix D.
(2) Remove magnetic drain plug and packing
c. If required, fill sump with lubricating oil, Item on bottom of APU gear box sump and
205, Appendix D, or Item 208, Appendix D, to drain oil into container. Check for any
proper oil level shown on filler cap/dipstick. presence of debris. If debris is found,
inspect system. Discard packing (Figure
d. Install filler cap. Press down on cap and turn
1-3-9-1, Detail B).
1/4-turn clockwise.
e. Make sure area is clean and free of foreign (3) Install magnetic drain plug and packing.
material. TORQUE DRAIN PLUG TO 45 INCH-
POUNDS. Lockwire, Item 196, Appendix
f. Close and latch APU compartment access
D, drain plug to valve.
doors.

1-3-9.1.2. Drain. (4) Install APU (PARA 15-4-1).

a. Unlatch and open APU compartment access

c. Make sure area is clean and free of foreign
doors.
material.
NOTE
d. Close and secure APU compartment access
Maximum capacity of lubricating oil for
doors.
APU is 3 quarts. Use 2-gallon container
to catch oil.

1-3-9-2
PARA 1-3-9 TM 1-70-23

FILLER
CAP / DIPSTICK

B
B
A
APU GEAR
BOX SUMP
PACKING
MAGNETIC
DRAIN PLUG
(TORQUE 45
IN. LBS)

FN1994A
SA

FIGURE 1-3-9-1. SERVICE/DRAIN APU

1-3-9-3/(1-3-9-4 Blank)
PARA 1-3-10 TM 1-70-23

1-3-10 SERVICE APU ACCUMULATOR.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-3-10.1 Service APU Accumulator 1-3-10-1

INITIAL SETUP • Nitrogen, Item 221, Appendix D

Tools References

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit • Appendix D

• Nitrogen Servicing Unit, 901002 • PARA 1-3-8

• Torque Wrench, 30 - 150 in. lbs • PARA 1-3-11

Materials/Parts • PARA 1-6-15

• Hydraulic Fluid, Item 155, Appendix D • PARA 1-6-16

• Leak Detection Fluid, Item 189, Appendix D • PARA 2-4-69

1-3-10.1 Service APU Accumulator. a. Observe pressure gage (Figure 1-3-10-1, Detail
A). If pressure gage does not read between
1-3-10.1.1. Check Precharge. 2700 - 3100 psig, use APU handpump to
slowly pump accumulator charge to read ap-
proximately 2900 psi (Figure 1-3-10-1, Detail
WARNING C). Allow five minutes for pressure to stabilize.

NOTE
To avoid injury to personnel, make sure
pump handle is firmly locked into In Graph A, Temperature/Tape Indicator
handle receptacle before operating hand- Chart (Figure 1-3-10-2), the upper and
pump. lower dotted lines indicate the maximum
and minimum value on the tape indica-
NOTE tor for a given ambient temperature. The
solid line indicates the ideal value on the
• APU handpump handle is in the left tape indicator for a given ambient tem-
stowage compartment behind the rear perature.
crew compartment.
b. If tape indicator reads above 86% and gage
• If helicopter is equipped with winteriza- reads below 2700 psig at an ambient tempera-
tion kit on APU, refer to PARA 1-3-11 ture of 70°F (21°C), stop pumping. Precharge
for additional servicing information. is too low and must be serviced. Use Graph A,

1-3-10-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-10

Temperature/Tape Indicator Chart (Figure 1-3- NOTE

10-2) for correct indicator reading at ambient
temperature other than 70°F (21°C). The APU accumulator nitrogen charge
must be released prior to servicing the
c. With charge at 2900 psig, compare actual tape APU accumulator with hydraulic fluid.
reading with Graph A. If actual reading does
not agree with Graph A, accumulator gas pre- f. Loosen locknut on servicing valve and slowly
charge is incorrect and must be serviced. release nitrogen charge.

1-3-10.1.2. Service (Previously Installed Ac-

cumulator). WARNING

CAUTION To avoid damage to equipment or injury

to personnel, do not service accumulator
with free air or oxygen.
Do not use unseparated gas-pressurized
hydraulic service equipment to fill g. Connect nitrogen bottle, Item 221, Appendix
hydraulic handpump reservoir. This type D, to servicing valve.
of equipment pumps air/gas into the
reservoir. Air/gas trapped in the h. Fully open locknut on nitrogen servicing valve.
hydraulic system can cause stiffened/
sluggish flight control movement during i. Slowly charge accumulator with nitrogen to
certain maneuvers. 1000 psi.

a. Open main rotor pylon sliding cover. j. Manually open APU start valve, to make sure
accumulator floating piston is bottomed.
b. Remove soundproofing panels from rear cabin Indicator to show 0% (Figure 1-3-10-1, Detail
ceiling (PARA 2-4-69). A and Detail B).

NOTE
WARNING • Floating piston is considered bottomed
when APU will no longer motor with
Make sure APU is clear when opening start valve open and 1000 psi nitrogen
and closing lever on start valve solenoid. applied.

NOTE • The following 1450 psi pressure and

tape reading is based on a 70°F (21°C)
Accumulator is fully discharged when temperature day. Use the Graph B
tape reading on indicator reads 0%. Temperature/Precharge Pressure Chart
(Figure 1-3-10-2) for correct pressure.
c. Manually open lever on start valve solenoid to
fully discharge accumulator (Figure 1-3-10-1, k. Add nitrogen to bring precharge to 1450 psi.
Detail B). Tighten locknut to close servicing valve
(Figure 1-3-10-1, Detail A).
d. Check backup pump reservoir for proper
service. Service backup pump module reservoir l. Close nitrogen bottle valve and disconnect
as required (PARA 1-3-8). nitrogen bottle from servicing valve.

e. Remove cap from servicing valve on pressure m. TORQUE LOCKNUT TO 50 - 60 INCH-

gage (Figure 1-3-10-1, Detail A). POUNDS.

1-3-10-2
PARA 1-3-10 TM 1-70-23

SOLENOID
A
ACTUATED
POSITION

MANUAL
LEVER

O
N

P
E
T
S
NORMAL POSITION C
SELECTOR
FILL VALVE
RESV 1 HANDLE
C
HANDPUMP

FILL
RESV 2 D
PUMP HANDLE

FILL FILL
RESV 4 RESV 3
(SEE NOTE)

T
ON
FR ACCUMULATOR

LINE TO
NITROGEN
BOTTLE
START
VALVE

PRESSURE
GAGE

SERVICING
VALVE/
LOCKNUT
(TORQUE 50−60
IN. LBS)
CAP

B
NOTE
RTR BRAKE FB2257A
INDICATOR SA

FIGURE 1-3-10-1. SERVICE APU ACCUMULATOR

1-3-10-3
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-10

100
TAPE INDICATOR READING (%) 95
90
85

PRECHARGE PRESSURE (PSIG)

80
75 1700
70 1600
65 1500
60 1400
55 1300
50 1200
45 1100
−25 0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 −25 0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175

AMBIENT TEMPERATURE ( F) AMBIENT TEMPERATURE ( F)

GRAPH A GRAPH B

TEMPERATURE/TAPE INDICATOR CHART TEMPERATURE/PRECHARGE PRESSURE CHART

AK1937A
SA

FIGURE 1-3-10-2. APU ACCUMULATOR SERVICING CHARTS

n. Check servicing valve for leaks with leak on the accumulator nitrogen gage or operate
detection fluid, Item 189, Appendix D. the backup hydraulic system pump using
external electrical power (PARA 1-6-16) until
o. Install valve cap on servicing valve. backup pump automatically shuts off. Indicator
tape reading to be between 63 and 86. Use
Graph A (Figure 1-3-10-2) for correct indicator
WARNING reading at ambient temperature other than 70°F
(21°C).

To avoid injury to personnel, make sure q. Check backup pump reservoir for proper
pump handle is firmly locked into service. Service backup pump module reservoir
handle receptacle before operating hand- as required (PARA 1-3-8).
pump.
r. Make sure area is clean and free of foreign
NOTE
material.
APU handpump handle is in the left
stowage compartment behind the rear s. Install soundproofing panels in rear cabin ceil-
crew compartment. ing (PARA 2-4-69).

p. Hydraulically charge accumulator using APU t. Make sure area is clean and free of foreign
handpump to approximately 2900 psi reading material.

1-3-10-4
PARA 1-3-10 TM 1-70-23

(2) Loosen locknut on servicing valve and

CAUTION slowly release nitrogen charge.

(3) Connect external hydraulic power to

Damage to hydraulic hand pump handle backup hydraulic system (PARA 1-6-15).
will result if handle is not positioned
correctly before closing main rotor (4) With the servicing valve locknut loose,
pylon sliding cover. Position pump slowly fill accumulator with hydraulic
handle in either 3 or 9 o’clock position fluid until a tape reading of 100% is ob-
before closing cover. tained.

u. Close and latch main rotor pylon sliding cover. (5) Reduce hydraulic supply pressure to zero.

1-3-10.1.3. Service (Newly Installed Ac- (6) Connect nitrogen bottle, Item 221, Ap-
cumulator). pendix D, to servicing valve.

(7) Fully open locknut on servicing valve.

CAUTION
(8) Slowly charge accumulator with nitrogen
to 1000 psi.
Do not use unseparated gas-pressurized
hydraulic service equipment to fill (9) Manually open APU start valve. Indicator
hydraulic handpump reservoir. This type to show 0% (Figure 1-3-10-1, Detail A
of equipment pumps air/gas into the and Detail B).
reservoir. Air/gas trapped in the
hydraulic system can cause stiffened/ NOTE
sluggish flight control movement during
certain maneuvers. • Floating piston is considered bottomed
when APU will no longer motor with
NOTE start valve open and 1000 psi nitrogen
applied.
Air must be purged from a new ac-
cumulator prior to servicing. The use of • The following 1450 psi pressure and
external hydraulic power is recom- tape reading is based on a 70°F (21°C)
mended as the fluid capacity of the ac- temperature day. Use the Graph B
cumulator exceeds the fluid available in Temperature/Precharge Pressure Chart
the backup pump reservoir. If external (Figure 1-3-10-2) for correct pressure.
hydraulic power is not available backup
pump may be used but care must be (10) Add nitrogen to bring precharge to 1450
taken to avoid depleting backup pump psi. Tighten locknut to close servicing
reservoir. valve (Figure 1-3-10-1, Detail A).

a. Open main rotor pylon sliding cover. (11) Close nitrogen bottle valve and discon-
nect nitrogen bottle from servicing valve.
b. Remove soundproofing panels from rear cabin
ceiling (PARA 2-4-69). (12) TORQUE LOCKNUT TO 50 - 60 INCH-
POUNDS.
c. Service accumulator with external hydraulic
power as follows: (13) Check servicing valve for leaks with leak
detection fluid, Item 189, Appendix D.
(1) Remove cap from servicing valve on pres-
sure gage (Figure 1-3-10-1, Detail A). (14) Install valve cap on servicing valve.

1-3-10-5
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-10

NOTE
WARNING
Backup pump reservoir will need to be
serviced per PARA 1-3-8 multiple times
To avoid injury to personnel, make sure before a tape reading of 100% is ob-
pump handle is firmly locked into tained due to the limited capacity of the
handle receptacle before operating hand- backup pump reservoir.
pump.
(4) With the nitrogen locknut loose and while
NOTE watching the backup pump reservoir, run
the backup pump intermittently to slowly
APU handpump handle is in the left
fill the hydraulic accumulator. When
stowage compartment behind the rear
backup pump reservoir is depleted, turn
crew compartment.
backup pump off and service reservoir
(15) Hydraulically charge accumulator using (PARA 1-3-8).
external hydraulic power or APU hand-
pump to approximately 2900 psi reading (5) Repeat step d. (4) until a tape reading of
on the accumulator nitrogen gage. Indica- 100% is obtained.
tor tape reading to be between 63 and 86.
(6) Turn off backup pump.
Use Graph A (Figure 1-3-10-2) for correct
indicator reading at ambient temperature
other than 70°F (21°C).
WARNING
(16) Manually open and close lever on start
valve solenoid (Figure 1-3-10-1, Detail
B). To avoid damage to equipment or injury
to personnel, do not service accumulator
(17) Repeat step c. (15). with free air or oxygen.

(18) Disconnect external hydraulic power to (7) Connect nitrogen bottle, Item 221, Ap-
backup hydraulic system (PARA 1-6-15). pendix D, to servicing valve.
(19) Check backup pump reservoir for proper (8) Fully open locknut on servicing valve.
service. Service backup pump module
reservoir as required (PARA 1-3-8). (9) Slowly charge accumulator with nitrogen
to 1000 psi.
d. Service accumulator with backup pump as
follows:

(1) Check backup pump reservoir for proper WARNING

service. Service backup pump module
reservoir as required (PARA 1-3-8).
Make sure APU is clear when opening
(2) Remove cap from servicing valve on pres- and closing lever on start valve solenoid.
sure gage (Figure 1-3-10-1, Detail A).
(10) Manually open APU start valve. Indicator
(3) Loosen locknut on servicing valve and to show 0% (Figure 1-3-10-1, Detail A
slowly release nitrogen charge. and Detail B).

1-3-10-6
PARA 1-3-10 TM 1-70-23

NOTE (16) Hydraulically charge accumulator by

operating the backup hydraulic system
• Floating piston is considered bottomed pump using external electrical power
when APU will no longer motor with (PARA 1-6-16). Shut down backup pump
start valve open and 1000 psi nitrogen by pulling BACKUP PUMP PWR circuit
applied. breaker prior to backup pump reservoir
depletion. Indicator tape reading to be
• The following 1450 psi pressure and between 63 and 86. Use Graph A (Figure
tape reading is based on a 70°F (21°C) 1-3-10-2) for correct indicator reading at
temperature day. Use the Graph B ambient temperature other than 70°F
Temperature/Precharge Pressure Chart (21°C).
(Figure 1-3-10-2) for correct pressure.
(17) Manually open and close lever on start
(11) Add nitrogen to bring precharge to 1450 valve solenoid (Figure 1-3-10-1, Detail
psi. Tighten locknut to close servicing B).
valve (Figure 1-3-10-1, Detail A).
(18) Bleed air from backup pump reservoir and
(12) Close nitrogen bottle valve and discon-
refill reservoir if needed (PARA 1-3-8).
nect nitrogen bottle from servicing valve.

(13) TORQUE LOCKNUT TO 50 - 60 INCH- (19) Repeat step d. (16).

POUNDS.
(20) Check backup pump reservoir for proper
(14) Check servicing valve for leaks with leak service. Service backup pump module
detection fluid, Item 189, Appendix D. reservoir as required (PARA 1-3-8).

(15) Install valve cap on servicing valve. e. Make sure area is clean and free of foreign
material.
NOTE
f. Install soundproofing panels in rear cabin ceil-
• The reservoir capacity of a single ac-
ing (PARA 2-4-69).
cumulator exceeds the reservoir capacity
of the backup pump. Once started, the
g. Make sure area is clean and free of foreign
backup pump will run for 90 seconds
material.
before shutting off. The backup pump
reservoir, however, will be empty in less
than 90 seconds. For this reason, it will
CAUTION
be required to pull the backup pump
power circuit breaker before the
reservoir pump runs dry.
Damage to hydraulic hand pump handle
• Backup pump power circuit breaker is will result if handle is not positioned
located on No. 1 DC PRI BUS circuit correctly before closing main rotor
breaker panel. pylon sliding cover. Position pump
handle in either 3 or 9 o’clock position
• It may be necessary to refill backup before closing cover.
pump reservoir 2 to 3 times before ac-
cumulator is adequately charged. h. Close and latch main rotor pylon sliding cover.

1-3-10-7/(1-3-10-8 Blank)
PARA 1-3-11 TM 1-70-23

1-3-11 SERVICE WINTERIZATION KIT APU ACCUMULATOR.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-3-11.1 Service Winterization Kit 1-3-11-1

APU Accumulator

INITIAL SETUP • Leak Detection Fluid, Item 189, Appendix D

Tools • Nitrogen, Item 221, Appendix D

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
References
• Nitrogen Servicing Unit, 901002

• Torque Wrench, 30 - 150 in. lbs • Appendix D

Materials/Parts • PARA 1-3-8

• Hydraulic Fluid, Item 154, Appendix D
• PARA 7-4-11
• Hydraulic Fluid, Item 155, Appendix D

1-3-11.1 Service Winterization Kit APU Ac- 3100 psig, use APU handpump to slowly pump
cumulator. charge to 2900 psig (Figure 1-3-11-2, Sheet 2,
Detail C). Allow several minutes for pressure
1-3-11.1.1. Check Precharge. to stabilize.
a. Open main rotor pylon sliding cover. NOTE

In Graph A, Temperature/Tape Indicator

WARNING Chart (Figure 1-3-11-1), the upper and
lower dotted lines indicate the maximum
To avoid injury to personnel, before and minimum value on the tape indica-
operating handpump, make sure pump tor for a given ambient temperature. The
handle is firmly locked into receptacle. solid line indicates the ideal value on the
tape indicator for a given ambient tem-
NOTE perture.
APU handpump handle is in the left
stowage compartment behind the rear c. If tape indicators (added together) reach 180%
crew compartment. before pressure gage reaches 2700 psig at
ambient temperature of 70°F (21°C), stop
b. Observe pressure gage (Figure 1-3-11-2, Sheet pumping. Precharge is too low and must be
1, Detail A). If pressure does not read 2700 - serviced. Use Graph A (Figure 1-3-11-1) for

1-3-11-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-11

correct indicator reading at ambient tempera- d. Check backup pump reservoir for proper
ture other than 70°F (21°C). service. Service backup pump module reservoir
as required (PARA 1-3-8).
d. With charge at 2900 psig, compare actual tape
readings (added together) with Graph A. If e. Remove cap from servicing valve on pressure
readings do not agree with Graph A, precharge gage (Figure 1-3-11-2, Sheet 1, Detail A).
is incorrect and must be serviced.
NOTE
1-3-11.1.2. Service (Previously Installed
Winterization Kit). The APU accumulator nitrogen charge
must be released prior to servicing the
APU accumulators with hydraulic fluid.
CAUTION
f. Loosen locknut on servicing valve and slowly
release nitrogen charge.
To prevent damage to helicopter during
cold weather operations of -29°F
(-34°C) or below, hydraulic fluid must
be changed from Item 155, Appendix D WARNING
to Item 154, Appendix D (PARA 7-4-
11). To avoid damage to equipment or injury
to personnel, do not service accumula-
CAUTION tors with free air or oxygen.

g. Connect nitrogen bottle, Item 221, Appendix

Do not use unseparated gas-pressurized D, to servicing valve.
hydraulic service equipment to fill
hydraulic handpump reservoir. This type h. Fully open locknut on nitrogen servicing valve.
of equipment pumps air/gas into the
i. Slowly charge accumulators with nitrogen to
reservoir. Air/gas trapped in the
1000 psi.
hydraulic system can cause stiffened/
sluggish flight control movement during j. Manually open APU start valve, to make sure
certain maneuvers. accumulator floating pistons are bottomed.
a. Open main rotor pylon sliding cover. Indicators to show 0% (Figure 1-3-11-2, Sheet
1, Detail A and Sheet 2, Detail B).
b. Remove soundproofing panels from rear cabin
ceiling (PARA 2-4-69). NOTE

• Floating pistons are considered bot-

WARNING tomed when APU will no longer motor
with start valve open and 1000 psi
nitrogen applied.
Make sure APU is clear when opening
and closing lever on start valve solenoid. • The following 1450 psi pressure and
tape reading is based on a 70°F (21°C)
NOTE
temperature day. Use the Graph B
Accumulators are fully discharged when Temperature/Precharge Pressure Chart
tape reading on indicator reads 0%. (Figure 1-3-11-1) for correct pressure.

c. Manually open lever on start valve solenoid to k. Add nitrogen to bring precharge to 1450 psi.
fully discharge accumulators (Figure 1-3-11-2, Tighten locknut to close servicing valve
Sheet 2, Detail B). (Figure 1-3-11-2, Sheet 1, Detail A).

1-3-11-2
PARA 1-3-11 TM 1-70-23

200

195
INDICATOR READINGS (%) ADDED TOGETHER

190

185

180

PRECHARGE PRESSURE (PSGI)

175
1700
170
1600
165
1500
160
1400
155
1300
150
1200
145
1100
140
1000
135
−75 −50 −25 0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175
130
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE ( 0 F)
125
GRAPH B
120

TEMPERATURE / PRECHARGE PRESSURE

−75 −50 −25 0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE ( 0 F)
GRAPH A

TEMPERATURE / TAPE INDICATOR CHART

AA9446A
SA

FIGURE 1-3-11-1. APU WINTERIZATION KIT SERVICING CHARTS

1-3-11-3
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-11

l. Close nitrogen bottle valve and disconnect

nitrogen bottle from servicing valve. CAUTION

m. TORQUE LOCKNUT TO 50 - 60 INCH-

POUNDS. Damage to hydraulic hand pump handle
will result if handle is not positioned
n. Check servicing valve for leaks with leak correctly before closing main rotor
detection fluid, Item 189, Appendix D. pylon sliding cover. Position pump
handle in either 3 or 9 o’clock position
before closing cover.
o. Install valve cap on servicing valve.
u. Close and latch main rotor pylon sliding cover.

WARNING 1-3-11.1.3. Service (Newly Installed

Winterization Kit).

To avoid injury to personnel, make sure

pump handle is firmly locked into CAUTION
handle receptacle before operating hand-
pump.
To prevent damage to helicopter during
cold weather operations of -29°F
NOTE
(-34°C) or below, hydraulic fluid must
be changed from Item 155, Appendix D
APU handpump handle is in the left
to Item 154, Appendix D (PARA 7-4-
stowage compartment behind the rear
11).
crew compartment.

p. Hydraulically charge accumulator using APU CAUTION

handpump to approximately 2900 psi reading
on the accumulator nitrogen gage or operate
the backup hydraulic system pump using Do not use unseparated gas-pressurized
external electrical power (PARA 1-6-16) until hydraulic service equipment to fill
b a c k u p p u m p a u t o m a t i c a l l y s h u t s o ff . hydraulic handpump reservoir. This type
Combined indicator tape readings to be of equipment pumps air/gas into the
between 130 and 180. Use Graph A (Figure reservoir. Air/gas trapped in the
1-3-11-1) for correct indicator reading at ambi- hydraulic system can cause stiffened/
ent temperature other than 70°F (21°C). sluggish flight control movement during
certain maneuvers.
q. Check backup pump reservoir for proper
NOTE
service. Service backup pump module reservoir
as required (PARA 1-3-8). Air must be purged from a new ac-
cumulator prior to servicing. The use of
r. Make sure area is clean and free of foreign external hydraulic power is recom-
material. mended as the fluid capacity of the ac-
cumulators exceeds the fluid available in
s. Install soundproofing panels in rear cabin ceil- the backup pump reservoir. If external
ing (PARA 2-4-69). hydraulic power is not available backup
pump may be used but care must be
t. Make sure area is clean and free of foreign taken to avoid depleting backup pump
material. reservoir.

1-3-11-4
PARA 1-3-11 TM 1-70-23

SERVICING VALVE /
LOCKNUT
(TORQUE 50−60
IN. LBS)

PRESSURE
GAGE

CAP

ACCUMULATOR

START
B VALVE
INDICATOR

T
ON
FR

SECOND
ACCUMULATOR

FO0611_1A
SA

FIGURE 1-3-11-2. SERVICE WINTERIZATION KIT APU ACCUMULATOR (SHEET 1 OF 2)

1-3-11-5
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-11

C
B D
D SELECTOR VALVE
SOLENOID HANDLE
FILL
ACTUATED RESV 1
POSITION

O
N

P
E
T
S
FILL
RESV 2
MANUAL
LEVER

NORMAL POSITION HANDPUMP FILL

FILL RESV 3
RESV 4
ROTOR BRAKE

PUMP HANDLE
FN1995_2
SA

FIGURE 1-3-11-2. SERVICE WINTERIZATION KIT APU ACCUMULATOR (SHEET 2 OF 2)

a. Open main rotor pylon sliding cover. (7) Fully open locknut on servicing valve.

b. Remove soundproofing panels from rear cabin (8) Slowly charge accumulators with nitrogen
ceiling (PARA 2-4-69). to 1000 psi.

c. Service accumulators with external hydraulic (9) Manually open APU start valve. Indica-
power as follows: tors to show 0% (Figure 1-3-11-2, Sheet
1, Detail A and Sheet 2, Detail B).
(1) Remove cap from servicing valve on pres-
sure gage (Figure 1-3-11-2, Sheet 1, NOTE
Detail A).
• Floating pistons are considered bot-
(2) Loosen locknut on servicing valve and tomed when APU will no longer motor
slowly release nitrogen charge. with start valve open and 1000 psi
nitrogen applied.
(3) Connect external hydraulic power to
backup hydraulic system (PARA 1-6-15). • The following 1450 psi pressure and
tape reading is based on a 70°F (21°C)
(4) With the servicing valve locknut loose, temperature day. Use the Graph B
slowly fill accumulators until both ac- Temperature/Precharge Pressure Chart
cumulator tapes read 100%. (Figure 1-3-11-1) for correct pressure.

(5) Reduce hydraulic supply pressure to zero. (10) Add nitrogen to bring precharge to 1450
psi. Tighten locknut to close servicing
(6) Connect nitrogen bottle, Item 221, Ap- valve (Figure 1-3-11-2, Sheet 1, Detail
pendix D, to servicing valve. A).

1-3-11-6
PARA 1-3-11 TM 1-70-23

(11) Close nitrogen bottle valve and discon- (1) Check backup pump reservoir for proper
nect nitrogen bottle from servicing valve. service. Service backup pump module
reservoir as required (PARA 1-3-8).
(12) TORQUE LOCKNUT TO 50 - 60 INCH-
POUNDS. (2) Remove cap from servicing valve on pres-
sure gage (Figure 1-3-11-2, Sheet 1,
(13) Check servicing valve for leaks with leak Detail A).
detection fluid, Item 189, Appendix D.
(3) Loosen locknut on servicing valve and
(14) Install valve cap on servicing valve.
slowly release nitrogen charge.

NOTE
WARNING
Backup pump reservoir will need to be
To avoid injury to personnel, make sure serviced per PARA 1-3-8 multiple times
pump handle is firmly locked into before a tape reading of 100% is ob-
handle receptacle before operating hand- tained on both accumulators, due to the
pump. limited capacity of the backup pump
reservoir.
NOTE
(4) With the nitrogen locknut loose and while
APU handpump handle is in the left watching the backup pump reservoir, run
stowage compartment behind the rear the backup pump intermittently to slowly
crew compartment. fill the hydraulic accumulators. When
backup pump reservoir is depleted, turn
(15) Hydraulically charge accumulators using backup pump off and service reservoir
external hydraulic power or APU hand- (PARA 1-3-8).
pump to approximately 2900 psi reading
on the accumulator nitrogen gage.
(5) Repeat step d. (4) until tape readings of
Combined indicator tape readings to be
100% are obtained on both accumulators.
between 130 and 180. Use Graph A
(Figure 1-3-11-1) for correct indicator
reading at ambient temperature other than (6) Turn off backup pump.
70°F (21°C).

(16) Manually open and close lever on start WARNING

valve solenoid (Figure 1-3-11-2, Sheet 2,
Detail B).
To avoid damage to equipment or injury
(17) Repeat step c. (15). to personnel, do not service accumula-
tors with free air or oxygen.
(18) Disconnect external hydraulic power to
backup hydraulic system (PARA 1-6-15).
(7) Connect nitrogen bottle, Item 221, Ap-
(19) Check backup pump reservoir for proper pendix D, to servicing valve.
service. Service backup pump module
reservoir as required (PARA 1-3-8). (8) Fully open locknut on servicing valve.

d. Service accumulators with backup pump as (9) Slowly charge accumulators with nitrogen
follows: to 1000 psi.

1-3-11-7
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-11

before shutting off. The backup pump

WARNING reservoir, however, will be empty in less
than 90 seconds. For this reason, it will
be required to pull the backup pump
Make sure APU is clear when opening power circuit breaker before the
and closing lever on start valve solenoid. reservoir pump runs dry.

(10) Manually open APU start valve. Indica- • Backup pump power circuit breaker is
tors to show 0% (Figure 1-3-11-2, Sheet located on No. 1 DC PRI BUS circuit
1, Detail A and Sheet 2, Detail B). breaker panel.

NOTE • It may be necessary to refill backup

pump reservoir 2 to 3 times before ac-
• Floating pistons are considered bot- cumulator is adequately charged.
tomed when APU will no longer motor
(16) Hydraulically charge accumulators by
with start valve open and 1000 psi
operating the backup hydraulic system
nitrogen applied.
pump using external electrical power
(PARA 1-6-16). Shut down backup pump
• The following 1450 psi pressure and
by pulling BACKUP PUMP PWR circuit
tape reading is based on a 70°F (21°C)
breaker prior to backup pump reservoir
temperature day. Use the Graph B
depletion. Combined indicator tape read-
Temperature/Precharge Pressure Chart
ings to be 160. Use Graph A (Figure 1-3-
(Figure 1-3-11-1) for correct pressure.
11-1) for correct indicator reading at
(11) Add nitrogen to bring precharge to 1450 ambient temperature other than 70°F
psi. Tighten locknut to close servicing (21°C).
valve (Figure 1-3-11-2, Sheet 1, Detail (17) Manually open and close lever on start
A). valve solenoid (Figure 1-3-11-2, Sheet 2,
Detail B).
(12) Close nitrogen bottle valve and discon-
nect nitrogen bottle from servicing valve. (18) Bleed air from backup pump reservoir and
refill reservoir if needed.
(13) TORQUE LOCKNUT TO 50 - 60 INCH-
POUNDS. (19) Repeat step d. (16).

(14) Check servicing valve for leaks with leak (20) Check backup pump reservoir for proper
detection fluid, Item 189, Appendix D. service. Service backup pump module
reservoir as required (PARA 1-3-8).
(15) Install valve cap on servicing valve.
e. Make sure area is clean and free of foreign
material.
NOTE
f. Install soundproofing panels in rear cabin ceil-
• The reservoir capacity of a single ac- ing (PARA 2-4-69).
cumulator exceeds the reservoir capacity
of the backup pump. Once started, the g. Make sure area is clean and free of foreign
backup pump will run for 180 seconds material.

1-3-11-8
PARA 1-3-11 TM 1-70-23

correctly before closing main rotor

CAUTION pylon sliding cover. Position pump
handle in either 3 or 9 o’clock position
before closing cover.
Damage to hydraulic hand pump handle
will result if handle is not positioned h. Close and latch main rotor pylon sliding cover.

1-3-11-9/(1-3-11-10 Blank)
PARA 1-3-12 TM 1-70-23

1-3-12 SERVICE/DRAIN MAIN TRANSMISSION.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE PAGE

1-3-12.1 Service/Drain Main 1-3-12-2 1-3-12.2 Flush Main Transmission/ 1-3-12-3

Transmission Change Oil Specification

INITIAL SETUP • Lubricating Oil, Item 206, Appendix D

Tools • Lubricating Oil, Item 208, Appendix D

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
References
• Container, 10-Gallon

• Drain Line, D-730-L • Appendix D

Materials/Parts • PARA 2-4-70

• Lockwire, Item 197, Appendix D

• Lubricating Oil, Item 205, Appendix D

1-3-12-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-12

1-3-12.1 Service/Drain Main Transmission. oils have been mixed, or another type of
oil is present, drain and refill with
1-3-12.1.1. Service. lubricating oil, Item 208, Appendix D.

NOTE b. If necessary to add oil, hinge open filler tube

cap and fill gear box with lubricating oil, Item
• Dipstick, 70351-08164-103, is 205, Appendix D, Item 206, Appendix D, or
calibrated for checking cold oil levels. Item 208, Appendix D.
Wait at least 2 hours after shutdown to
check oil. If oil level must be checked c. Make sure area is clean and free of foreign
when hot (immediately to 1/2 hour after material.
shutdown), oil level will read about 1/2
inch low (halfway between full and add d. Install oil level gage (dipstick).
mark or 1/2 inch below add mark).
1-3-12.1.2. Drain.
• Dipstick, 70351-08164-104, is
a. Remove drain lines and main transmission drip
calibrated for checking cold or hot oil
pan (PARA 2-4-70), if required, or open access
levels. Use appropriate scale when
panel.
checking oil level. Read hot side of dip-
stick when checking hot oil (im- b. Remove magnetic drain plug and packing from
mediately to 1/2 hour after shutdown), valve body (Figure 1-3-12-2). Discard packing.
or cold side of dipstick when checking
cold oil (at least 2 hours after c. Place end of drain line in empty 10-gallon
shutdown). container. Insert other end in drain port on
main transmission sump. Turn fitting on drain
a. Remove oil level gage (dipstick) and check for line clockwise and drain oil into container.
proper oil level (Figure 1-3-12-1, Detail A).
d. When oil stops flowing, turn fitting on drain
NOTE line counterclockwise, and remove from drain
port.
• Oil capacity of main transmission is
about 7 gallons. e. If valve body is damaged, perform the
following:
• Helicopter attitude should be taken into
consideration when reading dipstick. (1) R e m o v e v a l v e b o d y b y t u r n i n g
counterclockwise and pulling out.
• Before adding oil determine whether
main transmission contains lubricating (2) Install new valve body, with new packing,
oil, Item 205, Appendix D, Item 206, by pushing in and turning clockwise.
Appendix D, or Item 208, Appendix D. (3) Using lockwire, Item 197, Appendix D,
It is preferred to add the same type oil lockwire valve body to main transmission
that is in the main transmission. For sump.
normal operation, if oils are mixed, it is
not necessary to drain main transmission f. Lubricate packing with same oil main trans-
and refill with one type of oil. NO MIX- mission is to be serviced with. Install packing
ING IS ALLOWED FOR COLD and magnetic drain plug in drain port on trans-
WEATHER OPERATION. mission. Lockwire, Item 197, Appendix D,
plug to drain port.
• Operation at temperature below -29°F
(-34°C) will require use of lubricating g. Make sure area is clean and free of foreign
oil, Item 208, Appendix D. If lubricating material.

1-3-12-2
PARA 1-3-12 TM 1-70-23

OIL LEVEL
GAGE

ADD
ADD

FULL HOT
A

FULL COLD
A

COLD SIDE HOT SIDE

NOTE
OIL FILLER 70351−08164−104
CAP DIPSTICK ONLY

AA1446_1
SA

FIGURE 1-3-12-1. SERVICE MAIN TRANSMISSION

h. Install drain lines and main transmission drip pendix D), and is desirable for all oil
pan (PARA 2-4-70), if required, or close access changes.
panel.
• There is no requirement to flush the
1-3-12.2 Flush Main Transmission/Change main transmission when changing from
Oil Specification. lubricating oil, Item 205, Appendix D,
to Item 206, Appendix D.
NOTE
a. Run main transmission until oil reaches normal
• Operation at temperature below -29°F operating temperature.
(-34°C) will require use of lubricating b. Drain oil while still hot (PARA 1-3-12.1.2).
oil, Item 208, Appendix D. If lubricating
oils have been mixed, or another type of c. Service main transmission (PARA 1-3-12.1.1).
oil is present, drain and refill with
lubricating oil, Item 208, Appendix D. d. Run main transmission again until oil reaches
normal operating temperature.
• This procedure is essential when chang- e. Drain oil while still hot (PARA 1-3-12.1.2).
ing from one base oil to another (Item
206, Appendix D, to Item 208, Ap- f. Service main transmission (PARA 1-3-12.1.1).

1-3-12-3
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-12

VALVE
BODY

PACKING

MAGNETIC
DRAIN PLUG

PACKING
DRAIN TUBE
DRAIN
MAIN TRANSMISSION
PORT
SUMP FR
ON
T

LOOKING UP
FT2601
SA

FIGURE 1-3-12-2. DRAIN MAIN TRANSMISSION

1-3-12-4
PARA 1-3-13 TM 1-70-23

1-3-13 SERVICE/DRAIN INTERMEDIATE GEAR BOX.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-3-13.1 Service/Drain Intermedi- 1-3-13-1

ate Gear Box

INITIAL SETUP • Lubricating Oil, Item 206, Appendix D

Tools • Lubricating Oil, Item 208, Appendix D

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• Machinery Towel, Item 211, Appendix D
• Beaker, 2000 ml
References
• Container, 2-Quart

• Container, 2-Gallon • Appendix D

• Drain Line, H538A-3 • PARA 2-4-139

• Funnel
• PARA 6-4-31
Materials/Parts
• PARA 6-4-34
• Dry-Cleaning Solvent, Item 124, Appendix D
• Lubricating Oil, Item 205, Appendix D • PARA 6-4-37

1-3-13.1 Service/Drain Intermediate Gear bull’s-eye no action is required (Figure 1-3-13-

Box. 1, Detail A).

1-3-13.1.1. Service. b. If oil level is low, service intermediate gear

box per step g.
NOTE
c. If oil level cannot be determined, drain gear
• Intermediate gear box sight plug will not box into 2000 ml beaker (PARA 1-3-13.1.2).
give correct reading with pylon folded.
d. If oil drained from intermediate gear box is
• Visual oil level check will be performed 1200 ml (2.57 pints) or more, do this:
with the inspector at eye level with the
intermediate gear box sight plug. (1) Remove and inspect intermediate gear
box sight plug (PARA 6-4-34).
a. If sight plug is clean and oil level is to top of
bull’s-eye, lightly shake pylon to make sure ac- (2) Clean intermediate gear box sight plug us-
curate oil level. If oil level remains at top of ing machinery towel, Item 211, Appendix

1-3-13-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-13

T
ON
FR B

OIL
FILLER
CAP

INTERMEDIATE
GEAR BOX
SIGHT PLUG

INTERMEDIATE
GEAR BOX

T
ON
FR

SELF−CLOSING
VALVE

FO0613
SA

FIGURE 1-3-13-1. SERVICE/DRAIN INTERMEDIATE GEAR BOX

1-3-13-2
PARA 1-3-13 TM 1-70-23

D, dampened with dry-cleaning solvent,

Item 124, Appendix D. WARNING
(3) Install intermediate gear box sight plug
(PARA 6-4-34). Injury to personnel and damage to
equipment will result if gear box is oper-
(4) Service intermediate gear box per step g. ated without oil or with too little oil. If
gear box needs more than 300 ml (0.63
e. If oil drained from gear box is less than 1200 pint) to bring oil level to top of bull’s-
ml (2.57 pints), replace intermediate gear box eye (and aircraft was operated at this
(PARA 6-4-31). low oil level), the intermediate gear box
must be replaced.
NOTE
(5) If oil level remains low after adding 300
Operation at temperatures below -29°F
ml (0.63 pint) of oil, drain and replace
(-34°C) will require use of lubricating
intermediate gear box (PARA 1-3-13.1.2
oil, Item 208, Appendix D. If lubricating
and PARA 6-4-31).
oils have been mixed, or if another type
of oil is present, drain and refill gear box (6) Install oil filler cap.
with lubricating oil, Item 208, Appendix
D. (7) Make sure area is clean and free of
foreign material.
f. If necessary to change from one oil specifica-
tion to another, refer to (PARA 1-3-13.1.3). (8) Install intermediate gear box fairing
(PARA 2-4-139).
NOTE
1-3-13.1.2. Drain.
Before adding oil, determine whether
gear box contains lubricating oil, Item
a. Remove intermediate gear box chip detector/
205, Item 206, or Item 208, Appendix
temperature sensor (PARA 6-4-37).
D.
b. Place one end of drain line into 2-quart
g. Service intermediate gear box as follows:
container. Insert other end into self-closing
(1) Remove intermediate gear box fairing valve by pushing in and turning clockwise
(PARA 2-4-139). (Figure 1-3-13-1, Detail B).

(2) Remove oil filler cap. c. Remove oil filler cap, and drain oil into
container (Figure 1-3-13-1, Detail A).
NOTE
d. Remove drain hose.
Servicing limit of 300 ml (0.63 pint)
does not apply if servicing a completely e. Install intermediate gear box chip detector/
drained intermediate gear box. temperature sensor (PARA 6-4-37).

(3) Add no more than 300 ml (0.63 pint) of f. Service gear box with proper amount of oil
lubricating oil, Item 205, Item 206, or (PARA 1-3-13.1.1).
Item 208, Appendix D.
g. Install oil filler cap.
(4) If oil level comes within bull’s-eye on
intermediate gear box sight plug, servic- h. Make sure area is clean and free of foreign
ing is complete. material.

1-3-13-3
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-13

1-3-13.1.3. Change Oil Specification. e. Remove drain hose.

NOTE f. Remove self-closing valve (PARA 6-4-37).

This procedure is essential when chang- g. Place funnel under chip detector self-closing
ing from one base oil to another (Item valve opening. Place 2-gallon container under
205, Item 206, Appendix D, to Item 208, funnel.
Appendix D), and is desirable for all oil
changes. h. Remove o il filler cap and drain oil into
container (Figure 1-3-13-1, Detail A).
a. Run intermediate gear box until oil reaches
normal operating temperature. i. Thoroughly flush gear box with clean oil until
drained oil is clean with no trace of debris.
b. Drain oil while still hot (PARA 1-3-13.1.2).

c. Service intermediate gear box with new type j. Install intermediate gear box chip detector/
oil to top of bull’s-eye on intermediate gear temperature sensor (PARA 6-4-37).
box sight plug (PARA 1-3-13.1.1).
k. Service gear box with new oil to top of bull’s-
d. Run gear box again until oil reaches normal eye on intermediate gear box sight plug (PARA
operating temperature. 1-3-13.1.1).

e. Drain oil while still hot (PARA 1-3-13.1.2). l. Install oil filler cap.

f. Service intermediate gear box with new type m. Make sure area is clean and free of foreign
oil to top of bull’s-eye on intermediate gear material.
box sight plug (PARA 1-3-13.1.1).
n. Run intermediate gear box until oil reaches
1-3-13.1.4. Flush Intermediate Gear Box. normal operating temperature.
a. Run intermediate gear box until oil reaches o. Drain oil while still hot (PARA 1-3-13.1.2).
normal operating temperature.

b. Remove intermediate gear box fairing (PARA p. Service intermediate gear box with new oil to
2-4-139). top of bull’s-eye on intermediate gear box sight
plug (PARA 1-3-13.1.1).
c. Remove intermediate gear box chip detector/
temperature sensor (PARA 6-4-37). q. Install intermediate gear box fairing (PARA
2-4-139).
d. Place one end of drain line into 2-quart
container. Insert other end into self-closing r. Make sure area is clean and free of foreign
valve by pushing in and turning clockwise. material.

1-3-13-4
PARA 1-3-14 TM 1-70-23

1-3-14 SERVICE/DRAIN TAIL GEAR BOX.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-3-14.1 Service/Drain Tail 1-3-14-1

Gear Box

INITIAL SETUP • Lubricating Oil, Item 206, Appendix D

Tools • Lubricating Oil, Item 208, Appendix D

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit • Machinery Towel, Item 211, Appendix D

• Beaker, 2000 ml References

• Container, 2-Quart • Appendix D

• Container, 2-Gallon • PARA 2-4-137

• Drain Line, H538A-3 • PARA 6-4-52

• Funnel • PARA 6-4-55

Materials/Parts • PARA 6-4-57

• Dry-Cleaning Solvent, Item 124, Appendix D • PARA 6-4-59

• Lubricating Oil, Item 205, Appendix D • PARA 11-4-113

1-3-14.1 Service/Drain Tail Gear Box. remains at top of bull’s-eye, no action is

required (Figure 1-3-14-1, Detail B).
1-3-14.1.1. Service.
b. If oil level is low, service tail gear box per step
NOTE
h.
• Tail gear box sight plug will not give
correct reading with pylon folded. c. If oil level cannot be determined, drain tail gear
box into 2000 ml beaker (PARA 1-3-14.1.2).
• Visual oil level check will be performed
with the inspector at eye level with the
d. Inspect drained oil for purple discoloration. If
tail gear box sight plug.
discoloration is present, do this:
a. If tail gear box sight plug is clean and oil level
is to top of bull’s-eye, lightly shake pylon to (1) Remove tail rotor servo (PARA 11-4-
make sure of accurate oil level. If oil level 113).

1-3-14-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-14

A OIL
FILLER
CAP

CHIP DETECTOR /
TEMPERATURE
B SENSOR

SELF−CLOSING
VALVE TAIL GEAR BOX
SIGHT PLUG
FN1996A
SA

FIGURE 1-3-14-1. SERVICE/DRAIN TAIL GEAR BOX

(2) Inspect tail gear box for corrosion (PARA NOTE

6-4-57). Pay particular attention to tail ro-
tor servo bore area. Repair as required. Operation at temperatures below -29°F
(-34°C) will require use of lubricating
(3) Install tail rotor servo (PARA 11-4-113). oil, Item 208, Appendix D. If lubricating
oils have been mixed, or if another type
e. If oil drained from tail gear box is 1200 ml of oil is present, drain and refill tail gear
(2.57 pints) or more, do this: box with lubricating oil, Item 208, Ap-
pendix D.
(1) Remove and inspect tail gear box sight
g. If necessary to change from one oil specifica-
plug (PARA 6-4-55).
tion to another, refer to (PARA 1-3-14.1.3).
(2) Clean tail gear box sight plug using NOTE
machinery towel, Item 211, Appendix D,
dampened with dry-cleaning solvent, Item Before adding oil, determine whether
124, Appendix D. tail gear box contains lubricating oil,
Item 205, Item 206, or Item 208, Ap-
(3) Install tail gear box sight plug (PARA pendix D.
6-4-55).
h. Service tail gear box as follows:
(4) Service tail gear box per step h. (1) Remove tail gear box fairing (PARA 2-4-
137).
f. If oil drained from tail gear box is less than
1200 ml (2.57 pints), replace tail gear box (2) Remove oil filler cap (Figure 1-3-14-1,
(PARA 6-4-52). Detail A).

1-3-14-2
PARA 1-3-14 TM 1-70-23

NOTE c. Place one end of drain line into 2-quart

container. Insert other end into self-closing
Servicing limit of 400 ml (0.85 pint) valve by pushing in and turning clockwise.
does not apply if servicing a completely
drained tail gear box. d. Remove oil filler cap and d rain oil into
container (Figure 1-3-14-1, Detail A).
(3) Add no more than 400 ml (0.85 pint) of
lubricating oil, Item 205, Item 206, or
e. Remove drain line.
Item 208, Appendix D.

(4) If oil level comes within bull’s-eye on tail f. Install tail gear box chip detector/temperature
gear box sight plug, servicing is complete. sensor (PARA 6-4-59).

g. Service tail gear box with proper amount of oil

WARNING (PARA 1-3-14.1.1).

h. Install oil filler cap.

Injury to personnel and damage to
equipment will result if tail gear box is i. Install tail gear box fairing (PARA 2-4-137).
operated without oil or with too little oil.
If tail gear box needs more than 400 ml j. Make sure area is clean and free of foreign
(0.85 pint) to bring oil level to top of material.
bull’s-eye (and aircraft was operated at
this low oil level), the tail gear box must 1-3-14.1.3. Change Oil Specification.
be replaced.

NOTE NOTE

Pitch change shaft may remain in This procedure is essential when chang-
service if inspected and found service- ing from one base oil to another (Item
able. 205, Item 206, Appendix D to Item 208,
Appendix D), and is desirable for all oil
(5) If oil level remains low after adding 400 changes.
ml (0.85 pint) of oil, drain and replace tail
gear box and inspect pitch change shaft a. Run tail gear box until oil reaches normal
(PARA 1-3-14.1.2, PARA 6-4-52 and operating temperature.
PARA 11-4-113).
b. Drain oil while still hot (PARA 1-3-14.1.2).
(6) Install oil filler cap (Figure 1-3-14-1,
Detail A).
c. Service tail gear box with new type oil to top
(7) Make sure area is clean and free of of bull’s-eye on tail gear box sight plug (PARA
foreign material. 1-3-14.1.1).

(8) Install tail gear box fairing (PARA 2-4- d. Run tail gear box again until oil reaches normal
137). operating temperature.

1-3-14.1.2. Drain. e. Drain oil while still hot (PARA 1-3-14.1.2).

a. Remove tail gear box fairing (PARA 2-4-137).
f. Service tail gear box with new type oil to top
b. Remove tail gear box chip detector/temperature of bull’s-eye on tail gear box sight plug (PARA
sensor (PARA 6-4-59). 1-3-14.1.1).

1-3-14-3
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-14

1-3-14.1.4. Flush Tail Gear Box. Foreign objects may enter tail gear box
when tail rotor servo is removed. Make
NOTE sure that no foreign objects enter the tail
gear box during performance of this
If possible the tail gear box should be task.
flushed while the oil is at normal operat-
ing temperature. The tail gear box may (1) Remove tail rotor servo (PARA 11-4-
be flushed with cold oil if the aircraft 113).
cannot be operated in order to bring the
tail gear box oil to its normal operating (2) Inspect inside of tail gear box, especially
temperature. the inside diameter of the input bevel
pinion, for buildup of sludge and debris
a. Run tail gear box again until oil reaches normal accumulation. Remove sludge/debris us-
operating temperature. ing clean dry machinery towel, Item 211,
Appendix D. Make sure no debris is left
b. Remove oil filler cap (Figure 1-3-14-1, Detail inside the tail gear box.
A).
NOTE
c. Drain tail gear box while oil is still hot (PARA
1-3-14.1.2). Before flushing, determine whether tail
gear box contains lubricating oil, Item
d. Remove chip detector self-closing valve 205, Item 206, or Item 208, Appendix
(PARA 6-4-59). D. Flush with appropriate lubricating
oil.
e. Place funnel under the chip detector self-
closing valve opening. Place 2-gallon container (3) Flush tail gear box with clean lubricating
under funnel. oil Item 205, Item 206, or Item 208, Ap-
pendix D. Repeat using clean oil until oil
NOTE
drained from tail gear box is clean with no
The tail gear box may be flushed with trace of debris. Make sure oil stream is
tail rotor servo installed. However, the directed against inside of tail gear box to
flushing process will be more effective make sure all debris is flushed from the
when performed with the tail rotor servo tail gear box.
removed.
(4) Install tail rotor servo (PARA 11-4-113).
f. If the tail rotor servo is installed, flush gear box
with clean lubricating oil. Repeat with clean oil h. Install chip detector self-closing valve (PARA
until the oil drained from the tail gear box is 6-4-59).
clean with no trace of debris. Direct oil stream
against inside of the gear box in order to flush i. Service tail gear box with proper amount of oil
out as much sludge and debris as possible. (PARA 1-3-14.1.1).

g. To flush the tail gear box with the tail rotor j. Install oil filler cap.
servo removed, do the following:
k. Run tail gear box again until oil reaches normal
operating temperature.
CAUTION
l. Drain tail gear box while oil is still hot (PARA
1-3-14.1.2).
Damage to equipment will occur if
foreign objects enter tail gear box. m. Service tail gear box (PARA 1-3-14.1.1).

1-3-14-4
PARA 1-3-14 TM 1-70-23

n. Make sure area is clean and free of foreign

material.

1-3-14-5/(1-3-14-6 Blank)
PARA 1-3-15 TM 1-70-23

1-3-15 SERVICE MAIN ROTOR HEAD DAMPER.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-3-15.1 Service Main Rotor Head 1-3-15-1

Damper

INITIAL SETUP Materials/Parts

Tools • Hydraulic Fluid, Item 154, Appendix D

• Hydraulic Fluid, Item 155, Appendix D

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• Insulation Sleeving, Heat-Shrinkable, Item 171,
• Container, 1-Quart Appendix D

• Damper Indicator Handle Retainer, Locally-Made, • Lockwire, Item 197, Appendix D

Figure H-215, Appendix H
References
• Hydraulic Fluid Dispenser, AF5
• Appendix D
• Reducer • Appendix H

• Torque Wrench, 30 - 150 in. lbs • PARA 11-4-2

1-3-15.1 Service Main Rotor Head Damper. when filling dampers. Mixing hydraulic
fl u i d s i s a l l o w e d . F l u s h i n g i s n o t
a. Locally make, damper indicator handle retainer required when switching from hydraulic
(Figure H-215, Appendix H). fl u i d I t e m 1 5 4 , A p p e n d i x D , t o
hydraulic fluid Item 155, Appendix D.

CAUTION • Hydraulic fluid Item 155, Appendix D,

may be switched to hydraulic fluid Item
154, Appendix D, without flushing.
At temperatures below -40°F (-40°C),
only hydraulic fluid, Item 154, Ap- b. Service pressure hydraulic fluid dispenser with
pendix D, shall be used. hydraulic fluid, Item 154, Appendix D, or Item
155, Appendix D.
NOTE
c. Engage gust lock from inside cabin.
• At temperatures above -40°F (-40°C),
hydraulic fluid, Item 155, Appendix D, d. Install main rotor damper rigging blocks
or Item 154, Appendix D, can be used (PARA 11-4-2).

1-3-15-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-15

DAMPER
INDICATOR
HANDLE

DAMPER
FULL INDICATOR
INNER BLEED PLUG VALVE POSITION
(TORQUE 65−75 IN. LBS)
TUBING
NUT

REDUCER

OUTER BLEED
PORT

DAMPER

HYDRAULIC
FLUID
DISPENSER
A

FO0614
SA

FIGURE 1-3-15-1. SERVICE MAIN ROTOR HEAD DAMPER

e. Place 1-quart container below damper to catch A). Release valve and stop pressure flow.
any overflow of fluid. L o o s e n i n n e r b l e e d p l u g a n d b l e e d o ff
hydraulic fluid until indicator is bottomed.
f. Slowly loosen outer bleed plug and bleed off Repeat bleeding until all air is removed.
hydraulic fluid until indicator is bottomed.
m. Press valve on nozzle, allowing indicator to
g. Remove outer bleed plug and packing from move to full position.
outer bleed port. Discard packing. Install
reducer (Figure 1-3-15-1). n. Hold indicator in extended position using
damper indicator handle retainer. Disconnect
h. Connect nozzle and tubing of hydraulic fluid nozzle and remove reducer.
dispenser to reducer on damper.
o. Install bleed plug and packing in outer bleed
i. Loosen tubing nut, slowly press valve on port on damper.
nozzle, and bleed off any air trapped in
dispenser. p. Release damper indicator handle.

j. Release valve and tighten tubing nut to q. Check damper indicator for proper fluid level.
reducer.
r. TORQUE BLEED PLUGS TO 65 - 75 INCH-
k. Loosen inner bleed plug, slowly press valve on POUNDS. Lockwire, Item 197, Appendix D,
nozzle, and bleed off air trapped in damper. bleed plugs to each other and damper indicator.
Release valve and tighten inner plug. Cover lockwire with heat-shrinkable insulation
sleeving, Item 171, Appendix D.
l. Press valve on nozzle, allowing indicator to
move to full position (Figure 1-3-15-1, Detail s. Remove hydraulic fluid dispenser.

1-3-15-2
PARA 1-3-15 TM 1-70-23

t. Remove main rotor damper rigging blocks v. Unlock gust lock.

(PARA 11-4-2).
w. Record type of hydraulic fluid used to service
u. Make sure area is clean and free of foreign damper in helicopter logbook.
material.

1-3-15-3/(1-3-15-4 Blank)
PARA 1-3-16 TM 1-70-23

1-3-16 SERVICE TAIL ROTOR DRIVE SHAFT VISCOUS DAMPER BEAR-

INGS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-3-16.1 Service Tail Rotor Drive 1-3-16-1

Shaft Viscous Damper
Bearings

INITIAL SETUP • Sealing Compound, Item 298, Appendix D

Tools References
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• Appendix D
• Syringe, 2 ounce - Catheter Tip

• Torque Wrench, 0 - 30 in. lbs • PARA 6-4-45

Materials/Parts

• Damping Fluid, Item 121, Appendix D

• Lockwire, Item 197, Appendix D

1-3-16.1 Service Tail Rotor Drive Shaft in tube, while filling, to purge air bubbles from
Viscous Damper Bearings. fluid. Add fluid until fluid starts to come out of
adjacent filler hole. If tube is transparent, keep
NOTE adding fluid.
After reservicing viscous dampers, they
c. After servicing, check viscous damper tube for
must be inspected for leakage after next
air bubbles. An air bubble is to be visible, but
flight.
should not be more than 1 ⁄ 2 -inch long, with
support in vertical position.
1-3-16.1.1. Service.

a. Remove filler screws from tail rotor drive shaft d. Coat threads of filler screws with sealing
support tube (Figure 1-3-16-1). compound, Item 298, Appendix D, and install.
TORQUE SCREWS TO 10 - 20 INCH-
b. Fill tube using syringe filled with damping POUNDS. If screws have provisions for lock-
fluid, Item 121, Appendix D. Move drive shaft wire, lockwire, Item 197, Appendix D, screws.

1-3-16-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-16

FILLER SCREW
(TORQUE 10−20 IN. LBS)

TAIL ROTOR
DRIVE SHAFT
VISCOUS DAMPER
TAIL ROTOR BEARING
DRIVE SHAFT
SUPPORT TUBE

FO0615A
SA

FIGURE 1-3-16-1. SERVICE TAIL ROTOR DRIVE SHAFT VISCOUS DAMPER BEARINGS

1-3-16.1.2. Inspect. sure the air bubble inside tube is no more than 1
inch long. IF LEAKAGE IS FOUND OR AIR
After servicing the viscous damper, inspect for BUBBLE IS MORE THAN 1 INCH LONG, RE-
leakage from the tube at completion of the first PLACE TAIL ROTOR DRIVE SHAFT SUP-
flight. If the tail rotor drive shaft support tube is PORT TUBE (PARA 6-4-45).
transparent, leakage may be checked by making

1-3-16-2
PARA 1-3-17 TM 1-70-23

1-3-17 PRESSURE REFUEL MAIN TANKS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-3-17.1 Pressure Refuel Main 1-3-17-1

Tanks

INITIAL SETUP References

Tools • PARA 1-6-16

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit

• Static Ground Cable

1-3-17.1 Pressure Refuel Main Tanks. g. Open pressure refuel access cover (Figure 1-3-
17-1, Detail A).

WARNING h. Remove cap from refuel/defuel adapter.

i. Connect fuel nozzle to refuel/defuel adapter.

Injury to personnel and damage to Open valve by moving handle forward.
equipment will result if fuel servicing
procedures are not followed exactly. 1-3-17.1.2. Pressure Refuel.
Carelessness could cause an explosion.
These procedures must be followed
exactly and with extreme caution.
WARNING
1-3-17.1.1. Prepare to Pressure Refuel.

a. Turn off all electrical power (PARA 1-6-16). To prevent injury to personnel or dam-
age to equipment, refueling pumping
b. Park helicopter on level ground. system not to exceed a line pressure of
55 psi.
c. Connect static ground cable to lower drag
beam on axle. NOTE
d. Connect static ground cable between servicing
Electrical power may be turned on to al-
unit and ground.
low monitoring of fuel gages during
e. Connect static ground cable between helicopter refueling (PARA 1-6-16).
and servicing unit.
a. Start refueling system and fuel helicopter.
f. Plug fuel nozzle static ground into ground
receptacle on helicopter fuselage (Figure 1-3- b. Turn off refueling system when no flow is
17-1). indicated.

1-3-17-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-17

GROUND
RECEPTACLE REFUEL / DEFUEL
ADAPTER
A
CAP

ACCESS
COVER

AB1103
SA

FIGURE 1-3-17-1. PRESSURE REFUEL MAIN TANKS

c. Remove fuel nozzle from refuel/defuel adapter. g. Disconnect static ground cable between
helicopter and servicing unit.
d. Install cap on refuel/defuel adapter (Figure 1-3-
17-1, Detail A). h. Disconnect static ground cable between servic-
e. Close pressure refuel access cover. ing unit and ground (Figure 1-3-17-1).

f. Unplug fuel nozzle ground from ground i. Disconnect static ground cable from lower drag
receptacle on helicopter fuselage. beam on axle.

1-3-17-2
PARA 1-3-18 TM 1-70-23

1-3-18 GRAVITY REFUEL MAIN TANKS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-3-18.1 Gravity Refuel Main 1-3-18-1

Tanks

INITIAL SETUP References

Tools • PARA 1-6-16

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit

• Static Ground Cable

1-3-18.1 Gravity Refuel Main Tanks. c. Connect static ground cable to lower drag
beam on axle.

WARNING d. Connect static ground cable between servicing

unit and ground.

• Injury to personnel and damage to e. Connect static ground cable between helicopter
equipment will result if fuel servicing and servicing unit.
procedures are not followed exactly.
Carelessness could cause an explosion. f. Plug fuel nozzle static ground into ground
These procedures must be followed receptacle on helicopter fuselage (Figure 1-3-
exactly and with extreme caution. 18-1).

• Injury to personnel and damage to g. Open gravity fuel access cover (Figure 1-3-18-
equipment will result if electrical power 1, Detail A).
is applied to aircraft during gravity
refueling. Stray electrical voltage could h. Remove gravity filler cap from adapter unit,
cause an explosion. and place nozzle into tank.

NOTE 1-3-18.1.2. Gravity Refuel.

When gravity refueling, each fuel cell a. Refuel helicopter.

must be filled separately. The following
procedures apply to both fuel cells. b. Stop refueling helicopter when tanks are full.

1-3-18.1.1. Prepare to Gravity Refuel. c. Remove fuel nozzle from adapter unit (Figure
1-3-18-1, Detail A).
a. Turn off all electrical power (PARA 1-6-16).
d. Install cap on adapter unit with arrow on cap
b. Park helicopter on level ground. pointing forward.

1-3-18-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-18

ADAPTER CAP
UNIT
GROUND
RECEPTACLE

D
FW

A
ACCESS
A COVER

AB1104
SA

FIGURE 1-3-18-1. GRAVITY REFUEL MAIN TANKS

e. Close gravity fuel access cover. h. Disconnect static ground cable between servic-
ing unit and ground.
f. Unplug fuel nozzle static ground from ground
receptacle on helicopter fuselage (Figure 1-3-
i. Disconnect static ground cable from lower drag
18-1).
beam on axle.
g. Disconnect static ground cable between
helicopter and servicing unit.

1-3-18-2
PARA 1-3-19 TM 1-70-23

1-3-19 CLOSED CIRCUIT REFUEL.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-3-19.1 Closed Circuit Refuel 1-3-19-1

INITIAL SETUP References

Tools • PARA 1-6-16

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit

• Static Ground Cable

1-3-19.1 Closed Circuit Refuel. g. Open pressure fuel access cover (Figure 1-3-
19-1, Detail A).

WARNING h. Remove cap from refuel adapter.

i. Connect fuel nozzle to refuel adapter.

Injury to personnel and damage to
equipment will result if fuel servicing 1-3-19.1.2. Closed Circuit Refuel.
procedures are not followed exactly.
NOTE
Carelessness could cause an explosion.
These procedures must be followed • Make sure refueling pump system
exactly and with extreme caution. provides a line pressure of 15 psi.
1-3-19.1.1. Prepare to Closed Circuit Refuel. • Electrical power may be turned on to al-
low monitoring of fuel gages during
a. Turn off all electrical power (PARA 1-6-16). refueling (PARA 1-6-16).
b. Park helicopter on level ground. a. Refuel helicopter.
c. Connect static ground cable to lower drag b. Stop refueling helicopter when tanks are full.
beam on axle.
c. Remove fuel nozzle from refuel adapter
d. Connect static ground cable between servicing (Figure 1-3-19-1, Detail A).
unit and ground.
d. Install cap on refuel adapter.
e. Connect static ground cable between helicopter
and servicing unit. e. Close pressure fuel access cover.

f. Plug fuel nozzle static ground into ground f. Unplug fuel nozzle static ground from ground
receptacle on helicopter fuselage (Figure 1-3- receptacle on helicopter fuselage (Figure 1-3-
19-1). 19-1).

1-3-19-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-19

REFUEL
ADAPTER

GROUND
RECEPTACLE
CAP

ACCESS
A COVER
A

AB1105
SA

FIGURE 1-3-19-1. CLOSED CIRCUIT REFUEL

g. Disconnect static ground cable between i. Disconnect static ground cable from lower drag
helicopter and servicing unit. beam on axle.
h. Disconnect static ground cable between servic-
ing unit and ground.

1-3-19-2
PARA 1-3-20 TM 1-70-23

1-3-20 PRESSURE DEFUEL MAIN TANKS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-3-20.1 Pressure Defuel Main 1-3-20-1

Tanks

INITIAL SETUP References

Tools • PARA 1-3-21

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• PARA 1-6-16
• Static Ground Cable

1-3-20.1 Pressure Defuel Main Tanks. f. Open pressure fuel access cover (Figure 1-3-
20-1, Detail A).

WARNING g. Remove cap from refuel/defuel adapter.

h. Connect fuel nozzle to refuel/defuel adapter.

Injury to personnel and damage to
equipment will result if fuel servicing 1-3-20.1.2. Pressure Defuel.
procedures are not followed exactly.
Carelessness could cause an explosion.
CAUTION
These procedures must be followed
exactly and with extreme caution.
To prevent damage to equipment, make
1-3-20.1.1. Prepare to Pressure Defuel.
sure defueling system does not exceed 3
psi negative pressure (suction).
a. Turn off all electrical power (PARA 1-6-16).
a. Defuel helicopter.
b. Connect static ground cable to lower drag
beam on axle. NOTE
c. Connect static ground cable between servicing When tanks are defueled, some fuel will
unit and ground. remain in tank sumps. If necessary to
remove remaining fuel, drain fuel from
d. Connect static ground cable between helicopter sumps (PARA 1-3-21).
and servicing unit.
b. Stop defueling helicopter when tanks are
e. Plug fuel nozzle static ground into ground empty.
receptacle on helicopter fuselage left side
(Figure 1-3-20-1). c. Turn off defueling system.

1-3-20-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-20

GROUND
RECEPTACLE REFUEL / DEFUEL
ADAPTER
A
CAP

ACCESS
COVER

AB1106
SA

FIGURE 1-3-20-1. PRESSURE DEFUEL MAIN TANKS

d. Remove fuel nozzle from refuel/defuel adapter h. Disconnect static ground cable between
(Figure 1-3-20-1, Detail A). helicopter and servicing unit.

e. Install cap on refuel/defuel adapter.

i. Disconnect static ground cable between servic-
f. Close pressure fuel access cover. ing unit and ground.

g. Unplug fuel nozzle static ground from ground

j. Disconnect static ground cable from lower drag
receptacle on helicopter fuselage (Figure 1-3-
beam on axle.
20-1).

1-3-20-2
PARA 1-3-21 TM 1-70-23

1-3-21 GRAVITY DEFUEL MAIN TANKS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-3-21.1 Gravity Defuel Main 1-3-21-1

Tanks

INITIAL SETUP • Drain Valve, 70307-03018-102

Tools • Flex Hose

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit • Static Ground Cable

• Clamp, AN737-TW58 (or equivalent) References

• Container, Variable • PARA 1-6-16

1-3-21.1 Gravity Defuel Main Tanks. cover. Fuel may be trapped above access
cover. Take care to prevent fuel spillage
when opening access cover.
WARNING
b. Open fuel cell access panel on underside of
helicopter fuselage (Figure 1-3-21-1, Detail A).
Injury to personnel and damage to
equipment will result if fuel servicing c. Clamp length of flex hose to drain valve.
procedures are not followed exactly.
Carelessness could cause an explosion. d. Connect static ground cable between ground
These procedures must be followed receptacle on helicopter fuselage and ground
exactly and with extreme caution. (Figure 1-3-21-1).
NOTE
CAUTION
Gravity defueling procedures for left
and right fuel cells are the same.

1-3-21.1.1. Prepare to Gravity Defuel. Make sure container is sufficiently large

enough to contain all drained fuel.
a. Turn off all electrical power (PARA 1-6-16).
e. Place end of flex hose in a container to catch
draining fuel.
WARNING
1-3-21.1.2. Gravity Defuel.

Injury to personnel will result if care is a. Place drain valve in sump valve, push up, and
not taken when opening fuel cell access twist (Figure 1-3-21-1, Detail A).

1-3-21-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-21

SUMP
VALVE

GROUND
RECEPTACLE DRAIN VALVE

A
A

FUEL CELL
ACCESS PANEL

FO0616
SA

FIGURE 1-3-21-1. GRAVITY DEFUEL MAIN TANKS

b. Remove drain valve from sump valve when d. Disconnect static ground cable from ground
tank is empty. receptacle on helicopter fuselage (Figure 1-3-
21-1).
c. Close fuel cell access panel on underside of
helicopter fuselage.

1-3-21-2
PARA 1-3-22 TM 1-70-23

1-3-22 TRANSFER DEFUEL EXTENDED RANGE TANKS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-3-22.1 Transfer Defuel Extended 1-3-22-1

Range Tanks

INITIAL SETUP References

Tools • Appropriate Flight Manual

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit • PARA 1-3-20

• Container, 25-Gallon • PARA 1-3-21

1-3-22.1 Transfer Defuel Extended Range

Tanks. WARNING

Injury to personnel and damage to

WARNING
equipment will result if fuel transfer
procedures are performed with refuel/
Injury to personnel and damage to defuel equipment connected. Make
equipment will result if fuel servicing certain refuel/defuel equipment is
procedures are not followed exactly. disconnected prior to performing fuel
Carelessness could cause an explosion. transfer procedures.
These procedures must be followed
exactly and with extreme caution. b. Set auxiliary fuel management control panel
switches as follows (Figure 1-3-22-1, Detail
NOTE A):

(1) PRESS-OUTBD to OFF

Transfer defueling procedures apply to
230 gallon fuel tanks only. (2) PRESS-INBD to OFF
1-3-22.1.1. Prepare to Transfer Defuel. (3) TANKS to OUTBD

a. Defuel helicopter internal tanks leaving ap- (4) MODE to OFF

proximately 20 gallons of fuel for APU opera-
tion (PARA 1-3-20 or PARA 1-3-21). (5) MANUAL XFR-RIGHT to OFF

1-3-22-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-22

(6) MANUAL XFR-LEFT to OFF NOTE

(7) AUX FUEL QTY to TOTAL • Time required for Center Display Unit
TOTAL FUEL indication to increase in
c. Make sure the following circuit breakers are main fuel tanks will depend on fuel level
pushed in on mission readiness circuit breaker in external tanks and time required to
panel: pressurize.

(1) EXT FUEL RH • Auxiliary fuel management control

panel EXTERNAL-RIGHT NO FLOW
(2) NO. 2 XFER CONTROL indicator will momentarily go on and
then go off.
(3) EXT FUEL LH
• Auxiliary fuel management control
(4) AUX FUEL QTY panel AUX FUEL QTY indicator read-
ing will decrease until internal tanks are
d. Make sure BACKUP HYD CONTR circuit full or external tanks are empty followed
breaker is pushed in on upper console. by RIGHT NO FLOW indicator going
on.
e. Pull out ESSS JTSN OUTBD and ESSS JTSN
INBD circuit breakers on upper console. f. When transfer is complete, shut down APU
(Appropriate Flight Manual).
f. Pull out ESSS JTSN OUTBD, ESSS JTSN
INBD, and BACKUP PUMP PWR circuit g. Repeat operation until desired fuel tanks are
breakers on copilot’s circuit breaker panel. empty.
1-3-22.1.2. Transfer Defuel. h. Push in ESSS JTSN OUTBD, ESSS JTSN
INBD, and BACKUP PUMP PWR circuit
NOTE
breakers on copilot’s circuit breaker panel.
More than one transfer may be required
i. Push in ESSS JTSN OUTBD and ESSS JTSN
depending on amount of fuel in external
INBD circuit breakers on upper console.
tanks.

a. Start APU (Appropriate Flight Manual).

WARNING
b. Place PRESS-OUTBD switch ON to pressurize
outboard fuel tanks. Place PRESS-INBD
switch ON to pressurize inboard fuel tanks. Injury to personnel and damage to
equipment will result if residual fuel is
c. Place TANKS switch INBD or OUTBD to not drained from fuel tank prior to
transfer the inboard or outboard fuel tanks. removal. Residual fuel will add weight
to fuel tank. Make certain all residual
d. Place MODE switch to MANUAL. fuel is drained from fuel tank prior to
removal.
e. Place MANUAL XFR-RIGHT and MANUAL
XFR-LEFT switches ON to transfer the right or j. Drain all remaining fuel through drain valve on
left fuel tanks. bottom of fuel tank using 25-gallon container.

1-3-22-2
PARA 1-3-22 TM 1-70-23

A
AUXILIARY FUEL MANAGEMENT
PRESS FUEL XFR MANUAL XFR
OUTBD INBD TANKS MODE RIGHT LEFT
O
ON ON INBD AUTO ON ON
F
F

OUTBD MANUAL OFF OFF

QTY
BRIGHTNESS
EXTERNAL
TEST STATUS RIGHT LEFT
DECR INCR NO NO
FLOW FLOW

AUX FUEL QTY

A POUNDS INCR
INBD INBD
9990

DECR EMPTY EMPTY

VENT
SENSOR

OUTBD INBD FAIL

DEGRADED
FR OVFL OUTBD OUTBD
ON
T TOTAL CAL
EMPTY EMPTY

CONTROL
PANEL

AB0875
SA

FIGURE 1-3-22-1. TRANSFER DEFUEL EXTENDED RANGE TANKS

1-3-22-3/(1-3-22-4 Blank)
PARA 1-3-23 TM 1-70-23

1-3-23 PRESERVE MAIN FUEL CELL TANK.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-3-23.1 Preserve Main Fuel Cell 1-3-23-1

Tank

INITIAL SETUP References

Tools • Appendix D

• PARA 1-3-20
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• PARA 1-3-21
• Torque Wrench, 30 - 150 in. lbs
• PARA 1-6-16
Materials/Parts • PARA 2-4-45

• Antiseize Compound, Item 74, Appendix D • PARA 2-4-69

• PARA 10-4-40
• Lubricating Oil, Item 207, Appendix D (or
equivalent) • PARA 13-5-3

• Petrolatum, Item 234, Appendix D • PARA 13-5-6

1-3-23.1 Preserve Main Fuel Cell Tank. d. Remove passenger’s seats from rear cabin
(PARA 2-4-45).
1-3-23.1.1. Fuel Cell Installed in Helicopter.
e. Remove soundproofing panels from left and
NOTE right stowage compartments and center
structure in cabin midsection (PARA 2-4-69).
Fuel cells installed in a helicopter that is
being stored for less than 30 days f. Unhook cargo netting to get into compart-
require no special procedures. The fol- ments.
lowing procedures apply if fuel cells are
to remain drained for longer than 30 g. If air conditioning is installed, remove
days. condenser pallet (PARA 13-5-3) and evapora-
tor pallet (PARA 13-5-6).
a. Turn off all electrical power (PARA 1-6-16).
h. Remove bolts, washers, and remove access
b. Defuel fuel cells (PARA 1-3-20 or PARA 1-3- covers from both fuel cells. Remove packings
21). from covers.
c. Drain fuel cell sump (PARA 1-3-21). i. Purge fuel cell of fumes (PARA 10-4-40).

1-3-23-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-23

NOTE q. Install soundproofing panels (PARA 2-4-69).

When coating cell, make sure that all 1-3-23.1.2. Fuel Cell not Installed in Heli-
puddled or pooled oil is removed im- copter.
mediately.
a. For fuel cell removed from helicopter for
j. Apply a light coating of lubricating oil, Item return to depot for repair, do this:
207, Appendix D, or equivalent, to inside
surfaces of each fuel cell. (1) Purge fuel cell of fumes (PARA 10-4-40).
k. Lubricate packings with petrolatum, Item 234,
Appendix D. Install packings on access covers. (2) Scrub with warm, soapy water.

l. Coat threads of bolts with antiseize compound, (3) Rinse in clean, clear water.
Item 74, Appendix D. Bolt access covers to
fuel cells. TORQUE BOLTS TO 43 - 48 (4) Allow to air-dry.
INCH-POUNDS.
NOTE
m. Make sure area is clean and free of foreign
material. When coating cell, make sure all
puddled or pooled oil is removed im-
n. If removed, install condenser and evaporator
mediately.
pallets (PARA 13-5-3 and PARA 13-5-6).

o. Install cargo hook netting in aft section stow- b. If fuel cell is to be stored for longer than 1
age compartment access openings. week, spray or swab a light coating of lubricat-
ing oil, Item 207, Appendix D, or equivalent,
p. Install passenger’s seats (PARA 2-4-45). to inside surface of fuel cell.

1-3-23-2
PARA 1-3-24 TM 1-70-23

1-3-24 GRAVITY REFUEL EXTENDED RANGE TANKS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-3-24.1 Gravity Refuel Extended 1-3-24-1

Range Tanks

INITIAL SETUP References

Tools • PARA 1-6-16

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit

• Static Ground Cable

1-3-24.1 Gravity Refuel Extended Range c. Connect static ground cable between lower
Tanks. stage air valve on shock strut and ground
(Figure 1-3-24-1, Detail A).
1-3-24.1.1. Prepare to Gravity Refuel.
d. Connect static ground cable to servicing unit.

e. Connect static ground cable between helicopter

WARNING
and servicing unit.

• Injury to personnel and damage to f. Plug fuel nozzle static ground into inboard
equipment will result if fuel servicing ground receptacle on fuel tank (Figure 1-3-24-
procedures are not followed exactly. 1).
Carelessness could cause an explosion.
These procedures must be followed
exactly and with extreme caution. WARNING
• Injury to personnel and damage to
equipment will result if electrical power Injury to personnel will result if care is
is applied to aircraft during gravity not taken when lifting up lock in center
refueling. Stray electrical voltage could of fuel tank cap. Fuel tank may be pres-
cause an explosion. surized. Stand clear of fuel tank cap
when lifting up lock.
NOTE
g. Slowly lift up thumb lock in center of filler cap
Gravity refueling procedures apply to to relieve pressure in fuel tank (Figure 1-3-24-
230 gallon fuel tanks only. 1, Detail B).

a. Turn off all electrical power (PARA 1-6-16). h. Remove filler cap from fuel tank.

b. Park helicopter on level ground. i. Insert fuel nozzle into fuel tank.

1-3-24-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-24

GROUND
RECEPTACLE

EXTENDED
RANGE TANK
(TYPICAL)

GROUND
RECEPTACLE
LOWER STAGE
AIR VALVE
A
B

THUMB
LOCK

FILLER
CAP
F
W
D

FB3363
SA

FIGURE 1-3-24-1. GRAVITY REFUEL EXTENDED RANGE TANKS

1-3-24-2
PARA 1-3-24 TM 1-70-23

1-3-24.1.2. Gravity Refuel. e. Disconnect static ground cable between

helicopter and servicing unit.
a. Refuel tanks.
b. Stop refueling when tanks are full. f. Disconnect static ground cable between servic-
ing unit and ground.
c. Remove nozzle from tank and install filler cap
in fuel tank with thumb lock in center of filler g. Disconnect static ground cable from lower
cap pointing to rear (Figure 1-3-24-1, Detail stage air valve on shock strut (Figure 1-3-24-1,
B). Detail A).
d. Unplug fuel nozzle static ground from ground
receptacle on fuel tank (Figure 1-3-24-1).

1-3-24-3/(1-3-24-4 Blank)
PARA 1-3-25 TM 1-70-23

1-3-25 ADAPTER DEFUEL EXTENDED RANGE TANKS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-3-25.1 Adapter Defuel Extended 1-3-25-1

Range Tanks

INITIAL SETUP Materials/Parts

Tools • Adapter, MS24392-8

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit • Petrolatum, Item 234, Appendix D

References
• Container
• Appendix D
• Defuel Adapter, Locally-Made, Figure H-163, Ap-
pendix H • Appendix H

• Static Ground Cable • PARA 1-6-16

1-3-25.1 Adapter Defuel Extended Range NOTE

Tanks.
Adapter defueling procedures apply to
1-3-25.1.1. Prepare to Adapter Defuel. 230 gallon fuel tanks only.

a. Locally make defuel adapter (Figure H-163, b. Turn off all electrical power (PARA 1-6-16).
Appendix H).
c. Connect static ground cable to lower stage air
valve on shock strut (Figure 1-3-25-1, Sheet 1,
Detail A).
WARNING
d. Connect static ground cable to servicing unit.
Injury to personnel and damage to e. Connect static ground cable between helicopter
equipment will result if fuel servicing and servicing unit.
procedures are not followed exactly.
Carelessness could cause an explosion. f. Connect fuel nozzle static ground into ground-
These procedures must be followed ing receptacle on fuel tank (Figure 1-3-25-1,
exactly and with extreme caution. Sheet 2, Detail B).

1-3-25-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-25

GROUND
RECEPTACLE

LOWER
STAGE
AIR VALVE

CAP

B
A
FO0617_1
SA

FIGURE 1-3-25-1. ADAPTER DEFUEL EXTENDED RANGE TANKS (SHEET 1 OF 2)

l. Connect defuel nozzle to defuel adapter.

WARNING
1-3-25.1.2. Adapter Defuel.

Injury to personnel will result if care is NOTE

not taken when lifting up thumb lock in Make sure defueling system does not
center of filler cap. Fuel tank may be exceed 3 psi negative pressure (suction).
pressurized. Stand clear of filler cap
when lifting up thumb lock. a. Start defueling helicopter fuel tank.

g. Slowly lift up thumb lock in center of filler cap b. Stop defueling when tank is empty.
to relieve pressure in fuel tank (Figure 1-3-24-
c. Disconnect defuel nozzle from defuel adapter.
1, Sheet 2, Detail C).
d. Remove defuel adapter.
h. Remove plug and packing closest to rear
suspension lug (Figure 1-3-25-1, Sheet 2, e. Remove fuel tank adapter and packing (Figure
Detail B). 1-3-25-1, Sheet 2, Detail B). Discard packing.

i. Lubricate packing with petrolatum, Item 234, f. Lubricate packing with petrolatum, Item 234,
Appendix D. Appendix D.

g. Install plug and packing in fuel tank.

j. Install packing and fuel tank adapter, into fuel
tank. h. Close thumb lock in center of filler cap, mak-
ing sure it it pointing to rear (Figure 1-3-25-1,
k. Install defuel adapter to fuel tank adapter. Sheet 2, Detail C).

1-3-25-2
PARA 1-3-25 TM 1-70-23

ADAPTER

PLUG
PACKING

PACKING

SUSPENSION
LUG

GROUNDING
RECEPTACLE

DRAIN
VALVE

230 GALLON
EXTENDED
RANGE TANK

THUMB
LOCK

FILLER
CAP
F
W
D

FO0617_2
SA

FIGURE 1-3-25-1. ADAPTER DEFUEL EXTENDED RANGE TANKS (SHEET 2 OF 2)

1-3-25-3
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-25

i. Disconnect defuel nozzle static ground from not drained from fuel tank prior to
grounding receptacle on fuel tank (Figure 1-3- removal. Residual fuel will add weight
25-1, Sheet 2, Detail B). to fuel tank. Make certain all residual
fuel is drained from fuel tank prior to
j. Disconnect static ground cable between removal.
helicopter and servicing unit.

k. Disconnect static ground cable from servicing m. Drain all remaining fuel through drain valve on
unit. bottom of fuel tank in suitable container
(Figure 1-3-25-1, Sheet 2, Detail B).
l. Disconnect static ground cable from lower
stage air valve on shock strut (Figure 1-3-25-1,
Sheet 1, Detail A).

WARNING

Injury to personnel and damage to

equipment will result if residual fuel is

1-3-25-4
PARA 1-3-26 TM 1-70-23

1-3-26 CLEAN AND PRESERVE EXTENDED RANGE TANKS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE PAGE

1-3-26.1 Clean Extended Range 1-3-26-1 1-3-26.3 Depreservation of 1-3-26-3

Tanks Extended Range Tanks

1-3-26.2 Preservation of Extended 1-3-26-2 1-3-26.4 Storage of Extended 1-3-26-3

Range Tanks Range Tanks

INITIAL SETUP • Cleaning Compound, Item 97A, Appendix D

Tools
• Lubricating Oil, Item 207, Appendix D
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• Nitrogen, Item 221, Appendix D
• Combustible Gas Indicator, 51-8018
• Fire Extinguisher, CO2-type • Tags
• Flexible Hose, 1/4-inch-diameter
References
• Shipping Cradle, 24ATC005-501
• Appendix D
• Static Ground Cable
• Wooden Stick, 3-feet long, Locally-Made • PARA 16-4-55
Materials/Parts
• PARA 16-4-56
• Aircraft Fuel, 10-Gallons
• Cheesecloth, Item 90, Appendix D • PARA 16-4-64

1-3-26.1 Clean Extended Range Tanks. e. Remove drain plug and all other plugs and
caps. Position tank at a 4° nose-up attitude to
a. Rinse outside of fuel tank with clean water to allow water to drain from tank during cleaning
wash out foreign particles and contamination. process.

b. Slowly lift up thumb lock in center of filler cap f. Clean fuel tank inside and out using cleaning
to relieve pressure in fuel tank. compound, Item 97A, Appendix D.

g. Rinse tank with clean water.

c. Remove access doors (PARA 16-4-64).
h. Completely dry inside and outside of tank us-
d. Rinse inside of fuel tank with clean water to ing clean, lint-free, cheesecloth, Item 90, Ap-
wash out foreign particles and contamination. pendix D.

1-3-26-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-26

i. Install access doors (PARA 16-4-64). j. Purge tank with regulated air for one hour at 50
psi.
j. Close thumb lock in center of filler cap, mak-
ing sure it is pointing to rear. k. Remove air hose from hole. Install drain valve
(PARA 16-4-56).
1-3-26.2 Preservation of Extended Range
Tanks.
WARNING
WARNING
To avoid generating static electrical
charge when using a carbon dioxide fire
Injury to personnel and damage to
extinguisher, remove horn from hose
equipment will result if extended range
before inserting into filler neck. Ground
tanks are improperly purged. Tanks
fire extinguisher to helicopter.
could explode. Observe all warnings,
cautions, and notes while purging
NOTE
extended range tanks.
• Use fire extinguisher as a source of
a. Drain all fuel from extended range tank. Make
carbon dioxide.
sure drain valve is closed when tank is defu-
eled. • Nitrogen, Item 221, Appendix D, or
b. Remove tank from helicopter (PARA 16-4-55). other inert gas may be used in place of
Place tank in suitable cradle or on padded sup- carbon dioxide.
ports.
l. Attach one end of flexible hose to the nitrogen
c. Connect static ground cable to ground or inert gas source and carefully insert the open
receptacle on fuel tank. end into the tank filler neck. Insert hose far
enough to open and extend past filler valve.
d. Pour 5 gallons of lubricating oil, Item 207, Ap-
pendix D, in tank. Rotate tank 360° to make m. Discharge nitrogen or inert gas into tank at a
sure all internal surfaces of tank are coated rate of not more than one pound of gas per
with oil. minute.

e. Drain lubricating oil from tank. n. Use at least 3 pounds of nitrogen or inert gas to
fill/purge tank.
f. Remove drain valve (PARA 16-4-56) and open
filler cap. o. Remove nitrogen or inert gas hose from filler
neck and allow tank to set for 3 hours.
g. Locally make wooden stick, such as a broom
stick, to a length of 3 feet. p. Test fuel tank with a combustible gas indicator
for presence of fuel vapor. If fuel vapor is
NOTE
detected, repeat steps f. through p. until no
Insert wooden stick just enough to open vapors are detected.
flapper valve.
q. If tank is to be stored for more than 45 days,
h. Carefully push wooden stick in filler neck to preserve fuel tank by coating all interior
open flapper valve. surfaces with lubricating oil, Item 207, Ap-
pendix D.
i. Connect 1/4-inch diameter flexible hose to a
regulated air source and insert the open end in r. Attach a tag to filler cap stating: "THIS TANK
drain valve hole. HAS BEEN PRESERVED IN AC-

1-3-26-2
PARA 1-3-26 TM 1-70-23

CORDANCE WITH TM 1-70-23 AND IS f. Pour approximately 10 gallons of aircraft fuel

GAS FREE. REMOVE THIS TAG UPON into the tank. Rotate the fuel tank 360° several
FILLING TANK WITH FUEL." Sign and date times to flush the inside of the tank.
tag.
g. Drain the flushing fuel from the tank.
1-3-26.3 Depreservation of Extended Range
Tanks. h. Close thumb lock in center of filler cap, mak-
ing sure it is pointing to rear.
a. Slowly lift up thumb lock in center of filler cap
to relieve pressure in fuel tank. 1-3-26.4 Storage of Extended Range Tanks.

b. Remove access doors (PARA 16-4-64). a. Remove extended range tank from helicopter
(PARA 16-4-55).
c. Inspect the inside of the tank for fungus
contamination. b. Clean and preserve tank (PARA 1-3-26.1 and
PARA 1-3-26.2).
d. If fungus contamination is present, clean tank
(PARA 1-3-26.1).
c. Unlatch and remove top half of shipping
e. Install access doors (PARA 16-4-64). cradle. Set top half aside.

d. Place fuel tank into bottom half of shipping

cradle. Place top half of shipping cradle onto
WARNING
tank making sure tank lugs fit into correspond-
ing holes in cradle and that black arrow on top
Fuel tank weighs approximately 143 cradle half points toward the tank nose.
pounds empty. Aviation fuels weigh ap-
proximately 6.5 pounds per gallon. e. Relatch cradle halves.
Make sure adequate number of person-
nel are utilized to lift and move the fuel f. Store tanks no more than three high in warm,
tank. dry area.

1-3-26-3/(1-3-26-4 Blank)
PARA 1-3-27 TM 1-70-23

1-3-27 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL SYSTEM - SERVICE.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-3-27.1 Service/Deservice 1-3-27-1

Environmental Control
System

INITIAL SETUP • Vacuum Gage

Tools • Vacuum Pump, Rotary, 14008

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit Materials/Parts

• Container, 5-Gallon • Nitrogen, Item 221, Appendix D

• Electronic Leak Detector • Refrigerant, Item 261, Appendix D
• Multimeter, Clip-On, ME-489/U
References
• Protection, Eye, Skin, and Breathing
• Appendix D
• Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling Station,
17500B • PARA 1-6-16

• Refrigeration Unit Service Toolkit • PARA 13-5-6

1-3-27.1 Service/Deservice Environmental c. Remove knurled brass covers from servicing

Control System. valves.

1-3-27.1.1. Service. d. Connect other ends of hoses to color-coded

servicing valves on helicopters.
a. Open avionics compartment access door.
b. Connect low pressure (blue) hose of refrigerant NOTE
recovery and recycling station to the low side
of the servicing manifold and the high pressure Blue hose will be on left side, red hose
(red) hose of refrigerant recovery and recycling will be on right side.
station to the high side of the servicing
manifold. Make sure manifold hand wheels are e. Connect yellow hose to refrigerant, Item 261,
closed (Figure 1-3-27-1, Sheet 1, Detail A). Appendix D, bottle and spare vacuum gage.

1-3-27-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-27

nontoxic. It will produce highly toxic

CAUTION phosgene gas if exposed to open flame.
Make sure work area is well ventilated,
and that there are no open flames, or un-
• To avoid damage to compressor, make shielded heaters in immediate area.
sure freon bottle is positioned upright so
only vapor will transfer. • The use of heat on any part of the pres-
surized system will cause a pressure
• Not purging or improper purging of air buildup and could cause an explosion.
from service lines will allow air and Do not try to solder or weld any part of
water vapor to enter system causing the system while the system is charged
damage and reduced efficiency. with refrigerant.

f. Open valve on refrigerant bottle and record the j. Purge yellow hose of air by loosening fitting at
bottle pressure. servicing manifold until a little gaseous freon
comes out. Immediately tighten fitting.
g. Close valve on refrigerant bottle and discon-
nect yellow hose from spare vacuum gage. k. Open low side and high side hand wheel until
low pressure gauge equals refrigerant bottle
h. Connect end of yellow hose to center supply pressure.
port of servicing manifold.
l. Close low side, high side hand wheels and re-
i. Open refrigerant bottle valve. frigerant bottle valve. Disconnect yellow hose
from refrigerant bottle.

1-3-27.1.2. Leak Check.

WARNING

• To prevent injury to personnel, observe WARNING

the following safety precautions when
working on any part of the air-
Injury to personnel and damage to
conditioning system:
equipment will result if system pressure
exceeds 300 psig during leak test. Make
• Protect skin and eyes from possible
sure that nitrogen pressure gages are
contact with liquid refrigerant. Wear
properly calibrated and regulator adjust-
gloves and goggles. Keep your body as
ing screw is set for 0 psig. Close
well protected as you can from possible
manifold valves prior to opening supply
contact with liquid refrigerant.
valve on nitrogen bottle.
• If liquid refrigerant comes in contact a. Unscrew regulator adjusting screw on
with the eyes or skin, get immediate regulated dry nitrogen source until it is loose.
medical aid. Connect yellow hose to regulated nitrogen,
Item 221, Appendix D.
• The refrigerant in a sealed system is
always under pressure. Do not discon- b. Open valve on nitrogen source, set regulator to
nect any line or component of the pres- 5 psig.
surized cooling system without first
carefully releasing the pressure. c. Purge yellow hose by slowly loosening fitting
at service manifold until a small amount of air
• Refrigerant will displace air and can and nitrogen come out. Immediately tighten fit-
cause suffocation, even though it is ting.

1-3-27-2
PARA 1-3-27 TM 1-70-23

d. Increase regulator pressure until it equals re-

frigerant system pressure. WARNING
e. Open high and low side hand wheel. Slowly
increase refrigerant system pressure, indicated • Refrigerant boils at -30°F (-34°C), and
on manifold high pressure gage, to 300 psig. will cause frostbite if spilled on
unprotected skin. To avoid personal
f. Using an electronic leak detector, check all fit-
injury, wear gloves and eye protection
tings, connections, hoses and components for
when purging or installing refrigerant
leaks. Repair as necessary.
servicing hoses.
g. Repeat until no leaks are found.
• Refrigerant will displace air, and can
h. Close high side and low side hand wheel on cause suffocation, even though it is
servicing manifold. nontoxic. It will produce poisonous gas
if exposed to open flame. Make sure
i. Close nitrogen valve and unscrew regulator work area is well ventilated, and there
adjusting screw on nitrogen source. Disconnect are no open flames or heating apparatus
yellow hose from nitrogen regulator fitting and in immediate area.
place loose end into clean 5-gallon container,
1/4-full of water.
CAUTION
NOTE

Too rapid release of pressure will

Improper purging or not purging air
remove oil from system.
from servicing lines will allow air and
j. Slowly open high side and low side hand water vapor to enter system, causing
wheels until small amount of bubbles is evident damage and reduced efficiency.
in water. Drain system until no bubbles appear
in container. Pressure gages should read 0 psig. b. Purge yellow hose of air by doing this:

k. Close high side and low side hand wheel and (1) Open valve on refrigerant bottle.
disconnect yellow hose.
(2) Loosen hose fitting at servicing manifold
1-3-27.1.3. Evacuating System. until a little gas comes out. Immediately
tighten fitting.
a. Connect yellow hose to vacuum pump and
center supply port on servicing manifold.
CAUTION
b. Turn on vacuum pump and open low side and
high side hand wheels. Operate pump for a
minimum of 1.5 hours after the low side gage Damage to compressor will occur if re-
reads between 29.5 and 29.9 in. Hg. frigerant bottle is not kept upright. Air
or water vapor may enter system. Keep
c. Turn off vacuum pump and close low side and
refrigerant bottle upright.
high side hand wheels.

d. Disconnect yellow hose from vacuum pump. c. Engage the following circuit breakers for the
ECS:
1-3-27.1.4. Recharging System.
(1) ECS PWR on NO. 1 DC PRI BUS
a. Connect yellow hose to refrigerant bottle and
center supply port side of servicing manifold. (2) ECS CONTR on NO. 2 DC PRI BUS

1-3-27-3
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-27

SIGHT GAGE

Air Conditioner
TEST Fault Indicator Panel

LOOP

LOW
PRESSURE
SERVICE
A A VALVE

HIGH
PRESSURE
SERVICE
VALVE

Air Conditioner
Circuit Breaker Panel

30

29

28

27

26 SERVICING
LIMIT
25

24
AMPERAGE

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

15
65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110
o
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE ( F)
AIR CONDITIONING SERVICE CHART − AMPERAGE / TEMPERATURE AA0112_1
SA

FIGURE 1-3-27-1. SERVICE/DESERVICE ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL SYSTEM

(SHEET 1 OF 2)

1-3-27-4
PARA 1-3-27 TM 1-70-23

ECS
TEMP CONT AIR COND Q/F
COOL HTR PWR
O O O
F F F
F F F
FAN ON ON
COOL WARM
A

AA0112_2
SA

FIGURE 1-3-27-1. SERVICE/DESERVICE ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL SYSTEM

(SHEET 2 OF 2)

d. Slowly open refrigerant, Item 261, Appendix i. Connect the clip-on multimeter to one phase of
D, bottle valve and low side and high side the compressor/motor electrical harness. Use
handwheels. test loop provided on electrical pallet.

e. When both gages are approximately equal,

j. Place a clean 5-gallon container under evapora-
close both handwheels.
tor drain.
f. Connect external electrical power cart to
helicopter (PARA 1-6-16). k. When back up pump has shut off, turn on ECS
by placing HTR switch to OFF and AIR
g. Turn on EXT PWR switch. COND switch to COOL (Figure 1-3-27-1,
h. Turn on all electrical power (PARA 1-6-16). Sheet 2, Detail A). Set TEMP to full COOL.

NOTE
Backup pump may run to charge APU
accumulators. ECS will not operate until
back up pump stops.

1-3-27-5
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-27

NOTE p. Recheck multimeter reading.

The evaporator blower will immediately q. If amperage is below servicing limit, repeat
start, the condenser blower will start steps m. and n.
after 5 seconds, and after 10 seconds the
compressor will start. r. If amperage is above servicing limit, do this:

l. Watch sight gage and multimeter while servic- (1) Make sure low side hand wheel and re-
ing. frigerant bottle valve are closed.

(2) Disconnect yellow hose from refrigerant

bottle and connect to inlet filter on refrig-
WARNING erant recovery and recycling station.

Injury to personnel and damage to

equipment will result if high pressure WARNING
handwheel is used to meter refrigerant
during recharging. Refrigerant supply • To prevent injury to personnel, observe
bottle may explode. Do not use high the following safety precautions when
pressure handwheel to meter refrigerant working on any part of the air-
during recharging. conditioning system:
m. Use low side handwheel to meter refrigerant • Protect skin and eyes from possible
into system until proper amperage value is contact with liquid refrigerant. Wear
achieved (Figure 1-3-27-1, Sheet 1). gloves and goggles. Keep your body as
well protected as you can from possible
contact with liquid refrigerant.
CAUTION
• If liquid refrigerant comes in contact
with the eyes or skin, get immediate
Compressor and motor will be damaged
medical aid.
and cooling efficiency reduced if system
is overserviced. Allow only enough re- • Refrigerant will displace air and can
frigerant into system to allow for ef- cause suffocation, even though it is
ficient operation. nontoxic. It will produce highly toxic
phosgene gas if exposed to open flame.
NOTE Make sure work area is well ventilated,
Optimum charge is reached at target and that there are no open flames, or un-
amperage. Refer to servicing chart when shielded heaters in immediate area.
servicing. Occasional bubbles in sight NOTE
glass is acceptable.
Do not open low side handwheel too
n. Compare ampmeter reading with servicing fast. Oil from system will be released.
chart (Figure 1-3-27-1, Sheet 1). Close low Open low side handwheel slowly.
side handwheel and refrigerant bottle valve
when amperage is at low end of servicing limit. (3) With system operating, slowly open low
Sight gage should just be at point of clearing side handwheel to allow small amounts of
(Figure 1-3-27-1, Sheet 1, Detail A). An oc- refrigerant out of system.
casional flow of bubbles is allowed.
(4) Observe ampmeter. Close low side hand-
o. Allow system to operate for 15 minutes wheel when amperage is within servicing
minimum. limit.

1-3-27-6
PARA 1-3-27 TM 1-70-23

s. Observe indicator dot in center of sight glass • If liquid refrigerant comes in contact
on refrigerant recovery and recycling station. with the eyes or skin, get immediate
Indications are as follows: medical aid.

(1) Yellow dot means moisture in system. • Refrigerant will displace air and can
Deservice, evacuate, and reservice system cause suffocation, even though it is
until dot turns green. If yellow dot does nontoxic. It will produce highly toxic
not disappear or turn green on second phosgene gas if exposed to open flame.
service, replace filter drier assembly Make sure work area is well ventilated,
(PARA 13-5-6). and that there are no open flames, or un-
shielded heaters in immediate area.
(2) Green dot indicates normal operating
conditions. No further servicing is neces- a. Open avionics compartment access door.
sary.
b. Connect low pressure (blue) hose to the low
t. Close low side and high side hand wheels and side of servicing manifold and the high pres-
refrigerant bottle valve. Remove yellow hose. sure (red) hose to the high side of servicing
manifold. Make sure manifold hand wheels are
u. Place AIR COND switch to OFF position. closed.

v. Turn off EXT POWER switch. c. Remove knurled brass covers from servicing
valves.
w. Turn off all external power (PARA 1-6-16).
d. Connect other end of hoses to color-coded
x. Record amount of refrigerant in system. servicing valves on helicopter.

y. Remove blue and red hoses from helicopter NOTE

servicing valves. Install caps on valves.
Blue hose will be on left side, red hose
z. Make sure area is clean and free of foreign will be on right side.
material.
e. Connect yellow hose to center supply port of
aa. Preserve and store servicing equipment. servicing manifold, and to inlet filter on refrig-
erant recovery and recycling station.
ab. Close avionics compartment access door.
f. Turn on all electrical power (PARA 1-6-16).
1-3-27.1.5. Deservice.
g. Turn on EXT PWR switch.

NOTE
WARNING
Back up hydraulic pump may run to
charge APU accumulator. ECS will not
• To prevent injury to personnel, observe operate until back up pump stops.
the following safety precautions when
working on any part of the air- h. When back up pump has shut off, turn on ECS
conditioning system: by placing HTR switch to OFF and AIR
COND switch to COOL. Set TEMP CONT to
• Protect skin and eyes from possible full COOL. Operate ECS for at least 5 minutes
contact with liquid refrigerant. Wear (Figure 1-3-27-1, Sheet 2, Detail A).
gloves and goggles. Keep your body as
well protected as you can from possible i. Set TEMP CONT to WARM. Operate ECS for
contact with liquid refrigerant. at least 2 minutes.

1-3-27-7
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-27

j. Place AIR COND switch to OFF. k. Recover and recycle refrigerant using refriger-
ant recovery and recycling station per manu-
facturer’s instructions.
WARNING
l. Turn off EXT PWR POWER switch.

• Refrigerant boils at -30°F (-34°C), and m. Turn off all external power (PARA 1-6-16).
will cause frostbite if spilled on
unprotected skin. To prevent personnel n. Remove blue and red hoses from helicopter
injury, wear gloves and eye protection servicing valves. Install caps on valves.
when purging refrigerant servicing
hoses. o. Remove yellow hose from inlet filter on rear of
recycling station.
• Refrigerant will displace air and can
cause suffocation, even though it is p. Make sure area is clean and free of foreign
nontoxic. It will produce highly toxic material.
phosgene gas if exposed to open flame.
Make sure work area is well ventilated, q. Preserve and store servicing equipment.
and that there are no open flames, or un-
shielded heaters in immediate area. r. Close avionics compartment access door.

1-3-27-8
PARA 1-3-28 TM 1-70-23

1-3-28 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL SYSTEM COMPRESSOR - SERVICE.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-3-28.1 Service Environmental 1-3-28-1

Control System Compres-
sor

INITIAL SETUP References

Tools
• Appendix D
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• PARA 1-3-27
• Torque Wrench, 150 - 750 in. lbs
Materials/Parts • PARA 2-4-69
• Lubricating Oil, Refrigerant Compressor, Item
209A, Appendix D

1-3-28.1 Service Environmental Control NOTE

System Compressor.
• Acceptable oil level is achieved when
NOTE oil level is shown in compressor site
glass. If sight glass is completely
• Should an unknown quantity of oil covered with oil this indicates an overfill
remain in a discharged or a shut down condition.
system, and there is no oil indication in
sight glass, pallets, lines, and • In event of an overfill condition, excess
components should be flushed and oil must be removed. Remove sight
compressor serviced to sight glass. glass and drain oil.

• Environmental control system must not c. Loosen sight glass on compressor to eliminate
be operating when checking compressor trapped air in compressor pump (Figure 1-3-
oil level. 28-1, Detail A).

a. Remove soundproofing panel from left side d. Disconnect discharge line from upper portion
rear bulkhead (PARA 2-4-69). of tee fitting and turn discharge line upright.
Temporarily cap tee to prevent moisture from
b. Deservice ECS of refrigerant (PARA 1-3-27). entering system.

1-3-28-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-28

DISCHARGE
LINE

ELBOW

COMPRESSOR /
MOTOR
TEE
FITTING

SIGHT GLASS
(TORQUE 150−250
IN. LBS)
AA1404A
SA

FIGURE 1-3-28-1. SERVICE ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL SYSTEM COMPRESSOR

filling, through discharge line into compressor.

CAUTION Fill until sight glass is covered half way.

f. TORQUE SIGHT GLASS TO 150 - 250

To prevent damage to compressor, INCH-POUNDS.
under no circumstances should more
than 1600 cc (54 oz) of oil be added at g. Remove cap and reconnect discharge hose to
one servicing. tee fitting.

e. Pour refrigerant compressor lubricating oil, h. Service ECS (PARA 1-3-27).

Item 209A, Appendix D, in 4 ounce (118 cc)
increments, allowing 2 minutes between each i. Install soundproofing panel (PARA 2-4-69).

1-3-28-2
PARA 1-3-29 TM 1-70-23

1-3-29 SERVICE MAIN ROTOR BLADE BIMT SYSTEM.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE PAGE

1-3-29.1 Service Main Rotor Blade 1-3-29-2 1-3-29.2 Test BIMt Pressure 1-3-29-6
BIMt System Indicator

INITIAL SETUP • Lockwire, Item 197, Appendix D

Tools • Machinery Towel, Item 211, Appendix D

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• Nitrogen, Item 221, Appendix D
• BIMt Check and Fill Unit, 70700-77669-041
References
• Torque Wrench, 30 - 150 in. lbs
• Appendix D
Materials/Parts

• Dishwashing Compound, Item 122, Appendix D • PARA 5-4-31

• Leak Detection Fluid, Item 189, Appendix D • PARA 5-4-34

1-3-29-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-29

1-3-29.1 Service Main Rotor Blade BIMT blade from sunlight, for blade spar tem-
System. perature to stabilize, before measuring
pressure in spar.
NOTE
• When helicopter is to be operated in
• Blades are serviced with prepurified dry extreme cold temperatures, generally
nitrogen, Item 221, Appendix D, using a below 0°F (-17.8°C), the blade may be
BIMt check and fill unit. serviced to 1 psi over the maximum al-
lowable pressure for the ambient tem-
• Pressure gage used in BIMt check and perature at the time of servicing.
fill unit is an absolute pressure type. Servicing must be performed in
This means that gage, when not con- controlled climate environment
nected to blade, measures and indicates otherwise the additional 1 psi should not
barometric pressure of the day in inches be added. Allow time for temperature to
of mercury, but, when connected to stabilize when the blade has been
blade, indicated in psi any pressure ap- exposed to outside air temperature.
plied to it above that barometric pres-
sure, up to a maximum of 20 psi(g). a. Allow unit to stand (with case open) near
Pointer position may vary from day to blades to be checked or filled for 5 minutes
day because of changes in barometric before proceeding.
pressure. Pointer variance is a normal
occurrence and should have no influence b. Close check and fill units pressure regulator
on use of checking and filling unit. No (turn knob fully counterclockwise position).
attempt should be made to zero pointer.
The only requirement in servicing blade c. Connect nitrogen supply hose (Figure 1-3-29-
is to bring pressure indicated on gage up 1) to NITROGEN SUPPLY (Schrader) valve
to pressure required for existing blade on unit. Open by loosening upper hexnut.
spar temperature, as shown in Table 1-3-
29-1. d. Remove BIM hose from lid of unit and attach
quick-disconnect coupling to mating coupling
• If blade, equipment, or nitrogen tank is on unit (labeled "TO BIM NIPPLE").
moved to an area of different tempera-
e. With other end of BIM hose ready to attach to
ture before servicing, for accurate
Schrader valve on blade, provide 30 to 40 psig
servicing in accordance with measured
to unit.
blade spar temperature, allow enough
time for temperature of these items to
f. Open pressure regulator to purge air from unit.
stabilize. For example, if temperature
change is from 0° to 70°F (-17.8° to g. Attach hose to Schrader valve on blade.
21.1°C), allow 5 hours for temperature
of nitrogen in blade, equipment, or tank h. Open blade Schrader valve by loosening upper
to stabilize. hexnut. Observe reading on gage. This is pres-
sure in the blade.
• Do not attempt to measure spar pressure
with blade exposed to sunlight. Solar i. Note temperature reading on ambient air tem-
heating of blade can raise spar pressure perature dial.
by over 2 psi above free-air-temperature
pressure, resulting in an inaccurate spar j. Consult Blade Pressure Chart Table 1-3-29-1
pressure measurement. Allow a to find correct blade pressure for that tempera-
minimum of 90 minutes after removing ture.

1-3-29-2
PARA 1-3-29 TM 1-70-23

ABSOLUTE
RELIEF PRESSURE
VALVE GAGE

NITROGEN SUPPLY
PRESSURE GAGE
BIM HOSE
SUPPLIED
WITH
CHECK &
NITROGEN FILL UNIT

FACILITY
NITROGEN TO BIM
SUPPLY
HOSE
BLADE

PRESSURE CHECK
NITROGEN REGULATOR VALVE
SOURCE

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

BIM
CHECK

FILL
UNIT NITROGEN TO BIM NIPPLE
SUPPLY CHECK
FILL

FILL

60
40 80

20 100

0 120 FILL

20 140

40 F 160

AMBIENT PRESSURE
AIR TEMPERATURE REGULATOR
ABSOLUTE
PRESSURE

STATION BIM HOSE

ABSOLUTE
REGULATOR PRESSURE
SHUTOFF GAGE
NITROGEN CYLINDER KNOB
SUPPLY REGULATOR
HOSE

AB2459
SA

FIGURE 1-3-29-1. SERVICE MAIN ROTOR BLADE BIMt SYSTEM

1-3-29-3
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-29

Table 1-3-29-1. Blade Pressures Chart

Blade Spar Temperature Permissible Blade Pressure (PSI)

(Note 1 and 5) (Notes 2, 3, and 4)
Degrees C Degrees F Minimum Minimum Minimum Maximum
When Check- When Install- When Servicing
ing Installed ing Blade Blade
Blade

70 to 72 158 to 162 12.50 14.00 14.25 14.50

67 to 69 153 to 157 12.25 13.75 14.00 14.25
64 to 66 148 to 152 12.00 13.50 13.75 14.00
61 to 63 143 to 147 11.75 13.25 13.50 13.75
59 to 60 138 to 142 11.50 13.00 13.25 13.50
56 to 58 133 to 137 11.25 12.75 13.00 13.25
53 to 55 128 to 132 11.00 12.50 12.75 13.00
50 to 52 123 to 127 10.75 12.25 12.50 12.75
48 to 49 118 to 122 10.50 12.00 12.25 12.50
42 to 47 108 to 117 10.25 11.75 12.00 12.25
39 to 41 103 to 107 10.00 11.50 11.75 12.00
36 to 38 98 to 102 9.75 11.25 11.50 11.75
34 to 35 93 to 97 9.50 11.00 11.25 11.50
31 to 33 88 to 92 9.25 10.75 11.00 11.25
28 to 30 83 to 87 9.00 10.50 10.75 11.00
25 to 27 78 to 82 8.75 10.25 10.50 10.75
23 to 24 73 to 77 8.50 10.00 10.25 10.50
20 to 22 68 to 72 8.50 9.75 10.00 10.25
17 to 19 63 to 67 8.25 9.50 9.75 10.00
14 to 16 58 to 62 8.00 9.25 9.50 9.75
12 to 13 53 to 57 7.75 9.00 9.25 9.50
9 to 11 48 to 52 7.50 8.75 9.00 9.25
6 to 8 43 to 47 7.25 8.50 8.75 9.00
3 to 5 38 to 42 7.00 8.25 8.50 8.75
1 to 2 33 to 37 6.75 8.00 8.25 8.50
-5 to 0 23 to 32 6.50 7.75 8.00 8.25
-7 to -6 18 to 22 6.25 7.50 7.75 8.00
-10 to -8 13 to 17 6.00 7.00 7.25 7.50
-15 to -14 3 to 7 5.50 6.75 7.00 7.25
-18 to -16 -2 to 2 5.25 6.50 6.75 7.00
-21 to -19 -7 to -3 5.00 6.25 6.50 6.75
-24 to -22 -12 to -8 4.75 6.00 6.25 6.50
-27 to -25 -17 to -13 4.50 5.75 6.00 6.25
-30 to -28 -22 to -18 4.50 5.50 5.75 6.00
-32 to -31 -27 to -23 4.25 5.25 5.50 5.75
-35 to -33 -32 to -28 4.00 5.00 5.25 5.50
-38 to -36 -37 to -33 3.75 4.75 5.00 5.25

1-3-29-4
PARA 1-3-29 TM 1-70-23

Table 1-3-29-1. Blade Pressures Chart (Cont)

Blade Spar Temperature Permissible Blade Pressure (PSI)

(Note 1 and 5) (Notes 2, 3, and 4)
Degrees C Degrees F Minimum Minimum Minimum Maximum
When Check- When Install- When Servicing
ing Installed ing Blade Blade
Blade

-41 to -39 -42 to -38 3.50 4.50 4.75 5.00

-46 to -42 -52 to -43 3.25 4.25 4.50 4.75
-49 to -47 -57 to -53 3.00 4.00 4.25 4.50
-52 to -50 -62 to -58 2.75 3.75 4.00 4.25
-55 to -53 -67 to -63 2.50 3.50 3.75 4.00

NOTES

1. This table is for measured blade spar temperature with nitrogen in blade spar at a stabilized tem-
perature. If blade is moved to an area of different temperature before servicing or checking spar
pressure, allow enough time for temperature of nitrogen in spar to stabilize. For example, if tem-
perature change is from 0 - 70°F (-17.8 - 21.1°C), allow five hours for temperature of nitrogen in
blade to stabilize. When servicing blade, also allow an equivalent period of time for temperature
of equipment and nitrogen tank to stabilize.

2. Servicing pressures listed provide an allowance for normal nonsignificant leakage that can occur
between servicing intervals, before blade pressure indicator will start to show red.

3. Pressure gage used in checking unit or BIMt check and fill unit is an absolute pressure type.
This means that gage, when not connected to blade, measures and indicates barometric pressure
of the day in inches of mercury, but, when connected to blade, indicates in psi any pressure ap-
plied to it above that barometric pressure, up to a maximum of 20 psi(g). Pointer position may
vary from day to day because of changes in barometric pressure. Pointer variance is a normal oc-
currence and should have no influence on use of checking unit or BIMt check and fill unit. No
attempt should be made to zero pointer.

4. It is not mandatory that spar pressure of each blade to be installed be checked against "MINI-
MUM WHEN INSTALLING BLADE" column if spar pressure has been checked within last 6
months. However, this practice is recommended to obtain maximum service from blade.

5. Round off measured blade temperature reading to nearest degree.

k. To fill blade, open pressure regulator until gage m. Pressure in spar should be checked periodically
indicates desired pressure. by turning station valve shutoff knob fully
clockwise and noting reading on gage at station
l. After one minute has elapsed, close pressure regulator. When pressure in blade spar has
regulator and observe gage reading after it reached specified limit, shut off nitrogen supply
stabilizes.

1-3-29-5
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-29

at station valve by turning station valve shutoff replaced, but only if spar pressure is
knob fully clockwise. Check gage at station within permissible limits.
regulator for a reading within limits specified
for measured blade spar temperature.
CAUTION
n. Close blade Schrader valve. TORQUE
OUTER HEXNUT TO 50 - 70 INCH-
POUNDS. Lockwire, Item 197, Appendix D, Spar pressure loss may result if indicator
outer hexnut to body of Schrader valve. lever is not depressed fully when testing
indicator. A partly depressed plunger
o. Turn off nitrogen supply and remove hose from may cause loss of spar pressure and a
Schrader valve. slow indication, or no indication at all.
When testing pressure indicator, valve
p. Bleed residual pressure from unit. plunger under manual lever must be
pushed all the way down. This will shut
q. Disconnect hose from unit and stow in lid of off all spar pressure. It may be necessary
unit. to use both thumbs to do this. Also,
press on ridged part of handle, not on
r. Close and cap nitrogen supply Schrader valve. smooth tip.

s. Close pressure regulator. NOTE

t. Check air valve for leakage, especially in stem • The pressure indicator compensates for
area, by applying a liquid, such as leak detec- changes in temperature and compares a
tion fluid, Item 189, Appendix D, or dishwash- reference pressure, built into the indica-
ing compound, Item 122, Appendix D. tor, with the spar pressure. When the
pressure in the blade is within the
u. When check is complete and before test liquid required limits, the slots in the cylinder
dries, clean air thoroughly with clean, fresh show yellow, indicating that the blade is
water to remove all traces of liquid, then dry serviceable. If the pressure in the spar
blade using machinery towel, Item 211, Ap- drops below the minimum permissible
pendix D. service limits, the indicator shows red,
an unsafe indication.
v. Test BIMt pressure indicator (PARA 1-3-
29.2). • Do not hold indicator, as heat of hand
may change internal reference pressure
1-3-29.2 Test BIMT Pressure Indicator. and result in erroneous indicator read-
ing.

WARNING a. Press in and hold manual test lever (grenade-

type handle) (Figure 1-3-29-2). Do not place
hand on glass bulb.
Injury to personnel and damage to
equipment will result if blade with b. If indicator is operating properly, a full red
indicator showing any red is continued (unsafe) indication must show within 10 to 30
in service. Any blade on which the pres- seconds. When lever is released, the red indica-
sure indicator shows any red color must tion must snap back immediately, leaving an
be removed from service until the cause all yellow (safe) condition.
of the unsafe (red) indication is
positively found and corrected. If the c. The 10 to 30-second time limit applies when
indicator is malfunctioning it must be temperature is 20°F (-6.7°C) or above. At any

1-3-29-6
PARA 1-3-29 TM 1-70-23

FULL RED
YELLOW RED INDICATION
(SEE NOTE)

MANUAL
SPAR MANUAL ADAPTER TEST LEVER
TEST LEVER FULLY
DEPRESSED

PRESSURE NORMAL LOW−PRESSURE INDICATION TEST RESPONSE

NOTE
ONLY FULL RED INDICATION IS ACCEPTABLE
DURING TEST. INDICATOR MUST RETURN
IMMEDIATELY TO NORMAL YELLOW
INDICATION FOLLOWING TEST. AK1382
SA

FIGURE 1-3-29-2. TEST BIMt PRESSURE INDICATOR

lower temperature, extend upper limit to the

corresponding time listed:
d. Make an entry in helicopter logbook stating
Temperature Time reason for removal, whenever a blade is
removed from service.
19° to 0°F (-7.2° to 35 seconds
-17.8°C)
e. If indicator does not meet these requirements
-1° to -20°F (-18.3° 40 seconds and spar pressure is within permissible limits,
to -28.9°C) replace indicator (PARA 5-4-34). If spar pres-
sure is below permissible limit, replace blade
-21° to -40°F (-29.4° 50 seconds (PARA 5-4-31). Forward blade with low spar
to -40.0°C) pressure to BENCH for repair.

-41° to -60°F (-40.5° 60 seconds

to -51.1°C)

1-3-29-7/(1-3-29-8 Blank)
PARA 1-3-30 TM 1-70-23

1-3-30 SERVICE HYDRAULIC RESCUE HOIST.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-3-30.1 Service Hydraulic Rescue 1-3-30-1

Hoist

INITIAL SETUP References

Tools
• Appendix D
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• PARA 14-4-9
Materials/Parts
• Lockwire, Item 195, Appendix D
• Lubricating Oil, Item 205, Appendix D

1-3-30.1 Service Hydraulic Rescue Hoist. (7) Install rescue hoist forward cowling
(PARA 14-4-9).
NOTE
b. Service rescue hoist with oil plug as follows:
Some rescue hoists have oil plugs while
(1) Remove oil plug and packing from oil
others have sight gages.
overflow port (Figure 1-3-30-1, Detail B).
a. Service rescue hoist with sight gage as follows: (2) If oil level is below oil overflow port,
service as follows:
(1) Check sight gage to determine oil level
(Figure 1-3-30-1, Detail B). (a) Remove rescue hoist forward cowl-
ing (PARA 14-4-9).
(2) If oil is required, remove rescue hoist
front cowling (PARA 14-4-9). (b) Remove oil filler cap (Figure 1-3-30-
1, Detail A).
(3) Remove oil filler cap (Figure 1-3-30-1,
Detail A). (c) Fill with lubricating oil, Item 205,
Appendix D, until oil flows from
(4) Fill to FULL mark on sight gage with overflow port.
lubricating oil, Item 205, Appendix D. (d) Install oil plug and packing into
overflow port (Figure 1-3-30-1,
(5) Install oil filler cap. Lockwire, Item 195, Detail B). Lockwire, Item 195, Ap-
Appendix D, cap. pendix D, plug.
(6) Make sure area is clean and free of (e) Make sure area is clean and free of
foreign material. foreign material.

1-3-30-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-30

(f) Install rescue hoist forward cowling

(PARA 14-4-9).

1-3-30-2
PARA 1-3-30 TM 1-70-23

OIL FILLER CAP

A A
B

OIL LEVEL
SIGHT GAGE
(SEE NOTE)
OIL PLUG
PACKING
(SEE NOTE)

NOTE
SOME RESCUE HOISTS HAVE OIL
PLUGS INSTALLED WHILE OTHERS
HAVE LEVEL SIGHT GAGES. FC4137
SA

FIGURE 1-3-30-1. SERVICE HYDRAULIC RESCUE HOIST

1-3-30-3/(1-3-30-4 Blank)
PARA 1-3-31 TM 1-70-23

1-3-31 SERVICE ELECTRIC RESCUE HOIST.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-3-31.1 Service Electric Rescue 1-3-31-1

Hoist

INITIAL SETUP References

Tools
• Appendix D
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• PARA 14-4-9
• Syringe, 50cc
Materials/Parts
• Lockwire, Item 196, Appendix D
• Lubricating Oil, Item 205, Appendix D

1-3-31.1 Service Electric Rescue Hoist. for oil setting before check. Use lubricating oil,
Item 205, Appendix D, when servicing. To add
lubricating oil (17 oz required), perform the
CAUTION following:

(1) Remove forward cowling (PARA 14-4-9).

Damage to cable will occur if cable is
lubricated. Cable lubrication is strictly (2) Remove oil filler plug/dipstick and
prohibited. Cable must be completely packing/retainer from motor mount. Clean
clean to ensure proper tensioning. oil dipstick.

(3) Insert and thread dipstick to check oil

NOTE
level. Repeat if required.
Oil must be checked via an access plug (4) Using syringe, add lubricating oil, Item
at 6 month intervals of hoist operating 205, Appendix D, as necessary.
time.
(5) Install oil fill plug/dipstick, packing/
a. Check oil level on oil dipstick at 6 month retainer in motor mount. Lockwire, Item
intervals of hoist operating time (Figure 1-3- 196, Appendix D.
31-1, Detail A). Hoist must be mounted in
normal operating position. Allow 15 minutes (6) Install forward cowling (PARA 14-4-9).

1-3-31-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-3-31

OIL FILLER PLUG /

DIPSTICK

PACKING / RETAINER

MOTOR
MOUNT

OUTBD

NOTE
VIEWED FROM FRONT.

FO0619
SA

FIGURE 1-3-31-1. SERVICE ELECTRIC RESCUE HOIST

1-3-31-2
 TM 1-70-23

SECTION 1-4

CLEANING

SECTION OVERVIEW

PARAGRAPH TITLE

1-4-1 Cleaning Requirements

1-4-2 Clean Flight Controls and Hydraulic Deck

1-4-3 Clean Helicopter Exterior

1-4-4 Clean Engine

1-4-5 Clean Main and Tail Rotor Blades

1-4-6 Clean Main Rotor Blade Expandable Pins

1-4-7 Clean Main Rotor Head

1-4-8 Clean Powertrain

1-4-9 Clean Cargo Hook

1-4-10 Clean Main and Tail Landing Gear

1-4-11 Clean Tail Wheel Lockpin

1-4-12 Clean Tail Wheel Tow Adapters

1-4-13 Clean Crew Chief’s/Passenger’s Seats

1-4-14 Clean Main Rotor Deice Slipring and Brush Block

1-4-15 Clean Tail Rotor Deice Slipring

1-4-16 Clean Ejector Rack, BRU-22A/A

1-4-17 Clean Windshield Wiper Pivot Studs

1-4-18 Clean Cockpit Door Window

1-4-19 Clean Pilot’s/Copilot’s Seats Sliding Backframe

1-4-20 Clean Soundproofing Panels and Airframe Behind Panels

1-4-1
TM 1-70-23

PARAGRAPH TITLE

1-4-21 Clean Central Display Unit Faceplate

1-4-22 Clean Pilot Display Unit Faceplate

1-4-23 Clean Blackout Curtains

1-4-24 Clean Exterior Surface of External Fuel Tank

1-4-25 Clean Hydraulic Rescue Hoist

1-4-26 Clean FLIR System

1-4-27 Clean APU Engine Air Particle Separator (EAPS)

1-4-28 Clean Electric Rescue Hoist

1-4-2
PARA 1-4-1 TM 1-70-23

1-4-1 CLEANING REQUIREMENTS.

1-4-1.1 Scope. ing may need to increase to make sure of safe
flight.
This section contains cleaning procedures. Clean-
ing intervals may be dependent upon 1-4-1.2 Work Platforms.
environmental conditions or specific time intervals.
When unusual local conditions of environment, Work platforms located on engine cowlings
utilization, mission, experience of flight crew and provide access to the engines. Each platform is
maintenance personnel, or periods of inactivity are capable of supporting a static weight of 400
encountered, the scope and/or frequency of clean- pounds.

1-4-1-1/(1-4-1-2 Blank)
PARA 1-4-2 TM 1-70-23

1-4-2 CLEAN FLIGHT CONTROLS AND HYDRAULIC DECK.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-4-2.1 Clean Flight Controls and 1-4-2-1

Hydraulic Deck

INITIAL SETUP • Machinery Towel, Item 211, Appendix D

Tools
References
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• Appendix D
Materials/Parts
• Alcohol, Ethyl, Item 71, Appendix D
• Hydraulic Fluid, Item 155, Appendix D

1-4-2.1 Clean Flight Controls and Hydraulic b. Clean mixer, primary servos, and hydraulic
Deck. deck with ethyl alcohol, Item 71, Appendix D.

c. Wipe up remaining ethyl alcohol with a clean,

CAUTION dry machinery towel, Item 211, Appendix D.

d. Wipe down exposed portion of servo pushrods

To prevent buildup of static electricity, with a clean machinery towel, Item 211, Ap-
ground helicopter during cleaning pendix D, soaked in hydraulic fluid, Item 155,
operations. Appendix D.

a. Open main rotor pylon sliding cover. e. Close and latch main rotor pylon sliding cover.

1-4-2-1/(1-4-2-2 Blank)
PARA 1-4-3 TM 1-70-23

1-4-3 CLEAN HELICOPTER EXTERIOR.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-4-3.1 Clean Helicopter Exterior 1-4-3-1

INITIAL SETUP • Corrosion Preventive Compound, Item 115, Ap-

pendix D
Tools
• Dry-Cleaning Solvent, Item 124, Appendix D
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit

• Brush • Masking Tape, 1-Inch, Item 212, Appendix D

• Foam Generator, Spray, or Sponge • Masking Tape, 1 1/2-Inches, Item 213, Appendix D

Materials/Parts
• Masking Tape, 2-Inches, Item 214, Appendix D
• Barrier Material, Item 80, Appendix D
• Masking Tape, 3-Inches, Item 215, Appendix D
• Cleaning Compound, Solvent, Item 100, Appendix
D References
• Cloth
• Appendix D
• Corrosion Preventive Compound, Item 114, Ap-
pendix D • PARA 1-2-1

1-4-3.1 Clean Helicopter Exterior. extinguisher directional valve, or mixer

bellcranks while cleaning helicopter.
a. Open main rotor pylon sliding cover.
b. Cover electric actuators (trim, stabilator, and
tailwheel), backup pump motor, main and APU
CAUTION generators, fire extinguisher directional valve,
and mixer assembly with barrier material, Item
80, Appendix D, and secure with masking tape,
Do not water wash electric actuators Item 212 through Item 215, Appendix D.
(trim, stabilator, tailwheel, backup pump
motor, main, and APU generators), fire c. Close main rotor pylon sliding cover.

1-4-3-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-4-3

d. Close all panels, covers, and hatches prior to • To prevent alkaline water-base cleaning
washing (PARA 1-2-1). solution from drying, have rinse water
readily available. Cleaning will be less
effective if alkaline water-base solution
CAUTION
is allowed to dry.

• To prevent buildup of static electricity, e. Clean helicopter per Table 1-4-3-1.

ground helicopter during cleaning
operations. f. Open main rotor pylon sliding cover.
• To prevent damage to helicopter, do not
g. Remove barrier material covering electric ac-
use high-pressure water, steam-cleaning
tuators (trim, stabilator, and tailwheel), backup
equipment, or high-pressure air.
pump motor, main and APU generators, fire
• Damage to tail drive shaft bearings and extinguisher directional valve, and mixer as-
pitch control shaft bearing will result if sembly.
exposed to cleaning solvents. Cleaning
solvents can penetrate bearing seals and h. If cleaning compounds contacted tail rotor
dissolve grease. Do not spray cleaning pitch beam area, reapply corrosion preventive
solvents on tail drive shaft bearings and compound, Item 114 or Item 115, Appendix D,
pitch control shaft bearing in tail gear to exterior surfaces of pitch beam retaining nut
box. and washer.
NOTE
i. Close and latch main rotor pylon sliding cover.
• Use only approved cleaning compounds
listed in this task.

Table 1-4-3-1. Cleaning

Type of Soil Cleaning Agent or Mixing Directions Cleaning Procedure

Compound

Light soils Solvent Cleaning Type II - 1 part Apply cleaning compound

(dirt, dust, mud, salt, Compound, cleaning compound solution with foam generator,
loose soot) Type II , Item 100, to 9 parts water. spray, sponge, or cloth. Scrub
Appendix D and then rinse with fresh water.
or Type I - 1 part Dry surface after rinse.
Solvent Cleaning cleaning compound
Compound, to 16 parts water.
Type I, Item 100,
Appendix D

1-4-3-2
PARA 1-4-3 TM 1-70-23

Table 1-4-3-1. Cleaning (Cont)

Type of Soil Cleaning Agent or Mixing Directions Cleaning Procedure

Compound

Moderate soils Solvent Cleaning Type II - 1 part Apply cleaning compound

(hydraulic fluids, Compound, cleaning compound solution with foam generator,
lubrication oils, light Type II, Item 100, to 4 parts water. spray, sponge, or cloth. Rub
preservatives) Appendix D gently with a circular motion
or Type I - 1 part for up to one minute. Rinse
Solvent Cleaning cleaning compound with fresh water. Dry surface
Compound, to 9 parts water. after rinse.
Type I, Item 100,
Appendix D

Heavy soils Solvent Cleaning Undiluted Spray or brush on cleaning

(carbonized oil, aged Compound, compound. Wait 5 to 10
preservatives, grease, Type V, Item 100, minutes. Brush surface to
gun blast, exhaust Appendix D remove soil. Rinse with fresh
deposits) or water. Dry surface after rinse.
Solvent Cleaning
Compound,
Type I, Item 100,
Appendix D

Dry-Cleaning Dry-Cleaning Preclean surface by wiping or

Solvent, Solvent - Undiluted. brushing soiled area with dry-
Type II or Type III, cleaning solvent. Apply clean-
Item 124, Appendix ing compound solution with
D foam generator, spray, sponge,
and Cleaning Compound, or cloth. Wait one minute.
Solvent Cleaning Type I - 1 part Scrub surface for one minute.
Compound, cleaning compound Rinse with fresh water. Dry
Type I or Type II, to 4 parts water surface after rinse.
Item 100, Appendix or
D Cleaning Compound,
Type II - 1 part
cleaning compound
to 1 part water.

1-4-3-3/(1-4-3-4 Blank)
PARA 1-4-4 TM 1-70-23

1-4-4 CLEAN ENGINE.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-4-4.1 Clean Engine 1-4-4-1

INITIAL SETUP • TM 1-2840-248-23

References

• SEI 671

1-4-4.1 Clean Engine.

Refer to SEI 671 and TM 1-2840-248-23 for
engine cleaning and washing instructions.

1-4-4-1/(1-4-4-2 Blank)
PARA 1-4-5 TM 1-70-23

1-4-5 CLEAN MAIN AND TAIL ROTOR BLADES.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-4-5.1 Clean Main and Tail Ro- 1-4-5-1

tor Blades

INITIAL SETUP • Corrosion Preventive Compound, Item 115, Ap-

pendix D
Tools
• Hand Cleaner, Item 153, Appendix D
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• Litmus Paper, Item 191, Appendix D
Materials/Parts
• Machinery Towel, Item 211, Appendix D
• Cleaning Compound, Item 94, Appendix D
References
• Corrosion Preventive Compound, Item 114, Ap-
pendix D • Appendix D

1-4-5.1 Clean Main and Tail Rotor Blades. not use steam cleaning equipment or
high-pressure water.
NOTE

• Use only approved cleaning compounds • Damage to pitch control shaft bearing
listed in this task. will result if exposed to cleaning
solvents. Cleaning solvents can pene-
• To prevent alkaline water-base cleaning trate bearing seal and dissolve grease.
solution from drying, have rinse water Do not spray cleaning solvents on pitch
readily available. Cleaning will be less control shaft bearing in tail gear box.
effective if alkaline water-base solution
is allowed to dry. b. Wash rotor blades beginning at lowest point of
part being cleaned.
a. Dilute 1 part cleaning compound, Item 94, Ap-
pendix D, with 9 parts water by volume. If c. Rinse parts beginning at highest point of part
parts being cleaned are heavily soiled, dilute 1 being cleaned.
part cleaning compound with no less than 4
parts water by volume. d. Check cleaned parts after rinsing by doing this:

CAUTION (1) Draw a piece of red litmus paper, Item

191, Appendix D, against wetted surface.

• Steam or water under pressure may (2) If red litmus paper turns blue, repeat rins-
enter and separate adhesive bond. Do ing.

1-4-5-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-4-5

e. If water is not available, or temperatures do not f. Apply corrosion preventive compound, Item
permit using water, do this: 114 or Item 115, Appendix D, to exterior
surfaces of tail rotor pitch beam retaining nut
(1) Clean main and tail rotor blades with and washer.
hand cleaner, Item 153, Appendix D.
(2) Wipe off blades with a clean machinery
towel, Item 211, Appendix D.

1-4-5-2
PARA 1-4-6 TM 1-70-23

1-4-6 CLEAN MAIN ROTOR BLADE EXPANDABLE PINS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-4-6.1 Clean Main Rotor Blade 1-4-6-1

Expandable Pins

INITIAL SETUP References

Tools
• Appendix D
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• PARA 5-3-9
Materials/Parts
• Dry-Cleaning Solvent, Item 124, Appendix D
• Machinery Towel, Item 211, Appendix D

1-4-6.1 Clean Main Rotor Blade Expandable d. Wipe up remaining solvent with clean
Pins. machinery towel, Item 211, Appendix D.

a. Release spring clip portion of cam handle from

e. Check spring tension on expandable pins
nut and open cam handle.
(PARA 5-3-9).
b. Raise cam handle to the fully unlocked (open)
position.
c. Hand-clean or spray-wash lower ring, protrud-
ing below blade cuff, with dry-cleaning
solvent, Item 124, Appendix D.

1-4-6-1/(1-4-6-2 Blank)
PARA 1-4-7 TM 1-70-23

1-4-7 CLEAN MAIN ROTOR HEAD.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-4-7.1 Clean Main Rotor Head 1-4-7-1

INITIAL SETUP • Machinery Towel, Item 211, Appendix D

Tools • Masking Tape, 1-Inch, Item 212, Appendix D

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• Masking Tape, 1 1/2-Inches, Item 213, Appendix D
Materials/Parts
• Masking Tape, 2-Inches, Item 214, Appendix D
• Cleaning Compound, Item 94, Appendix D
• Masking Tape, 3-Inches, Item 215, Appendix D
• Cloth, Coated, Item 103, Appendix D

• Hand Cleaner, Item 153, Appendix D References

• Litmus Paper, Item 191, Appendix D • Appendix D

1-4-7.1 Clean Main Rotor Head.

CAUTION
a. Cover inspection holes on main rotor hub using
masking tape, Item 212 through Item 215, Ap-
pendix D. There are four, 2-inch holes on each Damage to elastomeric bearings will
hub arm. result if cleaning solution is not rinsed
off. Cleaning solution will damage rub-
NOTE
ber. Do not allow cleaning solution to
• Use only approved cleaning compounds remain on elastomeric bearings.
listed in this task.
d. Rinse parts beginning at highest point of part
• To prevent alkaline water-base cleaning being washed.
solution drying, have rinse water avail-
able. Cleaning will be less effective if e. Check cleaned parts after rinsing by doing this:
alkaline water-base solution is allowed
to dry. (1) Draw a piece of red litmus paper, Item
191, Appendix D, against wetted surface.
b. Dilute 1 part cleaning compound, Item 94, Ap-
pendix D, with 9 parts water by volume. (2) If red litmus paper turns blue, repeat rins-
ing.
c. Wash painted surfaces of main rotor head and
attaching components, beginning at lowest f. If water is not available, or temperatures do not
point of part being cleaned. permit the use of water, do this:

1-4-7-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-4-7

(1) Clean main rotor head with hand cleaner, g. Remove dirt or grease from swashplate guide
Item 153, Appendix D. and bearing by wiping with coated cloth, Item
103, Appendix D.
(2) Wipe off main rotor head with a clean
machinery towel, Item 211, Appendix D.

1-4-7-2
PARA 1-4-8 TM 1-70-23

1-4-8 CLEAN POWERTRAIN.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-4-8.1 Clean Powertrain 1-4-8-2

INITIAL SETUP • Corrosion Preventive Compound, Item 115, Ap-

pendix D
Tools
• Dry-Cleaning Solvent, Item 124, Appendix D
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• Machinery Towel, Item 211, Appendix D
Materials/Parts

• Corrosion Preventive Compound, Item 113, Ap- References

pendix D
• Appendix D
• Corrosion Preventive Compound, Item 114, Ap-
pendix D • PARA 1-2-1

1-4-8-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-4-8

1-4-8.1 Clean Powertrain. penetrate bearing seals and dissolve

grease. Do not spray corrosion preven-
tive compounds on tail drive shaft and
CAUTION cooler axial fan bearings.

c. Apply corrosion preventive compound, Item

To prevent damage to powertrain, do not 113, Appendix D, on special couplings and
use high-pressure water, steam-cleaning drive shaft hardware.
equipment, or high-pressure air.

a. Remove access panels and fairings (PARA CAUTION

1-2-1).

Damage to pitch control shaft bearing

CAUTION will result if exposed to cleaning
solvents. Cleaning solvents can pene-
trate bearing seal and dissolve grease.
Damage to tail drive shaft and oil cooler Do not spray cleaning solvents on pitch
axial fan bearings will result if exposed control shaft bearing in tail gear box.
to cleaning solvent. Cleaning solvent
can penetrate bearing seals and dissolve d. Hand-clean or spray-wash main transmission,
grease. Do not spray cleaning solvents input and accessory modules, intermediate and
on tail drive shaft or cooler axial fan tail gear boxes, with dry-cleaning solvent, Item
bearings. 124, Appendix D.

b. Hand-clean drive shafts with dry-cleaning e. If dry-cleaning solvent contacted tail rotor
solvent, Item 124, Appendix D. pitch beam area, reapply corrosion preventive
compound, Item 114 or Item 115, Appendix D,
to exterior surface of pitch beam retaining nut
CAUTION and washer.

f. W i p e u p r e m a i n i n g s o l v e n t w i t h c l e a n
Damage to tail drive shaft and oil cooler machinery towel, Item 211, Appendix D.
axial fan bearings will result if exposed
to corrosion preventive compounds. g. Install access panels and fairings (PARA 1-2-
Corrosion preventive compounds can 1).

1-4-8-2
PARA 1-4-9 TM 1-70-23

1-4-9 CLEAN CARGO HOOK.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-4-9.1 Clean Cargo Hook 1-4-9-1

INITIAL SETUP References

Tools • PARA 12-4-57

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• PARA 12-4-58
• Brush, Soft Bristle

• Protection, Eye

1-4-9.1 Clean Cargo Hook.

WARNING
a. Remove cartridge-actuated device prior to
cleaning (PARA 12-4-58).
Injury to personnel will result if precau-
b. Flush interior and exterior of hook with clean tions are not taken while using
tap water at normal pressure. compressed air. Do not point hose
towards personnel when blowing
compressed air through hose. Make sure
CAUTION
all personnel are wearing safety glasses
when compressed air is being used.
To prevent damage to, or faulty opera-
tion of cargo hook, do not open electri- e. Dry interior and exterior surfaces of hook with
cal box. Seal must remain intact. compressed air (15 psig maximum).

c. While flushing interior of hook, manually oper- f. If after two successive cleanings, the hook still
ate release lever and load arm. fails to operate properly, refer to normal
maintenance procedures (PARA 12-4-57).
d. While flushing exterior surfaces of hook,
loosen dirt by wiping or brushing with a soft g. Install cartridge-actuated device (PARA 12-4-
bristle brush. 58).

1-4-9-1/(1-4-9-2 Blank)
PARA 1-4-10 TM 1-70-23

1-4-10 CLEAN MAIN AND TAIL LANDING GEAR.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-4-10.1 Clean Main and Tail 1-4-10-1

Landing Gear

INITIAL SETUP • Machinery Towel, Item 211, Appendix D

Tools
References
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• Appendix D
Materials/Parts
• Dishwashing Compound, Item 122, Appendix D
• Dry-Cleaning Solvent, Item 124, Appendix D

1-4-10.1 Clean Main and Tail Landing Gear.

CAUTION

CAUTION

Do not use dry-cleaning solvent to clean

To prevent damage to equipment, do not tires.
water-wash wheels, piston cavities,
brake parts, activators, switches, and c. Clean tires with tap water and two ounces of
other moisture sensitive equipment. dishwashing compound, Item 122, Appendix
D, per gallon of water.
a. Clean wheels and bearing covers thoroughly
with dry-cleaning solvent, Item 124, Appendix
D. d. Rinse parts, beginning at highest point of parts
being cleaned.
b. Dry wheels and covers with a clean machinery
towel, Item 211, Appendix D.

1-4-10-1/(1-4-10-2 Blank)
PARA 1-4-11 TM 1-70-23

1-4-11 CLEAN TAIL WHEEL LOCKPIN.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-4-11.1 Clean Tail Wheel Lockpin 1-4-11-1

INITIAL SETUP References

Tools
• Appendix D
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
Materials/Parts
• Grease, Item 149, Appendix D
• Machinery Towel, Item 211, Appendix D

1-4-11.1 Clean Tail Wheel Lockpin. c. Lightly coat lockpin with grease, Item 149, Ap-
pendix D. Actuate lockpin by hand to make
1-4-11.1.1. Every 500 Hours. sure it is completely coated with grease.

a. Manually unlock tail wheel lockpin.

b. Clean old grease from lockpin with a clean

machinery towel, Item 211, Appendix D.

1-4-11-1/(1-4-11-2 Blank)
PARA 1-4-12 TM 1-70-23

1-4-12 CLEAN TAIL WHEEL TOW ADAPTERS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-4-12.1 Clean Tail Wheel Tow 1-4-12-1

Adapters

INITIAL SETUP • Machinery Towel, Item 211, Appendix D

Tools
• Methyl Ethyl Ketone, Item 217, Appendix D
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
References
Materials/Parts
• Corrosion Preventive Compound, Item 112, Ap- • Appendix D
pendix D

1-4-12.1 Clean Tail Wheel Tow Adapters. a. Clean tail wheel tow adapters using machinery
towel, Item 211, Appendix D, dampened with
NOTE methyl ethyl ketone, Item 217, Appendix D.

• Tail wheel tow adapters shall be cleaned b. Wipe up remaining methyl ethyl ketone, Item
after every 100 flight hours or if inspec- 217, Appendix D, with clean machinery towel,
tion shows that dirt or foreign material Item 211, Appendix D.
has built-up in the adapters.

• Tail wheel tow adapters are installed in c. Apply a coating of corrosion preventive
both ends of the tail landing gear axle compound, Item 112, Appendix D, to tail
and are bonded in place. wheel tow adapters.

1-4-12-1/(1-4-12-2 Blank)
PARA 1-4-13 TM 1-70-23

1-4-13 CLEAN CREW CHIEF’S/PASSENGER’S SEATS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-4-13.1 Clean Crew Chief’s/ 1-4-13-1

Passenger’s Seats

INITIAL SETUP Materials/Parts

Tools • Cleaning Compound, Solvent, Item 100, Appendix

D
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• Brush References

• Sponge • Appendix D

1-4-13.1 Clean Crew Chief’s/Passenger’s c. Apply cleaning compound solution with

Seats. sponge and scrub briskly. Rinse with clean
dampened sponge using fresh water. Allow
a. Brush loose particles from seats. area to dry.
b. Dilute 1 part solvent cleaning compound, Item
100, Appendix D, with 4 parts water by d. Raise nap by brushing.
volume.

1-4-13-1/(1-4-13-2 Blank)
PARA 1-4-14 TM 1-70-23

1-4-14 CLEAN MAIN ROTOR DEICE SLIPRING AND BRUSH BLOCK.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-4-14.1 Clean Main Rotor Deice 1-4-14-1

Slipring and Brush Block

INITIAL SETUP References

Tools
• Appendix D
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• PARA 12-4-26
Materials/Parts
• Brush, Item 83, Appendix D
• Methyl Ethyl Ketone, Item 217, Appendix D

1-4-14.1 Clean Main Rotor Deice Slipring c. Remove brush assembly from slipring (PARA
and Brush Block. 12-4-26).

a. Remove slipring from distributor (PARA 12-4- d. Clean brush block with small brush, Item 83,
26). Appendix D, to remove any debris.

b. Clean slipring with methyl ethyl ketone, Item e. Install brush assembly onto slipring and install
217, Appendix D. slipring (PARA 12-4-26).

1-4-14-1/(1-4-14-2 Blank)
PARA 1-4-15 TM 1-70-23

1-4-15 CLEAN TAIL ROTOR DEICE SLIPRING.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-4-15.1 Clean Tail Rotor Deice 1-4-15-1

Slipring

INITIAL SETUP References

Tools • Appendix D
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• PARA 1-6-16
• Brush, Sash

• Vacuum Cleaner • PARA 12-4-54

Materials/Parts

• Machinery Towel, Item 211, Appendix D

• Methyl Ethyl Ketone, Item 217, Appendix D

1-4-15.1 Clean Tail Rotor Deice Slipring. debris. Make sure drain holes at bottom of ro-
tor and stator are free of debris.
a. Turn off all electrical power (PARA 1-6-16).
b. Remove slipring stator brush assembly (PARA e. Wipe rotor clean using clean machinery towel,
12-4-54). Item 211, Appendix D, dampened with methyl
ethyl ketone, Item 217, Appendix D.
c. Vacuum any loose debris from tail rotor as-
sembly.
f. Install slipring stator brush assembly (PARA
d. Slowly turn tail rotor blades while using sash 12-4-54).
brush to clean slipring rotor. Vacuum all loose

1-4-15-1/(1-4-15-2 Blank)
PARA 1-4-16 TM 1-70-23

1-4-16 CLEAN EJECTOR RACK, BRU-22A/A.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-4-16.1 Clean Ejector Rack, 1-4-16-1

BRU-22A/A

INITIAL SETUP • Corrosion Preventive Compound, Item 114, Ap-

pendix D
Tools
• Dishwashing Compound, Item 122, Appendix D
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit

• Breech Cap Plug Assembly Wrench and Go/No-Go • Dry-Cleaning Solvent, Item 124, Appendix D
Breech Cap Gage, Locally-Made, Figure H-135,
Appendix H References

• Brush, Stiff Bristle • Appendix D

• Nonmetallic Brush, Stiff Bristle
• Appendix H
• Protection, Eye
• PARA 1-7-35
• Soft Brass or Plastic Scraper

• Torque Wrench, 30 - 150 in. lbs • PARA 16-2-4

Materials/Parts • PARA 16-4-34

• Cloth, Cleaning, Item 102, Appendix D
• PARA 16-4-36
• Corrosion Preventive Compound, Item 112, Ap-
pendix D • PARA 16-5-8

1-4-16.1 Clean Ejector Rack, BRU-22A/A.

CAUTION
1-4-16.1.1. Clean Ejector Rack.

Do not use abrasives on ejector

a. Remove ejector rack (PARA 16-4-34).
components. Use soft brass or plastic
scraper if particles cannot be removed
b. Remove breech, gun, and piston assembly from by following procedure.
ejector rack (PARA 16-4-36). Remove bearing
ring from piston assembly only if rack has been c. Clean breech, gun, and piston assembly with
fired or replacement of rings is required. Disas- stiff bristle brush and dry-cleaning solvent,
semble gun. Item 124, Appendix D. Reclean with dishwash-

1-4-16-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-4-16

CORROSION
PREVENTIVE
COMPOUND

BREECH CAP
HOUSING

CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR
ASSEMBLY COUPLER

SPRING
CONTACT
ASSEMBLY
PLUG
ASSEMBLY

GROUND PIN
AB0877_1
SA

FIGURE 1-4-16-1. CLEAN FIRING LEAD CABLE

ing compound, Item 122, Appendix D, and hot j. Inspect ejector rack before loading stores
fresh water. (PARA 1-7-35).

d. Visually inspect breech, gun, and piston as- 1-4-16.1.2. Clean Firing Lead Cable.
sembly (PARA 16-4-36).
NOTE
e. Inspect ejector rack for corrosion (PARA 16-4- Firing lead cable may be removed
36). without removing ejector rack.
f. Apply above parts with thin coating of corro- a. Remove firing lead cable and breech cap as-
sion preventive compound, Item 114, Ap- sembly from ejector rack breech (PARA 16-4-
pendix D. 36).

NOTE b. Locally make breech plug wrench and go/no-

go breech cap gage (Figure H-135, Appendix
Make certain breech is fully forward H).
locked. Close hooks and leave latched at
c. Remove plug assembly from firing lead cable
all times ejector unit is not in use.
assembly, using locally-made breech cap plug
g. Assemble breech, gun, and piston assembly as wrench (Figure 1-4-16-1).
required (PARA 16-4-36). d. Remove contact assembly and spring from fir-
ing lead cable assembly.
h. Test ejector rack (PARA 16-5-8).
e. Clean breech cap, plug assembly, contact as-
i. Install ejector rack (PARA 16-4-34). sembly, and spring with cleaning cloth, Item

1-4-16-2
PARA 1-4-16 TM 1-70-23

0.030 0.010 INCH MEASURED FROM

SURFACE OF PLUG
ASSEMBLY

BREECH CAP
HOUSING

SPRING

GROUND
PIN

CONTACT
ASSEMBLY

PLUG ASSEMBLY
APPLY (TORQUE
90−110 IN. LBS) CONNECTOR
ASSEMBLY

+0.020
0.045 −0.007 INCH MEASURED FROM
SURFACE OF PLUG
ASSEMBLY

AA8773_2
SA

FIGURE 1-4-16-2. CLEAN FIRING LEAD CABLE

102, Appendix D, moistened with dry-cleaning i. Install plug assembly using breech cap plug
solvent, Item 124, Appendix D, or equivalent. wrench. TORQUE PLUG TO 90 - 110 INCH-
POUNDS.
f. Wipe parts with clean, dry cleaning cloth, Item
102, Appendix D. j. Measure contact assembly protrusion with lo-
g. Using locally-made go/no-go breech cap gage, cally made go/no-go breech cap gage. Replace
measure ground pin protrusion on plug as- contact assembly spring if measurement is not
sembly (Figure 1-4-16-2). Replace plug as- within noted tolerance. Remeasure, if still not
sembly if measurement is not within noted within noted tolerance, replace contact as-
tolerance. sembly.

h. Assemble spring and contact on cable connec- k. Depress contact assembly and release to verify
tor. freedom of contact assembly movement.

1-4-16-3
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-4-16

fresh water and dry completely with

WARNING compressed air.

m. Apply corrosion preventive compound, Item

112, Appendix D, to outer surface of firing
Injury to personnel will result if precau-
cable connector and inner surface (except
tions are not taken while using
threads) of firing cable coupler.
compressed air. Do not point hose
towards personnel when blowing n. Perform continuity check on firing lead cable
compressed air through hose. Make sure assembly (PARA 16-2-4).
all personnel are wearing safety glasses
when compressed air is being used. o. Apply thin coat of corrosion preventive
compound, Item 112, Appendix D, to threads
l. Clean firing lead coupler and connector using of adapter assembly receptacle and install fir-
hot soapy water and stiff bristle nonmetallic ing lead cable breech cap assembly on ejector
brush (Figure 1-4-16-1). Rinse thoroughly with rack breech.

1-4-16-4
PARA 1-4-17 TM 1-70-23

1-4-17 CLEAN WINDSHIELD WIPER PIVOT STUDS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-4-17.1 Clean Windshield Wiper 1-4-17-1

Pivot Studs

INITIAL SETUP References

Tools
• Appendix D
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• PARA 1-5-8
Materials/Parts
• Dry-Cleaning Solvent, Item 124, Appendix D • PARA 12-4-19
• Machinery Towel, Item 211, Appendix D

1-4-17.1 Clean Windshield Wiper Pivot b. Hand-clean wiper pivot studs with dry-cleaning
Studs. solvent, Item 124, Appendix D.

CAUTION c. Wipe up remaining solvent with a clean

machinery towel, Item 211, Appendix D.

To prevent damage to equipment, use d. Lubricate wiper pivot studs (PARA 1-5-8).
only approved cleaning compounds in
the task.
e. Install windshield wiper arm (PARA 12-4-19).
a. Remove windshield wiper arm (PARA 12-4-
19).

1-4-17-1/(1-4-17-2 Blank)
PARA 1-4-18 TM 1-70-23

1-4-18 CLEAN COCKPIT DOOR WINDOW.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-4-18.1 Clean Cockpit Door 1-4-18-1

Window

INITIAL SETUP • Flannel Cloth, Item 140, Appendix D

Tools • Maintenance Kit, Window, Item 211A, Appendix

D
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• Soap
Materials/Parts

• Diaper Cloth (Alternate for Flannel Cloth) References

• Dishwashing Compound, Item 122, Appendix D • Appendix D

1-4-18.1 Clean Cockpit Door Window. surfaces are highly susceptible to

scratches, optical distortion, and crazing.
Special care must be taken to prevent
CAUTION destroying optical qualities of plastic.
Transparent plastics should be main-
tained only as outlined below.
Do not use the following materials for
cleaning or permit their fumes to contact a. Flush exterior of window with fresh water.
transparent plastics: gasoline, alcohol,
benzene, toluene, hexane, kerosene, b. Gently wash window with solution of mild
zylene, ketones (including acetone), soap and water using clean, soft cloth such as
carbon tetrachloride, fire extinguisher or flannel cloth, Item 140, Appendix D, diaper
deicing fluids, dope or lacquer thinners, cloth, or equivalent.
perchloroethylene, paint stripping
compounds, degreasing compounds, NOTE
aromatic naphtha, or other than specifi-
cally authorized compounds. These Cloths should be kept in containers to
materials can soften plastic and cause keep them clean and grit free.
crazing. Do not apply pressure or scrub
dry surfaces. c. Wipe window dry with clean, soft cloth such as
flannel cloth, Item 140, Appendix D, diaper
NOTE cloth, or equivalent.

Transparent acrylic plastic surfaces are d. If fresh water supply is not available, or if
free from effects of corrosion, but window is greasy, clean window using soft

1-4-18-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-4-18

cloth and dishwashing compound, Item 122, and sand are present during waxing or
Appendix D. Wipe dry after about 5 minutes. polishing, they would cause serious
damage to window.

CAUTION
e. If window is lightly scratched, polish window
using window maintenance kit, Item 211A,
Appendix D.
Do not polish any window until surface
has been thoroughly cleaned. If dirt, grit,

1-4-18-2
PARA 1-4-19 TM 1-70-23

1-4-19 CLEAN PILOT’S/COPILOT’S SEATS SLIDING BACKFRAME.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-4-19.1 Clean Pilot’s/Copilot’s 1-4-19-1

Seats Sliding Backframe

INITIAL SETUP • Corrosion Preventive Compound, Item 114, Ap-

pendix D
Tools

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit References

Materials/Parts • Appendix D
• Cloth, Cleaning, Item 102, Appendix D

1-4-19.1 Clean Pilot’s/Copilot’s Seats Slid- springs are under load at all times. With
ing Backframe. seat at lowest position, the vertical pre-
load on seat could be as high as 150
NOTE pounds. If no one is in seat and control
lever is pulled forward, the seat will be
Frequency of cleaning sliding back- snapped to highest stop. Anyone leaning
frame collars depends on operational over seat or with hands on guide tubes
environment such as extreme dust, etc. will be injured seriously.
a. Spray a liberal amount of corrosion preventive b. Cycle seat up and down several times by pull-
compound, Item 114, Appendix D, around the ing forward on control lever on front right side.
top of the four collars on the sliding backframe.
c. Wipe debris from columns with cleaning cloth,
Item 102, Appendix D.
WARNING d. Add additional compound to top of each collar
and wipe excess from each column.
To prevent injury to personnel, do not e. Repeat operation as required for complete
pull forward on control lever unless cleaning of collars and columns, resulting in
someone is sitting in seat. The extension proper movement of sliding backframe.

1-4-19-1/(1-4-19-2 Blank)
PARA 1-4-20 TM 1-70-23

1-4-20 CLEAN SOUNDPROOFING PANELS AND AIRFRAME BEHIND

PANELS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-4-20.1 Clean Soundproofing 1-4-20-1

Panels

1-4-20.2 Cleaning Mildew from 1-4-20-1

Airframe Behind
Soundproofing Panels

INITIAL SETUP • Corrosion Preventive Compound, Item 114, Ap-

pendix D
Tools
• Dry-Cleaning Solvent, Item 124, Appendix D
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• Machinery Towel, Item 211, Appendix D
Materials/Parts
• Soap, Mild
• Alcohol, Isopropyl, Item 72, Appendix D • Tribasic Sodium Phosphate, Item 340A, Appendix
D
• Cloth
References
• Corrosion Preventive Compound, Item 109, Ap-
pendix D • Appendix D

1-4-20.1 Clean Soundproofing Panels. (1) Scrub mildew on surface with machinery
towel, Item 211, Appendix D, dampened
a. Clean lightly soiled panel surfaces with clean with tribasic sodium phosphate, Item
cloth, mild soap, and warm water. Rinse and 340A, Appendix D, water solution (2-1/2
wipe dry. ounces by weight per 10 gallons of
water).
b. Spot clean oil, grease, hydraulic oil, or badly
soiled surfaces with dry-cleaning solvent, Item (2) Rinse the surface thoroughly with water.
124, Appendix D. Do not saturate panel. Wash
surfaces with clean cloth, mild soap, and water. (3) Dry with machinery towel, Item 211, Ap-
Rinse and wipe dry. pendix D.

1-4-20.2 Cleaning Mildew from Airframe b. For areas treated with corrosion preventive
Behind Soundproofing Panels. compound, clean as follows:

a. For areas not treated with corrosion preventive (1) Remove corrosion preventive compound
compound, clean as follows: using machinery towel, Item 211, Ap-

1-4-20-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-4-20

pendix D, dampened with isopropyl (1) Spray corrosion preventive compound,

alcohol, Item 72, Appendix D. Item 114, Appendix D, on area to remove
any moisture.
(2) Wipe dry with clean machinery towel,
Item 211, Appendix D.
(2) Coat area with corrosion preventive
c. To prevent recurrence of mildew, apply corro- compound, Item 109, Appendix D.
sion preventive compound as follows:

1-4-20-2
PARA 1-4-21 TM 1-70-23

1-4-21 CLEAN CENTRAL DISPLAY UNIT FACEPLATE.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-4-21.1 Clean Central Display 1-4-21-1

Unit Faceplate

INITIAL SETUP References

Materials/Parts • Appendix D
• Alcohol, Isopropyl, Item 72, Appendix D

• Cloth, Cleaning, Item 102, Appendix D

1-4-21.1 Clean Central Display Unit b. Gently rub faceplate with cleaning cloth.
Faceplate.
a. Dampen cleaning cloth, Item 102, Appendix D,
with isopropyl alcohol, Item 72, Appendix D.

1-4-21-1/(1-4-21-2 Blank)
PARA 1-4-22 TM 1-70-23

1-4-22 CLEAN PILOT DISPLAY UNIT FACEPLATE.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-4-22.1 Clean Pilot Display Unit 1-4-22-1

Faceplate

INITIAL SETUP References

Materials/Parts • Appendix D
• Alcohol, Isopropyl, Item 72, Appendix D

• Cloth, Cleaning, Item 102, Appendix D

1-4-22.1 Clean Pilot Display Unit Faceplate. a. Dampen cleaning cloth, Item 102, Appendix D,
with isopropyl alcohol, Item 72, Appendix D.
NOTE
b. Gently rub faceplate with cleaning cloth.
Cleaning for both the pilot’s and
copilot’s pilot display unit faceplate is
the same.

1-4-22-1/(1-4-22-2 Blank)
PARA 1-4-23 TM 1-70-23

1-4-23 CLEAN BLACKOUT CURTAINS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-4-23.1 Clean Blackout Curtains 1-4-23-1

INITIAL SETUP • Sponge (Alternate for Cloth)

Tools
References
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• Appendix D
Materials/Parts
• Cloth (Alternate for Sponge) • PARA 16-4-6
• Dishwashing Compound, Item 122, Appendix D

1-4-23.1 Clean Blackout Curtains. c. Rinse with clean dampened sponge or cloth us-
ing clean, fresh water.
a. If installed, remove blackout curtains (PARA
16-4-6). d. If required, install blackout curtains (PARA
16-4-6).
b. Wash curtains with dishwashing compound,
Item 122, Appendix D, using clean cloth or
sponge.

1-4-23-1/(1-4-23-2 Blank)
PARA 1-4-24 TM 1-70-23

1-4-24 CLEAN EXTERIOR SURFACE OF EXTERNAL FUEL TANK.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-4-24.1 Clean Exterior Surface of 1-4-24-1

External Fuel Tank

INITIAL SETUP References

Tools
• Appendix D
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
Materials/Parts
• Acetone, Item 25, Appendix D
• Machinery Towel, Item 211, Appendix D

1-4-24.1 Clean Exterior Surface of External Saturating outer surface will cause addi-
Fuel Tank. tional seepage from tank surface.

NOTE
b. Moisten machinery towel, Item 211, Appendix
Seepage substance on exterior of tank D, with acetone, Item 25, Appendix D, and
will appear as a thin, shiny film which is gently wipe area to be cleaned.
sticky and has slight amber coloring and
fuel odor. c. Allow minimum of 10 minutes for acetone to
evaporate from tank surface. Inspect tank
a. Inspect entire outer surface of tank for indica- surface for signs of seepage.
tions of seepage and note location if any is
found.
d. If seepage substance is still indicated, repeat
cleaning procedure until seepage substance is
CAUTION removed from tank.

Do not saturate outer surface of tank

with acetone, Item 25, Appendix D.

1-4-24-1/(1-4-24-2 Blank)
PARA 1-4-25 TM 1-70-23

1-4-25 CLEAN HYDRAULIC RESCUE HOIST.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE PAGE

1-4-25.1 Clean Hydraulic Rescue 1-4-25-1 1-4-25.2 Clean Hydraulic Rescue 1-4-25-1
Hoist Hoist Cable

INITIAL SETUP • Corrosion Preventive Compound, Item 114, Ap-

pendix D
Tools
• Dry-Cleaning Solvent, Item 124, Appendix D
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• Gloves
• Protective Gloves
• Lockwire, Item 195, Appendix D
Materials/Parts
References
• Alcohol, Isopropyl, Item 72, Appendix D

• Barrier Material, Item 80, Appendix D • Appendix D

• Cheesecloth, Item 90, Appendix D • PARA 1-6-15

• Cloth, Cleaning, Item 102A, Appendix D • PARA 1-6-16

1-4-25.1 Clean Hydraulic Rescue Hoist.

CAUTION
a. Wipe external surfaces with cleaning cloth,
Item 102A, Appendix D, moistened with dry-
cleaning solvent, Item 124, Appendix D. Dry
If hoist system is under backup power,
thoroughly after cleaning with cleaning cloth,
system limit switches will be bypassed.
Item 102A, Appendix D, or dry compressed air
Check that system will operate in
no higher than 20 psig.
normal power before reeling cable.
b. Clean the complete length of hoist cable
(PARA 1-4-25.2). c. In cabin, check that cabin RESCUE HOIST
control box NORMAL POWER light is on. If
1-4-25.2 Clean Hydraulic Rescue Hoist BACKUP CONTROL POWER switch light is
Cable. on, open switch guard assembly, and press
switch. BACKUP CONTROL POWER switch
a. Turn on external hydraulic and electrical power
light should go off and NORMAL POWER
(PARA 1-6-15 and PARA 1-6-16).
light should come on. Close switch guard as-
b. On upper console, set RESCUE HOIST switch sembly and lockwire, Item 195, Appendix D,
to ALL. switch guard assembly to screws.

1-4-25-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-4-25

e. In cabin, operate rescue hoist and cargo hook

WARNING pendant, while assistant walks out entire length
of cable.

• To prevent injury to personnel or dam-

age to equipment, rescue hoist cable CAUTION
must be kept clear of all parts of the
aircraft and free from other external
obstacles. Cable abrasion during hoist
operation can lead to cable failure. If Do not run backup control with hoist in
c a b le co n t act or snaggi ng occurs, down position. Doing so will result in
inspect cable for damage immediately. back winding cable on drum.

• Injury to personnel may occur if protec- f. Slowly reel hoist cable onto cable drum, while
tive gloves are not worn when reeling assistant applies firm drag on cable with gloved
cable in or out. Use protective gloves hand. On Breeze-Eastern hoist (BL27100
when reeling cable in or out. series), wipe cable with cheesecloth, Item 90,
Appendix D, dampened with isopropyl alcohol,
CAUTION
Item 72, Appendix D. On Lucas Aerospace
hoist (42315 series), wipe cable with
cheesecloth, Item 90, Appendix D, dampened
Damage to cable may occur if cable is with corrosion preventive compound, Item 114,
kinked when reeling cable in or out. Use Appendix D.
care not to kink cable when reeling
cable in or out. g. Turn off all switches.
d. Place barrier material, Item 80, Appendix D,
under hoist area to lay cable on during hoist h. Turn off external hydraulic and electrical
operation. power (PARA 1-6-15 and PARA 1-6-16).

NOTE i. Make sure area is clean and free of foreign

material.
If hoist was used in salt water condi-
tions, rinse cable with cold, clean fresh
water.

1-4-25-2
PARA 1-4-26 TM 1-70-23

1-4-26 CLEAN FLIR SYSTEM.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-4-26.1 Clean FLIR System 1-4-26-1

INITIAL SETUP References

Tools • PARA 1-4-3

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit • TM 11-70-23

1-4-26.1 Clean FLIR System. a. Clean external surface of FLIR (PARA 1-4-3).

NOTE
b. Clean FLIR germanium window (TM 11-70-
Make sure FLIR is in the STOW posi- 23).
tion when cleaning external surface.

1-4-26-1/(1-4-26-2 Blank)
PARA 1-4-27 TM 1-70-23

1-4-27 CLEAN APU ENGINE AIR PARTICLE SEPARATOR (EAPS).

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-4-27.1 Clean APU Engine Air 1-4-27-1

Particle Separator

INITIAL SETUP References

Tools
• Appendix D
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• PARA 16-4-73
Materials/Parts
• Dry-Cleaning Solvent, Item 124, Appendix D

1-4-27.1 Clean APU Engine Air Particle (3) After cleaning, flush lower particle
Separator. separator with clean water.

a. Remove upper air particle separator (PARA (4) Remove drain plug and drain water from
16-4-73). lower particle separator.

b. Check upper particle separator for dirt, grass, (5) Install drain plug.
and other foreign objects.
i. If dirt that is built up on lower particle separa-
c. Remove grass and other foreign objects. tor cannot be easily removed, do the following:

d. Clean the upper particle separator with dry- NOTE

cleaning solvent, Item 124, Appendix D. Removal of lower particle separator will
require the APU to be removed.
e. After cleaning, flush upper particle separator
with clean water. (1) Remove lower particle separator (PARA
16-4-73).
f. Check upper particle separator for damage that
would affect operation of APU. (2) Clean the lower particle separator with
dry-cleaning solvent, Item 124, Appendix
g. Flush collector box with clean water. D.
h. If dirt that is built up on lower particle separa- (3) After cleaning, flush lower particle
tor can be easily removed, do the following: separator with clean water.
(1) Check lower particle separator for dirt, (4) Drain water from lower particle separator.
grass and other foreign objects.
j. Make sure air inlet screen on APU is free of
(2) Remove grass and other foreign objects. debris and other foreign objects.

1-4-27-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-4-27

A
SHROUD APU

FRONT

LOWER
PARTICLE DRAIN
SEPARATOR PLUG

AB0879
SA

FIGURE 1-4-27-1. CLEAN APU ENGINE AIR PARTICLE SEPARATOR

k. If lower air particle separator was removed, l. Install upper air particle separator (PARA 16-
reinstall lower air particle separator (PARA 16- 4-73).
4-73).

1-4-27-2
PARA 1-4-28 TM 1-70-23

1-4-28 CLEAN ELECTRIC RESCUE HOIST.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE PAGE

1-4-28.1 Clean Electric Rescue 1-4-28-1 1-4-28.2 Clean Electric Rescue 1-4-28-2
Hoist Hoist Cable

INITIAL SETUP Materials/Parts

Tools • Brush, Item 83, Appendix D

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit • Cloth, Cleaning, Item 102, Appendix D

• Container, 55-gallon • Dry-Cleaning Solvent, Item 124, Appendix D

• Nonmetallic Brush, Stiff-Bristle References

• Protection, Eye • Appendix D

1-4-28.1 Clean Electric Rescue Hoist.

WARNING
CAUTION

Injury to personnel will result if precau-

• Damage to threads will occur if a wire tions are not taken while using
brush or scouring pad is used. compressed air. Do not point hose
towards personnel when blowing
• Damage to electrical components will compressed air through hose. Make sure
occur if components are immersed in all personnel are wearing safety glasses
dry-cleaning solvent. when compressed air is being used.

a. Loosen dirt and grease from gears, housings, b. Air dry parts cleaned in preceding step, using
and other metal parts using stiff-bristle 15 psi, clean compressed air, or by wiping with
nonmetallic brush, Item 83, Appendix D, and cleaning cloth, Item 102, Appendix D.
dry-cleaning solvent, Item 124, Appendix D.

1-4-28-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-4-28

1-4-28.2 Clean Electric Rescue Hoist Cable. a. Reel cable out into a 55-gallon container filled
with fresh water.

WARNING b. Wash rescue hoist drum with cleaning cloth,

Item 102, Appendix D, and fresh water and
wipe dry with cleaning cloth, Item 102, Ap-
Injury to personnel will occur if gloves pendix D.
are not worn when reeling out cable.
leather gloves must be worn when reel- NOTE
ing out cable.
When reeling cable in after cleaning, do
NOTE not drag on dirty floor or exceed 30°
fleet angle.
When reeling cable out for cleaning, do
not drag on dirty floor or exceed 30° c. Dry cable by passing it through dry, cleaning
fleet angle. cloth, Item 102, Appendix D when reeling in.

1-4-28-2
 TM 1-70-23

SECTION 1-5

LUBRICATION

SECTION OVERVIEW

PARAGRAPH TITLE

1-5-1 Lubrication Requirements

1-5-2 Lubricate Bifilar

1-5-3 Lubricate Swashplate

1-5-4 Lubricate Mixer Bellcranks

1-5-5 Lubricate Rotary Inputs

1-5-6 Lubricate Landing Gear Shock Struts

1-5-7 Lubricate Stabilator Actuator Assembly

1-5-8 Lubricate Windshield Wiper Pivot Studs

1-5-9 Lubricate Windshield Wiper Converter

1-5-10 Lubricate Tail Wheel Lockpin

1-5-11 Lubricate Tail Wheel Bearings

1-5-12 Lubricate Door Locks

1-5-13 Lubricate Ejector Rack, BRU-22A/A

1-5-1/(1-5-2 Blank)
PARA 1-5-1 TM 1-70-23

1-5-1 LUBRICATION REQUIREMENTS.

1-5-1.1 Scope. lubrication may need to be increased to make sure
of safe flight.
This section contains lubrication procedures.
Lubrication intervals may be dependent upon 1-5-1.2 Work Platforms.
environmental conditions or specific time intervals.
When unusual local conditions of environment, Work platforms located on engine cowlings
utilization, mission, experience of flight crew and provide access to the engines. Each platform is
maintenance personnel, or periods of inactivity, capable of supporting a static weight of 400
etc., are encountered, the scope and/or frequency of pounds.

1-5-1-1/(1-5-1-2 Blank)
PARA 1-5-2 TM 1-70-23

1-5-2 LUBRICATE BIFILAR.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-5-2.1 Lubricate Bifilar 1-5-2-1

INITIAL SETUP References

Tools
• Appendix D
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
Materials/Parts
• Grease, Item 151A, Appendix D
• Machinery Towel, Item 211, Appendix D

1-5-2.1 Lubricate Bifilar. seriously degrade the life of the rubber

in the bearing. If contact occurs, rinse
1-5-2.1.1. Every 30 Hours/42 Days. immediately with clean soapy water.

a. Clean old lubricant from bifilar with machinery b. Apply grease, Item 151A, Appendix D, to bifi-
towel, Item 211, Appendix D. lar bushings, pins, and washers (Figure 1-5-2-
1).
CAUTION

Do not allow any lubricant to contact the

elastomeric bearings. Any contact may

1-5-2-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-5-2

BUSHING BIFLAR

PIN

WASHER

AK1953
SA

FIGURE 1-5-2-1. LUBRICATE BIFILAR

1-5-2-2
PARA 1-5-3 TM 1-70-23

1-5-3 LUBRICATE SWASHPLATE.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-5-3.1 Lubricate Swashplate 1-5-3-1

INITIAL SETUP Materials/Parts

Tools • Cloth, Cleaning, Item 102, Appendix D

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit • Grease, Item 149, Appendix D

• Lubricating Gun References

• Torque Wrench, 150 - 750 in. lbs • Appendix D

1-5-3.1 Lubricate Swashplate. ring will result. The shield and ring are
bonded together to form one part.
1-5-3.1.1. Every 500 Hours/12 Months.
a. Turn main rotor head until red index marks on
rotating and stationary swashplates line up.
CAUTION Engage gust lock or rotor brake.

NOTE
• Lubricate swashplate every 500 hours or
33 bolts must be removed from inner
12 months, whichever comes first. More
bearing retainer ring in order to gain ac-
frequent lubrication, or using too much
cess to bearing seal.
grease, will not improve bearing life and
will cause helicopter to be sprayed with b. Remove bolts and washers holding inner bear-
grease. ing retainer ring to swashplate (Figure 1-5-3-
1).
• Do not try to remove the bearing shield
from the bearing retaining ring. Damage c. Slide retainer ring to one side so upper bearing
to the bearing shield/bearing retaining seal can be seen.

1-5-3-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-5-3

BOLT, WASHER
(TORQUE 176−194 IN. LBS)

OUTER BEARING
RETAINING RING

BEARING SHIELD
(BONDED TO INNER
BEARING RETAINING
RING)

INNER BEARING
RETAINING RING
UPPER BEARING
SEAL
SWASHPLATE

GREASE
FITTING

LOWER BEARING
SEAL AK1954A
SA

FIGURE 1-5-3-1. LUBRICATE SWASHPLATE

d. Lubricate bearings through four fittings on

CAUTION rotating swashplate with hand-operated
lubricating gun using grease, Item 149, Ap-
pendix D.
Damage to bearings will result if pres-
sure lubrication system is used to e. Stop lubricating when grease seeps out of
lubricate bearings. Use only hand- either upper or lower bearing seal (normally
operated lubricating gun. within 10 inches of fitting).
NOTE f. Using cleaning cloth, Item 102, Appendix D,
wipe off extra grease in seal area.
For replacement swashplate assemblies
built-up over 12 months prior to instal- g. Reinstall inner bearing retainer ring with bolts
lation, lubricate swashplate until ap- and washers, making sure red index marks are
proximately 5 cubic inches of grease has lined up. TORQUE BOLTS TO 176 - 194
been purged from upper and lower bear- INCH-POUNDS.
ing seal at each grease fitting (ap-
proximately 20 cubic inches total). h. Release gust lock or rotor brake.

1-5-3-2
PARA 1-5-4 TM 1-70-23

1-5-4 LUBRICATE MIXER BELLCRANKS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-5-4.1 Lubricate Mixer 1-5-4-1

Bellcranks

INITIAL SETUP Materials/Parts

Tools • Grease, Item 149, Appendix D

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit References

• Lubricating Gun • Appendix D

1-5-4.1 Lubricate Mixer Bellcranks. c. Lubricate bearings on mixer bellcranks with

hand-operated lubricating gun using grease,
1-5-4.1.1. Every 500 Hours. Item 149, Appendix D (Figure 1-5-4-1, Detail
A). Stop lubricating when grease seeps out of
NOTE
bearings.
Lubricate mixer bellcranks every 500
hours, if grease fittings are installed in d. Slide work platform to rear of helicopter,
bellcranks. install quick-release pins in stop position.
a. Open main rotor pylon sliding cover.
e. Close and latch main rotor pylon sliding cover.
b. Slide work platform as far to front of helicopter
as possible.

1-5-4-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-5-4

MIXER GREASE FITTING

A
PRIMARY
SERVO

GREASE FITTING AK1955

SA

FIGURE 1-5-4-1. LUBRICATE MIXER BELLCRANKS

1-5-4-2
PARA 1-5-5 TM 1-70-23

1-5-5 LUBRICATE ROTARY INPUTS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-5-5.1 Lubricate Rotary Inputs 1-5-5-1

INITIAL SETUP
References
• PARA 4-5-9

1-5-5.1 Lubricate Rotary Inputs.

1-5-5.1.1. Every 500 Hours.

Lubricate rotary inputs (PARA 4-5-9).

1-5-5-1/(1-5-5-2 Blank)
PARA 1-5-6 TM 1-70-23

1-5-6 LUBRICATE LANDING GEAR SHOCK STRUTS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-5-6.1 Lubricate Landing Gear 1-5-6-1

Shock Struts

INITIAL SETUP References

Tools
• Appendix D
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• PARA 2-4-96
Materials/Parts
• Hydraulic Fluid, Item 154, Appendix D
• Machinery Towel, Item 211, Appendix D

1-5-6.1 Lubricate Landing Gear Shock pistons are not kept clean and lubricated.
Struts. Shock struts will leak fluid if seals are
damaged. Make sure shock strut pistons
1-5-6.1.1. Every 10 Hours/14 Days. are clean and lubricated.

a. If required, remove upper main landing gear b. Wipe exposed portion of main and tail landing
fairing to gain access to main landing gear gear shock strut pistons with machinery towel,
shock strut piston (PARA 2-4-96). Item 211, Appendix D, dampened with
hydraulic fluid, Item 154, Appendix D.
CAUTION
c. If removed, install upper main landing gear
fairing (PARA 2-4-96).
Damage to main and tail landing gear
shock strut seals will result if shock strut

1-5-6-1/(1-5-6-2 Blank)
PARA 1-5-7 TM 1-70-23

1-5-7 LUBRICATE STABILATOR ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-5-7.1 Lubricate Stabilator Ac- 1-5-7-1

tuator Assembly

INITIAL SETUP References

Tools
• Appendix D
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• PARA 2-4-146
Materials/Parts
• Hydraulic Fluid, Item 154, Appendix D
• Machinery Towel, Item 211, Appendix D

1-5-7.1 Lubricate Stabilator Actuator As- b. Fully extend both output shafts (PARA 2-4-
sembly. 146).

1-5-7.1.1. Every 10 Hours/14 Days. c. Wipe exposed portion of shafts with machinery
Wipe exposed portion of lower actuator output towel, Item 211, Appendix D, dampened with
shaft with machinery towel, Item 211, Appendix D, hydraulic fluid, Item 154, Appendix D.
dampened with hydraulic fluid, Item 154, Ap-
pendix D. d. Install stabilator actuator (PARA 2-4-146).

1-5-7.1.2. Every 500 Hours.

a. Remove stabilator actuator (PARA 2-4-146).

1-5-7-1/(1-5-7-2 Blank)
PARA 1-5-8 TM 1-70-23

1-5-8 LUBRICATE WINDSHIELD WIPER PIVOT STUDS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-5-8.1 Lubricate Windshield 1-5-8-1

Wiper Pivot Studs

INITIAL SETUP References

Tools
• Appendix D
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• Container, 1-Cup
Materials/Parts
• Brush, Item 83, Appendix D
• Hydraulic Fluid, Item 155, Appendix D

1-5-8.1 Lubricate Windshield Wiper Pivot b. Using brush, Item 83, Appendix D, apply
Studs. h y d r a u l i c fl u i d o n p i l o t ’ s a n d c o p i l o t ’ s
windshield wiper pivot studs link attachment
1-5-8.1.1. Every 10 Hours/14 Days. area.

a. Pour a small quantity of hydraulic fluid, Item

155, Appendix D, in clean 1-cup container.

1-5-8-1/(1-5-8-2 Blank)
PARA 1-5-9 TM 1-70-23

1-5-9 LUBRICATE WINDSHIELD WIPER CONVERTER.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-5-9.1 Lubricate Windshield 1-5-9-1

Wiper Converter

INITIAL SETUP References

Tools
• Appendix D
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• PARA 12-4-14
• Container, 1-Cup
• Hypodermic Syringe

Materials/Parts

• Grease, Item 149, Appendix D

• Hydraulic Fluid, Item 155, Appendix D

1-5-9.1 Lubricate Windshield Wiper b. Pack housing with grease, Item 149, Appendix
Converter. D.

1-5-9.1.1. Every 10 Hours/14 Days. c. Pack gears and bearings on end of converter
a. Pour a small quantity of hydraulic fluid, Item linkage with grease, Item 149, Appendix D.
155, Appendix D, in clean 1-cup container.
d. Assemble and install windshield wiper
b. Using hypodermic syringe, apply hydraulic converter (PARA 12-4-14).
fluid on converter shaft below splines to
lubricate internal packing.

1-5-9.1.2. Every 500 Hours.

a. Remove, disassemble, and clean windshield
wiper converter (PARA 12-4-14).

1-5-9-1/(1-5-9-2 Blank)
PARA 1-5-10 TM 1-70-23

1-5-10 LUBRICATE TAIL WHEEL LOCKPIN.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-5-10.1 Lubricate Tail Wheel 1-5-10-1

Lockpin

INITIAL SETUP References

Tools
• Appendix D
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
Materials/Parts
• Grease, Item 149, Appendix D
• Machinery Towel, Item 211, Appendix D

1-5-10.1 Lubricate Tail Wheel Lockpin. c. Lightly coat lockpin with grease, Item 149, Ap-
pendix D. Actuate lockpin by hand to make
1-5-10.1.1. Every 500 hours. sure it is completely coated with grease.

a. Manually unlock tail wheel lockpin.

b. Clean old grease from lockpin with a clean

machinery towel, Item 211, Appendix D.

1-5-10-1/(1-5-10-2 Blank)
PARA 1-5-11 TM 1-70-23

1-5-11 LUBRICATE TAIL WHEEL BEARINGS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-5-11.1 Lubricate Tail Wheel 1-5-11-1

Bearings

INITIAL SETUP
References
• PARA 3-4-28

1-5-11.1 Lubricate Tail Wheel Bearings.

1-5-11.1.1. Every 250 Hours/6 Months.

Remove tail wheel and lubricate bearings (PARA
3-4-28).

1-5-11-1/(1-5-11-2 Blank)
PARA 1-5-12 TM 1-70-23

1-5-12 LUBRICATE DOOR LOCKS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-5-12.1 Lubricate Door Locks 1-5-12-1

INITIAL SETUP References

Materials/Parts • Appendix D
• Lubricating Oil, Item 209, Appendix D

1-5-12.1 Lubricate Door Locks. locks using key to make sure there is no binding or
other interference (Figure 1-5-12-1, Detail A and
1-5-12.1.1. Every 500 Hours. Detail B).
Lightly coat keys, lock sets, and lock hooks with
lubricating oil, Item 209, Appendix D. Actuate

1-5-12-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-5-12

B
DUST CAP
WASHER
A

A B

LOCK ASSEMBLY

FLAT WASHER

AK1956
SA

FIGURE 1-5-12-1. LUBRICATE DOOR LOCKS

1-5-12-2
PARA 1-5-13 TM 1-70-23

1-5-13 LUBRICATE EJECTOR RACK, BRU-22A/A.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-5-13.1 Lubricate Ejector Rack, 1-5-13-1

BRU-22A/A

INITIAL SETUP References

Materials/Parts • Appendix D
• Lubricating Oil, Item 209, Appendix D

1-5-13.1 Lubricate Ejector Rack, BRU-22A/

A.

1-5-13.1.1. Every 500 Hours.

Lubricate mechanical arming unit plunger using
lubricating oil, Item 209, Appendix D.

1-5-13-1/(1-5-13-2 Blank)
 TM 1-70-23

SECTION 1-6

GROUND HANDLING

SECTION OVERVIEW

PARAGRAPH TITLE

1-6-1 Ground Handling General

1-6-2 Tow Helicopter

1-6-3 Jack Helicopter

1-6-4 Tie Down and Moor Helicopter

1-6-5 Protective Covers

1-6-6 Park Helicopter

1-6-7 Fold/Spread Main Rotor Blades

1-6-8 Fold/Spread Tail Rotor Blades

1-6-9 Fold/Unfold Tail Pylon

1-6-10 Kneel Helicopter

1-6-11 Cabin Tiedown Fittings

1-6-12 Tiedown Plates

1-6-13 Tail Cone Tow Fittings

1-6-14 Fuselage and Tail Cone Tiedown Rings

1-6-15 Apply Hydraulic Power

1-6-16 Apply Electrical Power

1-6-17 Hydraulic Cart Connect and Checkout

1-6-1/(1-6-2 Blank)
PARA 1-6-1 TM 1-70-23

1-6-1 GROUND HANDLING GENERAL.

1-6-1.1 Scope. limited to, towing, jacking, mooring, hoisting,
leveling, and external power connection.
This section contains ground handling procedures.
Procedures in this section include, but are not

1-6-1-1/(1-6-1-2 Blank)
PARA 1-6-2 TM 1-70-23

1-6-2 TOW HELICOPTER.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-6-2.1 Tow Helicopter 1-6-2-1

INITIAL SETUP References

Tools
• PARA 1-6-4
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• Chocks
• Tow Bar, AA1730-1251

1-6-2.1 Tow Helicopter. • Battery power may be used to level sta-

bilator. However, if battery low light is
1-6-2.1.1. Tow Helicopter. on, battery power will only be available
for APU starting, and external power
should be used to operate stabilator.
CAUTION
• Cabin floor panel installation is not
required for towing operations.
• Damage to tail landing gear will result if
a. Level stabilator so tow operator can see all
helicopter over 16825 pounds gross
around helicopter.
weight is towed with tail landing gear
swiveled 180° underneath tail cone. Do
not tow helicopter with tail landing gear CAUTION
tail wheel swiveled 180° underneath tail
cone, when gross weight exceeds 16825
pounds. Damage to helicopter will result if tow
bar becomes separated from tail wheel.
• Damage to the tow bar or helicopter can Make sure tow bar is properly secured to
result if too sharp an angle e xists tail wheel.
between the tow vehicle and the tow
bar. The angle between the tow vehicle b. Unpin tow bar crossbeam from tube, to allow
and tow bar should not exceed 90° to positioning of tow bar on tail wheel. Insert axle
avoid damage. pins into tail wheel axle holes, and re-pin
crossbeam to tube (Figure 1-6-2-1, Detail A).
NOTE c. Connect tow bar to tow vehicle.

• The helicopter may be either pushed or d. On tail wheel, place tail wheel lockpin in DIS-
pulled during towing. ENGAGED position (Figure 1-6-2-1, Detail B)

1-6-2-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-6-2

CROSSBEAM

AXLE
PIN

A
B
TUBE

B
TAIL
LANDING
GEAR

LOCK PIN

GED
NGA
DISE
MANUAL
ENGAGED
OPERATING
LEVER

LOCKPIN
ACTUATOR
STOP

LOCKPIN
(SHOWN IN
ENGAGED
POSITION)
FC3759
SA

FIGURE 1-6-2-1. TOW HELICOPTER

1-6-2-2
PARA 1-6-2 TM 1-70-23

or in cockpit on upper console, place BATT • Have personnel on both sides of

switch ON. On lower console, PUSH TAIL- helicopter to watch main rotor blades,
WHEEL switch button to release tail wheel tail rotor blades, and airframe clearance
lock. Place BATT switch OFF. when towing and turning helicopter.

• Make sure all external power sources

CAUTION are disconnected and clear of helicopter.

• If possible, wait 20 minutes after remov-

Damage to main rotor blades will occur ing electrical power from vertical gyro
if end of blade is pulled down more than before towing to prevent gyro damage.
6 inches below normal drooped position. • If helicopter is to be towed in a
Do not pull blade down more than 6 congested area, main rotor blades can be
inches when installing tiedown ropes. moved using tiedown ropes.
e. If towing helicopter in a congested area, install h. Tow helicopter safely, without damage, using
main rotor blade tiedown ropes (PARA 1-6-4). these precautions:

f. Disconnect any tiedown lines or grounding (1) Do not release tail wheel lockpin until
straps. tow bar is attached to tow vehicle.

g. Have an assistant release parking brakes and (2) Do not release parking brake or remove
ride in cockpit to work brakes, if required. chocks from wheels until after tow bar is
installed, and tow vehicle is attached.
NOTE
(3) Make sure all engines are off, and both
• Tow only on level surface and do not go main and tail rotors are stopped.
over 5 miles-per-hour. (4) Check operation of brakes.

• Do not brake to sudden stop when turn- i. Remove chocks from main wheels and tow
ing; do not make quick starts and stops. helicopter.

1-6-2-3/(1-6-2-4 Blank)
PARA 1-6-3 TM 1-70-23

1-6-3 JACK HELICOPTER.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-6-3.1 Jack Helicopter 1-6-3-1

INITIAL SETUP • Plumb Bob

Tools References
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• PARA 1-6-6
• Chocks

• Jack

1-6-3.1 Jack Helicopter. e. Slowly lower landing gear to ground. Remove

jack.
1-6-3.1.1. Jack Main Landing Gear.
1-6-3.1.2. Jack Tail Landing Gear.
NOTE
NOTE
• Normal load for all jackpads is 7492
pounds.
• Normal load for all jack pads is 7492
• Floor panel installation is not required pounds.
when jacking helicopter.
• Floor panel installation is not required
a. Park helicopter on as solid and level an area as when jacking helicopter.
possible (PARA 1-6-6).
a. Park helicopter on as solid and level an area as
b. Chock helicopter.
possible (PARA 1-6-6).

b. Chock helicopter.
WARNING
c. Place jack beneath jack pad on tail landing gear
To prevent injury to personnel or dam- fork or place jack beneath jack pad on tail cone
age to equipment engage tail wheel (Figure 1-6-3-1, Sheet 2 or Sheet 3).
lockpin before jacking helicopter.

c. Place jack beneath jack pad on drag beam d. Slowly jack landing gear or tail cone until tire
(Figure 1-6-3-1, Sheet 1, Detail A). just clears ground.

d. Jack landing gear slowly until tire just clears e. Slowly lower landing gear to ground. Remove
ground. jack.

1-6-3-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-6-3

DRAG
BEAM

A
JACK
PAD

JACK

AK1958_1
SA

FIGURE 1-6-3-1. JACK HELICOPTER (SHEET 1 OF 3)

TAIL LANDING GEAR

FORK
JACK PAD

JACK

AK1958_2
SA

FIGURE 1-6-3-1. JACK HELICOPTER (SHEET 2 OF 3)

1-6-3-2
PARA 1-6-3 TM 1-70-23

JACK DRAG TAIL JACK

BEAM CONE
STA SUPPORT STA
247.0 605.3

FL0339_3
SA

FIGURE 1-6-3-1. JACK HELICOPTER (SHEET 3 OF 3)

1-6-3.1.3. Jack Entire Helicopter. and that chocks are moved as helicopter
is jacked.
a. Park helicopter indoors on a solid and level
area as possible (PARA 1-6-6). NOTE

• Normal load for all jack pads is 7492

CAUTION pounds.
• Floor panel installation is not required
when jacking helicopter.
To prevent damage to helicopter, check
overhead clearance before jacking. d. Release parking brake. Do not remove chocks.
b. Place jack beneath jack pad on bottom front of e. Using four people, one for each jack, and one
each drag beam support, and bottom rear of tail observer, jack helicopter slowly and evenly
cone (Figure 1-6-3-1, Sheet 3). while adjusting height of jacks to line up
plumb bob with intersection of zero marked on
c. Hang plumb bob from slot just inside left cargo outboard edge of leveling plate until desired
door above leveling plate (Figure 1-6-3-2, height is reached, and helicopter is level
Detail A and Detail B). (Figure 1-6-3-2, Detail A). As helicopter is
jacked, move chocks to keep landing gear
secured until tires are off ground.
WARNING
f. Lower helicopter in same manner used to jack
it. As helicopter is lowered, move chocks to
To prevent helicopter from rolling off keep landing gear secured as weight of
jacks, make sure parking brake is off, helicopter comes off jacks. Remove jacks.

1-6-3-3
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-6-3

PLUMB
BOB LEVELING
PLATE
4
3
2

A 0
1
2
3
4

B B
TIEDOWN ATTACH UPPER END
A RING OF PLUMB BOB LINE
IN THIS SLOT
D

LEFT SIDE−
LOOKING FORWARD VIEW D−D
AK1959
SA

FIGURE 1-6-3-2. LEVEL HELICOPTER

g. Lock parking brake.

1-6-3-4
PARA 1-6-4 TM 1-70-23

1-6-4 TIE DOWN AND MOOR HELICOPTER.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-6-4.1 Tie Down and Moor Heli- 1-6-4-2

copter

INITIAL SETUP
- APU Exhaust Plug, 70700-20509-041
Tools - Blade Fold Set, 70700-20412-011, consisting of:
-- Alignment Pin, 70700-20394-111
• Aircraft Cable, 1/2-inch
-- Blade Fold Support, 70700-20417-041
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit -- Blade Fold Support, 70700-20417-042
-- Blade Handling Pole, 70700-20395-041
• Anchor, Deadman -- Retainer, 70700-20428-041
-- Retainer, 70700-20428-042
• Anchor Kits -- Support Poles, 70700-20427-041 through 70700-
• Chain 20427-044
- Engine Air Inlet Plug, 70700-20507-042
• Chocks - Forward and Rear Tiedown Fitting, 70700-20433-
045
• Chocks, Ice Grip - Lock Assembly, 70700-20369-041
- Oil Cooler, IR Jammer, Screen Cover, 70700-
• W/O HIRSS Flyaway Equipment Kit, 70700-
20511-041
10000-011, consisting of:
- Pitot Tube Cover, 70700-20460-041
- HIRSS Cover, LH 89SDSCC-D-0162-1
- APU Exhaust Plug, 70700-20509-041
- HIRSS Cover, RH 89SDSCC-D-0162-2
- Blade Fold Set, 70700-20412-011, consisting of:
- HIRSS Intake, Plug Assembly, LH 70700-20514-
-- Alignment Pin, 70700-20394-111
041
-- Blade Fold Support, 70700-20417-041
- HIRSS Intake, Plug Assembly, RH 70700-20514-
-- Blade Fold Support, 70700-20417-042
042
-- Blade Handling Pole, 70700-20395-041
- HIRSS Exhaust, Plug Assembly, 70700-20515-
-- Retainer, 70700-20428-041
043
-- Retainer, 70700-20428-042
-- Support Poles, 70700-20427-041 through 70700-
20427-044
- Engine Air Inlet Plug, 70700-20507-042 • Rope, Manila, 1 1/2-inch
- Engine Exhaust Plug, 70700-20508-041
- Lock Assembly, 70700-20369-041 • Rope, Wire
- Oil Cooler, IR Jammer, Screen Cover, 70700-
20511-041 • Tiedown Chain Assembly, 627728A
- Pitot Tube Cover, 70700-20460-041
• Tiedown Tensioner, CGU-4/E
• HIRSS Flyaway Equipment Kit, 70700-10000-
014, consisting of: • Wooden Cleats

1-6-4-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-6-4

References • PARA 1-3-19

• PARA 1-3-17 • PARA 1-6-5

• PARA 1-3-18 • PARA 1-6-6

1-6-4.1 Tie Down and Moor Helicopter. d. Turn rotor head and position a blade over
center of cockpit.

CAUTION
CAUTION

Structural damage can occur from high

velocity surface winds. When possible, To avoid damaging blades, do not pull
helicopter shall be evacuated to a safe down end of blade more than 6 inches
weather area when tornado, hurricane, from its normal drooped position.
or winds above 75 knots are expected.
e. Install lock assembly, 70700-20369-041, into
NOTE blade receiver on tip end of blade. Pull down
on lock assembly lock release cable, insert lock
• Mooring hardware is not flyaway equip- assembly in blade receiver, and release lock
ment. Each mooring point in use will be release cable (Figure 1-6-4-1, Detail A).
equipped with mooring hardware.
f. Pull down on lock assembly to make sure it is
• Floor panel installation is not required
locked into main rotor blade.
when tying down or mooring helicopter.

a. Park helicopter (PARA 1-6-6). CAUTION

b. Fill fuel cells (PARA 1-3-17, PARA 1-3-18, or
PARA 1-3-19).
Damage to main rotor blade will occur if
c. Secure chocks by nailing wood cleats from lock release cable is unsecure. Strong
chock to chock on each side of each wheel. winds will cause lock release cable to
Use rope to secure chocks if wood cleats are strike blade. Make sure lock release
not available, or when using ice grip chocks. blade is secure when tiedown ropes are
attached to blade.

CAUTION g. Secure lock release cable by wrapping it

several times around tiedown rope, and pass
end loop through last wrap.
To prevent damage, it is recommended
that blades be folded if wind speeds h. Turn rotor head, and install lock assemblies in
above 60 knots are expected. Tie down other blades in same manner.
of the main rotor blades should be done
when actual or projected wind condi- i. Position blades at an angle of about 45° from
tions are 45 to 60 knots. centerline of helicopter, and engage gust lock.

1-6-4-2
PARA 1-6-4 TM 1-70-23

HELICOPTER TAIL
C TIEDOWN CABLE
(TYPICAL 2 PLACES)

RECEIVER
HELICOPTER BLADE
TIEDOWN CABLE
(TYPICAL 2 PLACES)
A D

TIEDOWN
ROPE
A LOCK
ASSEMBLY

D
WARNING
FLAG

DRAG
LOCK RELEASE
BEAM
CABLE
TIEDOWN
RING

C B

TAIL CONE
TIEDOWN
RING

FUSELAGE
TIEDOWN
RING

STA 308.0 STA 485.0

(BOTH SIDES) (BOTH SIDES) AB0878A
SA

FIGURE 1-6-4-1. TIE DOWN MAIN ROTOR BLADES

1-6-4-3
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-6-4

(4) Connect tiedown chain assemblies to

CAUTION mooring pad tiedown points using
tiedown tensioners.

To prevent damaging blades, do not pull (5) Adjust length of chains to take slack from
main rotor blade tips more than 6 inches chains.
below normal droop position when us-
ing tiedowns. (6) Repeat procedure for helicopter rear
mounting points.
j. Fasten tiedown ropes, from two rear blades to
tail cone tiedown rings (Figure 1-6-4-1, Detail NOTE
B).
• When ground tiedown rings are not
k. Fasten tiedown ropes, from two front blades to available, move helicopter to an area
main landing gear drag beams tiedown rings where anchor kits or deadman type
(Figure 1-6-4-1, Detail D). anchors capable of sustaining a 12500
pound per cable pull test may be used.
l. If helicopter is to be moored on paved surface,
do this: • Chain must be capable of sustaining a
12500 pound pull test.
(1) Position helicopter on mooring pad with
BL 0.0 directly above and parallel to cen- m. On unpaved surface, fasten 1/2-inch aircraft
terline of mooring pad (Figure 1-6-4-2). cables or wire rope to tiedown rings, and
extend outward to ground mooring points at
(2) Position fuselage tiedown rings an equal 45° angles (Figure 1-6-4-2). Use chain or 1-1/2
distance between two forward pairs of pad inch manila rope if cable is not available.
mooring points, 10 feet behind forward Provide enough slack in cable, chain, or rope
pair of mooring points (Figure 1-6-4-1, between anchor and tiedown ring to prevent
Detail C and Figure 1-6-4-2). tightening due to moisture, distortion, or tire
deflation on the opposite side. Use anti-slip
(3) Connect hook-ends of tiedown chain as- knots in rope, such as the square or bowline.
semblies to helicopter forward mooring
rings. n. Install protective covers (PARA 1-6-5).

1-6-4-4
PARA 1-6-4 TM 1-70-23

MOORING
CHAIN

10 FT

20 FT 20 FT

10 FT

MOORING CHAIN

TIE DOWN
POINT

MOORING PAD

AB0873
SA

FIGURE 1-6-4-2. PAVED SURFACE MOORING CONFIGURATION (TYPICAL)

1-6-4-5/(1-6-4-6 Blank)
PARA 1-6-5 TM 1-70-23

1-6-5 PROTECTIVE COVERS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-6-5.1 Protective Covers 1-6-5-2

INITIAL SETUP -- Retainer, 70700-20428-042

-- Support Poles, 70700-20427-041 through 70700-
Tools 20427-044
- Engine Air Inlet Plug, 70700-20507-042
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit - Forward and Rear Tiedown Fitting, 70700-20433-
045
• W/O HIRSS Flyaway Equipment Kit, 70700- - Lock Assembly, 70700-20369-041
10000-011, consisting of: - Oil Cooler, IR Jammer, Screen Cover, 70700-
20511-041
- APU Exhaust Plug, 70700-20509-041 - Pitot Tube Cover, 70700-20460-041
- Blade Fold Set, 70700-20412-011, consisting of: - HIRSS Cover, LH 89SDSCC-D-0162-1
-- Alignment Pin, 70700-20394-111 - HIRSS Cover, RH 89SDSCC-D-0162-2
-- Blade Fold Support, 70700-20417-041 - HIRSS Intake, Plug Assembly, LH 70700-20514-
-- Blade Fold Support, 70700-20417-042 041
-- Blade Handling Pole, 70700-20395-041 - HIRSS Intake, Plug Assembly, RH 70700-20514-
-- Retainer, 70700-20428-041 042
-- Retainer, 70700-20428-042 - HIRSS Exhaust, Plug Assembly, 70700-20515-
-- Support Poles, 70700-20427-041 through 70700- 043
20427-044
- Engine Air Inlet Plug, 70700-20507-042
- Engine Exhaust Plug, 70700-20508-041 • Main Rotor Blade Cover, 1730BH025-1, Locally-
- Lock Assembly, 70700-20369-041 Made, Figure H-187, Appendix H
- Oil Cooler, IR Jammer, Screen Cover, 70700-
20511-041 • Main Rotor Head Cover, 1730BH025-3, Locally-
- Pitot Tube Cover, 70700-20460-041 Made, Figure H-189, Appendix H

• Mast Cover, 1730BH025-6, Locally-Made, Figure

• HIRSS Flyaway Equipment Kit, 70700-10000- H-192, Appendix H
014, consisting of:
• Tail Rotor Blade Cover, 1730BH025-2, Locally-
Made, Figure H-188, Appendix H
- APU Exhaust Plug, 70700-20509-041
- Blade Fold Set, 70700-20412-011, consisting of: • Tail Rotor Gear Box Cover, 1730BH025-4,
-- Alignment Pin, 70700-20394-111 Locally-Made, Figure H-190, Appendix H
-- Blade Fold Support, 70700-20417-041
-- Blade Fold Support, 70700-20417-042 References
-- Blade Handling Pole, 70700-20395-041
-- Retainer, 70700-20428-041 • Appendix H

1-6-5-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-6-5

1-6-5.1 Protective Covers. (3) Locally make mast cover, 1730BH025-6,

and install over mast (Figure H-192, Ap-
1-6-5.1.1. Install. pendix H).
a. Install covers, 70700-20460-041, over pitot (4) Locally make main rotor head cover,
tubes (Figure 1-6-5-1). 1730BH025-3, and install over main rotor
b. Install plugs, 70700-20507-042, in engine air head (Figure H-189, Appendix H).
inlets.
(5) Locally make tail rotor gear box cover,
c. HIRSS Install HIRSS protective covers as 1730BH025-4, and install over tail rotor
follows: gear box (Figure H-190, Appendix H).

(1) Install right hand HIRSS intake plugs, 1-6-5.1.2. Remove.

70700-20514-042.
a. Remove cover from oil cooler, IR jammer, if
(2) Install left hand HIRSS intake plugs, installed, and screens (Figure 1-6-5-1).
70700-20514-041.
b. Remove plug from APU and engine exhaust
(3) Install HIRSS exhaust plugs, 70700-
ducts.
20515-043, on both sides.

(4) Install left hand HIRSS cover, 89SDSCC- c. W/O HIRSS Remove plugs from engine
D-0162-1. exhaust ducts.

(5) I n s t a l l r i g h t h a n d H I R S S c o v e r , d. HIRSS Remove covers from left and right

89SDSCC-D-0162-2. HIRSS, engine exhaust inlet, and engine
exhaust plug.
d. W/O HIRSS Insert engine exhaust plugs,
70700-20508-041, two places.
e. Remove plug from engine air inlets.
e. Install plug, 70700-20509-041, in APU exhaust
duct. f. Remove covers from pitot tubes.

f. Install cover, 70700-20511-041, over oil NOTE

cooler, IR jammer, if installed, and screens.
Use extreme care while removing cov-
NOTE
ers.
Use extreme care while installing cov-
ers. g. If installed, remove the following covers:

g. Install the following covers for storage, ship- (1) Main rotor blade covers.
ping, and adverse weather conditions.
(2) Tail rotor blade covers.
(1) Locally make main rotor blade covers,
1730BH025-1, and install over main rotor
(3) Main rotor head cover.
blades (Figure H-187, Appendix H).

(2) Locally make tail rotor blade covers, (4) Mast cover.
1730BH025-2, and install over tail rotor
blades (Figure H-188, Appendix H). (5) Tail rotor gear box cover.

1-6-5-2
PARA 1-6-5 TM 1-70-23

TAIL ROTOR BLADE

COVER 1730BH025−2

TAIL ROTOR GEARBOX

COVER 1730BH025−4

MAIN ROTOR
BLADE COVER
1730BH025−1

APU EXHAUST
PLUG
OIL COOLER, IR JAMMER 70700−20509−041
AND SCREEN COVER
70700−20511−041

PITOT TUBE COVER

70700−20460−041 ENGINE EXHAUST PLUG
(TYPICAL 2 PLACES) 70700−20508−041
(TYPICAL 2 PLACES)
HIRSS ENGINE EXHAUST PLUG ASSEMBLY
MAST COVER 70700−20515−043
1730BH025−6 (TYPICAL 2 PLACES)
HIRSS INTAKE PLUG ASSEMBLY
70700−20514−041 (LH)
70700−20514−042 (RH)
LEFT HIRSS COVER
ENGINE AIR 89SDSCC−D−0162−1
INLET PLUG RIGHT HIRSS COVER
70700−20507−042 89SDSCC−D−0162−2
MAIN ROTOR (TYPICAL 2 PLACES)
HEAD COVER
1730BH025−3

FB3405
SA

FIGURE 1-6-5-1. PROTECTIVE COVERS

1-6-5-3/(1-6-5-4 Blank)
PARA 1-6-6 TM 1-70-23

1-6-6 PARK HELICOPTER.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-6-6.1 Park Helicopter 1-6-6-1

INITIAL SETUP References

Tools • PARA 1-6-4

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit • PARA 1-6-5

• Chocks • PARA 1-6-7

1-6-6.1 Park Helicopter. c. Center tail wheel and place tail wheel lockpin
in ENGAGED position.
1-6-6.1.1. General.
d. Depress toe brake pedals and pull up on park-
a. Locate helicopter more than rotor blade ing brake handle to lock parking brakes. Chock
distance from other helicopters or objects. main wheels.

b. Park helicopter for ease of maintenance and e. Install protective covers (PARA 1-6-5).
servicing helicopter.
f. Connect low-resistance ground wire to static
1-6-6.1.2. Short-Term Parking. ground wire on left main landing gear.

NOTE 1-6-6.1.3. Long-Term Parking.

• During short-term parking, helicopter NOTE

should be attended or monitored at all
times. During long-term parking, the helicopter
will not be attended or monitored.
• With winds 20 knots or more, helicopter
shall face into wind. a. Park helicopter same as short-term parking.

• You may use battery power to position NOTE

stabilator. If battery low light is on, bat-
tery power will be available only for If 60-knot winds or more are expected,
APU starting, and external power should main rotor blades must be folded.
be used to operate stabilator.
b. If necessary, fold main rotor blades (PARA
a. Make sure stabilator is in neutral position, 0°. 1-6-7).

b. Engage gust lock. c. Tie down helicopter (PARA 1-6-4).

1-6-6-1/(1-6-6-2 Blank)
PARA 1-6-7 TM 1-70-23

1-6-7 FOLD/SPREAD MAIN ROTOR BLADES.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-6-7.1 Fold/Spread Main Rotor 1-6-7-2

Blades

INITIAL SETUP -- Support Poles, 70700-20427-041 through 70700-

20427-044
Tools - Engine Air Inlet Plug, 70700-20507-042
- Forward and Rear Tiedown Fitting, 70700-20433-
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit 045
• W/O HIRSS Flyaway Equipment Kit, 70700- - Lock Assembly, 70700-20369-041
10000-011, consisting of: - Oil Cooler, IR Jammer, Screen Cover, 70700-
20511-041
- APU Exhaust Plug, 70700-20509-041 - Pitot Tube Cover, 70700-20460-041
- Blade Fold Set, 70700-20412-011, consisting of: - HIRSS Cover, LH 89SDSCC-D-0162-1
-- Alignment Tool, 70700-20394-111 - HIRSS Cover, RH 89SDSCC-D-0162-2
-- Blade Fold Bracket, 70700-20416-042 - HIRSS Intake, Plug Assembly, LH 70700-20514-
-- Blade Fold Support, 70700-20417-041 041
-- Blade Fold Support, 70700-20417-042 - HIRSS Intake, Plug Assembly, RH 70700-20514-
-- Blade Handling Pole, 70700-20395-041 042
-- Retainer, 70700-20428-041 - HIRSS Exhaust, Plug Assembly, 70700-20515-
-- Retainer, 70700-20428-042 043
-- Support Poles, 70700-20427-041 through 70700-
20427-044
- Engine Air Inlet Plug, 70700-20507-042 • Grease Pencil
- Engine Exhaust Plug, 70700-20508-041
- Lock Assembly, 70700-20369-041 • Link
- Oil Cooler, IR Jammer, Screen Cover, 70700-
20511-041 • Main Rotor Blade Holder, Locally-Made, Figure
- Pitot Tube Cover, 70700-20460-041 H-193, Appendix H (Alternate for Blade Handling
Pole)

• HIRSS Flyaway Equipment Kit, 70700-10000- • Maintenance Platform (Alternate for Small Work-
014 (HIRSS), consisting of: stand)

- APU Exhaust Plug, 70700-20509-041 • Padding

- Blade Fold Set, 70700-20412-011, consisting of:
-- Alignment Tool, 70700-20394-111 • Pin, 70700-20394-045
-- Blade Fold Support, 70700-20417-041
-- Blade Fold Support, 70700-20417-042 • Protective Covering
-- Blade Handling Pole, 70700-20395-041
-- Retainer, 70700-20428-041 • Small Workstand (Alternate for Maintenance
-- Retainer, 70700-20428-042 Platform)

1-6-7-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-6-7

References • PARA 5-4-5

• Appendix H • PARA 5-4-18

• PARA 1-7-42 • PARA 5-4-31

• PARA 5-3-9 • PARA 12-4-26

1-6-7.1 Fold/Spread Main Rotor Blades. • If any blade is dropped during fold/
spread sequence, inspect elastomeric
bearing (PARA 5-4-5). If necessary,
WARNING inspect per PARA 1-7-42.

• Main rotor blade holder (Figure H-193,

• Make sure there is no equipment or Appendix H) may be used in place of
personnel in path of folding blades. blade handling pole, 70700-20395-041.
• Do not release rotor brake or gust lock 1-6-7.1.1. Fold Main Rotor Blades.
while main rotor blades are folded.
a. If blade deice kit is installed, disconnect
• To prevent injury to personnel or dam-
electrical connectors from main rotor blades
age to equipment, do not block swash-
(PARA 12-4-26).
plate during blade folding.

CAUTION WARNING

• To prevent damage to equipment, do not To prevent injury to personnel or dam-

start engines or pressurize hydraulic age to equipment, pitch control rods
systems while main rotor blades are must be disconnected prior to starting
folded. blade fold procedures.

• When folding blade, watch for possible b. Disconnect pitch control rods from spindle
interference between main rotor blade horns (PARA 5-4-18).
expandable pins of another blade and
blade being folded. c. Reinstall hardware in rod ends.
• When folding blade, make sure trim tab
does not come in contact with other CAUTION
blades.

• To prevent damage to trim tab, do not

support blade in trim tab area when us- To prevent damage to rod ends and/or
ing main rotor blade holder. main shaft extension, use suitable
protective covering when securing rod
NOTE ends.

• If pylon is to be folded, fold main rotor d. Install protective covering and secure rod ends
blades first. to main shaft extension.

1-6-7-2
PARA 1-6-7 TM 1-70-23

e. Attach retainer, 70700-20428-041, on left and engaged. If main rotor blade holder is
right side at STA 585.0 (Figure 1-6-7-1, Sheet used, slide over end of blade (Figure 1-6-
1, Detail B). 7-1, Sheet 1).

f. Attach retainer, 70700-20428-042, on left and (2) Relieve load on main rotor blade expand-
right side at STA 624.0. able pins on main rotor sleeve by lifting
blade tip while pulling up on pin.
g. Turn main rotor head until yellow index marks
on rotating and stationary swashplates line up. NOTE
If main rotor head is without yellow index
marks, do the following: If main rotor blade expandable pin is
stuck, refer to PARA 5-4-31 for removal
(1) Line up red index marks. procedures.

(2) Mark rotating and stationary swashplate (3) Remove leading edge main rotor blade
with grease pencil (Figure 1-6-7-1, Sheet expandable pin from blade cuff and main
1, Detail A). rotor sleeve.

(3) Line up grease pencil marks. (4) Using blade handling pole, walk blade
forward over nose of helicopter.
h. Turn main rotor head 360° as many times as
(5) Install blade fold bracket, 70700-20416-
required to have inboard tail rotor blade ap-
042 (part of blade fold support, 70700-
proximately horizontal so that it does not
20417-042), between blade cuff with pin,
extend above top of tail rotor pylon. Engage
70700-20394-045, and sleeve with
gust lock or rotor brake.
expandable pin (Figure 1-6-7-1, Sheet 2,
NOTE Detail D).

(6) Raise or lower the blade to line up pin

All main rotor blade expandable pins
holes. Alignment tool may be used to line
must be replaced in the hole from which
up holes when installing pins.
they were removed.
NOTE
i. Unlock all main rotor blade expandable pins
(Figure 1-6-7-1, Sheet 1, Detail C). If main rotor blade expandable pin is
stuck, refer to PARA 5-4-31 for removal
j. Fold red color-coded blade as follows: procedures.

NOTE (7) Remove trailing edge main rotor blade

expandable pin, walk blade to rear of
When installing blade handling pole, helicopter until fold bracket link, 70700-
make sure pivot at upper fitting of pole 20415-042 (part of blade fold support,
is oriented so as not to pry fitting from 70700-20417-042), can be installed
blade. Rotate fitting before pulling on between sleeve with expandable pin, and
pole. fold bracket with quick-release pin.

(1) With aid of assistants, connect blade (8) C o n t i n u e w a l k i n g b l a d e t o r e a r o f

handling pole to blade lock receiver near helicopter until blade is above front
end of blade. Make sure lock is fully retainer, 70700-20428-041.

1-6-7-3
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-6-7

NOTE NOTE

When installing support pole, make sure If main rotor blade expandable pin is
pivot at upper fitting of pole is oriented stuck, refer to PARA 5-4-31 for removal
so as not to pry fitting from blade. Ro- procedures.
tate fitting before pulling on pole.
(3) Remove trailing edge main main rotor
(9) Using maintenance platform or small blade expandable pin from blade cuff and
workstand, have assistant manually hold main rotor sleeve.
blade while blade handling pole or main
rotor blade holder is removed. Im-
(4) Using blade handling pole, walk blade
mediately install support pole, 70700-
back until it is above support fitting on tail
20427-041, color-coded red, in blade lock
cone.
receiver (Figure 1-6-7-1, Sheet 2, Detail
E).
NOTE
NOTE
When installing support pole, make sure
Blade may be guided by assistant on pivot at upper fitting of pole is oriented
maintenance platform/small workstand. so as not to pry fitting from blade. Ro-
tate fitting before pulling on pole.
(10) Put ball on lower end of support pole in
socket of retainer, 70700-20428-041. (5) Using maintenance platform or small
Hold ball in socket by installing quick- workstand, have assistant manually hold
release pin. blade while blade handling pole or main
rotor blade holder is removed. Im-
(11) Attach fork on lower end of support pole mediately install support pole, 70700-
to rod end on retainer, using quick-release 20427-043, color-coded blue, in blade
pin. lock receiver (Figure 1-6-7-1, Sheet 3,
Detail F).
k. Fold blue color-coded blade as follows:
NOTE
NOTE
Blade may be guided by assistant on
When installing blade handling pole, maintenance platform/small workstand.
make sure pivot at upper fitting of pole
is oriented so as not to pry fitting from
(6) Put ball on lower end of support pole into
blade. Rotate fitting before pulling on
socket of retainer, 70700-20428-042.
pole.
Hold ball in socket by installing quick-
release pin.
(1) With aid of assistants, connect blade
handling pole to blade lock receiver near
end of blade. Make sure lock is fully (7) Attach fork on lower end of support pole
engaged. If main rotor blade holder is to rod end of retainer, using quick-release
used, slide over end of blade (Figure 1-6- pin.
7-1, Sheet 1).
(8) Install padding between red and blue
(2) Relieve load on main rotor blade expand- blades.
able pins on main rotor sleeve by lifting
blade tip while pulling up on pin. l. Fold black color-coded blade as follows:

1-6-7-4
PARA 1-6-7 TM 1-70-23

YELLOW
BLADE

BLACK
BLADE HANDLING POLE
BLADE
70700−20395−041
(SEE NOTE 1) OR
MAIN ROTOR BLADE
HOLDER

BLUE BLADE

RED BLADE

MAIN ROTOR BLADE

1.00 IN. STATIONARY
EXPANDABLE PIN
SWASHPLATE

RED GREASE
LINES PENCIL
MARK

OPEN A
CLOSE

BLADE C
CUFF
ROTATING 2.75 IN.
SWASHPLATE

B
RETAINER
(SEE NOTES
2 AND 3)

MAIN ROTOR
SLEEVE
NOTES
1. POLE / HOLDER POSITIONED UNDER
BLUE BLADE FOR CLARITY ONLY.
2. RETAINER, 70700−20428−041, IS
INSTALLED AT STA 585.0 (LEFT AND
RIGHT SIDES).
3. RETAINER, 70700−20428−042, IS QUICK−
INSTALLED AT 624.0 (LEFT AND RIGHT RELEASE
PIN FO0620_1A
SIDES). SA

FIGURE 1-6-7-1. FOLD/SPREAD MAIN ROTOR BLADES (SHEET 1 OF 7)

1-6-7-5
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-6-7

YELLOW
BLADE RED
BLADE

BLACK
BLADE

BLUE
BLADE

INSTALL BLADE FOLD SUPPORT AND FOLD BACK RED BLADE

MAIN ROTOR BLADE
BLADE 1 BLADE
RED BLADE FOLDED EXPANDABLE PIN 2

RED BLADE INSTALL

F BRACKET F
ROTATE R R
BLADE O O
N N
T T
SLEEVE SLEEVE
SUPPORT POLE
(RED BLADE)
70700−20427−041 ROTATE
BLADE 3 BRACKET BLADE
COLOR−CODED RED BLADE 4
INSTALLED
SLEEVE
QUICK− PIN
RELEASE PIN D
FORK F
R
E BRACKET O F
RED N
COLOR T R
O
BRACKET N
SLEEVE T
QUICK−
RELEASE PIN
ROTATE 5 SLEEVE 6 BLADE FOLDED
SOCKET BLADE SUPPORT INSTALLED
INSTALL
LINK
RETAINER SLEEVE
70700−20428−041 BALL
F
R
QUICK− O
F N
RELEASE PIN R T
O
VIEW LOOKING FORWARD N
FROM STA 585.0 BLADE BRACKET T
BLADE FO0620_2B
SA

FIGURE 1-6-7-1. FOLD/SPREAD MAIN ROTOR BLADES (SHEET 2 OF 7)

1-6-7-6
PARA 1-6-7 TM 1-70-23

SUPPORT POLE
YELLOW (RED BLADE)
BLADE 70700−20427−041
COLOR−CODED RED
AND RETAINER
70700−20428−041
BLUE
BLACK BLADE
BLADE SUPPORT POLE
(BLUE BLADE)
70700−20427−043
COLOR−CODED BLUE,
AND RETAINER
70700−20428−042
F

RED
BLADE

BLUE BLADE FOLDED

BLADE LOCK
BLUE RECEIVER
BLADE

SUPPORT POLE
(BLUE BLADE)
70700−20427−043
COLOR−CODED BLUE

QUICK−
RELEASE PINS

FORK

QUICK−
RELEASE PIN

SOCKET
BALL

RETAINER
70700−20428−042 QUICK−RELEASE
PIN

VIEW LOOKING FORWARD

FROM STA 624.0 FO0620_3B
SA

FIGURE 1-6-7-1. FOLD/SPREAD MAIN ROTOR BLADES (SHEET 3 OF 7)

1-6-7-7
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-6-7

NOTE NOTE

When installing blade handling pole, When installing support pole, make sure
make sure pivot at upper fitting of pole pivot at upper fitting of pole is oriented
is oriented so as not to pry fitting from so as not to pry fitting from blade. Ro-
blade. Rotate fitting before pulling on tate fitting before pulling on pole.
pole.
(6) Using maintenance platform or small
(1) Install blade handling pole in blade lock workstand, have assistant manually hold
receiver near end of blade. Make sure blade while blade handling pole or main
lock is fully engaged. If main rotor blade rotor blade holder is removed. Im-
holder is used, slide over end of blade mediately install blade support pole,
(Figure 1-6-7-1, Sheet 1). 70700-20427-042, color-coded black, in
blade lock receiver (Figure 1-6-7-1, Sheet
(2) Relieve load on main rotor blade expand- 4, Detail H).
able pins on main rotor sleeve by lifting
blade tip while pulling up on pin.
NOTE
NOTE
Blade may be guided by assistant on
If main rotor blade expandable pin is maintenance platform/small workstand.
stuck, refer to PARA 5-4-31 for removal
procedures. (7) Put ball on lower end of support pole in
socket of retainer, 70700-20428-041.
(3) Remove trailing edge main main rotor Hold ball in socket by installing quick-
blade expandable pin from blade cuff and release pin.
main rotor sleeve.
(8) Attach fork on lower end of support pole
(4) W a l k b l a d e f o r w a r d o v e r n o s e o f to rod end on retainer with quick-release
helicopter and install blade fold bracket, pin.
70700-20416-041 (part of blade fold sup-
port, 70700-20417-041), in blade cuff m. Fold yellow color-coded blade as follows:
with pin, 70700-20394-045, and sleeve,
using expandable pin (Figure 1-6-7-1, NOTE
Sheet 4, and Detail G).

NOTE When installing blade handling pole,

make sure pivot at upper fitting of pole
If main rotor blade expandable pin is is oriented so as not to pry fitting from
stuck, refer to PARA 5-4-31 for removal blade. Rotate fitting before pulling on
procedures. pole.

(5) Remove leading edge main rotor blade (1) Install blade handling pole in blade lock
expandable pin, walk blade to rear of receiver near end of blade. Make sure
helicopter until fold bracket link, 70700- lock is fully engaged. If main rotor blade
20415-041 (part of blade fold support, holder is used, slide over end of blade
70700-20417-041), can be installed (Figure 1-6-7-1, Sheet 1).
between sleeve with expandable pin, and
fold bracket, using quick-release pin. (2) Relieve load on main rotor blade expand-
Continue walking blade to rear of able pins on main rotor sleeve by lifting
helicopter. blade tip while pulling up on pin.

1-6-7-8
PARA 1-6-7 TM 1-70-23

YELLOW BLADE

G
BLACK BLADE

BLUE BLADE

RED BLADE

INSTALL BLADE FOLD SUPPORT

AND FOLD BACK BLADE
SWING BLACK BLADE IN THIS MAIN ROTOR
1 2
BLADE
DIRECTION TO INSTALL SUPPORT EXPANDABLE F
BLADE BLADE R
SEE DETAIL G PIN
O
N
T
SLEEVE SLEEVE

BLACK BLADE F
R
O INSTALL
N
T BRACKET
SUPPORT POLE
(BLACK BLADE)
70700−20427−042 3 BLADE
(COLOR CODED BLACK) F 4
INSTALLED R
BLADE O
N
T BRACKET
QUICK−
G SLEEVE
RELEASE BRACKET
PIN SLEEVE F
R
FORK O
N
BLACK H T
COLOR−CODE

F
R 6 BLADE FOLDED
SOCKET
O 5
RETAINER N SLEEVE
INSTALL
QUICK− T SLEEVE LINK
70700−20418−041
RELEASE PIN
BLADE
QUICK− BALL
RELEASE PIN
F
R
VIEW LOOKING FORWARD O
FROM STA 585.0 N SUPPORT
T INSTALLED
BLADE FO0620_4A
BRACKET SA

FIGURE 1-6-7-1. FOLD/SPREAD MAIN ROTOR BLADES (SHEET 4 OF 7)

1-6-7-9
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-6-7

NOTE a. Spread yellow color-coded blade as follows:

If main rotor blade expandable pin is (1) Remove padding from between blades.
stuck, refer to PARA 5-4-31 for removal
procedures. (2) Using maintenance platform or small
workstand, have assistant manually hold
(3) Remove leading edge main main rotor blade.
blade expandable pin from blade cuff and
main rotor sleeve. (3) Remove quick-release pins from retainer,
70700-20428-042 (Figure 1-6-7-1, Sheet
(4) Using blade handling pole, walk blade to 5, Detail J).
rear of helicopter until blade is above rear
NOTE
retainer, 70700-20428-042, on tail cone.
When installing blade handling pole,
NOTE
make sure pivot at upper fitting of pole
When installing support pole, make sure is oriented so as not to pry fitting from
pivot at upper fitting of pole is oriented blade. Rotate fitting before pulling on
so as not to pry fitting from blade. Ro- pole.
tate fitting before pulling on pole. (4) Remove yellow color-coded support pole,
70700-20427-044, from blade and from
(5) Using maintenance platform or small
retainer. Immediately install blade
workstand, have assistant manually hold
handling pole in blade lock receiver near
blade while blade handling pole or main
end of blade. Make sure lock is fully
rotor blade holder is removed. Im-
engaged. If main rotor blade holder is
mediately install support pole, 70700-
used, slide over end of blade.
20427-044, in blade lock receiver (Figure
1-6-7-1, Sheet 5, Detail J). (5) Walk blade forward until main rotor blade
expandable pin holes line up, and blade is
NOTE in flight position.
Blade may be guided by assistant on (6) Insert main rotor blade expandable pin
maintenance platform/small workstand. through main rotor blade cuff lugs and
spindle. Align main rotor blade expand-
(6) Put ball on lower end of support pole in
able pin handle with main rotor blade cuff
socket of retainer. Hold ball in socket by
decal. Do not hit or force main rotor blade
installing quick-release pin.
expandable pins into position. Gently rock
(7) Attach fork on lower end of support pole main rotor blade to get proper alignment.
to rod end on retainer with quick-release (7) Check main rotor blade expandable pin
pin. tension (PARA 5-3-9).
(8) Install padding between yellow and black (8) Close and latch both pins (Figure 1-6-7-1,
blades. Sheet 1, Detail C).
1-6-7.1.2. Spread Main Rotor Blades. (9) Remove blade handling pole or main rotor
blade holder from blade.
NOTE
b. Spread black color-coded blade as follows:
Make sure main rotor blade expandable
pins are installed in the same hole from (1) Using maintenance platform or small
which they were removed. workstand, have assistant hold blade.

1-6-7-10
PARA 1-6-7 TM 1-70-23

YELLOW BLADE

YELLOW BLADE FOLDED

RED, BLUE, AND BLACK BLADES NOT SHOWN

YELLOW BLADE

SUPPORT POLE
(YELLOW BLADE)
70700−20427−044
(COLOR CODED YELLOW)

QUICK−
RELEASE
PIN
FORK

YELLOW
COLOR−CODE

SOCKET

RETAINER QUICK−
70700−20428−042 RELEASE PIN

BALL
QUICK−
RELEASE PIN

VIEW LOOKING FORWARD

FO0620_5B
FROM STA 624.0 SA

FIGURE 1-6-7-1. FOLD/SPREAD MAIN ROTOR BLADES (SHEET 5 OF 7)

1-6-7-11
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-6-7

YELLOW BLADE

K
BLACK BLADE

BLUE BLADE

BLADE
HANDLING POLE
70700−20395−041
OR MAIN ROTOR
BLADE HOLDER RED BLADE

K
MAIN ROTOR BLADE REMOVE BLADE FOLD SUPPORT AND SPREAD BLACK BLADE
EXPANDABLE
PIN 2 3
1
BLADE
REMOVE
LINK SLEEVE
SLEEVE BRACKET BRACKET
SLEEVE
BLADE
BLADE F
R
O
F F N
R R T
O O
N N BRACKET
T T
4 F 5 6 7 MAIN ROTOR BLADE
R EXPANDABLE
O BLADE PIN
N BLADE BLADE SPREAD FR
BLADE T F ON
R OPEN T
SLEEVE O CLOSE
BRACKET N
T
SLEEVE SLEEVE

BLADE
F CUFF
R REMOVE
O BRACKET
N MAIN ROTOR SLEEVE
T SUPPORT
REMOVED

FO0620_6A
SA

FIGURE 1-6-7-1. FOLD/SPREAD MAIN ROTOR BLADES (SHEET 6 OF 7)

1-6-7-12
PARA 1-6-7 TM 1-70-23

YELLOW
BLADE

BLACK
BLADE

BLUE BLADE

RED BLADE

L
REMOVE BLADE FOLD SUPPORT AND SPREAD RED BLADE

1
REMOVE ROTATE
ROTATE BLADE BLADE 3
LINK BLADE 2 SLEEVE
SLEEVE
SLEEVE
F
R
O
N
T
F F
R R
O O
BLADE N N
T BRACKET T
BLADE BRACKET

7 MAIN ROTOR BLADE

EXPANDABLE
BLADE 4 BLADE PIN
F 5 BLADE 6 FR
R BLADE SPREAD O
O PIN NT
N OPEN
PIN T CLOSE

F
R ROTATE F
REMOVE O R BLADE
BLADE
BRACKET BRACKET N O CUFF
T N
SLEEVE SLEEVE T
SLEEVE FO0620_7
MAIN ROTOR SLEEVE SA

FIGURE 1-6-7-1. FOLD/SPREAD MAIN ROTOR BLADES (SHEET 7 OF 7)

1-6-7-13
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-6-7

(2) Remove quick-release pins from retainer, decal. Do not hit or force main rotor blade
70700-20428-041, holding black color- expandable pins into position. Gently rock
coded support pole, 70700-20427-042, in main rotor blade to get proper alignment.
place (Figure 1-6-7-1, Sheet 4, Detail H).
(8) Check main rotor blade expandable pin
NOTE tension (PARA 5-3-9).

When installing blade handling pole, (9) Close and latch both pins (Figure 1-6-7-1,
make sure pivot at upper fitting of pole Sheet 1, Detail C).
is oriented so as not to pry fitting from
blade. Rotate fitting before pulling on (10) Remove blade handling pole or main rotor
pole. blade holder from blade.

(3) Remove support pole from blade and c. Spread blue color-coded blade as follows:
from retainer. Immediately install blade
handling pole in blade lock receiver near (1) Remove padding from between blades.
end of blade. Make sure lock is fully
engaged. If main rotor blade holder is (2) Using maintenance platform or small
used, slide over end of blade. workstand, have assistant hold blade.

(4) Using blade handling pole, walk blade (3) Remove quick-release pins from retainer,
forward, remove fold bracket link, 70700- 70700-20428-042, holding support pole,
20415-041 (part of blade fold support, 70700-20427-043, color-coded blue
70700-20417-041), from fold bracket, (Figure 1-6-7-1, Sheet 3, Detail F).
70700-20416-041 (part of blade fold sup-
port, 70700-20417-041), and sleeve. NOTE
Continue walking blade forward over
nose of helicopter until leading edge of When installing blade handling pole,
blade cuff can be secured to sleeve with make sure pivot at upper fitting of pole
main rotor blade expandable pin (Figure is oriented so as not to pry fitting from
1-6-7-1, Sheet 6, Detail K). blade. Rotate fitting before pulling on
pole.
(5) Insert main rotor blade expandable pin
through main rotor blade cuff lugs and (4) Remove support pole from blade and
spindle. Align main rotor blade expand- retainer. Immediately install blade
able pin handle with main rotor blade cuff handling pole in blade lock receiver near
decal. Do not hit or force main rotor blade end of blade. Make sure lock is fully
expandable pins into position. Gently rock engaged. If main rotor blade holder is
main rotor blade to get proper alignment. used, slide over end of blade.
Do not lock pin.
(5) Walk blade forward until main rotor blade
(6) Remove bracket from blade and sleeve, expandable pin holes line up, and blade is
walk blade to rear of helicopter until trail- in flight position.
ing edge of blade cuff can be secured to
sleeve with main rotor blade expandable (6) Insert main rotor blade expandable pin
pin. through main rotor blade cuff lugs and
spindle. Align main rotor blade expand-
(7) Insert main rotor blade expandable pin able pin handle with main rotor blade cuff
through main rotor blade cuff lugs and decal. Do not hit or force main rotor blade
spindle. Align main rotor blade expand- expandable pins into position. Gently rock
able pin handle with main rotor blade cuff main rotor blade to get proper alignment.

1-6-7-14
PARA 1-6-7 TM 1-70-23

(7) Check main rotor blade expandable pin (5) Insert main rotor blade expandable pin
tension (PARA 5-3-9). through main rotor blade cuff lugs and
spindle. Align main rotor blade expand-
(8) Close and latch both pins (Figure 1-6-7-1, able pin handle with main rotor blade cuff
Sheet 1, Detail C). decal. Do not hit or force main rotor blade
expandable pins into position. Gently rock
(9) Remove blade handling pole or main rotor main rotor blade to get proper alignment.
blade holder from blade. Do not lock pin.
d. Spread red color-coded blade as follows:
(6) Remove bracket from blade and sleeve,
(1) Using maintenance platform or small walk blade to rear of helicopter until trail-
workstand, have assistant hold blade. ing edge of blade cuff can be secured to
sleeve with main rotor blade expandable
(2) Remove quick-release pins from retainer, pin.
70700-20428-041, holding support pole,
7 0700-20427-041, col or-c o d e d r e d (7) Insert main rotor blade expandable pin
(Figure 1-6-7-1, Sheet 2, Detail E). through main rotor blade cuff lugs and
spindle. Align main rotor blade expand-
NOTE able pin handle with main rotor blade cuff
When installing blade handling pole, decal. Do not hit or force main rotor blade
make sure pivot at upper fitting of pole expandable pins into position. Gently rock
is oriented so as not to pry fitting from main rotor blade to get proper alignment.
blade. Rotate fitting before pulling on
pole. (8) Check main rotor blade expandable pin
tension (PARA 5-3-9).
(3) Remove support pole from blade and
retainer. Immediately install blade (9) Close and latch both pins (Figure 1-6-7-1,
handling pole in blade lock receiver near Sheet 1, Detail C).
end of blade. Make sure lock is fully
engaged. If main rotor blade holder is (10) Remove blade handling pole or main rotor
used, slide over end of blade. blade holder from blade.
(4) Using blade handling pole, walk blade
forward, remove fold bracket link, 70700- e. Remove retainers, 70700-20428-041 and -042,
20415-042 (part of blade fold support, from tail cone (Figure 1-6-7-1, Sheet 1, Detail
70700-20417-042), from fold bracket, B).
70700-20416-042 (part of blade fold sup-
port, 70700-20417-042), and sleeve. f. If blade deice kit is installed, connect electrical
Continue walking blade forward over connectors to main rotor blades (PARA 12-4-
nose of helicopter until leading edge of 26).
blade cuff can be secured to sleeve with
main rotor blade expandable pin (Figure g. Connect pitch control rod upper end on spindle
1-6-7-1, Sheet 7, Detail L). horn (PARA 5-4-18).

1-6-7-15/(1-6-7-16 Blank)
PARA 1-6-8 TM 1-70-23

1-6-8 FOLD/SPREAD TAIL ROTOR BLADES.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-6-8.1 Fold/Spread Tail Rotor 1-6-8-1

Blades

INITIAL SETUP Materials/Parts

Tools • Tiedown Strap, Item 333, Appendix D

References
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• Appendix D
• Grease Pencil
• Appropriate MTF
• Maintenance Platform
• PARA 1-6-9
• Protective Covering
• PARA 5-4-38
• Pylon Lock Strut, 70700-20385-041 • PARA 5-4-39

• Tail Rotor Blade Spacers, 70700-20453-041 • PARA 12-4-52

1-6-8.1 Fold/Spread Tail Rotor Blades. The pylon lock strut can then be used as
a step for access to tail rotor blades.
1-6-8.1.1. Fold Tail Rotor Blades.
a. If blade deice kit is installed, disconnect tail ro-
tor slipring electrical connectors from tail rotor
WARNING blade electrical connectors (PARA 12-4-52).

NOTE
Injury to personnel and damage to
Do not change length of control rods.
equipment will result if tail rotor pylon
is folded to 90° incorrectly. If pylon is b. Remove bolts, washers, and nuts from pitch
to be folded 90°, refer to PARA 1-6-9. control rods at pitch beam.
NOTE c. Remove pitch control rods and bonding jump-
ers from pitch beam. Reinstall bolts, washers,
Tail rotor blades should be folded with and nuts in rods for future use (Figure 1-6-8-1,
pylon spread using maintenance Sheet 1).
platform. If maintenance platform is not
available, fold pylon 90° and secure d. If color bands have worn off, use grease pencil
with pylon lock strut, 70700-20385-041. and put index marks on blades, retention plates,

1-6-8-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-6-8

BOLT, WASHER, NUT,

COTTER PIN
PITCH
CONTROL
ROD

BONDING
JUMPER
INBOARD
RETENTION
PLATE

INBOARD
TAIL ROTOR
BLADE

OUTBOARD
RETENTION
PLATE

PITCH
BEAM

OUTBOARD
TAIL ROTOR
BOLT, BLADE
WASHERS,
NUT AK1970
SA

FIGURE 1-6-8-1. FOLD/SPREAD TAIL ROTOR BLADES (SHEET 1 OF 2)

pitch control rods, and pitch beam before and outboard) are parallel with each other
separating retention plates, to make sure bal- (Figure 1-6-8-1, Sheet 2).
ance integrity during buildup.
i. Put tail rotor blade spacer between blades near
NOTE blade tip, and tie blades together.
• Record location and stack-ups of all
hardware removed. CAUTION
• Retention plates may contain hardware
for balance purposes. Reinstall hardware
in the same location from which they To prevent damage to rod ends and/or
were removed. blades, use suitable protective covering
when securing pitch control rods.
e. Remove outboard retention plate bolts, wash-
ers, balance weights, and nuts. Save hardware j. Install protective covering and secure loose
for use when spreading blades. ends of pitch control rods to pitch beam or
blades.
f. Slide outboard tail rotor blades towards pitch
beam. 1-6-8.1.2. Spread Tail Rotor Blades.
g. If blade deice kit is installed, secure slipring ro-
tor, spacers, and shims to inner retention plate a. Remove protective covering and free pitch
with tiedown straps, Item 333, Appendix D. control rod ends from pitch beam or blades.

h. Turn outboard tail rotor blades clockwise on b. Untie blades and remove tail rotor blade spac-
pitch control shaft until both blades (inboard ers.

1-6-8-2
PARA 1-6-8 TM 1-70-23

INBOARD TAIL
ROTOR BLADES

TAIL GEAR
BOX

OUTBOARD
TAIL ROTOR
BLADES

PITCH
BEAM

PITCH
CONTROL
ROD AK1971
SA

FIGURE 1-6-8-1. FOLD/SPREAD TAIL ROTOR BLADES (SHEET 2 OF 2)

c. Turn outboard tail rotor blade place. Keep spacers and laminated shims next
counterclockwise on pitch control shaft until to their holes in retention plate.
blade is in normal flight position.
f. Secure outboard retention plate to inboard
retention plate using bolts, washers, balance
CAUTION
weights, and nuts (PARA 5-4-38).

Make sure color bands or index marks NOTE

on blades, retention plates, pitch control
rods, and pitch beam line up. Do not change lengths of control rods.
NOTE
g. Install tail rotor pitch control rods in pitch
Retention plates may contain hardware beam (PARA 5-4-39).
for balance purposes. Reinstall hardware
in the same location from which they h. Connect tail rotor slipring electrical connectors
were removed. to tail rotor blade electrical connectors (PARA
12-4-52).
d. Slide outboard blade in toward inboard blade
and line up boltholes of inboard and outboard
i. If blade deice kit is installed, check for proper
retention plates. Outboard blade should line up
clearance between tail rotor slipring rotor and
with deep slot in outboard retention plate
stator (PARA 12-4-52).
(Figure 1-6-8-1).

e. If blade deice kit is installed, remove tiedown j. Perform a limited maintenance test flight (Ap-
straps holding slipring rotor and hardware in propriate MTF).

1-6-8-3/(1-6-8-4 Blank)
PARA 1-6-9 TM 1-70-23

1-6-9 FOLD/UNFOLD TAIL PYLON.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-6-9.1 Fold/Unfold Tail Pylon 1-6-9-2

INITIAL SETUP • Protective Caps and Plugs

Tools • Tiedown Strap, Item 333, Appendix D

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit References

• Crowfoot Adapter, 7/8-inch • Appendix D

• Feeler Gage • Appendix H
• Flight Control Quick-Disconnect Wrench, Locally- • MIL-STD-6866
Made, Figure H-48, Appendix H
• PARA 1-6-15
• Fluorescent Penetrant Inspection Kit
• PARA 1-6-16
• Lockout Blocks, 70700-20463-041
• PARA 1-7-11
• Padding
• PARA 1-7-20
• Pylon Fold Strut, 70700-20448-044
• PARA 2-4-137
• Pylon Lock Strut, 70700-20385-041

• Torque Wrench, 0 - 30 in. lbs • PARA 2-4-139

• Torque Wrench, 30 - 150 in. lbs • PARA 2-4-142

• Torque Wrench, 700 - 1600 in. lbs • PARA 2-6-5

Materials/Parts • PARA 2-6-42

• Fibrous Cord, Item 139, Appendix D • PARA 6-4-40

• Lockwire, Item 197, Appendix D • PARA 11-4-118

1-6-9-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-6-9

1-6-9.1 Fold/Unfold Tail Pylon. (2) Place collective stick in about midposi-
tion.
1-6-9.1.1. Fold Tail Pylon.
(3) For right spring cylinder, apply full left
NOTE pedal to reduce spring tension. Remove
cotter pin, nut, and washer. Pull down on
• When folding tail pylon, tail rotor blades cylinder while removing bolt. Unbolt
may or may not be folded. spring cylinder from support.
• If main rotor blades are to be folded, (4) For left spring cylinder, apply full right
fold pylon last. pedal to reduce spring tension. Remove
cotter pin, nut, and washer. Pull down on
• Stabilator does not have to be removed,
cylinder while removing bolt. Unbolt
if pylon is to be folded 90°.
spring cylinder from support.
a. If required, remove stabilator (PARA 2-4-142).
(5) Turn off all hydraulic and electrical power
b. Remove tail gear box fairings (PARA 2-4- (PARA 1-6-15 and PARA 1-6-16).
137).
(6) Tie down cylinders to pylon with tiedown
straps, Item 333, Appendix D.
CAUTION
e. Hinge open section of tail drive shaft cover,
just forward of intermediate gear box.
To prevent injury to personnel, lockout
blocks, 70700-20463-041, and tiedown f. Remove intermediate gear box fairing (PARA
straps, Item 333, Appendix D, must be 2-4-139).
installed on quadrant before disconnect-
ing tail rotor flight control cables. g. Remove screws and washers securing access
panels to rear section of tail cone at STA 640.0.
c. Install lockout blocks and tiedown straps on Remove access panels.
quadrant (Figure 1-6-9-1, Sheet 1, Detail A).
NOTE
NOTE
Either crowfoot adapter or locally-made
Each spring cylinder is installed the flight control quick-disconnect wrench
same way. may be used to disconnect cables.
d. If lockout blocks are not available use this
h. If necessary, locally make flight control quick-
alternate method to release spring cylinder
disconnect wrench (Figure H-48, Appendix H).
tension:
i. Remove locknuts from control cable quick-
CAUTION disconnects, just forward of STA 642.0.
Separate cable halves (Figure 1-6-9-1, Sheet 2,
Detail C).
To prevent damage to equipment, do not
start engines or pressurize hydraulic j. Disconnect electrical connectors, P600 and
systems while main rotor blades are J600, near intermediate gear box (Figure 1-6-
folded. 9-1, Sheet 2, Detail B).

(1) Turn on electrical and hydraulic power k. Install protective caps and plugs on electrical
(PARA 1-6-15 and PARA 1-6-16). connectors.

1-6-9-2
PARA 1-6-9 TM 1-70-23

TIEDOWN STRAP TIEDOWN STRAP

(2 REQUIRED) (2 REQUIRED)

QUADRANT
A

LOCKOUT BLOCK
LOCKOUT BLOCK
70700−20463−041

AK1972
SA

FIGURE 1-6-9-1. FOLD/UNFOLD TAIL PYLON (SHEET 1 OF 6)

l. Remove bolts, washers, and nuts connecting lower corners of tail cone bulkhead (Figure
tail drive shaft to flexible coupling (Figure 1-6- 1-6-9-1, Sheet 2).
9-1, Sheet 2, Detail D). After removing each
bolt, keep washers with that bolt. Put hardware o. Put padding under tail drive shaft to support
in suitable bag and tie to drive shaft. shaft (Figure 1-6-9-1, Sheet 3).

m. Working within tail cone, back off tapered pins p. Slowly fold pylon.
from pylon.
q. Install pylon lock strut if pylon is to be folded
90° (Figure 1-6-9-1, Sheet 4, Detail E).
WARNING
r. Watch that tail rotor blades clear main rotor
blades. If tail blades need repositioning, turn at
Make sure personnel secure pylon to intermediate gear box input flange.
prevent inadvertent folding when bolts
are removed. s. If pylon is to be folded 180°, install pylon fold
strut on pylon and tail cone (Figure 1-6-9-1,
NOTE
Sheet 5).
To prevent excessive hydraulic fluid
leaks from tail rotor quick-disconnects, t. Put padding under tips of tail rotor blades, and
make sure hydraulic system pressure is tie tail rotor blades to main rotor blades or
reduced to static. blade support poles, using fibrous cord, Item
139, Appendix D.
n. Remove bolts and washers attaching pylon to
tail cone bulkhead. Bolts are on upper and u. Remove tapered pins.

1-6-9-3
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-6-9

B ELECTRICAL
CONNECTOR
STABILATOR J600
D
ELECTRICAL STA
B CONNECTOR 648.0
P600

TAIL
CONE

QUICK−
DISCONNECT
PYLON
CABLE
HALF
C
C CABLE
HALF
ACCESS HOLE

BOLT, WASHER
STA RETAINER
642.0

LOCKNUT

BOLT

T SPHERICAL
ON WASHER
FR

INTERMEDIATE
GEAR BOX
NUT

SECTION III
DRIVE SHAFT

SPHERICAL
WASHER
FLEXIBLE
COUPLING

FZ0537_2B
SA

FIGURE 1-6-9-1. FOLD/UNFOLD TAIL PYLON (SHEET 2 OF 6)

1-6-9-4
PARA 1-6-9 TM 1-70-23

TAIL CONE PYLON

PADDING

TAIL ROTOR
BLADES
(FOLDED)

AK1974
SA

FIGURE 1-6-9-1. FOLD/UNFOLD TAIL PYLON (SHEET 3 OF 6)

v. Using fluorescent penetrant inspection kit, (1) Install bolt into barrel-nut until two
fluorescent penetrant inspect pylon attachment threads protrude past nut.
bolts and washers, and tapered pins (MIL-
STD-6866). (2) Check breakaway torque by backing off
bolt. IF TORQUE NEEDED TO
REMOVE BOLT IS LESS THAN 24
WARNING INCH-POUNDS, REPLACE BARREL-
NUT AND RECHECK TORQUE. IF
TORQUE IS STILL LESS THAN 24
FSCAP
INCH-POUNDS, REPLACE BOLT.
Verification of barrel-nut and retainer
installation and breakaway torque are
critical characteristics. Verification of WARNING
correct installation and torque is
required.
FSCAP
NOTE

Make sure only square barrel-nuts are Radius pad installation is a critical
used. characteristic. Make sure installation
inspection is performed.
w. Check all four pylon to tail cone bolts and
barrel-nuts for minimum breakaway torque as x. Inspect canted bulkhead for damage and radius
follows (Figure 1-6-9-1, Sheet 6, Detail G): pad installation (PARA 2-6-42).

1-6-9-5
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-6-9

STA
645.8

TAIL CONE

E
E

TAIL ROTOR
PYLON LOCK STRUT PYLON
BL 70700−20385−041
6.38
LH FB3370_4
SA

FIGURE 1-6-9-1. FOLD/UNFOLD TAIL PYLON (SHEET 4 OF 6)

1-6-9.1.2. Unfold Tail Pylon.

CAUTION
a. Make sure all inspections as noted in PARA
1-6-9.1.1 have been performed prior to unfold-
ing tail pylon. To prevent crushing, make sure all
electrical connectors and control cables
b. Install tapered pins in tail cone. Make sure pins are out of the way.
are backed off enough to prevent interference
when closing pylon. NOTE

NOTE To prevent excessive hydraulic fluid

leaks fron tail rotor quick-disconnects,
When unfolding tail pylon, tail rotor make sure hydraulic system is reduced
blades may or may not be folded. to static.

c. Remove padding and untie tail rotor blades. f. Slowly unfold pylon and watch that tail rotor
blades clear main rotor blades. If blades need
d. If pylon is folded 180°, remove pylon fold strut repositioning, turn at intermediate gear box
from pylon and tail cone (Figure 1-6-9-1, Sheet input flange.
5).
g. Remove padding from under drive shaft.
e. If pylon is folded 90°, remove pylon lock strut
from pylon and tail cone (Figure 1-6-9-1, Sheet h. Before closing pylon, make sure area is clean
4, Detail E). and free of foreign material.

1-6-9-6
PARA 1-6-9 TM 1-70-23

i. Install countersunk washers (countersunk side n. Perform the following:

facing bolthead) and washers on attachment
bolts (Figure 1-6-9-1, Sheet 6, Detail G). (1) Remove protective caps and plugs from
electrical connectors.
j. Install attachment bolts and washers securing
pylon to tail cone. Do not torque bolts now. (2) Inspect and treat electrical connectors
(PARA 1-7-20).
k. Turn all tapered pins into mating bushings in
pylon. (3) Connect electrical connectors, P600 and
J600, near intermediate gear box (Figure
1-6-9-1, Sheet 2, Detail B).
WARNING
o. Remove hardware from bag tied to drive shaft.

FSCAP p. Connect drive shaft to flexible coupling

(PARA 6-4-40).
Installation of bolts and washers and
bolt torque are critical characteristics.
Verification of correct installation and
torque is required.
WARNING

NOTE Verification of proper cable routing

between pulleys and retaining pins or
Be careful not to damage tail rotor servo
guards is a critical characteristic.
lines when torquing bolts.

l. TORQUE BOLTS TO 1311 - 1449 INCH- NOTE

POUNDS. Apply torque stripes (PARA 2-6-5).
• Either crowfoot adapter or locally-made
m. Perform tail cone/tail pylon gap check as fol- flight control quick-disconnect wrench,
lows (Figure 1-6-9-2): Figure H-48, Appendix H, may be used
to connect cables.
(1) Working within tail cone, back off tapered
pins from pylon. • Quick-disconnects have two configura-
tions.
(2) Using feeler gage, measure gap between
tail pylon and tail cone bosses marked • Extension half bottomed in slot half
"A". MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE GAP (2.44 inch slot).
TO BE 0.010-INCH.
• Ball end bottoms before extension half
(3) Using feeler gage, measure gap between (2.63 inch slot).
tail pylon and tail cone bosses marked
"B". MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE GAP • Both assemblies are acceptable when
TO BE 0.030-INCH. NO MORE THAN torqued to specifications.
TWO NON-ADJACENT LOCATIONS
CAN BE GREATER THAN 0.015- q. Connect cable halves at quick-disconnects (two
INCH. places) (Figure 1-6-9-1, Sheet 6, Detail F).
Bottom forward cable retainer locknut in aft
(4) If gap exceeds limits, contact Sikorsky cable slot. TORQUE LOCKNUT TO 40 - 60
ILS for recommended disposition. INCH-POUNDS.

(5) Turn all tapered pins into mating bushings r. Lockwire, Item 197, Appendix D, locknut to
in pylon. retainer on quick-disconnect.

1-6-9-7
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-6-9

PYLON

JACKING
PYLON FOLD STRUT
PAD
70700−20448−044

FB3369
SA

FIGURE 1-6-9-1. FOLD/UNFOLD TAIL PYLON (SHEET 5 OF 6)

v. Close tail rotor drive shaft cover just forward

CAUTION of intermediate gear box.

Make sure cable halves are connected at w. Install access panels to rear section of tail cone
quick-disconnects before removing at STA 640.0 using screws and washers.
lockout blocks from quadrant.
x. Install intermediate gear box fairing (PARA
s. Remove lockout blocks from quadrant (Figure 2-4-139).
1-6-9-1, Sheet 1, Detail A).

t. If required, connect spring cylinders (PARA y. Install tail gear box fairings (PARA 2-4-137).
11-4-118).
z. Check helicopter logbook to make sure that
u. Before installing fairings, make sure area is pylon to tail cone torque check is shown as due
clean and free of foreign material. 27 - 33 flight hours after installation (PARA
1-7-11).
CAUTION
aa. If removed, install stabilator (PARA 2-4-142).

To prevent damage to equipment, do not

start engines or pressurize hydraulic
systems while blades are folded.

1-6-9-8
PARA 1-6-9 TM 1-70-23

STABILATOR

QUICK−
TAIL DISCONNECT
CONE
CABLE
HALF
CABLE
PYLON F HALF
F

G RETAINER
LOCKNUT
(TORQUE
40−60 IN. LBS)
STA ACCESS
642.0 HOLE

TAIL CONE
BARREL−NUT

RETAINER

BOLT (TORQUE
1311−1449 IN. LBS)

PYLON COUNTERSUNK
WASHER
PLAIN
FR WASHER
ON
T

FZ0537_6
SA

FIGURE 1-6-9-1. FOLD/UNFOLD TAIL PYLON (SHEET 6 OF 6)

1-6-9-9
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-6-9

FITTING
N T
F RO

B
B

FA1994
SA

FIGURE 1-6-9-2. TAIL CONE/TAIL PYLON GAP CHECK

1-6-9-10
PARA 1-6-10 TM 1-70-23

1-6-10 KNEEL HELICOPTER.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-6-10.1 Kneel Helicopter 1-6-10-1

INITIAL SETUP
References
• PARA 1-6-17

1-6-10.1 Kneel Helicopter. beneath helicopter under cargo hook, LF/ADF loop
antenna, AN/ARQ-31 antenna, and lower anticolli-
Kneel helicopter, using instructions given in PARA sion light, and drag beam wire strike cutters.
1-6-17. Pay particular attention to clearance

1-6-10-1/(1-6-10-2 Blank)
PARA 1-6-11 TM 1-70-23

1-6-11 CABIN TIEDOWN FITTINGS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-6-11.1 Replace Cabin Tiedown 1-6-11-1

Fittings

INITIAL SETUP Materials/Parts

• Antiseize Compound, Item 74, Appendix D
Tools
• Lockwire, Item 198, Appendix D
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• Machinery Towel, Item 211, Appendix D
• Nonmetallic Scraper, Locally-Made • Sealing Compound, Item 292, Appendix D
• Trichloroethylene, Technical, Item 343, Appendix
• Pliers
D
• Tiedown Fitting, 70700-20433-045 References
• Appendix D
• Torque Wrench, 30 - 150 in. lbs
• PARA 2-4-45
• Torque Wrench, 150 - 750 in. lbs
• PARA 2-4-69
• Torque Wrench, 0 - 600 ft lbs • PARA 2-4-70

1-6-11.1 Replace Cabin Tiedown Fittings. (1) Remove crew chief’s/passenger’s seats, if
installed (PARA 2-4-45).
1-6-11.1.1. Install.
NOTE
a. Remove tiedown cover plates from
soundproofing in cabin ceiling. Removal of main transmission drip pan
is required only when replacing barrel-
b. Inspect tiedown cover plate making sure insert nuts at STA 343.58.
did not remain in barrel-nut. If insert remained
(2) If required, remove main transmission
in barrel-nut, remove insert and repair cover
drip pan (PARA 2-4-70).
plate (PARA 2-4-69).
(3) Remove soundproofing panels as required
c. Thread new bolt into barrel-nut. TORQUE (PARA 2-4-69).
MUST BE 32 - 300 INCH-POUNDS. If run-on
torque is not 32 - 300 inch-pounds, replace (4) At STA 312.3, remove barrel-nut from
barrel-nut as follows: transmission beam using pliers.

1-6-11-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-6-11

CABIN
SUPPORT

WL
A WASHER 261.0

RETAINING
RING

BOLT (TORQUE
A 108−118 FT LBS)
BL
16.5

TIEDOWN
FITTING

INSIDE CABIN LOOKING

FORWARD AT STA
A 343.58 AND STA 312.30
RIGHT SIDE SHOWN,
LEFT SIDE OPPOSITE

TIEDOWN FITTING ASSEMBLY

70700−20433−045

FB3368A
SA

FIGURE 1-6-11-1. REPLACE CABIN TIEDOWN FITTINGS

(5) At STA 343.58, perform the following: (8) At STA 343.58, perform the following:

(a) Remove sealing compound using (a) Push barrel-nut into transmission
nonmetallic scraper. beam with barrel side toward bolt-
head.
(b) Remove plastic plug in transmission
(b) Install plastic plug in transmission
beam.
beam.
(c) Remove barrel-nut from transmis- (c) Clean surface of plastic plug and
sion beam. transmission beam area using
machinery towel, Item 211, Ap-
pendix D, wet with technical trichlo-
CAUTION roethylene, Item 343, Appendix D.
(d) Apply a bead of sealing compound,
Damage to barrel-nut recess will occur Item 292, Appendix D around plastic
if barrel-nut is improperly installed. plug.
Make sure barrel side of nut is toward
bolthead. (9) Install soundproofing panels as required
(PARA 2-4-69).
(6) Install retainer over barrel-nut. (10) If removed, install main transmission drip
pan (PARA 2-4-70).
(7) At STA 312.3, push barrel-nut into trans-
mission beam with barrel side toward (11) I f r e m o v e d , i n s t a l l c r e w c h i e f ’ s /
bolthead. passenger’s seats (PARA 2-4-45).

1-6-11-2
PARA 1-6-11 TM 1-70-23

cabin support. TORQUE BOLT TO 108 - 118

WARNING FOOT-POUNDS.

e. Lockwire, Item 198, Appendix D, bolt to

Injury to personnel and damage to drilled-head bolt in passenger’s seat support
equipment will result of improper fitting.
tiedown fitting is installed. Tiedown fit-
1-6-11.1.2. Remove.
ting, 70700-20433-045, with an "H"
etched in the bolthead, 70700-20472- NOTE
101, is the only approved tiedown fit-
ting. Keep bolt and washer with fitting.

NOTE a. Remove bolt and countersunk washer securing

tiedown fitting assembly to cabin support
Install countersunk washer with (Figure 1-6-11-1, Detail A).
countersunk side facing down against b. Apply antiseize compound, Item 74, Appendix
shoulder of bolt. D, to tiedown cover plate insert threads.
d. Install countersunk washer on bolt and install c. Install tiedown cover plates on soundproofing
tiedown fitting (Figure 1-6-11-1, Detail A) to in cabin ceiling.

1-6-11-3/(1-6-11-4 Blank)
PARA 1-6-12 TM 1-70-23

1-6-12 TIEDOWN PLATES.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-6-12.1 Replace Tiedown Plates 1-6-12-1

INITIAL SETUP • Torque Wrench, 700 - 1600 in. lbs

Tools References

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit • PARA 2-4-36

• Tiedown Plate, 70700-20414-041 • PARA 2-4-94

• Tiedown Plate, 70700-20414-042 • PARA 2-4-99

1-6-12.1 Replace Tiedown Plates. 12-1, Detail A). TORQUE BOLTS TO 732 -
808 INCH-POUNDS.
1-6-12.1.1. Install.
1-6-12.1.2. Remove.
a. Remove left and right drag beam support fair-
ings and cockpit steps (PARA 2-4-94 and NOTE
PARA 2-4-99).
Keep hardware together and stow with
b. Remove left and right roll vibration absorbers kit.
(PARA 2-4-36).
a. Remove bolts and washers securing tiedown
NOTE
plates to landing gear supports. Remove
• Tiedown plate, 70700-20414-042, is in- tiedown plate (Figure 1-6-12-1, Detail A).
stalled on left landing gear support.
b. Install left and right roll vibration absorbers
• Tiedown plate, 70700-20414-041, is in- (PARA 2-4-36).
stalled on right landing gear support.
c. Install left and right drag beam support fairings
c. Install tiedown plate on landing gear support and cockpit steps (PARA 2-4-94 and PARA
and attach with bolts and washers (Figure 1-6- 2-4-99).

1-6-12-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-6-12

WASHER
NAS1149F0863P

LANDING GEAR
SUPPORT BOLT AN8−23A
A (TORQUE 732−
808 IN. LBS)
(4 PLACES)

BOLT
A STORAGE

TIEDOWN PLATE
70700−20414
(−042 LH SHOWN
−041 RH OPPOSITE)

LEFT SIDE SHOWN

RIGHT SIDE OPPOSITE
FO0621
SA

FIGURE 1-6-12-1. REPLACE TIEDOWN PLATES

1-6-12-2
PARA 1-6-13 TM 1-70-23

1-6-13 TAIL CONE TOW FITTINGS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-6-13.1 Replace Tail Cone Tow 1-6-13-1

Fittings

INITIAL SETUP • Tow Fitting, 70700-20433-042

Tools

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit

• Pylon Fold Strut, 70700-20448-044

1-6-13.1 Replace Tail Cone Tow Fittings. b. Install tow fittings on tail cone at STA 646.0,
BL 6.50, and attach with nut and washers
NOTE (Figure 1-6-13-1, Detail A).
• Replacement of left and right fittings is
the same. 1-6-13.1.2. Remove.

• Tail cone tow fittings are designed to Remove nuts and washers securing tow fittings
tow the helicopter at "cargo loading from tail cone (Figure 1-6-13-1, Detail A). Remove
winch" speed only, and at very shallow tow fittings.
left or right angles using only a tail
wheel steering bar.

1-6-13.1.1. Install.
a. Check that pylon fold strut is installed (Figure
1-6-13-1).

1-6-13-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-6-13

TOW FITTING NUT,

70700−20433−042 WASHERS

TAIL
CONE

A
FRONT
A

WL
216.3

TAIL ROTOR
PYLON STRUT
JACKING 70700−20448−044
BL
PAD 6.50
(TYP)

VIEW
LOOKING DOWN
STA 646.0
FC4138B
SA

FIGURE 1-6-13-1. REPLACE TAIL CONE TOW FITTINGS

1-6-13-2
PARA 1-6-14 TM 1-70-23

1-6-14 FUSELAGE AND TAIL CONE TIEDOWN RINGS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-6-14.1 Replace Fuselage and Tail 1-6-14-1

Cone Tiedown Rings

INITIAL SETUP • Torque Wrench, 150 - 750 in. lbs

Tools

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit

1-6-14.1 Replace Fuselage and Tail Cone a. Install tiedown ring to fitting at STA 308.0
Tiedown Rings. with eyebolt, washers, and nut. TORQUE
NUT TO 150 - 300 INCH-POUNDS. Install
1-6-14.1.1. Remove. cotter pin (Figure 1-6-14-1, Detail A).
a. Remove nut, washers, and eyebolt attaching
tiedown ring to fitting at STA 308.0. Remove b. Install tiedown ring to fitting at STA 485.0
tiedown ring (Figure 1-6-14-1, Detail A). with bolt, washers, and nut. TORQUE NUT
TO 170 - 340 INCH-POUNDS. Install cotter
b. Remove nut, washers, and bolt attaching pin (Figure 1-6-14-1, Detail B).
tiedown ring to fitting at STA 485.0. Remove
tiedown ring (Figure 1-6-14-1, Detail B). c. Install eyebolt in fitting at STA 308.0 with
c. Remove nut, washers, and eyebolt from fitting washers and nut. TORQUE NUT TO 150 - 300
at STA 308.0 (Figure 1-6-14-1, Detail C). INCH-POUNDS. Install cotter pin (Figure 1-6-
14-1, Detail C).
1-6-14.1.2. Install.
NOTE
Eyebolt, 70219-02136-102, is to be
used.

1-6-14-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-6-14

EYEBOLT, WASHERS,
NUT (TORQUE 150−300
IN. LBS), COTTER PIN

FITTING
C

FUSELAGE
TIEDOWN
RING
B

O NT
STA 308.0
FR (LEFT SIDE SHOWN
A
RIGHT SIDE OPPOSITE)

FITTING COUNTERSUNK
C WASHER
ESSS FITTING

EYEBOLT, WASHERS
NUT (TORQUE
150−300 IN. LBS), BOLT, WASHERS,
COTTER PIN NUT (TORQUE
170−340 IN. LBS),
B COTTER PIN

TAIL CONE
TIEDOWN
RING
FR T
ON ON STA 485.0
T FR (LEFT SIDE SHOWN
RIGHT SIDE OPPOSITE)
STA 308.0
(LEFT SIDE SHOWN
RIGHT SIDE OPPOSITE)
FK1856A
SA

FIGURE 1-6-14-1. REPLACE FUSELAGE AND TAIL CONE TIEDOWN RINGS

1-6-14-2
PARA 1-6-15 TM 1-70-23

1-6-15 APPLY HYDRAULIC POWER.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE PAGE

1-6-15.1 External Hydraulic Power 1-6-15-1 1-6-15.2 Internal Hydraulic Power 1-6-15-2

INITIAL SETUP • PARA 11-4-90

Tools
• PARA 11-4-91
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• PARA 11-4-92
• Hydraulic Power Source
References
• PARA 1-3-8
• PARA 1-6-16

1-6-15.1 External Hydraulic Power. respective reservoir low capsule on the

caution/advisory panel to go on.
1-6-15.1.1. General.
• Make sure aircraft logbook and
maintenance documentation is reviewed
CAUTION prior to applying hydraulic power.

a. Check with maintenance personnel in charge of

• To prevent accidental engagement of
helicopter, prior to applying hydraulic power.
backup hydraulic pump when external
hydraulic power is applied to helicopter,
pull out BACKUP PUMP PWR circuit CAUTION
breaker located on the NO. 1 DC PRI
BUS circuit breaker panel.

• Operation of the backup hydraulic pump To prevent damage to flight control

while external hydraulic power is ap- system, do not move flight controls
plied to the helicopter backup system while blades are folded and hydraulic
can cause damage to the backup pump. power is applied. If movement of flight
controls is required while blades are
NOTE folded, forward, aft, and lateral control
rods must be disconnected.
• Whenever ground return lines from
external hydraulic power source are con- b. If required, disconnect forward, aft, and lateral
nected to helicopter, the pump module control rods (PARA 11-4-90, PARA 11-4-91,
reservoir will deplete, causing its PARA 11-4-92).

1-6-15-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-6-15

1-6-15.1.2. Connect. c. Install caps on pressure and return line quick-

disconnects.
a. Open main rotor pylon sliding cover.
d. Service hydraulic pump modules (PARA 1-3-
b. Remove caps from pressure and return line 8).
quick-disconnects.
e. If required, connect forward, aft, and lateral
c. Inspect quick-disconnect male couplings for control rods (PARA 11-4-90, PARA 11-4-91,
damage prior to installation. PARA 11-4-92).

NOTE f. Make sure area is clean and free of foreign

material.
Make sure to loop pressure line over
high point on helicopter to prevent air g. Close and latch main rotor pylon sliding cover.
from entering hydraulic system. Loop
line over engine cowling or main rotor 1-6-15.2 Internal Hydraulic Power.
pylon transmission cover.
1-6-15.2.1. General.
d. Connect pressure line from hydraulic power
source to pressure quick-disconnect on No. 1,
No. 2, or backup hydraulic pump (Figure 1-6- CAUTION
15-1, Detail A and Detail B).

NOTE • Damage to backup hydraulic system will

result if backup pump is run for an
Make sure to loop return line over high extended period of time when surround-
point on helicopter to prevent air from ing temperature is above 90°F (32°C).
entering hydraulic system. Loop line To prevent overheating backup
over engine cowling or main rotor pylon hydraulic system, use this chart for
transmission cover. limits when running backup pump.

e. Connect return line from hydraulic power Cooldown

source to return quick-disconnect on No. 1, No. Surrounding Operating Time,
2, or backup return port. Temperature Time Pump Off
F° (C°) (Minutes) (Minutes)
f. Start hydraulic power source. Adjust flow rate
and pressure to 6 gpm at 3000 psi. Open 90° (32°) max Unlimited -
hydraulic power source outlet and inlet valves.
91° - 100° (33° 24 72
1-6-15.1.3. Disconnect. - 38°)
a. Close hydraulic power source outlet and inlet 101° - 125° 16 48
valves. Shut down hydraulic power source. (39° - 52°)
b. Disconnect hydraulic power source pressure
and return lines from No. 1, No. 2, or backup
hydraulic pump and No. 1, No. 2, or backup • If weight on wheels switch is bypassed,
return port (Figure 1-6-15-1, Detail A and overheating of backup pump module can
Detail B). occur.

1-6-15-2
PARA 1-6-15 TM 1-70-23

SECOND STAGE FIRST STAGE

HYDRAULIC PUMP HYDRAULIC PUMP
A
QUICK−DISCONNECT
BACKUP FOR EXTERNAL
HYDRAULIC PUMP POWER CONNECTION
SECOND STAGE
RETURN PORT

BACKUP SYSTEM
HYDRAULIC PUMP

FIRST STAGE
RETURN PORT
T
BACKUP RETURN ON
BACKUP SYSTEM FR
RETURN PORT

QUICK−DISCONNECT
FOR EXTERNAL
POWER CONNECTION

T
ON
FR

QUICK−DISCONNECT
FOR EXTERNAL
POWER CONNECTION

NO. 2 HYDRAULIC
PUMP (SECOND STAGE)
NO. 2 RETURN
(SECOND STAGE)
NO. 1 HYDRAULIC
PUMP (FIRST STAGE)

NO. 1 RETURN
(FIRST STAGE) AK1984
SA

FIGURE 1-6-15-1. EXTERNAL HYDRAULIC POWER

1-6-15-3
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-6-15

NOTE folded, forward, aft, and lateral control

rods must be disconnected.
• Make sure flight controls are free to
move. b. If required, disconnect forward, aft, and lateral
control rods (PARA 11-4-90, PARA 11-4-91,
• Make sure aircraft logbook and PARA 11-4-92).
maintenance documentation is reviewed
prior to applying hydraulic power. 1-6-15.2.2. Connect.

a. Connect electrical power (PARA 1-6-16).

a. Check with maintenance personnel in charge of
helicopter, prior to applying hydraulic power.
b. Place BACKUP HYD PUMP switch to ON.

1-6-15.2.3. Disconnect.
CAUTION
a. Place BACKUP HYD PUMP switch to OFF.

To prevent damage to flight control b. Disconnect electrical power (PARA 1-6-16).

system, do not move flight controls
while blades are folded and hydraulic c. If required, connect forward, aft, and lateral
power is applied. If movement of flight control rods (PARA 11-4-90, PARA 11-4-91,
controls is required while blades are PARA 11-4-92).

1-6-15-4
PARA 1-6-16 TM 1-70-23

1-6-16 APPLY ELECTRICAL POWER.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE PAGE

1-6-16.1 External Electrical Power 1-6-16-1 1-6-16.2 Internal Electrical Power 1-6-16-2

INITIAL SETUP References

Tools • Appropriate Flight Manual

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit

• Generator Set, MD-3M (or equivalent)

1-6-16.1 External Electrical Power. NOTE

1-6-16.1.1. General. Make sure aircraft logbook and

maintenance documentation is reviewed
prior to applying electrical power.
WARNING
Check with maintenance personnel in charge of
helicopter, prior to applying electrical power.
• The ac electrical supply system of
helicopter can be lethal under certain 1-6-16.1.2. Connect.
conditions.
a. Make sure all switches and circuit breakers are
• Before applying power to helicopter, in the appropriate position (Appropriate Flight
make sure area around stabilator is clear Manual).
of personnel and equipment. Should sta-
bilator be in any position other than tral- b. Open access cover (4B-26). Connect generator
ing edge down, it will reposition set to EXT POWER RECEPTACLE, using
automatically to full down when power equipment operation instructions (Figure 1-6-
is applied. 16-1).

• Backup pump may start if APU ac- c. Start generator set.

cumulator is below 2600 psi when ac
power is applied to the helicopter. Make d. Place EXT PWR switch, on upper console, to
sure all hydraulic and flight components RESET, then ON (Figure 1-6-16-1, Detail A).
are secured for operation. Make sure all
personnel are clear of flight controls. e. Place BATT switch, on upper console, to ON.

1-6-16-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-6-16

1-6-16.1.3. Disconnect. automatically to full down when power

is applied.
a. Place BATT switch, on upper console, to OFF
(Figure 1-6-16-1, Detail A). • Backup pump may start if APU ac-
cumulator is below 2600 psi when ac
b. Place EXT PWR switch, on upper console, to power is applied to the helicopter. Make
OFF. sure all hydraulic and flight components
are secured for operation. Make sure all
personnel are clear of flight controls.
WARNING
NOTE

Make sure generator set is off, prior to Make sure aircraft logbook and
disconnecting. maintenance documentation is reviewed
prior to applying electrical power.
c. Shut down and disconnect generator set from
Check with maintenance personnel in charge of
EXT POWER RECEPTACLE (Figure 1-6-16-
helicopter, prior to applying electrical power.
1).
1-6-16.2.2. Connect.
d. Close access cover (4B-26).

1-6-16.2 Internal Electrical Power.

WARNING
1-6-16.2.1. General.
To prevent injury to personnel and dam-
age to helicopter, have fire guard check
WARNING APU fuel drain. Wait at least two
minutes after APU shut down before at-
tempting a restart. DO NOT RESTART
• The ac electrical supply system of
APU until fuel drainage has stopped.
helicopter can be lethal under certain
conditions. With qualified and authorized personnel at controls,
start APU.
• Before applying power to helicopter,
make sure area around stabilator is clear 1-6-16.2.3. Disconnect.
of personnel and equipment. Should sta-
bilator be in any position other than tral- With qualified and authorized personnel at
ing edge down, it will reposition controls, shutdown APU.

1-6-16-2
PARA 1-6-16 TM 1-70-23

EXT PWR BATT

RESET
O O
F F
A F F
ON ON

ACCESS COVER
4B−26
AB1107
SA

FIGURE 1-6-16-1. EXTERNAL ELECTRICAL POWER

1-6-16-3/(1-6-16-4 Blank)
PARA 1-6-17 TM 1-70-23

1-6-17 HYDRAULIC CART CONNECT AND CHECKOUT.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-6-17.1 Connect and Check Out 1-6-17-1

Hydraulic Cart

INITIAL SETUP References

Tools • Appendix D

• Hydraulic Cart Assembly, 70700-20437-047 • PARA 2-4-95

Materials/Parts • PARA 2-4-96

• Hydraulic Fluid, Item 154, Appendix D • PARA 2-4-97

1-6-17.1 Connect and Check Out Hydraulic e. Put hydraulic cart assembly, 70700-20437-047,
Cart. in cabin and tie unit down (Figure 1-6-17-1,
Sheet 1, Detail B).
1-6-17.1.1. Connect.
f. Measure and record exposed shiny portion of
a. Unfasten and fold down left and right main upper and lower shock strut for all three struts.
gear shock strut upper fairings (PARA 2-4-96). Tape recorded dimension to each strut.

b. Unfasten and remove left and right main land- g. Check hydraulic cart quick-disconnects for
ing gear lower shock strut fairings (PARA 2-4- cleanness; if needed, flush ends of quick-
95). disconnects with hydraulic fluid, Item 154, Ap-
pendix D.
c. Remove left and right tail cone covers from tail
h. Plug ground wire from hydraulic cart in ground
cone.
receptacle on helicopter fuselage.
d. Remove tail landing gear fairing from bottom i. Service hydraulic cart with hydraulic fluid,
of tail cone (PARA 2-4-97). Item 154, Appendix D. Do not let level in
reservoir fall below 1 gallon, or rise above 2
NOTE gallons.

Take necessary precautions to prevent j. Connect hose, 70700-20368-048, to upper and

hydraulic cart and lines from soiling lower kneeling valve quick-disconnects of left
interior furnishings. main wheel shock strut. Connect other end of

1-6-17-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-6-17

KNEELING UPPER
VALVE AND SHOCK
DISCONNECT STRUT
HOSE CONNECTION
TO RIGHT SHOCK STRUT HOSE
NOT SHOWN 70700−20368−047
HOSE
70700−20368−048
(TO LEFT AND RIGHT
SHOCK STRUT)
TO
C HYDRAULIC
CART

LOWER
SHOCK
A T STRUT
ON
A FR

HOSE
B 70700−20368−047
(TO TAIL SHOCK STRUT)

HYDRAULIC CART ASSEMBLY

SHOWN INSTALLED IN CABIN

TAIL WHEEL SHOCK STRUT

HOSE
D E
70070−20368−048 RESERVOIR CONTROL
UPPER 70700−20446−042 PENDANT
KNEELING
VALVE
RESERVOIR
70700−20446−042

HOSE
70700−20368−047
(TO TAIL LANDING
GEAR SHOCK STRUT)

TO
HYDRAULIC
CART
LOWER C
KNEELING
VALVE

POWER CABLE
70070−20437−044

T TO 28 VDC 50 AMP HOSE

ON HOSE (ON TRANSPORT AIRCRAFT 70700−20368−048
FR 70700−20368−048 OR THROUGH ADAPTER (TO RIGHT MAIN LANDING
(TO LEFT MAIN LANDING 70700−20437−045 TO GEAR SHOCK STRUT)
GEAR SHOCK STRUT) AUXILIARY POWER CART)
MAIN WHEEL SHOCK STRUT
(LEFT SHOWN, RIGHT SIMILAR) HYDRAULIC CART ASSEMBLY
70700−20437−047
FO0622_1
SA

FIGURE 1-6-17-1. CONNECT AND CHECK OUT HYDRAULIC CART (SHEET 1 OF 2)

1-6-17-2
PARA 1-6-17 TM 1-70-23

EMERGENCY
STOP
LANDING GEAR CONTROL
CONTROL BOX LEFT TAIL RIGHT
70700−20444−041 START UP

POWERON
GROUND
STRAP STOP DOWN

C0NT
R
POW OL
ER
POW MOT
5 ER OR /
ON POW PUMP
ER
MOT
OR
STOP 50

D E

CONTROL PENDANT
70700−20443−045
J4
CONTROL P4
PENDANT
J3 RECEPTACLE
J2
PRESSURE SWITCH
POWER
AND CONTROL VALVES
RECEPTACLE
RECEPTACLE

FO0622_2
SA

FIGURE 1-6-17-1. CONNECT AND CHECK OUT HYDRAULIC CART (SHEET 2 OF 2)

left gear hose to LEFT MAIN connection on wheel shock strut. Connect other end of hose to
cart (Figure 1-6-17-1, Sheet 1, Detail B and TAIL connection on cart (Figure 1-6-17-1,
Detail C). Sheet 1, Detail A and Detail B).

NOTE m. Open upper and lower kneeling valves of three

shock struts.
• Hose is connected to cart, on lower left
side of cart, just above hose connection n. Connect power cable, 70700-20437-044, to
for tail landing gear shock strut. connector, J2 on back of cart (Figure 1-6-17-1,
Sheet 1, Detail B and Sheet 2, Detail D). Con-
• If necessary, loosen jamnut securing nect other end of cable to source of 28 vdc.
disconnect to valve, and release trapped
hydraulic pressure. o. Connect connector, P4, of remote control
pendant, 70700-20443-045, to connector, J4 on
k. Connect hose, 70700-20368-048, to upper and control box, 70700-20444-041 (Figure 1-6-17-
lower kneeling valve quick-disconnects of right 1, Sheet 2, Detail D and Detail E).
main wheel shock strut. Connect other end of
right gear hose to RIGHT MAIN connection on 1-6-17.1.2. Check Out.
cart.
a. Push in CONTROL POWER and MOTOR/
NOTE PUMP POWER circuit breakers, on hydraulic
cart control box (Figure 1-6-17-1, Sheet 2,
Hose is connected to cart on lower right Detail D).
side of cart.
b. Press START switch, on control box. POWER
l. Connect hose, 70700-20368-047, to upper and ON light control box and light on pendant will
lower kneeling valve quick-disconnects on tail go on.

1-6-17-3
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-6-17

g. Push EMERGENCY STOP switch, on top of

WARNING control box. Pump will stop running and all
lights will go off.

Before raising or lowering helicopter

check that there are no obstructions CAUTION
overhead, and that the area under
helicopter is clear of personnel/
equipment and tools; kneeling valves are To prevent damage to underside of
opened, and that there is enough helicopter, lower main and tail struts
hydraulic fluid in cart. together. Do not lower helicopter any
lower than 3/8-inch from floor.
NOTE
h. Repeat check out without pushing in circuit
The hydraulic cart operator should place breakers. Lower helicopter by lowering struts,
himself where he can see all areas of the using switches on pendant.
helicopter affected by this procedure.

c. Press START button on pendant. i. Push STOP switch on pendant. Pump will stop
running and all lights will go off. Pull out
NOTE CONTROL POWER AND MOTOR/PUMP
POWER circuit breakers on control box.
MOTOR STOP light on control box will
go on when and if return line to j. Close kneeling valves on all shock struts.
reservoir is disconnected or when pres-
sure (hydraulic) is over 50 psi. k. Install tail landing gear fairing to bottom of tail
cone (PARA 2-4-97).
d. Place RIGHT switch, on pendant, to UP. Right
gear should lengthen. Release switch. Place
l. Install left and right tail cone covers to tail
switch to DOWN. Right gear should shorten.
cone.
Release switch.

e. Repeat procedure for left and tail struts, using m. Install left and right main landing gear lower
LEFT and TAIL switches on pendant. shock strut fairings (PARA 2-4-95).

f. Partly lower helicopter, by lowering struts, us- n. Fold up and fasten left and right main gear
ing switches on pendant. shock strut upper fairings (PARA 2-4-96).

1-6-17-4
 TM 1-70-23

SECTION 1-7

PERIODIC/SPECIAL INSPECTIONS

SECTION OVERVIEW

PARAGRAPH TITLE

1-7-1 Special Inspection Requirements

1-7-2 Engine Output Shaft Inspection - 1 to 3 Hours

1-7-3 Gear Boxes, Mounting Bolts Torque Check - 9 to 11 Hours

1-7-4 Main Rotor Blade Tip Cap Screws - 9 to 11 Hours

1-7-5 Main Rotor Head Torque Check - 9 to 11 Hours

1-7-6 Spindle Sleeve Bearing Inspection - 9 to 11 Hours

1-7-7 Outboard Retention Plate Nuts and Tail Rotor Pitch Beam
Retaining Nut Torque Check - 9 to 11 Hours

1-7-8 Tail Rotor Drive Shaft Torque Check - 9 to 11 Hours

1-7-9 Tail Gear Box Inboard Retention Plate Torque Check - 9 to 11

Hours

1-7-10 Tail Rotor Cable Tension Check - 9 to 11 Hours

1-7-11 Every 30 Hours

1-7-12 Every 50 Hours

1-7-13 Every 60 Hours

1-7-14 Every 100 Hours

1-7-15 Every 150 Hours

1-7-16 Every 250 Hours

1-7-17 Every 1000 Hours

1-7-18 Before First Flight of Day

1-7-19 Every 30 Days

1-7-1
TM 1-70-23

PARAGRAPH TITLE

1-7-20 Every 90 Days

1-7-21 Every 120 Days

1-7-22 Every 6 Months

1-7-23 Every 12 Months

1-7-24 After Dual-Engine Operation with Gust Lock Engaged

1-7-25 After Exceeding 145 KIAS with Cabin Doors Opened

1-7-26 After Fire Extinguishing System Discharge (Halon-Type)

1-7-27 After Firing Chaff Dispenser

1-7-28 After Firing Ejector Rack, BRU-22A/A

1-7-29 After Engine Output Shaft Maintenance

1-7-30 After Last Flight/Before First Flight of Day

1-7-31 After Main Rotor Blade Contact with Tail Rotor Pylon or Tail
Cone

1-7-32 After Main Rotor Blade Contact with IR Jammer, ALQ-144

1-7-33 After Operating Transmission at High Temperature or Low/No

Oil Pressure

1-7-34 After Single-Engine Operation Above Idle with Gust Lock

Engaged

1-7-35 Before Loading Stores - Inspect Ejector Rack, BRU-22A/A

1-7-36 Before Every Flight - Inspect Hydraulic System Components

1-7-37 Engine Output Shaft Inspection - After Disconnect

1-7-38 Engine Whine/High Frequency Vibration Inspection

1-7-39 Hard Landing

1-7-40 Helicopter Subject to Excessive Spin Rate

1-7-41 Helicopter Subject to Salt Water Immersion or Dry Chemical

and Foam-Type Fire Extinguishing Agents

1-7-42 Main Rotor Blades Dropped During Blade Fold

1-7-2
 TM 1-70-23

PARAGRAPH TITLE

1-7-43 Main Rotor Blades Subject to High Winds

1-7-44 Main Rotor Droop Stop Pounding

1-7-45 Operating Helicopter in Erosive Conditions

1-7-46 Operating Helicopter in Heavy Rainfall 70583−702374

1-7-47 Post Lightning Strike Inspection

1-7-48 Hydraulic Rescue Hoist Inspection

1-7-49 Rotor Brake Inspection

1-7-50 Sudden Stoppage

1-7-51 Tail Rotor Out of Balance - Loss of Material

1-7-52 Transmission System - Overspeed

1-7-53 Transmission System - Overtemperature S70−I

1-7-54 Transmission System - Overtemperature S70−II

1-7-55 Transmission System - Overtorque S70−I

1-7-56 Transmission System - Overtorque S70−II

1-7-57 After Tail Rotor Blade Removal

1-7-58 Electric Rescue Hoist Inspections

1-7-59 Every 60 Months

1-7-60 Every 500 Hours

1-7-3/(1-7-4 Blank)
PARA 1-7-1 TM 1-70-23

1-7-1 SPECIAL INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS.

1-7-1.1 Scope. c. Inspections based on calendar time.

This section contains requirements for standards of 1-7-1.3 Inspection Requirements.

serviceability applicable to the helicopter. The
inspection requirements are in these manuals: TM Inspection requirements establish when certain
1-70-PMS-1 10 Hour/14 Day Inspection, TM 1-70- equipment is to be inspected and the condition to
PMS-2 Periodic Inspections, and TM 1-70-23, be sought. Compliance with the inspections is
Chapter 1, Section 7, Special Inspections. required to make sure that latent problems are
discovered and corrected before malfunctioning or
1-7-1.2 Special Inspection Description. serious trouble results. Record all inspections in
The special inspections contained herein supple- helicopter log book.
ment the scheduled inspections in Preventive
1-7-1.4 Standards of Serviceability.
Maintenance Services Checklists, TM 1-70-PMS-1
and TM 1-70-PMS-2. These inspections are
required at intervals that are not the same as the Standards of serviceability to be used in the day-to-
scheduled inspections. The special inspections day inspection and maintenance of the helicopter
include, but are not limited to: can be found as fits, tolerances, wear limits, and
specifications in the helicopter maintenance manu-
NOTE als.

When unusual local conditions of 1-7-1.5 Scheduling.

environment, utilization, mission,
e x p e r i e n c e o f fl i g h t c r e w a n d Special inspections are to be accomplished within,
maintenance personnel, or periods of but not to exceed 610% from the scheduled time.
inactivity etc. are encountered, the scope For calendar time specified special inspections, a
and/or frequency of inspections may 630 day tolerance is allowed. These tolerances ap-
increase as necessary to make sure of ply only to the special inspections found in this
safe flight. section.
a. Inspections which depend upon specific
1-7-1.6 Work Platforms.
incidents, such as a hard landing or overspeed.
Immediate inspection is required for further
flight. Work platforms located on engine cowlings
provide access to the engines. Each platform is
b. Inspections which depend upon specific condi- capable of supporting a static weight of 400
tions, such as main rotor head torque check. pounds.

1-7-1-1/(1-7-1-2 Blank)
PARA 1-7-2 TM 1-70-23

1-7-2 ENGINE OUTPUT SHAFT INSPECTION - 1 TO 3 HOURS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-7-2.1 Engine Output Shaft 1-7-2-1

Inspection - 1 to 3 Hours

INITIAL SETUP References

Tools
• Appendix D
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• PARA 4-4-1
• Powerplant Repairer’s Toolkit
• Torque Wrench, 30 - 150 in. lbs • PARA 4-4-4

Materials/Parts • TM 1-70-VIB
• Sealing Compound, Item 286, Appendix D

1-7-2.1 Engine Output Shaft Inspection - 1 removed or disconnected (TM 1-70-

to 3 Hours. VIB).

NOTE b. Check torque on three bolts or studs connecting

flexible coupling to input module flange while
Whenever engine output shaft is re-
holding nuts as follows:
placed, do a torque check of bolts or
studs connecting flexible coupling to (1) Initially check torque of bolts or studs in
input module flange after the first 1 to 3 tightening direction. If input module
flight-hours. flange, 70351-08206-102, is used, check
a. Remove air inlet assembly (PARA 4-4-4). torque while holding nuts. TORQUE
MUST NOT BE LESS THAN 90 INCH-
POUNDS.
WARNING
(2) IF TORQUE ON ANY ONE BOLT OR
STUD IS BELOW 90 INCH-POUNDS,
FSCAP REPLACE ALL BOLTS OR STUDS
AND ASSEMBLY HARDWARE CON-
Torque stabilization is a critical NECTING DISC PACK TO INPUT
characteristic. FLANGE (PARA 4-4-1). IF INPUT
NOTE MODULE FLANGE, 70351-08206-041,
WITH NUTPLATES IS USED, RE-
Perform engine output shaft vibration PLACE WITH INPUT MODULE
check whenever engine output shaft is FLANGE, 70351-08206-102, IF AVAIL-

1-7-2-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-2

ABLE. IF INPUT MODULE FLANGE, nuts in tightening direction only while holding
70351-08206-041 IS USED, AFTER bolts as follows:
TORQUE HAS STABILIZED, PLACE
A DROP OF SEALING COMPOUND, (1) Initially check nuts in tightening direction
ITEM 286, APPENDIX D, TO while holding bolts. TORQUE MUST
THREADS OF BOLTS ADJACENT TO NOT BE LESS THAN 90 INCH-
NUTPLATES. MAKE SURE COM- POUNDS.
POUND SEEPS INTO NUTPLATES.
Perform engine output shaft vibration check (2) IF TORQUE ON ANY ONE NUT IS
if shaft was disconnected (TM 1-70-VIB). BELOW 90 INCH-POUNDS, REPLACE
ENGINE OUTPUT SHAFT. Perform an
(3) Check bolts or studs in tightening direc-
engine output shaft balance check if shaft
tion. If input module flange, 70351-
was disconnected (TM 1-70-VIB).
08206-102, is used, check torque while
holding nut. TORQUE MUST NOT BE
LESS THAN 130 INCH-POUNDS. (3) Check nuts in tightening direction while
holding bolts. TORQUE MUST NOT BE
(4) IF TORQUE ON ANY BOLT OR STUD LESS THAN 130 INCH-POUNDS.
IS BELOW 130 INCH-POUNDS, RE-
TORQUE TO 130 - 140 INCH- (4) IF TORQUE ON ANY NUT IS BELOW
POUNDS. Repeat torque check after each 130 INCH-POUNDS, RETORQUE TO
1 to 3 flight hours until torque stabilizes. 130 - 140 INCH-POUNDS. Repeat torque
check after each 1 to 3 flight hours until
(5) If torque does not stabilize after third
torque stabilizes.
consecutive torque check, replace three
bolts or studs and assembly hardware con-
(5) If torque does not stabilize after third
necting disc pack to input module flange
consecutive torque check, replace engine
(PARA 4-4-1). If input module flange,
output shaft assembly. Balance engine
70351-08206-041 with nutplates is used,
output shaft (TM 1-70-VIB).
replace with input module flange, 70351-
08206-102, if available. If input module
flange, 70351-08206-041 is used, after d. Check helicopter logbook to make sure torque
torque has stabilized, place a drop of seal- check of bolts connecting disc pack coupling to
ing compound, Item 286, Appendix D, to input module flange is due after initial ground
threads of bolts adjacent to nutplates. run and after 1 to 3 flight hours, if found loose
Make sure compound seeps into nutplates. during the torque check. Also, check helicopter
Balance engine output shaft (TM 1-70- logbook to make sure torque check of bolts
VIB). connecting disc pack coupling to engine output
shaft is due after initial ground run and after 1
c. Check torque on three nuts securing flexible to 3 flight hours, if found loose during the
coupling to engine output shaft by torquing torque check.

1-7-2-2
PARA 1-7-3 TM 1-70-23

1-7-3 GEAR BOXES, MOUNTING BOLTS TORQUE CHECK - 9 TO 11

HOURS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE PAGE

1-7-3.1 Main Gear Box 1-7-3-1 1-7-3.3 Tail Gear Box 1-7-3-2

1-7-3.2 Intermediate Gear Box 1-7-3-2

INITIAL SETUP • Epoxy Primer Coating Kit, Item 135, Appendix D

Tools • Paint, Polyurethane, Item 224, Appendix D

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit • Sealing Compound, Item 292, Appendix D

• Powerplant Repairer’s Toolkit References

• Appendix D
Materials/Parts
• PARA 6-3-1
• Acetone, Item 25, Appendix D
• PARA 6-4-31
• Corrosion Preventive Compound, Item 113, Ap-
pendix D • PARA 6-4-52

1-7-3.1 Main Gear Box.

WARNING
NOTE

• Whenever a main gear box is replaced FSCAP

or the torque on mounting bolts is
broken, do a mounting bolt torque check Torque stabilization check is a critical
after the first 9 to 11 flight hours. characteristic.

b. If any torques were below minimums, retorque

• Turn torque wrench in the tightening bolts.
direction to check torques.
c. Repeat mounting bolts torque check every 9 to
a. Check main gear box mounting bolts for proper 11 flight hours until torque stabilizes. If torque
torque (PARA 6-3-1). has not stabilized after 3 consecutive checks,

1-7-3-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-3

replace hardware and repeat torque stabiliza- b. If any torques were below minimums, retorque
tion check. bolts.

d. After torque has stabilized, do this: c. Repeat mounting bolts torque check every 9 to
11 flight hours until torque stabilizes. If torque
(1) Remove corrosion preventive compound has not stabilized after three consecutive
using acetone, Item 25, Appendix D. checks, replace hardware and repeat torque
stabilization check.
(2) Apply sealing compound, Item 292, Ap-
pendix D, to joints around boltheads, nuts,
d. After torque has stabilized, do this:
and washers. Allow to dry.

(3) Using epoxy primer coating kit, Item 135, (1) Remove corrosion preventive compound
Appendix D, apply epoxy primer to joints using acetone, Item 25, Appendix D.
around boltheads, nuts, and washers. Al-
low to dry. (2) Apply sealing compound, Item 292, Ap-
pendix D, to joints around boltheads, nuts,
(4) Apply one coat of polyurethane paint, and washers. Allow to dry.
Item 224, Appendix D, to joints around
boltheads, nuts, and washers. Allow to (3) Using epoxy primer coating kit, Item 135,
dry. Appendix D, apply epoxy primer to joints
around boltheads, nuts, and washers. Al-
(5) Apply two coats of corrosion preventive low to dry.
compound, Item 113, Appendix D, to gear
box attachment feet. (4) Apply one coat of polyurethane paint,
Item 224, Appendix D, to joints around
1-7-3.2 Intermediate Gear Box. boltheads, nuts, and washers. Allow to
dry.
NOTE

• Whenever intermediate box is replaced (5) Apply two coats of corrosion preventive
or the torque on mounting bolts is compound, Item 113, Appendix D, to gear
broken, do a mounting bolt torque check box attachment feet.
after the first 9 to 11 flight hours.
1-7-3.3 Tail Gear Box.
• Turn torque wrench in the tightening
direction to check torques. NOTE

a. Check intermediate gear box mounting bolts • Whenever a tail gear box is replaced or
for proper torque (PARA 6-4-31). the torque on mounting bolts is broken,
do a mounting bolt torque check after
the first 9 to 11 flight hours.
WARNING
• Turn torque wrench in the tightening
FSCAP direction to check torques.

Torque stabilization check is a critical a. Check tail gear box mounting bolts for proper
characteristic. torque (PARA 6-4-52).

1-7-3-2
PARA 1-7-3 TM 1-70-23

(1) Remove corrosion preventive compound

WARNING using acetone, Item 25, Appendix D.

(2) Apply sealing compound, Item 292, Ap-

FSCAP pendix D, to joints around boltheads, nuts,
and washers. Allow to dry.
Torque stabilization check is a critical
(3) Using epoxy primer coating kit, Item 135,
characteristic.
Appendix D, apply epoxy primer to joints
around boltheads, nuts, and washers. Al-
b. If any torques were below minimums, retorque
low to dry.
bolts.
(4) Apply one coat of polyurethane paint,
c. Repeat mounting bolts torque check every 9 to Item 224, Appendix D, to joints around
11 flight hours until torque stabilizes. If torque boltheads, nuts, and washers. Allow to
has not stabilized after three consecutive dry.
checks, replace hardware and repeat torque
stabilization check. (5) Apply two coats of corrosion preventive
compound, Item 113, Appendix D, to gear
d. After torque has stabilized, do this: box attachment feet.

1-7-3-3/(1-7-3-4 Blank)
PARA 1-7-4 TM 1-70-23

1-7-4 MAIN ROTOR BLADE TIP CAP SCREWS - 9 TO 11 HOURS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-7-4.1 Main Rotor Blade Tip 1-7-4-1

Cap Screws - 9 to 11
Hours

INITIAL SETUP • Torque Wrench, 30 - 150 in. lbs

Tools

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit

• Torque Wrench, 0 - 30 in. lbs

1-7-4.1 Main Rotor Blade Tip Cap Screws - b. I F T O R Q U E I S 2 5 I N C H - POUNDS O R

9 to 11 Hours. GREATER, TORQUE HAS STABILIZED.
TORQUE CHECK IS COMPLETE.

WARNING c. IF TORQUE IS BELOW 25 INCH-POUNDS,

TORQUE HAS NOT STABILIZED.
FSCAP TORQUE SCREW TO 29 - 31 INCH-
POUNDS. REPEAT TORQUE CHECK
Torque stabilization is a critical EVERY 3 TO 5 FLIGHT HOURS UNTIL
characteristic. SCREW STABILIZES AT 25 INCH-
a. Check torque on tip cap screws in tightening POUNDS MINIMUM TORQUE.
direction. TORQUE MUST NOT BE LESS
THAN 25 INCH-POUNDS.

1-7-4-1/(1-7-4-2 Blank)
PARA 1-7-5 TM 1-70-23

1-7-5 MAIN ROTOR HEAD TORQUE CHECK - 9 TO 11 HOURS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE PAGE

1-7-5.1 General 1-7-5-2 1-7-5.6 Damper Attachment Bolts 1-7-5-6

1-7-5.2 Hub-to-Shaft Extension 1-7-5-2 1-7-5.7 Main Rotor Head Shaft 1-7-5-6
Bolts Bolts

1-7-5.3 Hub-to-Shaft Expandable 1-7-5-4 1-7-5.8 Spindle Attachment Bolts 1-7-5-7

Pins
1-7-5.9 Pitch Control Rod Lock- 1-7-5-7
1-7-5.4 Pressure Plate Bolts 1-7-5-4 nuts

1-7-5.5 Spindle-to-Horn Attach- 1-7-5-5

ment Bolts

INITIAL SETUP Materials/Parts

Tools • Corrosion Preventive Compound, Item 113, Ap-

pendix D
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• Lockwire, Item 197, Appendix D
• Feeler Gage
• Sealing Compound, Item 292, Appendix D
• Hex Wrench
• Trichloroethylene, Technical, Item 343, Appendix
• Nonmetallic Scraper, Locally-Made D

• Powerplant Repairer’s Toolkit References

• Appendix D
• Spindle Horn Nut Torque Adapter, Locally-Made,
Figure H-205, Appendix H • Appendix H
• Torque Wrench, 150 - 750 in. lbs • PARA 5-4-1
• Torque Wrench, 700 - 1600 in. lbs • PARA 5-4-28

• Torque Wrench, 100 - 500 ft lbs • PARA 12-4-26

1-7-5-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-5

1-7-5.1 General. check are different from the components’

installation torque range.
NOTE
h. Torque check of zone I and zone II are
Whenever a main rotor head (new or independent. When bolts in either zone are
used) is installed or the main rotor head stabilized above minimum torque value, torque
is lowered and raised, do a main rotor check is complete for that zone.
head torque check every 9 to 11 flight-
hours until stabilized. The expression 1-7-5.2 Hub-to-Shaft Extension Bolts.
"main rotor head torque check" as used
in this procedure refers to the items and a. If blade deice kit is not installed, remove bifilar
torque values shown in Figure 1-7-5-1, cover (PARA 5-4-28).
Sheet 1. This figure also defines the two
zones referred to in this step. b. If blade deice kit is installed, remove main ro-
tor blade deice distributor (PARA 12-4-26).
a. Whenever spindle attachment bolts are in-
stalled, retorque them after 9 to 11 flight hours. c. Remove lockring (PARA 5-4-1).

b. Whenever damper attachment bolts are in- d. Check torque on NAS hub-to-shaft extension
stalled, retorque them after 9 to 11 flight-hours. bolts. TORQUE MUST NOT BE LESS
THAN 228 FOOT-POUNDS (Figure 1-7-5-1,
c. Whenever any spindle to horn attachment bolts Sheet 1).
are removed or replaced, or when a replace-
ment spindle assembly or spindle horn is in- e. IF TORQUE IS 228 FOOT-POUNDS OR
stalled, or when antiflap assembly is removed GREATER, TORQUE HAS STABILIZED.
or replaced, do a torque check on spindle-to- TORQUE ALL BOLTS TO 262 FOOT-
horn attachment bolts every 9 to 11 flight hours POUNDS. TORQUE CHECK IS COM-
until torque has stabilized. PLETE.

d. During checks, record number of bolts at each f. IF TORQUE IS LESS THAN 228 FOOT-
location below minimum torque to move each POUNDS, TORQUE HAS NOT
bolt. Turn torque wrench in tightening direc- STABILIZED. TORQUE ALL BOLTS TO
tion to check. Also, follow numbered sequence 262 FOOT-POUNDS. CHECK TORQUE ON
on main rotor shaft nut and upper and lower ALL ZONE I COMPONENTS. REPEAT
pressure plate when checking torque. TORQUE CHECK AFTER 9 TO 11 FLIGHT
HOURS.
e. To stabilize a fastener at required torque level,
repeat specified torquing sequence until bolts g. If torque has not stabilized on fourth consecu-
do not move at required torque. tive torque check, do this:

f. The 11 hour flight interval is the maximum and (1) Remove main rotor head (PARA 5-4-1).
shall not be exceeded. Torque checks at less
than 9 flight hours are permissible in order to (2) Inspect split cones, main rotor shaft
avoid mission interruption. Torque checks extension, cone seats, bolts, upper pres-
done at less than 9 flight hours, however, are sure plate, lower pressure plate, and main
not valid for purposes of stabilization. For rotor shaft nut for nicks, gouges, dents, or
stabilization a minimum flight time of 9 hours distortion which might prevent correct
is required. installation and torquing of parts.

g. Torque ranges for components inspected dur- (3) Replace parts as required and repeat
ing 9 to 11 flight hours main rotor head torque torque check after 9 to 11 flight hours.

1-7-5-2
PARA 1-7-5 TM 1-70-23

ZONE 1
LOCKRING HUB−TO−SHAFT
EXTENSION
EXPANDABLE PIN, UPPER PRESSURE PLATE
NUT (SEE NOTES 3 AND
4)
HUB−TO−SHAFT
EXTENSION BOLT
(NAS)
(SEE NOTES 1 AND 2)

MAIN ROTOR HUB

UPPER PRESSURE PLATE

BOLT
(SEE NOTES 7 AND 8)
LOCKRING

BOLT MAIN ROTOR SHAFT NUT

(SEE NOTES 9, 10, 11, AND 12)
ZONE II
MAIN ROTOR SHAFT NUT
LOWER PRESSURE PLATE
MAIN ROTOR
SHAFT EXTENSION

LOWER
PRESSURE
PLATE

BOLT, WASHER MAIN ROTOR SHAFT

(SEE NOTES 5 AND 6)

NOTES

1. MINIMUM TORQUE 228 FT LBS.

2. TORQUE 262 FT LBS MAXIMUM.
3. MINIMUM TORQUE 900 IN. LBS.
4. TORQUE 1207 IN. LBS MAXIMUM.
5. MINIMUM TORQUE 336 IN. LBS.
6. TORQUE 425 IN. LBS MAXIMUM.
7. MINIMUM TORQUE 708 IN. LBS.
8. TORQUE 945 IN. LBS MAXIMUM.
9. BREAKING TORQUE LESS THAN 288 IN.
LBS ON THREE OR MORE BOLTS NOT
PERMITTED.
10. BREAKING TORQUE LESS THAN 576 IN.
LBS ON EIGHT OR MORE BOLTS NOT
PERMITTED.
11. MINIMUM TORQUE 672 IN. LBS.
12. TORQUE 787 IN. LBS MAXIMUM. FO0623_1B
SA

FIGURE 1-7-5-1. MAIN ROTOR HEAD - TORQUE CHECK (SHEET 1 OF 2)

1-7-5-3
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-5

h. Install lockring (PARA 5-4-1). sure plate, lower pressure plate, and main
rotor shaft nut for nicks, gouges, dents, or
i. If blade deice kit is not installed, install bifilar distortion, which might prevent correct
cover (PARA 5-4-28). installation and torquing of bolts.

j. If blade deice kit is installed, install main rotor (4) Replace parts as required and repeat
blade deice distributor (PARA 12-4-26). torque check after 9 to 11 flight hours.

k. Make sure area is clean and free of foreign i. Install lockring (PARA 5-4-1).
material.
j. If blade deice kit is not installed, install bifilar
1-7-5.3 Hub-to-Shaft Expandable Pins. cover (PARA 5-4-28).

a. Open main rotor pylon sliding cover. k. If blade deice kit is installed, install main rotor
blade deice distributor (PARA 12-4-26).
b. If blade deice kit is not installed, remove bifilar
cover (PARA 5-4-28). l. Make sure area is clean and free of foreign
material.
c. If blade deice kit is installed, remove main ro-
tor blade deice distributor (PARA 12-4-26). m. Close and latch main rotor pylon sliding cover.
d. Remove lockring (PARA 5-4-1). 1-7-5.4 Pressure Plate Bolts.
e. Check torque on nuts on expandable pins. a. Every three days, inspect area where corrosion
TORQUE MUST NOT BE LESS THAN 900 preventive compound, Item 113, Appendix D,
INCH-POUNDS. Use hex wrench to prevent was applied and reapply as required. After each
pins from turning (Figure 1-7-5-1, Sheet 1). torque check, reapply two coats of corrosion
preventive compound, Item 113, Appendix D.
f. IF TORQUE IS 900 INCH-POUNDS OR
GREATER, TORQUE HAS STABILIZED.
b. Check torque on lower pressure plate bolts in
TORQUE ALL NUTS TO 1207 INCH-
numerical sequence. TORQUE MUST NOT
POUNDS. TORQUE CHECK IS COM-
BE LESS THAN 336 INCH-POUNDS (Figure
PLETE.
1-7-5-1, Sheet 1).
g. IF TORQUE IS LESS THAN 900 INCH-
c. IF TORQUE IS LESS THAN 336 INCH-
POUNDS, TORQUE HAS NOT
POUNDS ON TWO OR LESS BOLTS,
STABILIZED. TORQUE ALL NUTS TO
TORQUE HAS STABILIZED. TORQUE
1207 INCH-POUNDS. CHECK TORQUE ON
ALL BOLTS TO 425 INCH-POUNDS.
ALL ZONE I COMPONENTS. REPEAT
TORQUE CHECK AFTER 9 TO 11 FLIGHT
d. Measure gap between lower pressure plate and
HOURS.
main rotor shaft extension using feeler gage.
h. If torque has not stabilized on fourth consecu- MINIMUM GAP IS 0.001 INCH. A GAP
tive torque check, do this: DISTANCE OF NOT OVER 0.035 INCH IS
ALLOWED BETWEEN SMALLEST AND
(1) Remove expandable pins and inspect for LARGEST GAP AREAS. If gap is beyond
cleanness and damage (PARA 5-4-31). limits, lower pressure plate and repeat torquing
sequence (PARA 5-4-1).
(2) Remove main rotor head (PARA 5-4-1).
e. IF TORQUE IS LESS THAN 336 INCH-
(3) Inspect split cones, main rotor shaft POUNDS ON THREE OR MORE BOLTS,
extension, cone seats, bolts, upper pres- TORQUE HAS NOT STABILIZED. Measure

1-7-5-4
PARA 1-7-5 TM 1-70-23

gap between lower pressure plate and main rotor TORQUE HAS NOT STABILIZED.
shaft extension using feeler gage. MINIMUM TORQUE ALL BOLTS TO 945 INCH-
GAP IS 0.001 INCH. A GAP DISTANCE OF POUNDS. CHECK TORQUE ON ALL
NOT OVER 0.035 INCH IS ALLOWED ZONE I COMPONENTS. REPEAT
BETWEEN SMALLEST AND LARGEST TORQUE CHECK AFTER 9 TO 11 FLIGHT
GAP AREAS. If gap is beyond limits, lower HOURS.
pressure plate and repeat torquing sequence
(PARA 5-4-1). IF GAP IS WITHIN LIMITS, l. If torque has not stabilized on fourth consecu-
TORQUE ALL BOLTS TO 425 INCH- tive torque check, do this:
POUNDS. CHECK TORQUE ON ALL
(1) Remove main rotor head (PARA 5-4-1).
ZONE II COMPONENTS. REPEAT
TORQUE CHECK AFTER 9 TO 11 FLIGHT (2) Inspect split cones, main rotor shaft
HOURS. extension, cone seats, bolts, upper pres-
sure plate, lower pressure plate, and main
f. If torque has not stabilized on fourth consecu- rotor shaft nut for nicks, gouges, dents, or
tive torque check, do this: distortion which might prevent correct
installation and torquing of parts.
(1) Remove main rotor head (PARA 5-4-1).
(3) Replace parts as required and repeat
(2) Inspect split cones, main rotor shaft torque check after 9 to 11 flight hours.
extension, cone seats, bolts, upper pres-
sure plate, lower pressure plate and main 1-7-5.5 Spindle-to-Horn Attachment Bolts.
rotor shaft nut for nicks, gouges, dents, or
distortion which might prevent correct
installation and torquing of parts. WARNING
(3) Replace parts as required and repeat
torque check after 9 to 11 flight hours. FSCAP

g. After torque has stabilized, remove corrosion Torque stabilization is a critical

preventive compound using technical trichloro- characteristic.
ethylene, Item 343, Appendix D.
NOTE
h. Seal gap between pressure plate and main rotor Sealing compound may not be present.
shaft extension, and areas around lockring and
lower pressure plate boltheads with sealing a. If required, remove sealing compound using
compound, Item 292, Appendix D. nonmetallic scraper.

i. Check torque on upper pressure plate bolts in b. Using spindle horn nut torque adapter (Figure
numerical sequence. TORQUE MUST NOT H-205, Appendix H) check torque of nuts.
BE LESS THAN 708 INCH-POUNDS. TORQUE MUST NOT BE LESS THAN 281
INCH-POUNDS. RETORQUE ALL LOOSE
j. IF TORQUE IS 708 INCH-POUNDS OR NUTS TO 304 - 336 INCH-POUNDS.
GREATER, OR IF TORQUE IS LESS THAN TORQUE CHECK IS COMPLETE (Figure
708 INCH-POUNDS ON ONE BOLT, 1-7-5-1, Sheet 2, Detail A).
TORQUE HAS STABILIZED. TORQUE
ALL BOLTS TO 945 INCH-POUNDS. c. Repeat torque check at 9 to 11 flight hours until
TORQUE CHECK IS COMPLETE. stabilized. IF TORQUE IS 281 INCH-
POUNDS OR GREATER, RETORQUE ALL
k. IF TORQUE IS LESS THAN 708 INCH- LOOSE NUTS TO 304 - 336 INCH-POUNDS,
POUNDS ON TWO OR MORE BOLTS, TORQUE HAS STABILIZED.

1-7-5-5
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-5

BOLT, WASHER, NUT BOLT, WASHER, NUT

(TORQUE 1045−1155 (TORQUE 1045−1155
IN. LBS) IN. LBS)

DAMPER

SPINDLE
SPINDLE HORN
A

SPINDLE−TO−HORN
ATTACHMENT BOLTS,
WASHERS, NUTS
(TORQUE 304−336
IN. LBS) FO0623_2
SA

FIGURE 1-7-5-1. MAIN ROTOR HEAD - TORQUE CHECK (SHEET 2 OF 2)

d. If, on the fourth torque check, any bolt has a c. Install cotter pin. Seal area around bolthead
breaking torque less than 281 inch-pounds, and nut with sealing compound, Item 292, Ap-
disassemble attachment horn and visually pendix D.
inspect clamped parts and bolts for gouges,
nicks, dents, or distortion which might interfere 1-7-5.7 Main Rotor Head Shaft Bolts.
with clamp up. Replace parts as required.
Repeat torque check every 9 to 11 flight hours a. If blade deice kit is not installed, remove bifilar
until stabilized. cover (PARA 5-4-28).

e. If torque has stabilized, apply sealing b. If blade deice kit is installed, remove main ro-
compound, Item 292, Appendix D, to bolt- tor blade deice distributor (PARA 12-4-26).
heads, washers, and nuts.
c. Remove lockring (PARA 5-4-1).
1-7-5.6 Damper Attachment Bolts.
d. Check torque on bolts holding main rotor shaft
NOTE nut in numerical sequence as follows (Figure
1-7-5-1, Sheet 1):
Sealing compound may not be present.
(1) CHECK BREAKING TORQUE. IF
a. If required, remove sealing compound and cot- BREAKING TORQUE IS LESS THAN
ter pin from damper attachment bolt. 288 INCH-POUNDS ON THREE OR
MORE BOLTS, GO TO STEP d. (5).
b. TORQUE DAMPER ATTACHMENT BOLT
NUT TO 1045 - 1155 INCH-POUNDS (Figure (2) CHECK BREAKING TORQUE. IF
1-7-5-1, Sheet 2). TORQUE CHECK IS COM- BREAKING TORQUE IS LESS THAN
PLETE. 576 INCH-POUNDS ON EIGHT OR

1-7-5-6
PARA 1-7-5 TM 1-70-23

MORE BOLTS, TORQUE HAS NOT i. Make sure area is clean and free of foreign
STABILIZED. GO TO STEP d. (5). material.

(3) IF TORQUE IS LESS THAN 672 INCH- 1-7-5.8 Spindle Attachment Bolts.
POUNDS, TORQUE HAS NOT
STABILIZED. TORQUE ALL BOLTS NOTE
TO 787 INCH-POUNDS. CHECK
TORQUE ON ALL ZONE II Sealing compound may not be present.
COMPONENTS. REPEAT TORQUE
CHECK AFTER 9 TO 11 FLIGHT a. If required, remove sealing compound from
HOURS. spindle attachment boltheads using nonmetallic
scraper.
(4) IF TORQUE IS 672 INCH-POUNDS OR
GREATER, TORQUE HAS b. TORQUE SPINDLE ATTACHMENT
STABILIZED. TORQUE ALL BOLTS BOLTS TO 910 - 1010 INCH-POUNDS IN
TO 787 INCH-POUNDS. TORQUE CRISSCROSS SEQUENCE. TORQUE
CHECK IS COMPLETE. CHECK IS COMPLETE.

(5) If torque has not stabilized after fourth c. Apply sealing compound, Item 292, Appendix
consecutive torque check, or if bolts D, around boltheads.
failed torque checks in step d. (1) or step
d. (2), do this: 1-7-5.9 Pitch Control Rod Locknuts.

(a) Remove main rotor head (PARA NOTE

5-4-1).
Pitch control rod locknut torque check is
(b) Inspect split cones, main rotor shaft only required for pitch control rods
extension, cone seats, bolts, upper equipped with elastomeric rod ends.
pressure plate, lower pressure plate,
and main rotor shaft nut for nicks, a. Remove lockwire from upper and lower lock-
gouges, dents or distortion which nuts.
might prevent correct installation
and torquing of parts. NOTE
(c) Replace parts as required and repeat To prevent improper torque of upper
torque check after 9 to 11 flight locknut on pitch control rod, make sure
hours. torque wrench is not in contact with lock
key when torquing.
e. The lower pressure plate bolts may have
dropped in torque value, as a result of tighten-
b. Check torque on upper and lower locknuts.
ing main rotor shaft nut bolts. Recheck torque
TORQUE TO BE 325 - 375 INCH-POUNDS.
on lower pressure plate bolts (PARA 1-7-5.4).
IF REQUIRED, TORQUE UPPER LOCK-
Reseal bolts with sealing compound, Item 292,
NUT TO 325 - 375 INCH-POUNDS.
Appendix D, after torque check.

f. Install lockring (PARA 5-4-1). c. Lockwire, Item 197, Appendix D, lower lock-
nut to link, and then back to lower locknut
g. If blade deice kit is not installed, install bifilar (double-safety).
cover (PARA 5-4-28).
d. Lockwire, Item 197, Appendix D, upper lock-
h. If blade deice kit is installed, install main rotor nut to lock key, and then back to opposite side
blade deice distributor (PARA 12-4-26). of upper locknut (double-safety).

1-7-5-7/(1-7-5-8 Blank)
PARA 1-7-6 TM 1-70-23

1-7-6 SPINDLE SLEEVE BEARING INSPECTION - 9 TO 11 HOURS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-7-6.1 Inspect Spindle Sleeve 1-7-6-1

Bearing - 9 to 11 Hours

INITIAL SETUP References

Tools
• PARA 5-4-5
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• Flashlight
• Inspection Mirror

1-7-6.1 Inspect Spindle Sleeve Bearing - 9 b. Using inspection mirror and flashlight, visually
to 11 Hours. check spindle sleeve bearing for Teflon fabric
extrusion in and around outboard end face of
a. Using inspection mirror and flashlight, visually sleeve bearing. NONE ALLOWED. Remove,
check spindle sleeve bearing for metal-to-metal disassemble, and inspect spindle sleeve bearing
contact in and around outboard end face of inner and outer sleeve if Teflon fabric extrusion
sleeve bearing. NONE ALLOWED. Remove, is found (PARA 5-4-5).
disassemble, and inspect spindle sleeve bearing
inner and outer sleeve if metal to metal contact is
found (PARA 5-4-5).

1-7-6-1/(1-7-6-2 Blank)
PARA 1-7-7 TM 1-70-23

1-7-7 OUTBOARD RETENTION PLATE NUTS AND TAIL ROTOR PITCH

BEAM RETAINING NUT TORQUE CHECK - 9 TO 11 HOURS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE PAGE

1-7-7.1 Outboard Retention Plate 1-7-7-1 1-7-7.2 Tail Rotor Pitch Beam 1-7-7-2
Nuts Torque Check - 9 to Retaining Nut Torque
11 Hours Check - 9 to 11 Hours

INITIAL SETUP • Lockwire, Item 197, Appendix D

Tools
• Sealing Compound, Item 292, Appendix D
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
References
• Spanner Wrench
• Torque Wrench, 150 - 750 in. lbs • Appendix D

• Torque Wrench, 700 - 1600 in. lbs

• PARA 5-4-40
Materials/Parts
• PARA 11-4-113
• Corrosion Preventive Compound, Item 115, Ap-
pendix D

1-7-7.1 Outboard Retention Plate Nuts b. IF TORQUE ON NUTS IS 627 INCH-

Torque Check - 9 to 11 Hours. POUNDS OR GREATER, TORQUE HAS
STABILIZED. TORQUE CHECK IS COM-
NOTE PLETE.

• Inboard retention plate bolts torque must c. If torque on nuts is below 627 inch-pounds,
be stabilized prior to performing torque torque is not stabilized. Torque nuts as follows:
check on outboard retention plate nuts.
(1) T O R Q U E N U T S I N C R I S S C R O S S
PATTERN TO 627 - 693 INCH-
• Whenever outboard retention plate nuts
POUNDS.
torque is broken, a torque check on nuts
is required after the first 9 to 11 flight (2) Repeat torque check after 9 to 11 flight
hours. hours.
a. Check torque on outboard retention plate nuts (3) I f t o r q u e d o e s n o t s t a b i l i z e a f t e r 3
in a tightening direction (Figure 1-7-7-1). consecutive torque checks, replace bolts
TORQUE ON NUTS MUST NOT BE LESS and nuts (PARA 5-4-40). Repeat torque
THAN 627 INCH-POUNDS. check.

1-7-7-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-7

TAIL ROTOR PITCH BEAM

RETAINING NUT
(TORQUE 950−1050 IN. LBS)

BOLT, COUNTERSUNK
WASHER, WASHER, NUT
(SEE NOTE)

SCREW,
WASHER

TAIL ROTOR
PITCH BEAM

NOTE
OUTBOARD
TORQUE NUTS IN CRISSCROSS RETENTION
PATTERN 627−693 IN. LBS. PLATE FO0624
SA

FIGURE 1-7-7-1. OUTBOARD RETENTION PLATE NUTS AND PITCH BEAM RETAINING NUT
TORQUE CHECK

1-7-7.2 Tail Rotor Pitch Beam Retaining Nut d. Install screws and washers to retaining nut.
Torque Check - 9 to 11 Hours. TIGHTEN SCREWS SNUG. DO NOT
TORQUE. Lockwire, Item 197, Appendix D,
NOTE screwheads. Proceed to step h. to apply corrosion
preventive compound.
• Inboard retention plate nut and outboard
retention plate nut torques must be e. If torque is below 950 inch-pounds, torque has
stabilized prior to performing torque not stabilized. Torque nut as follows:
check on tail rotor pitch beam retaining
nut. (1) TORQUE NUT TO 950 - 1050 INCH-
POUNDS USING SPANNER WRENCH.
• Whenever tail rotor pitch beam retaining
DO NOT EXCEED 1050 INCH-
nut torque is broken, a torque check on
POUNDS TORQUE LIMIT WHEN AT-
nut is required after the first 9 to 11
TEMPTING TO ALIGN HOLES IN
flight hours.
NUT AND WASHER.
a. Remove screws and washers from retaining nut
(Figure 1-7-7-1). (2) If holes in retaining nut do not align with
holes in washer when 1050 inch-pounds is
b. Check torque on pitch beam retaining nut in reached, do this:
tightening direction. TORQUE MUST NOT
BE LESS THAN 950 INCH-POUNDS. (a) R e m o v e t a i l r o t o r p i t c h b e a m
(PARA 5-4-40). Check pitch beam
c. IF TORQUE IS 950 INCH-POUNDS OR conical seat and washer mating
GREATER, TORQUE HAS STABILIZED. surface, retaining nut, washer, and
TORQUE CHECK IS COMPLETE. pitch control shaft tapered surface

1-7-7-2
PARA 1-7-7 TM 1-70-23

for damage or debris which may of parts. Replace parts as required (PARA
prevent alignment of holes. Replace 5-4-40).
components as required.
(4) Inspect pitch control shaft for damage or
(b) R e i n s t a l l t a i l r o t o r p i t c h b e a m debris which might prevent correct instal-
(PARA 5-4-40). Install washer 180° lation and torquing of parts. Replace pitch
from original position. Line up pitch control shaft as required (PARA 11-4-
beam lands with slot in washer. Turn 113).
pitch beam as necessary. (5) Clean pitch beam, retaining nut, washer,
and pitch control shaft and install tail ro-
(3) Install screws and washers to retaining
tor pitch beam (PARA 5-4-40). Repeat
nut. TIGHTEN SCREWS SNUG, DO
torque check after 9 to 11 flight-hours.
NOT TORQUE. Lockwire, Item 197, Ap-
pendix D. g. If torque does not stabilize after 3 more
consecutive torque checks, replace tail rotor
(4) Repeat torque check after 9 to 11 flight pitch beam, retaining nut, washer, and pitch
hours. control shaft (PARA 5-4-40 and PARA 11-4-
113). Repeat torque check.
f. If torque does not stabilize after three consecu-
tive torque checks, do this: h. Apply corrosion preventive compound, Item
115, Appendix D, to pitch beam retaining nut,
(1) Remove tail rotor pitch beam (PARA 5-4- washer, and pitch change shaft thread mating
40). surfaces and inboard pitch beam to pitch
change shaft mating surface. After torque has
(2) Inspect pitch beam conical seat and pitch stabilized, apply sealing compound, Item 292,
control shaft tapered surface for excessive Appendix D, to pitch beam retaining nut,
corrosion preventive compound buildup. washer, pitch change shaft threaded mating
surfaces and inboard pitch beam to pitch shaft
(3) Inspect pitch beam, retaining nut, and mating surfaces.
washer for damage or debris which might
prevent correct installation and torquing

1-7-7-3/(1-7-7-4 Blank)
PARA 1-7-8 TM 1-70-23

1-7-8 TAIL ROTOR DRIVE SHAFT TORQUE CHECK - 9 TO 11 HOURS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-7-8.1 Tail Rotor Drive Shaft 1-7-8-1

Torque Check - 9 to 11
Hours

INITIAL SETUP References

Tools
• PARA 6-4-38 through PARA 6-4-41
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• Torque Wrench, 0 - 30 in. lbs
• Torque Wrench, 150 - 750 in. lbs

1-7-8.1 Tail Rotor Drive Shaft Torque Check • Check tail rotor drive shaft torque
- 9 to 11 Hours. stabilization after 9 to 11 hours of flight
and every 9 to 11 flight hours thereafter
until no loss of torque is noted.
WARNING • If inner flexible coupling on tail rotor
drive shaft section I is damaged, drive
FSCAP shaft must be replaced.
a. Check torque on all self-locking nuts on tail ro-
Torque stabilization check is a critical
tor drive shaft couplings. TORQUE MUST
characteristic.
NOT BE LESS THAN 328 INCH-POUNDS.
IF TORQUE IS 328 INCH-POUNDS OR
CAUTION GREATER, TORQUE HAS STABILIZED.
TORQUE CHECK IS COMPLETE.

b. IF TORQUE IS LESS THAN 328 INCH-

Tail rotor drive shaft section I, 70361-
POUNDS, TORQUE HAS NOT
23001-047, is a dynamically balanced
STABILIZED. TORQUE NUT TO 328 - 362
assembly. Do not disturb the hardware
INCH-POUNDS. Repeat torque check after 9 to
attaching adapters and inner flexible
11 flight hours.
couplings to drive shaft.
c. If torque has not stabilized after three consecu-
NOTE tive torque checks, do this:
• Do a torque stabilization check if tail ro- (1) Remove bolt, self-locking nut, and spheri-
tor drive shafts are removed, or if the cal washers. Inspect for damage, corro-
installation torque is broken. sion, and fretting.

1-7-8-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-8

(2) Replace any damaged parts. (4) Install bolt, spherical washers, and self-
locking nut (PARA 6-4-38, PARA 6-4-
(3) The self-locking nut may be reused, if 39, PARA 6-4-40, and PARA 6-4-41).
replacement part is not available, provid- Repeat torque check after 9 to 11 flight
ing the nut meets a minimum run-on hours.
torque of 9.5 inch-pounds.

1-7-8-2
PARA 1-7-9 TM 1-70-23

1-7-9 TAIL GEAR BOX INBOARD RETENTION PLATE TORQUE CHECK -

9 TO 11 HOURS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-7-9.1 Tail Gear Box Inboard 1-7-9-2

Retention Plate Torque
Check - 9 to 11 Hours

INITIAL SETUP References

Tools • Appendix D
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• PARA 5-4-38
• Ink Marker
• PARA 6-4-52
• Torque Wrench, 30 - 150 in. lbs

Materials/Parts • PARA 6-4-55

• Lockwire, Item 197, Appendix D • PARA 6-4-57

1-7-9-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-9

INBOARD
TAIL GEAR RETENTION
BOX PLATE

1
16 2
15 3

14 4

13 5

12 6

11 7
10 8
9

NOTES RETAINING
1. TORQUE SEQUENCE 1, 9, 13, 5, 11, 3, NUT, BOLT
15, 7, 2, 10, 14, 6, 16, 8, 12, 4. (SEE NOTES
1 AND 2)
2. PERFORM TORQUE CHECK AT 60 IN.
LBS, 100 IN. LBS, 114 IN. LBS, AND
120 IN. LBS PER SEQUENCE SHOWN IN
NOTE 1.
3. TIGHTEN JAMNUTS 1/6 TO 1/3 TURN JAMNUT
PAST POINT WHERE SHARP RISE IN (SEE NOTE 3)
TORQUE IS FELT.
FB4504B
SA

FIGURE 1-7-9-1. TAIL GEAR BOX INBOARD RETENTION PLATE BOLTS - TORQUE CHECK

1-7-9.1 Tail Gear Box Inboard Retention

Plate Torque Check - 9 to 11 Hours. CAUTION

NOTE
Damage to retention plate will result if
Whenever tail gear box (new or used) is tools come in contact when loosening
replaced, or bolts shown in Figure 1-7- jamnuts. Do not allow tools to come in
9-1 are untorqued for maintenance such contact with retention plate when
as inboard retention plate or seal loosening jamnuts.
replacement, check inboard retention
plate retaining nut bolts for loss of b. Using ink marker, mark one of the sixteen bolts
torque 9 to 11 flight hours after installa- securing the inboard retention plate to bevel
tion, and every 9 to 11 flight hours gear as a reference point and loosen jamnuts on
thereafter, until no loss of torque is inboard retention plate bolts.
noted. c. Check torque on tail gear box inboard retention
plate bolts in the following sequence: 1, 9, 13,
a. Remove tail rotor blades (PARA 5-4-38).
5, 11, 3, 15, 7, 2, 10, 14, 6, 16, 8, 12, 4.

NOTE
WARNING
Check torque in a tightening direction
only.
FSCAP
d. Using reference bolt as number one, apply
Torque stabilization check is a critical torque in four steps and record bolt number and
characteristic. torque range at first movement as follows:

1-7-9-2
PARA 1-7-9 TM 1-70-23

(1) Check torque on all 16 bolts at 60 inch- MOTION IS FELT AT 120 INCH-
pounds using the sequence specified in POUNDS. CHECK HELICOPTER
step c. Record readings. LOGBOOK TO MAKE SURE RETEN-
TION PLATE TORQUE CHECK IS
(2) Check torque on all 16 bolts at 100 inch- PERFORMED WITHIN THE NEXT 9 -
pounds using the sequence specified in 11 FLIGHT HOURS. GO TO STEP F.
step c. Record readings.
(4) If eight or more bolts moved below 60
(3) Check torque on all 16 bolts at 114 inch- inch-pounds, replace tail gear box (PARA
pounds using the sequence specified in 6-4-55).
step c. Record readings.
(5) If three or more bolts moved below 100
(4) Check torque on all 16 bolts at 120 inch- inch-pounds, but less than eight bolts
pounds using the sequence specified in moved below 60 inch-pounds, remove
step c. Record readings. inboard retention plate (PARA 6-4-57)
and perform the following:
e. O n c o m p l e t i o n o f t o r q u e c h e c k , d o t h e
(a) Inspect split cones, inboard retention
following:
plate sleeve, splines on inboard
retention plate and bevel gear, split
(1) IF NO BOLTS MOVED BELOW 120
cone races on inboard retention plate
INCH-POUNDS, TORQUE CHECK IS
and bevel gear, threads on bevel gear
COMPLETE. GO TO STEP F.
and large nut and lipped washer
(PARA 6-4-52).
(2) IF NO BOLTS MOVED BELOW 114
INCH-POUNDS, BUT ONE OR MORE (b) I n s t a l l i n b o a r d r e t e n t i o n p l a t e
MOVED BETWEEN 114 - 120 INCH- (PARA 6-4-57).
POUNDS, TIGHTEN ALL BOLTS TO
120 INCH-POUNDS USING THE
SAME SEQUENCE SPECIFIED IN CAUTION
STEP C. REPEAT SEQUENCE UNTIL
ALL BOLTS HAVE STABILIZED AND
NO MOTION IS FELT AT 120 INCH- Damage to retention plate will result if
POUNDS. TORQUE STABILIZATION tools come in contact while tightening
IS COMPLETE. GO TO STEP F. jamnuts. Do not allow tools to come in
contact with retention plate when
(3) IF ONE OR MORE BOLTS MOVED tightening jamnuts.
BELOW 114 INCH-POUNDS, BUT NO
f. TIGHTEN JAMNUTS 1/6 TO 1/3 TURN
MORE THAN TWO BOLTS MOVED
PAST POINT WHERE SHARP RISE IN
BELOW 100 INCH-POUNDS,
TORQUE IS FELT.
TIGHTEN ALL BOLTS TO 120 INCH-
POUNDS USING THE SAME SE- g. Lockwire, Item 197, Appendix D, all bolts and
QUENCE SPECIFIED IN STEP C. jamnuts.
REPEAT SEQUENCE UNTIL ALL
BOLTS HAVE STABILIZED AND NO h. Install tail rotor blades (PARA 5-4-38).

1-7-9-3/(1-7-9-4 Blank)
PARA 1-7-10 TM 1-70-23

1-7-10 TAIL ROTOR CABLE TENSION CHECK - 9 TO 11 HOURS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-7-10.1 Tail Rotor Cable Tension 1-7-10-1

Check - 9 to 11 Hours

INITIAL SETUP • Tensiometer

• Thermometer
Tools
References
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• PARA 1-6-15
• Rigging Pin, 1/4 x 6-inch • PARA 11-4-6
• Rigging Pin, 70700-20380-062 • PARA 11-4-104 through PARA 11-4-106

1-7-10.1 Tail Rotor Cable Tension Check - 9 ture for 1 hour. Do not check tension
to 11 Hours. with helicopter parked in hot sun.

a. If using external hydraulic power, pull

CAUTION BACKUP HYD CONTR circuit breaker in DC
ESNTL BUS on overhead control panel.

Damage to flight control components b. Pressurize backup hydraulic system (PARA

will result if hydraulic power is shut 1-6-15).
down during rigging with rigging pins
c. On AUTO FLIGHT CONTROL panel,
still installed. Make sure all rigging pins
disengage SAS 1, SAS 2, and TRIM switches.
are removed before shutting down
Engage BOOST switch.
hydraulic power.
d. With thermometer, take air temperature read-
NOTE
ing inside tail cone area close to where tensi-
• Tail rotor cable tension must be ometer readings are to be taken.
stabilized on newly delivered aircraft, or e. Install rigging pin, 70700-20380-062, in yaw
on those that have had recent cable boost servo.
replacement. A tail rotor cable tension
check must be done every 9 to 11 flight f. Install rigging pin, 70700-20380-062, in collec-
hours, until tension stabilizes (PARA tive boost servo.
11-4-104, PARA 11-4-105, PARA 11-4-
106, and Table 11-4-104-1). g. Take cable tensiometer readings on both left
and right cables, at least ten inches away from
• Check cable tension only after any cable supporting mechanism in front tail
helicopter has been at an even tempera- cone section (PARA 11-4-104).

1-7-10-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-10

NOTE

If tail rotor cable check is being per-

formed on newly delivered aircraft, or COMPENSATE FOR TEMPERATURE
on those that have had recent cable 20°C - 10°C = 10°C
replacement, proceed to step l. There or
will be no earlier recorded tension read- 68°F - 50°F = 18°F
ings to calculate. 10°C x 2.25 = 22.5
or
h. Record air temperature readings and cable ten-
18°F x 1.25 = 22.5
sion readings in helicopter logbook.
119 + 22.5 = 141.5
i. Add left and right cable tension readings from (tension compensated for temperature)
earlier record. Divide total by 2.

j. Add new left and right cable tension readings.

Divide total by 2 (see example).
l. Adjust cable tension as necessary to get equal
k. Compare temperature at which tension read-
tension readings on left and right cables
ings were taken. Compensate readings for tem-
(PARA 11-4-106).
perature by doing this:
m. After cable tension checks and adjustments
(1) Subtract lower temperature from higher
have been completed, attempt to install rigging
temperature, to get range.
pin (1/4 x 6-in.) in the tail rotor servo. If pin
(2) Multiply range by 1.25 if temperature is does not slide in easily, perform a tail rotor rig
in °F (2.25 if temperature is °C). check (PARA 11-4-6). If pin will slide in eas-
ily, no tail rotor rig check is required.
(3) Add result to average tension recorded
with lower temperature. Compare this n. Remove rigging pin from tail rotor servo.
adjusted tension reading to average ten-
sion recorded for higher temperature. NOTE
READINGS MUST BE WITHIN 5
POUNDS OF EACH OTHER. When earlier and new tension readings,
compensated for temperature, are within
EXAMPLE: 5 pounds of each other, consider tail ro-
tor cable tension as stabilized, and no
Reading Temperature Tensiometer further cable tension checks are
Reading required.
(Left + Right)
o. Remove rigging pin, 70700-20380-062, from
1 50°F (10°C) (117 + 121) yaw boost servo.
42
= 119 average p. Remove rigging pin, 70700-20380-062, from
collective boost servo.
2 68°F (20°C) (143 + 148)
(9 to 11 42 q. Turn off all hydraulic power (PARA 1-6-15).
flight hours = 145.5 aver-
later) age r. P u s h i n B A C K U P H Y D C O N T R c i r c u i t
breaker in DC ESNTL BUS panel on overhead
control.

1-7-10-2
PARA 1-7-11 TM 1-70-23

1-7-11 EVERY 30 HOURS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE PAGE

1-7-11.1 Bifilar Weights 1-7-11-2 1-7-11.7 Stabilator Hinge Fitting 1-7-11-4

Torque Check
1-7-11.2 Horizontal Stores Support 1-7-11-2
(HSS) Pneumatic Check 1-7-11.8 Tail Rotor Pitch Control 1-7-11-5
Valve Rods with Spherical Bear-
ings
1-7-11.3 Main Rotor Head Damp- 1-7-11-2
ers 1-7-11.9 Tail Rotor Pylon-to-Tail 1-7-11-5
Cone Bolts Torque Check
1-7-11.4 Main Rotor Pitch Control 1-7-11-4
Rod Spherical Bearings 1-7-11.10 Transition Section-to-Tail 1-7-11-6
Cone Bolt Torque Check
1-7-11.5 Rotating Scissors 1-7-11-4
1-7-11.11 Oil Cooler 1-7-11-6
1-7-11.6 Spindle Elastomeric Bear- 1-7-11-4
ing Assembly

INITIAL SETUP • PARA 1-2-1

Tools • PARA 2-3-12

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit • PARA 2-6-5
• Teflon Lined Spherical Bearing Plastic Feeler
• PARA 2-6-42
Gage, Figure H-209, Appendix H

• Torque Wrench, 30 - 150 in. lbs • PARA 5-3-1

• Torque Wrench, 150 - 750 in. lbs • PARA 5-3-4

• Torque Wrench, 700 - 1600 in. lbs • PARA 5-3-5

Materials/Parts • PARA 5-3-6
• Abrasive Cloth, Item 12, Appendix D
• PARA 5-3-7
• Abrasive Wheel, Item 22, Appendix D
• PARA 5-3-12
• Methyl Ethyl Ketone, Item 217, Appendix D
• PARA 5-4-32
References

• Appendix D • PARA 6-3-15

• Appendix H • PARA 16-4-27

1-7-11-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-11

1-7-11.1 Bifilar Weights. (1) Remove paint with methyl ethyl ketone,
Item 217, Appendix D.
NOTE
(2) Inspect AREAS A and B for cracks.
B i fi l a r w e i g h t s s h a l l b e v i s u a l l y NONE ALLOWED. Replace weight if
inspected for cracks. Visually inspect cracks are found (PARA 5-4-32).
each weight for cracks between and
adjacent to the bushing bores on upper (3) Inspect AREA C for bond separation. Re-
and lower surfaces of each flange. NO place weight if bond separation is found
CRACKS ALLOWED. (PARA 5-4-32).

a. Inspect bifilar weights for nicks, gouges, and (4) Touch up paint on weight as required
cracks in AREA A, AREA B, and AREA C as (PARA 2-6-5).
follows (Figure 1-7-11-1, Detail A and Detail
B): 1-7-11.2 Horizontal Stores Support (HSS)
Pneumatic Check Valve.
(1) A R E A A - N I C K S A N D G O U G E S
SHALL NOT EXCEED 0.150-INCH NOTE
DEEP.
The following procedure is required
(2) A R E A B - C O R N E R N I C K S A N D when operating in dry, dusty and/or
GOUGES SHALL NOT EXCEED 0.10- sandy environment.
INCH DEEP. SURFACE NICKS AND
GOUGES SHALL NOT EXCEED 0.030- Clean pneumatic check valves (PARA 16-4-27).
INCH DEEP. NO CRACKS AL-
1-7-11.3 Main Rotor Head Dampers.
LOWED.
NOTE
(3) AREA C - NO NICKS OR GOUGES
ALLOWED. Removal of damper is not required for
feeler gage inspection.
(4) Using abrasive cloth, Item 12, Appendix
D, or abrasive wheel, Item 22, Appendix a. Inspect inboard and outboard main rotor head
D, blend nicks and gouges in Area A and damper rod end bearings for wear using 0.010-
Area B to a 0.50-inch radius. inch side of Teflon lined spherical bearing
plastic feeler gage (Figure H-209, Appendix H)
(5) Replace weight if damage is more than (PARA 5-3-4).
limits (PARA 5-4-32).
NOTE
NOTE
• Do the following inspections every 15
Cracked paint in area C of weights with flight hours only on bearings that have
"UT" or "X" marked in area of part failed the 0.010-inch feeler gage inspec-
number is acceptable. tion.

b. Inspect weight marked "UT" or "X" following • Removal of damper assembly is not
the part number. If the letters "UT" or "X" are required for feeler gage inspection.
present, no further inspection is required. If the
letters "PL" or no part marking after the part b. Inspect inboard and outboard main rotor head
number, visually inspect each bifilar weight for damper rod end bearings for wear using 0.015-
cracked paint in the bonded joint area (AREA inch side of Teflon lined spherical bearing
C). If cracks in paint are found, perform the plastic feeler gage (Figure H-209, Appendix H)
following: (PARA 5-3-4).

1-7-11-2
PARA 1-7-11 TM 1-70-23

BUMPER
PAD

WEIGHT
AREA "A" AREA "B"

WEIGHT
(SEE NOTE 1) 4.21 IN.

A
0.80 IN.

AREA "C"

B
WEIGHT
BUMPER AREA "A" AREA "B"
PAD

4.21 IN.

B 0.80 IN.

WEIGHT
(SEE NOTE 2)

AREA "C"

NOTES
1. WEIGHT, 70107-08404-042.
2. WEIGHTS, 70107-08404-043
AND 70107-08404-044. AA1146
SA

FIGURE 1-7-11-1. INSPECT BIFILAR WEIGHTS

1-7-11-3
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-11

1-7-11.4 Main Rotor Pitch Control Rod 1-7-11.7 Stabilator Hinge Fitting Torque
Spherical Bearings. Check.

a. Inspect main rotor head upper pitch control rod NOTE

end bearings for wear using 0.010-inch side of
locally made, spherical bearing, plastic feeler Whenever a stabilator hinge fitting is re-
gage (Figure H-209, Appendix H) (PARA 5-3- placed, removed and reinstalled, or
5). torque on mounting bolts is broken, the
following check is required each 30
b. Inspect main rotor head lower pitch control rod flight hours until torque is stabilized for
end bearing for wear using 0.010-inch side of three consecutive 30 hour torque checks.
locally made, spherical bearing, plastic feeler
gage (Figure H-209, Appendix H) (PARA 5-3- a. Remove screws and washers securing right and
5). left stabilator/pylon fairings. Remove fairings.

b. Remove screws and washers securing inspec-

c. Inspect main rotor pitch control rods for any
tion covers to underside of stabilator. Remove
obvious damage or deformation (PARA 5-3-5).
covers.
NOTE c. Check torque on top and bottom 5/16-inch
corner bolts which attach each hinge fitting to
Do the following inspections every 15 front spar of stabilator. TORQUE MUST NOT
flight hours only on bearings that have BE LESS THAN 180 INCH-POUNDS.
failed the 0.010-inch feeler gage inspec-
tion. d. IF TORQUE IS LESS THAN 110 INCH-
POUNDS ON ANY BOLT, REPLACE BOLT
d. Inspect main rotor head upper pitch control rod AND NUT. TORQUE BOLT TO 214 - 236
end bearings for wear using 0.015-inch side of INCH-POUNDS. REPEAT TORQUE
locally made, spherical bearing, plastic feeler CHECK UNTIL BOLT STABILIZES AT 180
gage (Figure H-209, Appendix H) (PARA 5-3- INCH-POUNDS MINIMUM FOR THREE
5). CONSECUTIVE 30 HOUR TORQUE
CHECKS.
e. Inspect main rotor head lower pitch control rod
end bearing for wear using 0.015-inch side of e. IF TORQUE IS 110 - 179 INCH-POUNDS,
locally made, spherical bearing, plastic feeler RETORQUE TOP AND BOTTOM CORNER
gage (Figure H-209, Appendix H) (PARA 5-3- BOLTS IN A DIAGONAL PATTERN (TOP
5). LEFT CORNER, BOTTOM RIGHT
CORNER, TOP RIGHT CORNER, BOT-
1-7-11.5 Rotating Scissors. TOM LEFT CORNER) TO 214 - 236 INCH-
POUNDS. REPEAT TORQUE CHECK
a. Inspect scissors attachment bearings on swash- UNTIL BOLT STABILIZES AT 180 INCH-
plate for play (PARA 5-3-6). POUNDS MINIMUM FOR THREE
CONSECUTIVE 30 HOUR TORQUE
b. Inspect rotating scissors bearings for play CHECKS.
(PARA 5-3-7).
f. IF TORQUE IS 110 - 179 INCH-POUNDS
1-7-11.6 Spindle Elastomeric Bearing As- FOR THREE CONSECUTIVE 30 HOUR
sembly. TORQUE CHECKS, REPLACE BOLT AND
NUT. TORQUE BOLT TO 214 - 236 INCH-
Inspect elastomeric spherical and thrust bearings POUNDS. REPEAT TORQUE CHECK
(PARA 5-3-1). UNTIL BOLT STABILIZES AT 180 INCH-

1-7-11-4
PARA 1-7-11 TM 1-70-23

POUNDS MINIMUM FOR THREE c. IF TORQUE IS GREATER THAN 1311

CONSECUTIVE 30 HOUR TORQUE INCH-POUNDS, TORQUE HAS
CHECKS. STABILIZED. TORQUE CHECK IS COM-
PLETE. Apply torque stripe to bolts (PARA
g. IF TORQUE IS MORE THAN 180 INCH- 2-6-5).
POUNDS FOR THREE CONSECUTIVE 30
HOUR TORQUE CHECKS, TORQUE HAS
STABILIZED. TORQUE CHECK IS COM- WARNING
PLETE.

h. Install inspection covers to underside of stabi- FSCAP

lator with washers and screws.
Verification of proper hardware installa-
i. Install right and left stabilator/pylon fairings tion and torque of bolts is a critical
with washers and screws. characteristic.

1-7-11.8 Tail Rotor Pitch Control Rods with d. I F T O R Q U E I S B E L O W 1 3 1 1 I N C H -

Spherical Bearings. POUNDS, TORQUE HAS NOT
STABILIZED. TORQUE BOLTS TO 1311 -
a. Inspect tail rotor pitch control rod end bearings 1449 INCH-POUNDS. REPEAT TORQUE
for wear using 0.010-inch side of locally made CHECK EVERY 30 FLIGHT HOURS
plastic feeler gage (Figure H-209, Appendix H) UNTIL TORQUE STABILIZES AT 1311
(PARA 5-3-12). INCH-POUNDS MINIMUM TORQUE. Ap-
ply torque stripe to bolts after torque stabilizes
NOTE (PARA 2-6-5).
Do the following inspections every 15
e. If torque does not stabilize after three consecu-
flight hours only on bearings that have
tive torque checks, do this:
failed the 0.010-inch feeler gage inspec-
tion. (1) Replace discrepant bolt, nut, and washers.
b. Inspect tail rotor pitch control rod end bearings
for wear using 0.015-inch side of locally made
plastic feeler gage (Figure H-209, Appendix H) WARNING
(PARA 5-3-12).

1-7-11.9 Tail Rotor Pylon-to-Tail Cone Bolts FSCAP

Torque Check.
Verification of proper hardware installa-
NOTE tion and torque of bolts is a critical
characteristic.
Perform this check each time pylon is
separated from tail cone. (2) T O R Q U E B O L T S T O 1 3 1 1 - 1 4 4 9
INCH-POUNDS. REPEAT TORQUE
a. Remove tail cone access covers (PARA 1-2-1). CHECK EVERY 30 FLIGHT HOURS
UNTIL TORQUE STABILIZES AT
b. Check bolts and nuts holding pylon to tail 1311 INCH-POUNDS MINIMUM
cone. TORQUE MUST NOT BE LESS THAN TORQUE. Apply torque stripe to bolts
1311 INCH-POUNDS. after torque stabilizes (PARA 2-6-5).

1-7-11-5
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-11

h. Install tail cone access covers (PARA 1-2-1).

WARNING
1-7-11.10 Transition Section-to-Tail Cone
Bolt Torque Check.
FSCAP
NOTE
Installation of radius pads is a critical
Perform this check each time tail cone is
characteristic. Make sure radius pads are
separated from transition section.
bonded securely to tail cone.
Perform transition section to tail cone bolt torque
f. Check tail cone attachment points for four in- check (PARA 2-3-12).
stalled radius pads. Replace missing or da-
maged radius pads (PARA 2-6-42). 1-7-11.11 Oil Cooler.

g. Make sure area is clean and free of foreign Inspect oil cooler viscous damper bearing for
material. debris, damage, or overheating (PARA 6-3-15).

1-7-11-6
PARA 1-7-12 TM 1-70-23

1-7-12 EVERY 50 HOURS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE PAGE

1-7-12.1 Aircraft Battery 1-7-12-1 1-7-12.3 Main Gear Box Planetary 1-7-12-2
Carrier Assembly
1-7-12.2 Deswirl Duct Clamp 1-7-12-1

INITIAL SETUP • PARA 4-4-2

Tools • PARA 9-2-22

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• PARA 9-2-23
• Electric Etcher

• Fluorescent Penetrant Inspection Kit • Special Service Instructions (SSI) No. 70-109

References

• MIL-STD-6866

• NAS 410

1-7-12.1 Aircraft Battery. inspection does not apply if deswirl duct

clamp, 15J65-1568, 70300-30800-101,
Refer to PARA 9-2-22 or PARA 9-2-23 for 50 or 70300-30800-102, is installed.
hour battery inspection.
a. Remove clamp and deswirl duct (PARA 4-4-
1-7-12.2 Deswirl Duct Clamp. 2).
NOTE
b. Using fluorescent penetrant inspection kit,
• Do this inspection every 50 flight hours, inspect clamp in area of T-bolt strap to V
or before first flight following comple- retainer welds for cracks (MIL-STD-6866).
tion of 50 flight hours. NONE ALLOWED.

• The following inspection is applicable c. Remove torque markings, 50 - 70 inch-pounds

only to helicopters with deswirl duct on clamp. Remark clamp, with electric etcher
clamp, 12J72-1568, installed. This to read 35 - 40 inch-pounds.

1-7-12-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-12

d. Install deswirl duct and clamp (PARA 4-4-2). • The following procedure is to be per-
formed only by personnel certified as
1-7-12.3 Main Gear Box Planetary Carrier Level II UT technicians (or equivalent,
Assembly. per NAS 410) with a minimum of eight
hours of Sikorsky Aircraft administered
NOTE training specific to use of this procedure.
• The following inspection is applicable to
main gear box (2800 series) assemblies, • If required, contact Sikorsky ILS for
70351-08100 and 70351-78100, information regarding this procedure.
containing planetary carrier, 70351-
08175-043, 70351-08175-044, or a. Perform ultrasonic test inspection of main gear
70351-08175-045. box planetary carrier (special service instruc-
tions (SSI) No. 70-109).
• The following inspection is to be per-
formed on main gear box planetary car- b. Check helicopter logbook to make sure main
rier assemblies after accumulating 1400 gear box planetary carrier assembly inspection
flight hours and initial untrasonic test is shown due in 50 flight hours.
inspection.

1-7-12-2
PARA 1-7-13 TM 1-70-23

1-7-13 EVERY 60 HOURS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE PAGE

1-7-13.1 Tail Rotor Blade Horn 1-7-13-1 1-7-13.2 Swashplate Links 1-7-13-1
Assembly

INITIAL SETUP References

Tools
• Appendix D
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• PARA 1-6-15
• Allen Wrench, 1/4 inch

• Magnifying Glass, 10X • PARA 1-6-16

• Feeler Gage • PARA 5-3-13

• Torque Wrench, 150 - 750 in. lbs
• PARA 11-4-95
Materials/Parts
• Alcohol, Denatured, Item 70, Appendix D

• Soap

1-7-13.1 Tail Rotor Blade Horn Assembly. d. If crack is suspected, refer to PARA 5-3-13.
a. Clean surfaces of four tail rotor blade horn as- 1-7-13.2 Swashplate Links.
semblies with soap and water or denatured
alcohol, Item 70, Appendix D.
a. Turn off all hydraulic and electrical power
b. Visually examine painted surfaces for cracks (PARA 1-6-15 and PARA 1-6-16).
with 10X magnifying glass.
c. If no cracks are found, tail rotor blade as-
sembly may continue in service.

1-7-13-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-13

race. NONE ALLOWED. Replace swash-

CAUTION plate link if liner deterioration or extrusion
is found.

Any swashplate link assembly which (2) Check spherical bearing for radial play.
exceeds or does not conform to accept/ NONE ALLOWED. Replace swashplate
reject criteria listed in this inspection is link if radial play is found (PARA 11-4-
to be replaced. 95).

NOTE (3) Check gap under expandable pin washer

using feeler gage, while pin is installed.
• The following inspection is required on GAP SHALL NOT EXCEED 0.002 -
helicopters which have the swashplate INCH. If gap exceeds 0.002 inch, reinstall
link assemblies specified in step b. If expandable pin to obtain correct gap
these swashplate links are not installed, (PARA 11-4-95).
this inspection is not required. (4) If expandable pin has passed gap check,
perform torque check while pin is in-
• Cracks of spherical bearing will be
stalled as follows:
found on uniball surface usually starting
at the outer lip and running parallel to (a) Remove cotter pin from expandable
the bolt axis across the bearing. pin.

b. With expandable pin installed, visually inspect (b) Insert 1/4 inch Allen wrench into
forward longitudinal swashplate link as- end of expandable pin.
semblies, 70400-08110-047, 70400-08110-049,
(c) While holding Allen wrench firmly,
and 70400-08110-053; aft longitudinal swash-
apply 300 inch - pounds of torque to
plate link assemblies, 70400-08110-048,
expandable pin nut. MINIMUM
70400-08110-050, and 70400-08110-054; and
TORQUE OF 300 INCH -
lateral swashplate link assemblies, 70400-
POUNDS MUST BE ACHIEVED
08151-046, 70400-08151-048, and 70400-
WITHOUT MOVEMENT OF
08151-050 for cracks. A MAXIMUM OF ONE
NUT. If nut moves before minimum
CRACK IS ALLOWED. If no cracks are found
torque is reached, replace swashplate
and expandable pin is properly installed, inspec-
link (PARA 11-4-95)
tion is complete.
(d) If minimum torque is achieved,
c. If more than one crack is found, replace swash- remove Allen wrench and install
plate link (PARA 11-4-95). new cotter pin.

d. If one crack is found, do this: (5) If all of the above conditions are met,
swashplate link may remain in use for an
(1) Check Teflon liner for deterioration or additional 10 flight hours before replace-
extrusion between spherical bearing outer ment is required.

1-7-13-2
PARA 1-7-14 TM 1-70-23

1-7-14 EVERY 100 HOURS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE PAGE

1-7-14.1 Engine Output Shaft, 1-7-14-2 1-7-14.7 Main Rotor Damper At- 1-7-14-4
Transmission Input tach Bolts
Module Flange, Elasto-
meric Gimbal, and 1-7-14.8 Main Rotor Pitch Control 1-7-14-4
Adjacent Components Rods
Inspection
1-7-14.9 Tail Gear Box Chip 1-7-14-5
1-7-14.2 Following First External 1-7-14-4 Detector/Temperature
Lift Mission Exceeding Sensor
8000 Pounds
1-7-14.10 Tail Rotor System - Tail 1-7-14-5
1-7-14.3 Intermediate Gear Box 1-7-14-4 Rotor Pitch Horn Fairing
Chip Detector/
Temperature Sensor 1-7-14.11 Aircraft Battery 1-7-14-5

1-7-14.4 Main Module Sump Chip 1-7-14-4 1-7-14.12 Rotor Brake 1-7-14-5
Detector/Temperature
Sensor 1-7-14.13 Accessory Module Oil 1-7-14-6
Return Screen
1-7-14.5 Main Transmission Sup- 1-7-14-4
port Beams and Upper 1-7-14.14 Rescue Hoist 1-7-14-6
Deck Skin

1-7-14.6 Oil Cooler 1-7-14-4

INITIAL SETUP Materials/Parts

Tools • Drill Bit, No. 60 (0.040-inch diameter)

• Dry-Cleaning Solvent, Item 124, Appendix D

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• Sealing Compound, Item 286, Appendix D
• Flashlight
References
• Inspection Mirror
• Appendix D
• Straight Edge
• PARA 2-4-70

• Torque Wrench, 30 - 150 in. lbs • PARA 2-6-1

• Torque Wrench, 150 - 750 in. lbs • PARA 4-4-1

1-7-14-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-14

• PARA 4-4-4 • PARA 6-4-59

• PARA 4-4-6 • PARA 6-4-71

• PARA 5-3-4 • PARA 6-4-73

• PARA 5-4-18 • PARA 9-2-22

• PARA 5-4-38 • PARA 9-2-23

• PARA 6-2-2 • PARA 14-3-1

• PARA 6-3-8 • PARA 14-3-2

• PARA 6-4-15 • PARA 14-4-1

• PARA 6-4-25 • PARA 14-4-32

• PARA 6-4-28 • TM 1-70-VIB

1-7-14.1 Engine Output Shaft, Transmission

Input Module Flange, Elastomeric Gimbal, WARNING
and Adjacent Components Inspection.

a. Remove engine air inlet assembly (PARA 4-4- FSCAP

4).
Verification of minimum torque of bolts
b. Visually inspect accessible portion of engine is a critical characteristic.
output shaft with flashlight and inspection mir-
NOTE
ror through inspection hole in cowl for obvious
damage. REPLACE ENGINE OUTPUT Whenever the engine output shaft is
SHAFT ASSEMBLY IF DAMAGE FOUND removed or replaced, an engine output
EXCEEDS ALLOWABLE LIMITS (PARA shaft vibration level check must be per-
4-4-6). formed (TM 1-70-VIB).
c. Visually inspect engine output shaft for obvi- e. Check torque on three bolts connecting flexible
ous damage. REPLACE ENGINE OUTPUT coupling to input module flange while holding
SHAFT ASSEMBLY IF DAMAGE FOUND nuts as follows:
EXCEEDS ALLOWABLE LIMITS (PARA
4-4-6). (1) Initially check bolts in tightening direc-
tion. If input module flange, 70351-
d. Visually inspect disc pack coupling for cracks, 08206-102, is used, check torque while
obvious damage, buckling and lamination holding nut. TORQUE MUST NOT BE
spread (PARA 4-4-6). LESS THAN 90 INCH-POUNDS.

1-7-14-2
PARA 1-7-14 TM 1-70-23

(2) IF TORQUE ON ANY ONE BOLT IS nuts in tightening direction only while holding
BELOW 90 INCH-POUNDS, REPLACE bolts.
ALL BOLTS AND ASSEMBLY
HARDWARE CONNECTING DISC (1) Initially check nuts in tightening direction
PACK TO INPUT FLANGE (PARA 4-4- while holding bolts. TORQUE MUST
1). IF INPUT MODULE FLANGE, NOT BE LESS THAN 90 INCH-
70351-08206-041 WITH NUTPLATES POUNDS.
IS USED, REPLACE WITH INPUT
MODULE FLANGE, 70351-08206-102, (2) IF TORQUE ON ANY ONE NUT IS
IF AVAILABLE. IF INPUT MODULE BELOW 90 INCH-POUNDS, REPLACE
FLANGE, 70351-08206-041 IS USED, ENGINE OUTPUT SHAFT. Perform an
AFTER TORQUE HAS STABILIZED, engine output shaft balance check if shaft
PLACE A DROP OF SEALING COM- was disconnected (TM 1-70-VIB).
POUND, ITEM 286, APPENDIX D, TO
THREADS OF BOLTS ADJACENT TO (3) Check nuts in tightening direction while
NUTPLATES. MAKE SURE COM- holding bolts. TORQUE MUST NOT BE
POUND SEEPS INTO NUTPLATES. LESS THAN 130 INCH-POUNDS.
Perform engine output shaft vibration check
if shaft was disconnected (TM 1-70-VIB). (4) IF TORQUE ON ANY NUT IS BELOW
130 INCH-POUNDS, RETORQUE TO
(3) Check bolts in tightening direction. If 130 - 140 INCH-POUNDS. Repeat torque
input module flange, 70351-08206-102, is check after each 1 to 3 flight hours until
used, check torque while holding nut. torque stabilizes.
TORQUE MUST NOT BE LESS THAN
(5) If torque does not stabilize after third
130 INCH-POUNDS.
consecutive torque check, replace engine
output shaft assembly. Balance engine
(4) I F T O R Q U E O N A N Y B O L T I S
output shaft (PARA 4-4-1 and TM 1-70-
BELOW 130 INCH-POUNDS, RE-
VIB).
TORQUE TO 130 - 140 INCH-
POUNDS. Repeat torque check after each
g. Visually inspect elastomeric gimbal for bond
1 to 3 flight hours until torque stabilizes.
separation and bolt breakage (PARA 6-3-8).
(5) If torque does not stabilize after third h. Visually inspect for evidence of oil leakage
consecutive torque check, replace three from input module seal (PARA 6-3-8).
bolts and assembly hardware connecting
disc pack to input module flange (PARA i. Perform engine output shaft vibration level
4-4-1). If input module flange, 70351- check (TM 1-70-VIB).
08206-041 with nutplates is used, replace
with input module flange, 70351-08206- j. Check helicopter logbook to make sure torque
102, if available. If input module flange, check of bolts connecting disc pack coupling to
70351-08206-041 is used, after torque has input module flange is due after initial ground
stabilized, place a drop of sealing run and after 1 to 3 flight hours, if found loose
compound, Item 286, Appendix D, to during the torque check. Also, check helicopter
threads of bolts adjacent to nutplates. logbook to make sure torque check of bolts
Make sure compound seeps into nutplates. connecting disc pack coupling to engine output
Balance engine output shaft (TM 1-70- shaft is due after initial ground run and after 1
VIB). to 3 flight hours, if found loose during the
torque check.
f. Check torque on three nuts securing flexible
coupling to engine output shaft by torquing k. Install engine air inlet assembly (PARA 4-4-4).

1-7-14-3
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-14

1-7-14.2 Following First External Lift Mis- b. Inspect left and right main transmission sup-
sion Exceeding 8000 Pounds. port beams at BL 16.5 for cracks in upper cap,
forward and aft of main transmission mounting
NOTE pad at STA 343.0. Inspect web stiffener attach-
ing STA 343.0 frames to left and right support
The following inspection is to be per- beams at BL 16.5 for cracks. NO CRACKS
formed every 100 hours following first ALLOWED. If cracks are found contact, Sikor-
external lift mission exceeding 8000 sky Aircraft ILS manager.
pounds.
c. Inspect upper deck skin for cracks in vicinity
Inspect cargo hook well area between STA 343.0 of gusset doubler on left and right main trans-
and STA 363.0 and BL 10.0 left and right for mission support beams. If cracks are present in
cracks. Give special attention to lower caps located skin and not in support beam, repair skin
on STA 343.0 and STA 363.0, inboard of BL 10.0 (PARA 2-6-1).
left and right. NO CRACKS ALLOWED.
d. Inspect upper deck skin for working fasteners
1-7-14.3 Intermediate Gear Box Chip in vicinity of gusset doubler on left and right
Detector/Temperature Sensor. support beams. If working fasteners are
detected, replace working fasteners.
NOTE
e. Install main transmission drip pan (PARA 2-4-
The following inspection is only 70).
required on aircraft without a functional
1-7-14.6 Oil Cooler.
built-in test system installed.
Perform vibration check on oil cooler (TM 1-70-
a. Remove chip detector/temperature sensor and VIB).
inspect self-closing valve (PARA 6-4-15).
1-7-14.7 Main Rotor Damper Attach Bolts.
b. Perform operational check of intermediate gear
box chip detector system (PARA 6-2-2). Check main rotor damper attach bolt break away
torque with torque wrench. Apply torque in
1-7-14.4 Main Module Sump Chip Detector/ tightening direction to bolthead. If bolthead moves
Temperature Sensor. at torque below 700 inch-pounds, remove and
inspect bolt for wear and washer for deformation.
NOTE Replace bolt and washer if required (PARA 5-3-4).
If bolts are removed, check helicopter logbook to
The following inspection is only make sure damper attachment bolts torque check is
required on aircraft without a functional shown as due 9 to 11 flight hours after installation.
built-in test system installed.
1-7-14.8 Main Rotor Pitch Control Rods.
Perform operational check on chip detector in left and
right accessory module, left and right input module, Check upper bolt only on main rotor pitch control
and main module sump (PARA 6-2-2). rod attach bolt break away torque with torque
wrench. Apply torque in tightening direction to
1-7-14.5 Main Transmission Support Beams bolthead. If bolthead moves at torque below 700
and Upper Deck Skin. inch-pounds, remove and inspect bolt for wear and
washers for stackup and deformation (washers
a. Remove main transmission drip pan (PARA must be flat). Replace bolt and/or washer if
2-4-70). required (PARA 5-4-18).

1-7-14-4
PARA 1-7-14 TM 1-70-23

1-7-14.9 Tail Gear Box Chip Detector/ e. If clearance between inner lip and tail rotor
Temperature Sensor. blade spar is 0.350-inch or more at leading and
trailing edges, slide boot back over fairing and
NOTE install tiedown strap (PARA 5-4-38).

The following inspection is only f. If clearance between inner lip and tail rotor
required on aircraft without a functional blade spar is less than 0.350-inch at leading
built-in test system installed. and trailing edges, and spar contact is evident,
measure and record spar damage as follows:
a. Remove chip detector/temperature sensor and
inspect self-closing valve (PARA 6-4-59). (1) Place No. 60 (0.040-inch diameter) drill
bit into damage notch.
b. Perform operational check of tail gear box chip
detector system (PARA 6-2-2). (2) Place straight edge parallel to spar surface
over drill bit. If straight edge touches drill
1-7-14.10 Tail Rotor System - Tail Rotor bit, stop measuring and record in log,
Pitch Horn Fairing. "spar damage is less than 0.040-inch in
depth".
NOTE
(3) If straight edge touches spar on each side
Tail rotor blade prior to S/N A009- of drill bit but does not touch drill bit, use
02083 will be inspected at 100 hour a drill bit large enough to fill damage
intervals or when replacing tail rotor notch.
blade assembly or fairing.
(4) Place straight edge parallel to spar surface
over drill bit. If straight edge touches drill
a. Remove tiedown strap from boot and slide boot
bit, repeat measurement check using
inboard.
progressively smaller drill bit until
straight edge touches spar on each side of
NOTE
drill bit but does not touch drill bit.
Interference between tail rotor blade (5) Record in log, "spar damage is (drill bit
fairing assembly and tail rotor blade size) inches in depth".
spar is measured on specific tail rotor
blades and are inspected for delamina- NOTE
tion and/or splintering.
Maximum contact damage is 0.070-
b. Check for interference between tail rotor blade inch.
fairing assembly inner lip and tail rotor blade
spar. (6) Repair or replace tail rotor blade as-
sembly.
c. Inspect rotor blades for delamination and/or
(7) Slide boot back over fairing and install
splintering. If damage is evident, replace tail
tiedown strap.
rotor blade assembly or repair damage.
1-7-14.11 Aircraft Battery.
NOTE
Refer to PARA 9-2-22 or PARA 9-2-23 for 100
Pay particular attention to spar corner- hour inspection.
to-fairing clearance.
1-7-14.12 Rotor Brake.
d. Measure fairing clearance between inner lip
and tail rotor blade spar. a. Apply rotor brake.

1-7-14-5
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-14

b. Clean top of brake linings and exposed piston a. Open main rotor pylon sliding cover.
housing with dry-cleaning solvent, Item 124,
Appendix D. b. Visually inspect accessory module and input
module for discoloration. If housing paint is
c. Check wear pin extension. Pins should extend found to be discolored, from aluminized gray
3/16-inch minimum beyond rotor break hous- to brown, remove the affected module (PARA
ing. 6-4-25 and PARA 6-4-28) and do the
following:
d. If pin extension is less than 3/16-inch, replace
brake pucks (PARA 6-4-71). (1) Remove oil drain tubes from left and right
accessory module.
e. If brake pucks are to be replaced, check rotor
brake disc thickness. Replace rotor brake disc (2) Remove and inspect oil screens for any
if thickness is less than 0.410-inches (PARA foreign material.
6-4-73).
(3) Clean oil screens with dry-cleaning
f. Check rotor brake housing and disc for warp- solvent, Item 124, Appendix D.
ing, scoring, corrosion, or cracks.
(4) Install oil screens and drain tubes.
g. Release rotor brake. c. Make sure area is clean and free of foreign
material.
1-7-14.13 Accessory Module Oil Return
Screen. d. Close and latch main rotor pylon sliding cover.
NOTE 1-7-14.14 Rescue Hoist.

Helicopters with main generator serial a. Inspect hoist support assembly and airframe
numbers through 774 will be inspected fitting for cracks, corrosion, or deformation
every 100 flight hours for 500 flight (PARA 14-4-1 or PARA 14-4-32).
hours. Thereafter, inspections shall be
perform at 500 flight hour intervals as b. Check electrical cables and hydraulic lines/
long as generator serial numbers through hoses for damage, chafing, leakage, and wear
774 are installed. (PARA 14-3-1 or PARA 14-3-2).

1-7-14-6
PARA 1-7-15 TM 1-70-23

1-7-15 EVERY 150 HOURS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE PAGE

1-7-15.1 Tail Rotor Drive Shaft 1-7-15-1 1-7-15.2 Cargo Door Upper Track 1-7-15-1
Section I Flexible Installation
Couplings

INITIAL SETUP References

Tools • PARA 2-6-26

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit • PARA 6-4-38

• Magnifying Glass, 10X • PARA 6-4-42

1-7-15.1 Tail Rotor Drive Shaft Section I b. If outer coupling is cracked, replace coupling
Flexible Couplings. (PARA 6-4-42).

NOTE c. If inner coupling is cracked, replace tail rotor

drive shaft section I (PARA 6-4-38).
• This procedure is applicable to
helicopters equipped with rotor brake. 1-7-15.2 Cargo Door Upper Track Installa-
tion.
• Red oxide stains on coupling discs are
a. Check cargo door upper track fasteners for
acceptable.
cracks and corrosion.
a. Using 10X magnifying glass, inspect the b. If corrosion is found, clean and repair (PARA
double tail drive shaft flexible couplings on 2-6-26).
both ends of tail drive shaft section I for cracks
on both sides of coupling, especially in area of c. If cracks or wear to 0.040-inch is found, re-
conical washers. NO CRACKS ALLOWED. place track or hangers (PARA 2-6-26).

1-7-15-1/(1-7-15-2 Blank)
PARA 1-7-16 TM 1-70-23

1-7-16 EVERY 250 HOURS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-7-16.1 Inspect Stabilator 1-7-16-1

INITIAL SETUP References

Tools • PARA 2-3-15

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit • PARA 2-4-142

• Torque Wrench, 30 - 150 in. lbs • PARA 2-6-47

1-7-16.1 Inspect Stabilator. INCH-POUNDS MINIMUM FOR THREE

CONSECUTIVE 250 HOUR TORQUE
NOTE CHECKS.

If stabilator is removed and reinstalled f. IF TORQUE IS 65 - 99 INCH-POUNDS, RE-

on same serial number helicopter and no TORQUE CENTER BOLTS IN A
adjustments or repairs have been made, DIAGONAL PATTERN (TOP LEFT
no test flight is required. CENTER, BOTTOM RIGHT CENTER, TOP
RIGHT CENTER, BOTTOM LEFT
a. Remove stabilator (PARA 2-4-142). CENTER, THEN TWO MIDDLE BOLTS)
TO 128 - 142 INCH-POUNDS. REPEAT
b. Inspect stabilator attachment bolts (PARA 2-3- TORQUE CHECK UNTIL BOLT
15). STABILIZES AT 100 INCH-POUNDS MINI-
MUM FOR THREE CONSECUTIVE 250
c. Check torque on 1/4-inch center bolts which at- HOUR TORQUE CHECKS.
tach each hinge fitting to front spar of stabila-
tor. TORQUE MUST NOT BE LESS THAN g. IF TORQUE IS 65 - 99 INCH-POUNDS FOR
100 INCH-POUNDS. THREE CONSECUTIVE 250 HOUR
TORQUE CHECKS, REPLACE BOLT AND
d. IF TORQUE IS 100 INCH-POUNDS OR NUT. TORQUE BOLT TO 128 - 142 INCH-
GREATER, FOR THREE CONSECUTIVE POUNDS. REPEAT TORQUE CHECK
250 HOUR TORQUE CHECKS, TORQUE UNTIL BOLT STABILIZES AT 100 INCH-
HAS STABILIZED. TORQUE CHECK POUNDS MINIMUM FOR THREE
COMPLETE. CONSECUTIVE 250 HOUR TORQUE
CHECKS.
e. IF TORQUE IS LESS THAN 65 INCH-
POUNDS ON ANY BOLT, REPLACE BOLT h. Inspect double row ball bearings, mounted in
AND NUT. TORQUE BOLTS TO 128 - 142 pylon fitting, for cracked inner races. Replace
INCH-POUNDS. REPEAT TORQUE bearings if inner races are cracked (PARA 2-6-
CHECK UNTIL BOLT STABILIZES AT 100 47).

1-7-16-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-16

i. Install stabilator (PARA 2-4-142).

1-7-16-2
PARA 1-7-17 TM 1-70-23

1-7-17 EVERY 1000 HOURS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE PAGE

1-7-17.1 Cabin Tub Inspection 1-7-17-1 1-7-17.3 Transition Section Tub 1-7-17-2
Inspection
1-7-17.2 Flight Control Rods 1-7-17-2

INITIAL SETUP References

• PARA 2-4-71
Tools
• PARA 2-6-27
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• PARA 2-6-30
• Borescope Kit, 6650-T700-003 • PARA 10-4-2

• Nonmetallic Scraper, Locally-Made • PARA 11-4-63 through PARA 11-4-66

• PARA 11-4-73
Materials/Parts
• PARA 11-4-75
• Cleaning Compound, Solvent, Item 99A, Appendix
• PARA 11-4-80 through PARA 11-4-82
D
• PARA 11-4-84
• Cleaning Compound, Solvent, Item 99B, Appendix
D • PARA 11-4-85

• PARA 11-4-112
• Corrosion Preventive Compound, Item 112, Ap-
pendix D • PARA 11-5-11

1-7-17.1 Cabin Tub Inspection. b. Inspect tub section for corrosion, loose or miss-
ing fasteners, damage to stringers, and general
NOTE condition. Inspect floor panel for damage and
Removal of floor panel is to be done at security of fasteners. Repair or replace missing
1000 flight hours, or when 36 months or damaged fasteners (PARA 2-6-27).
has elapsed since last inspection oc-
curred. c. Install cabin floor panel (PARA 2-4-71).
a. Remove cabin floor panel (PARA 2-4-71).

1-7-17-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-17

1-7-17.2 Flight Control Rods. c. Visually inspect internal areas of control rod
for corrosion using engine borescope. Repair as
NOTE required (PARA 11-5-11).
• Remove and inspect flight control rods 1-7-17.3 Transition Section Tub Inspection.
after every 1000 hours or 36 month
interval, whichever occurs first. Inspec- NOTE
tion interval may be made to coincide
with the 500 hour inspection as long as Removal of the fuel tanks to accom-
the 36 month interval is not exceeded. modate this inspection is to be done at
1000 flight hours, or when 36 months
• Refer to PARA 11-5-11 for control rod has elapsed since first inspection oc-
disassembly and repair. curred.
• Do not disassemble any riveted connec-
a. Remove No. 1 or No. 2 fuel cell (PARA 10-4-
tions when inspecting control rods.
2).
Inspect only the internal surfaces of the
adapter tube that are accessible and
b. Remove foam blocks using nonmetallic
exposed after disassembly of threaded
scraper.
components. DO NOT REMOVE
PLUG OR ANY CAST RESIN FROM
c. Thoroughly clean tub structure using solvent
ADAPTER TO FACILITATE
cleaning compound, Item 99A or Item 99B,
INSPECTION.
Appendix D.
a. Remove and completely disassemble the fol-
lowing flight control rods: d. Inspect tub section for corrosion, loose or miss-
ing fasteners, damage to stringers, and general
(1) Torque shaft to boost servo control rods condition.
(PARA 11-4-63, PARA 11-4-64, PARA
11-4-65, and PARA 11-4-66). e. Repair tub area as necessary (PARA 2-6-30).

(2) Boost servo to mixer control rods (PARA f. Cover entire tub with corrosion preventive
11-4-73, PARA 11-4-75, and PARA 11- compound, Item 112, Appendix D. MAKE
4-85). SURE ALL STRUCTURAL SURFACES OF
THE TUB SECTION ARE COVERED. AL-
(3) Mixer to primary servo control rods LOW TO COMPLETELY DRY PRIOR TO
(PARA 11-4-80, PARA 11-4-81, and INSTALLING FOAM BLOCKS.
PARA 11-4-82).
NOTE
(4) Yaw lever to forward quadrant control rod
(PARA 11-4-84).
Replace all foam blocks at the same
(5) Tail rotor servo to tail rotor quadrant time. Foam blocks are available as a kit,
pushrod (PARA 11-4-112). 70219-03011-041.

b. Visually inspect all external surfaces of disas- g. Install new foam blocks (PARA 2-6-30).
sembled control rod components for corrosion.
Repair as required (PARA 11-5-11). h. Install No. 1 or No. 2 fuel cell (PARA 10-4-2).

1-7-17-2
PARA 1-7-18 TM 1-70-23

1-7-18 BEFORE FIRST FLIGHT OF DAY.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE PAGE

1-7-18.1 Inspect Collective and 1-7-18-1 1-7-18.4 Inspect Main Landing 1-7-18-2
Yaw Boost Servos Gear Drag Beam

1-7-18.2 Inspect Stabilator As- 1-7-18-2 1-7-18.5 Inspect Pitch Control 1-7-18-2
sembly Rods

1-7-18.3 Inspect Main Rotor 1-7-18-2

Spindle Blade Attachment
Lugs

INITIAL SETUP • PARA 2-6-5

Tools
• PARA 3-4-1
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• PARA 3-4-5
• Fluorescent Penetrant Inspection Kit
• Magnifying Glass, 10X • PARA 5-3-1

• Nonmetallic Scraper, Locally-Made

• PARA 5-3-5
References
• PARA 11-4-67
• MIL-STD-6866
• PARA 2-4-142 • PARA 11-4-70

1-7-18.1 Inspect Collective and Yaw Boost (1) Visually inspect where output clevis at-
Servos. taches. Check for cracks or a break where
clevis butts against piston. NO CRACKS
a. Open main rotor pylon sliding cover. ALLOWED.

b. Pull on collective stick with about 10 - 20 (2) Check for broken piston by grabbing top
pounds force. Release grip but do not push end of the output link between thumb and
down. forefinger and attempt to move the link
vertically. NO VERTICAL MOVE-
c. Push left pedal with about 20 - 30 pounds MENT ALLOWED.
force. Release load but do not push right pedal.
(3) R E P L A C E S E R V O H A V I N G
d. Inspect both collective and yaw boost servo CRACKED OR BROKEN PISTON
pistons as follows: (PARA 11-4-67 or PARA 11-4-70).

1-7-18-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-18

e. Make sure area is clean and free of foreign NOTE

material.
Make sure area is clean prior to inspec-
f. Close and latch main rotor pylon sliding cover. tion. Sealing compound is not to extend
more than 3/8-inch beyond edge of
1-7-18.2 Inspect Stabilator Assembly. washers found under jackpad and retain-
ing nut.
NOTE
(1) If excess sealing compound is found,
Do this inspection on helicopters that remove using nonmetallic scraper.
have stabilators without inspection cov-
ers in lower skin of leading edge. NOTE

A crack will appear as a thin line in the

a. Inspect upper and lower exterior surfaces of
painted surface radiating outwards from
stabilator between BL 47.0 and BL 52.0 for
under the bead of sealing compound.
cracks and loose rivets. NO CRACKS AL-
LOWED. (2) Visually inspect 3.0-inch radius around
upper and lower jackpad holes for
b. Replace stabilator with cracks or loose rivets evidence of cracking using 10X magnify-
and send stabilator to Sikorsky Aircraft ing glass.
Corporation for repair (PARA 2-4-142).
(3) If crack is found or suspected, perform
1-7-18.3 Inspect Main Rotor Spindle Blade fluorescent penetrant inspection (MIL-
Attachment Lugs. STD-6866), using fluorescent penetrant
inspection kit. NO CRACKS AL-
Inspect main rotor spindle blade attachment lugs LOWED. Replace drag beam if cracks are
(PARA 5-3-1). found (PARA 3-4-1).

1-7-18.4 Inspect Main Landing Gear Drag (4) Inspect jackpad nut torque stripe for slip-
Beam. page. If slippage has occurred, retorque
nut (PARA 3-4-5), and reapply torque
a. Inspect LH and RH main landing gear drag stripe (PARA 2-6-5).
beams for cracks, corrosion and blistering or
flaking paint. 1-7-18.5 Inspect Pitch Control Rods.
b. Inspect area around jackpad and tiedown ring Perform pitch control rod movement inspection
mounting holes as follows: (PARA 5-3-5).

1-7-18-2
PARA 1-7-19 TM 1-70-23

1-7-19 EVERY 30 DAYS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-7-19.1 Inspect Forward Looking 1-7-19-1

Infrared Radar (FLIR)

INITIAL SETUP References

Tools • TM 11-70-23
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit

1-7-19.1 Inspect Forward Looking Infrared b. Purge and fill nitrogen (TM 11-70-23).
Radar (FLIR).

a. Inspect desiccant cartridge indicator. Replace

cartridge when 2 sections (20 and 40) of
indicator turned lavender (TM 11-70-23).

1-7-19-1/(1-7-19-2 Blank)
PARA 1-7-20 TM 1-70-23

1-7-20 EVERY 90 DAYS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE PAGE

1-7-20.1 General 1-7-20-2 1-7-20.4 Corrosion Removal 1-7-20-6

Procedures
1-7-20.2 90 Day Inspection 1-7-20-2
Requirements

1-7-20.3 Corrosion Preventive 1-7-20-5

Compound Buildup
Removal

INITIAL SETUP • PARA 2-6-31

Tools • PARA 3-3-1

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit • PARA 3-4-1
Materials/Parts • PARA 3-4-26
• Abrasive Mat, Item 14, Appendix D
• PARA 3-4-27
• Alcohol, Isopropyl, Item 72, Appendix D
• PARA 5-3-10
• Brush, Acid, Item 84, Appendix D
• PARA 5-5-14
• Corrosion Compound, Item 108, Appendix D
• PARA 6-4-11
• Corrosion Preventive Compound, Item 113, Ap-
pendix D • PARA 6-4-36
• Corrosion Preventive Compound, Item 114, Ap- • PARA 6-4-38 through PARA 6-4-41
pendix D

• Corrosion Preventive Compound, Item 115, Ap- • PARA 6-4-43

pendix D
• PARA 6-4-46
• Dry-Cleaning Solvent, Item 124, Appendix D
• PARA 6-4-50
• Epoxy Primer Coating Kit, Item 135, Appendix D
• PARA 6-4-57
• Machinery Towel, Item 211, Appendix D
• PARA 11-3-16
References

• Appendix D • PARA 11-3-17

• PARA 2-6-27 • PARA 11-3-19 through PARA 11-3-22

1-7-20-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-20
1-7-20.1 General. (9) A v i o n i c s b a y c o n n e c t o r s ( e x t e r n a l
surfaces).
NOTE
b. If corrosion is found on items a. (1) through a.
• Components listed in PARA 1-7-20.2 (7) refer to Corrosion Removal Procedure No.
are to be inspected and have corrosion 1 (PARA 1-7-20.4.1).
preventive compounds applied.
c. If corrosion is found on item a. (8) refer to Cor-
• When helicopters are operating in highly rosion Removal Procedure No. 2 (PARA 1-7-
corrosive environments (continued 20.4.2).
exposure to salt water or salt air), the
Commander or Maintenance Officer d. If corrosion is found on item a. (9) refer to Cor-
may, at his discretion, increase the scope rosion Removal Procedure No. 3 (PARA 1-7-
and/or frequency of the application of 20.4.3).
corrosion preventive compounds to 30
days. 1-7-20.2.2. Area No. 2 (Cabin Section).

• Inspection interval can be adjusted a. Remove corrosion preventive compound

either way by 20% to coincide with the (PARA 1-7-20.3) from the following
nearest Periodic or 100 hour inspection. components and inspect for corrosion:

1-7-20.2 90 Day Inspection Requirements. (1) Cabin door track.

NOTE (2) Bolt, nut, and washer on folding step.

The following components require (3) Main landing gear bolts at both ends of
inspection and application of corrosion strut.
preventive compounds at 90 day
intervals. (4) Cargo hook load beam and release lever.

(5) Brake assembly hydraulic fittings.

1-7-20.2.1. Area No. 1 (Cockpit Section).
(6) Floor attachment screws.
a. Remove corrosion preventive compound
(PARA 1-7-20.3) from the following (7) Cargo tiedown rings and floor pans.
components and inspect for corrosion:
(8) Drag beam pivot inside diameter.
(1) Door hinge bearing rod end.
(9) Drag beam exterior surfaces.
(2) Windshield wiper pivot stud.
(10) 70583−702374 Interior of battery
(3) Nose door latch assembly and strut. conditioner/analyzer connector.
(4) Nose door hinge bolts. (11) Interior of battery power connector.

(5) Cockpit door hinge, lever assemblies and (12) Exterior of main gear switch connector.
hardware, jettison assembly.
(13) Exterior of cargo hook connectors.
(6) Parking brake control rod.
(14) 70583−702374 Exterior of battery
(7) Avionics securing hardware. conditioner/analyzer connector.

(8) A v i o n i c s b a y c o n n e c t o r s ( i n t e r n a l (15) Crew chief’s window latch assembly,

components). receiver hardware, and rollers.

1-7-20-2
PARA 1-7-20 TM 1-70-23

(16) Cabin door latch assembly and receiver (5) Exterior of environmental control system
assembly. connectors P3, P4, P7, P456, and P457 (if
applicable).
(17) Unpainted mounting points on jack
points. (6) External electrical connectors over fuel
cell.
b. If corrosion is found on items a. (1) through a.
(5) refer to Corrosion Removal Procedure No. (7) Avionics access door, latch assembly,
1 (PARA 1-7-20.4.1). hinges, and hardware (if applicable).

c. If corrosion is found on items a. (6) and a. (7) b. If corrosion is found on items a. (1) through a.
refer to (PARA 2-6-27). (4) refer to Corrosion Removal Procedure No.
1 (PARA 1-7-20.4.1).
d. If corrosion is found on item a. (8) refer to
(PARA 3-4-1). c. If corrosion is found on items a. (5) and a. (6)
refer to Corrosion Removal Procedure No. 3
e. If corrosion is found on item a. (9) refer to (PARA 1-7-20.4.3).
(PARA 3-3-1).
d. If corrosion is found on item a. (7) refer to
f. If corrosion is found on items a. (10) and a. (PARA 2-6-31).
(11) refer to Corrosion Removal Procedure No.
2 (PARA 1-7-20.4.2). 1-7-20.2.4. Area No. 4 (Tail Cone Section).

g. If corrosion is found on items a. (12) through a. a. Remove corrosion preventive compound

(14) refer to Corrosion Removal Procedure No. (PARA 1-7-20.3) from the following
3 (PARA 1-7-20.4.3). components and inspect for corrosion:

h. If corrosion is found on items a. (15) and a. (1) Pivot bolts at both ends of oleo.
(16) refer to Corrosion Removal Procedure No.
5 (PARA 1-7-20.4.5). (2) Tail landing gear fork retaining ring.

i. If corrosion is found on item a. (17) refer to (3) Anticollision light mounting hardware.
Corrosion Removal Procedure No. 4 (PARA
1-7-20.4.4). (4) Antenna mount screws.

1-7-20.2.3. Area No. 3 (Transition Section). (5) Drive shaft coupling bolts.

(6) Tail wheel lock connector exterior.

a. Remove corrosion preventive compound
(PARA 1-7-20.3) from the following (7) Exterior of all electrical connectors.
components and inspect for corrosion:
(8) Tail rotor drive shaft cover hinges, nut-
(1) Fuel sump door hardware. plates, and quarter-turn fasteners.
(2) Pressure refueling fuel access door hinges (9) Pylon pivot bolts.
and hardware and pneumatic ground start
door hardware. (10) Low points inside tail cone.

(3) Tiedown rings. (11) Tail wheel lock actuator, attaching

hardware, and bellcrank mechanism.
(4) Doppler antenna support hinges and
hardware. (12) Tail wheel axle bushings.

1-7-20-3
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-20

(13) Tail drive shaft spherical washers. (4) Quadrant control rod including redundant
bolts and bushings.
(14) Tail drive shaft flange nut.
(5) Tail rotor pitch beam bushings.
(15) Tail drive shaft tube to flange juncture.
(6) Tail rotor retention plate bolts.
b. If corrosion is found on items a. (1) through a.
(5) refer to Corrosion Removal Procedure No. (7) Tail rotor drive shaft coupling bolts.
1 (PARA 1-7-20.4.1).
(8) Exterior of all connectors.
c. If corrosion is found on items a. (6) and a. (7)
refer to Corrosion Removal Procedure No. 3 (9) Tail pylon drive shaft cover hardware.
(PARA 1-7-20.4.3).
(10) Intermediate gear box housing.
d. If corrosion is found on items a. (8) and a. (9)
refer to Corrosion Removal Procedure No. 6 (11) Tail gear box housing.
(PARA 1-7-20.4.6).
(12) Tail rotor drive shaft flange nuts.
e. If corrosion is found on item a. (10) refer to
Corrosion Removal Procedure No. 7 (PARA (13) Tail rotor drive shaft spherical washers.
1-7-20.4.7).
(14) Tail rotor pitch horn bushings.
f. If corrosion is found on item a. (11) refer to
(PARA 3-4-27). (15) Tail rotor drive shaft to flange juncture.
g. If corrosion is found on item a. (12) replace b. If corrosion is found on items a. (1) through a.
(PARA 3-4-26). (7) refer to Corrosion Removal Procedure No.
1 (PARA 1-7-20.4.1).
h. If corrosion is found on item a. (13) refer to
PARA 6-4-38, PARA 6-4-39, and PARA 6-4-
c. If corrosion is found on item a. (8) refer to Cor-
40.
rosion Removal Procedure No. 3 (PARA 1-7-
i. If corrosion is found on item a. (14) refer to 20.4.3).
(PARA 6-4-43).
d. If corrosion is found on item a. (9) refer to Cor-
j. If corrosion is found on item a. (15) refer to rosion Removal Procedure No. 6 (PARA 1-7-
(PARA 6-4-46). 20.4.6).

1-7-20.2.5. Area No. 5 (Tail Rotor Pylon Sec- e. If corrosion is found on item a. (10) refer to
tion). (PARA 6-4-36).

a. Remove corrosion preventive compound f. If corrosion is found on item a. (11) refer to

(PARA 1-7-20.3) from the following (PARA 6-4-57).
components and inspect for corrosion:
g. If corrosion is found on items a. (12) and a.
(1) Stabilator sensor pushrod and attaching (13) refer to (PARA 6-4-41).
hardware.
h. If corrosion is found on item a. (14) refer to
(2) Stabilator actuator shaft nut and lock- (PARA 5-5-14).
washer.
i. If corrosion is found on item a. (15) refer to
(3) Toggle link on tail rotor quadrant. (PARA 6-4-46).

1-7-20-4
PARA 1-7-20 TM 1-70-23

1-7-20.2.6. Area No. 6 (Main Rotor Pylon d. If corrosion is found on item a. (8) refer to Cor-
Section). rosion Removal Procedure No. 7 (PARA 1-7-
20.4.7).
a. Remove corrosion preventive compound
(PARA 1-7-20.3) from the following e. If corrosion is found on item a. (9) refer to
components and inspect for corrosion: (PARA 5-3-10).

(1) Main rotor pylon sliding cover latch and f. If corrosion is found on item a. (10) refer to
receiver. (PARA 6-4-11).

(2) Main rotor pylon sliding cover tapered g. If corrosion is found on item a. (11) refer to
pins and receivers. (PARA 6-4-50).

(3) Engine cover latch, bolts, washers, nuts, h. If corrosion is found on item a. (12) refer to
tapered lockpins, and receivers. (PARA 6-4-43).

(4) Redundant flight control bolts, bushings. i. If corrosion is found on item a. (13) refer to
(PARA 11-3-16, PARA 11-3-17, PARA 11-3-
(5) If blade deice kit is installed, unpainted 19, PARA 11-3-20, PARA 11-3-21, and PARA
clamps on blade deice. 11-3-22).
(6) Drive shaft coupling bolts. j. If corrosion is found on item a. (14), apply cor-
rosion preventive compound, Item 114, Ap-
(7) Exterior of all electrical connectors.
pendix D, using acid brush, Item 84, Appendix
(8) Interior attachment of fairing above skin D.
at STA 470.0 along stringer inside fairing.
k. If corrosion is found on item a. (15), apply cor-
(9) Bifilar washers and bushings. rosion preventive compound, Item 114, Ap-
pendix D, using acid brush, Item 84, Appendix
(10) Main transmission housing around bolts D.
and studs.
l. If corrosion is found on item a. (16), apply cor-
(11) Tail rotor drive shaft tube to flange rosion preventive compound, Item 114, Ap-
juncture. pendix D, using acid brush, Item 84, Appendix
D.
(12) Tail rotor drive shaft flange nut.
1-7-20.3 Corrosion Preventive Compound
(13) Scratched, worn painted areas on control Buildup Removal.
rods, bellcranks, and tie rod attachment to
gear box. NOTE

(14) Oil cooler flange nut(s). Continued application of corrosion

preventive compound may cause exces-
(15) Boost servo plate alignment pins. sive buildup.

b. If corrosion is found on items a. (1) through a. a. Remove corrosion preventive compound using
(6) refer to Corrosion Removal Procedure No. machinery towel, Item 211, Appendix D,
1 (PARA 1-7-20.4.1). dampened with isopropyl alcohol, Item 72, Ap-
pendix D.
c. If corrosion is found on item a. (7) refer to Cor-
rosion Removal Procedure No. 3 (PARA 1-7- b. Wipe dry with clean machinery towel, Item
20.4.3). 211, Appendix D.

1-7-20-5
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-20

AREA NO. 5

AREA NO. 6

AREA NO. 4

AREA NO. 1 AREA NO. 3

AREA NO. 2
FC2190_1
SA

FIGURE 1-7-20-1. LOCATION OF INSPECTION AREAS

1-7-20.4 Corrosion Removal Procedures. Teflon-lined spherical bearings. Teflon

linings will degrade. Use care when ap-
1-7-20.4.1. Corrosion Removal - plying corrosion preventive compound.
Procedure No. 1.
NOTE
a. Remove surface corrosion using abrasive mat,
Item 14, Appendix D. Remove as much corro-
sion as possible without removing part. Do not Do not spray corrosion preventive
remove any more material than is necessary to compound on components with Teflon-
remove corrosion. Do not remove sealant to lined spherical bearings. Use brush only.
permit cleanup.
d. Using acid brush, Item 84, Appendix D, apply
b. Clean repaired area using isopropyl alcohol, corrosion preventive compound, Item 114, Ap-
Item 72, Appendix D, and acid brush, Item 84, pendix D.
Appendix D. Dry using clean machinery towel,
Item 211, Appendix D. 1-7-20.4.2. Corrosion Removal -
Procedure No. 2.
c. Inspect repaired area. REPLACE ITEM IF,
AFTER REWORK, LESS THAN 80% OF a. If necessary, disconnect electrical connector.
THE CORROSION WAS REMOVED.
b. Remove surface corrosion from electrical con-
CAUTION nector.

c. Inspect repaired area. REPLACE ITEM IF,

Damage to equipment will result if cor- AFTER REWORK, LESS THAN 80% OF
rosion preventive compound contacts THE CORROSION WAS REMOVED.

1-7-20-6
PARA 1-7-20 TM 1-70-23

NOTE Appendix D. Dry using clean machinery towel,

Item 211, Appendix D.
Corrosion preventive compound
deposits a thin, nonconductive film c. Inspect repaired area. REPLACE ITEM IF,
which must be removed from electrical AFTER REWORK, CORROSION IS
connectors and mounting surfaces for DEEPER THAN 0.010-INCH.
proper operation of electrical and avi-
onic components. d. Using acid brush, Item 84, Appendix D, apply
corrosion compound, Item 108, Appendix D.
d. Using acid brush, Item 84, Appendix D, apply
corrosion preventive compound, Item 115, Ap- e. Using acid brush, Item 84, Appendix D, apply
pendix D. corrosion preventive compound, Item 114, Ap-
pendix D.
e. Using machinery towel, Item 211, Appendix D,
dampened with dry-cleaning solvent, Item 124, 1-7-20.4.5. Corrosion Removal -
Appendix D, remove corrosion preventive Procedure No. 5.
compound from electrical contact points and
mounting surfaces. Use small brush to remove a. Remove surface corrosion using abrasive mat,
corrosion preventive compound from inside Item 14, Appendix D. Remove as much corro-
electrical connectors. sion as possible without removing part. Do not
remove any more material than is necessary to
f. If necessary, connect electrical connector. remove corrosion. Do not remove sealant to
permit cleanup.
1-7-20.4.3. Corrosion Removal -
Procedure No. 3. b. Clean repaired area using isopropyl alcohol,
Item 72, Appendix D, and acid brush, Item 84,
a. If necessary, disconnect electrical connector. Appendix D. Dry using clean machinery towel,
Item 211, Appendix D.
b. Remove surface corrosion from electrical con-
nector. c. Using acid brush, Item 84, Appendix D, apply
corrosion preventive compound, Item 114, Ap-
c. Inspect repaired area. REPLACE ITEM IF,
pendix D.
AFTER REWORK, LESS THAN 80% OF
THE CORROSION WAS REMOVED.
1-7-20.4.6. Corrosion Removal -
d. Using acid brush, Item 84, Appendix D, apply Procedure No. 6.
corrosion preventive compound, Item 113, Ap-
a. Remove surface corrosion using abrasive mat,
pendix D.
Item 14, Appendix D. Remove as much corro-
e. If necessary, connect electrical connector. sion as possible without removing part. Do not
remove any more material than is necessary to
1-7-20.4.4. Corrosion Removal - remove corrosion. Do not remove sealant to
Procedure No. 4. permit cleanup.

a. Remove surface corrosion using abrasive mat, b. Clean repaired area using isopropyl alcohol,
Item 14, Appendix D. Remove as much corro- Item 72, Appendix D, and acid brush, Item 84,
sion as possible without removing part. Do not Appendix D. Dry using clean machinery towel,
remove any more material than is necessary to Item 211, Appendix D.
remove corrosion.
c. Inspect repaired area. REPLACE ITEM IF,
b. Clean repaired area using isopropyl alcohol, AFTER REWORK, LESS THAN 80% OF
Item 72, Appendix D, and acid brush, Item 84, THE CORROSION WAS REMOVED.

1-7-20-7
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-20

d. Using acid brush, Item 84, Appendix D, apply Appendix D. Dry using clean machinery towel,
corrosion compound, Item 108, Appendix D. Item 211, Appendix D.

e. Using acid brush, Item 84, Appendix D, apply c. Inspect repaired area. PITS SHALL NOT EX-
corrosion preventive compound, Item 114, Ap- CEED 0.005 INCH DEEP.
pendix D.
d. Treat repaired aluminum surfaces.
1-7-20.4.7. Corrosion Removal -
Procedure No. 7.
e. Using epoxy primer coating kit, Item 135, Ap-
a. Remove surface corrosion. Do not remove any pendix D, touch up repaired area with epoxy
more material than is necessary to remove cor- primer.
rosion.
f. Using acid brush, Item 84, Appendix D, apply
b. Clean repaired area using isopropyl alcohol, corrosion preventive compound, Item 114, Ap-
Item 72, Appendix D, and acid brush, Item 84, pendix D.

1-7-20-8
PARA 1-7-21 TM 1-70-23

1-7-21 EVERY 120 DAYS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE PAGE

1-7-21.1 Inspect Ejector Rack, 1-7-21-1 1-7-21.2 Inspect Rescue Hoist 1-7-21-1
BRU-22A/A Spring Pin

INITIAL SETUP References

Tools • PARA 1-4-16

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit

1-7-21.1 Inspect Ejector Rack, BRU-22A/A. NOTE

Clean ejector rack, BRU-22A/A, and firing lead If replacement spring pin is unavailable,
cable (PARA 1-4-16). it is acceptable to install a new spring
pin, MS171500, until a replacement
1-7-21.2 Inspect Rescue Hoist Spring Pin. spring pin is obtained.

a. Visually inspect rescue hoist spring pin for (1) If equipped with a Lucas Aerospace
signs of corrosion or cracks. NO CORRO- manufactured rescue hoist and hook as-
SION OR CRACKS ALLOWED. Replace sembly, replace spring pin, MS171500,
spring pin with correct spring pin, if corrosion or with spring pin, MS39086-494.
cracks are detected (refer to step b.).
NOTE

WARNING • The replacement spring pin, BL-14792-

2, has been painted orange along its
entire length for ease of identification.
Damage to equipment and/or injury to
personnel may occur if rescue hoist • If replacement spring pin is unavailable,
hook assembly is equipped with spring it is acceptable to install a new spring
pin, MS171500. This spring pin is pin, until a replacement spring pin is ob-
subject to stress corrosion under condi- tained.
tions of severe salt water exposure.
(2) I f e q u i p p e d w i t h a B r e e z e - E a s t e r n
b. Verify part number of spring pin. If part manufactured rescue hoist, replace spring
number is MS171500 or part number is pin, MS171500, with spring pin, BL-
unknown, replace as follows: 14792-2.

1-7-21-1/(1-7-21-2 Blank)
PARA 1-7-22 TM 1-70-23

1-7-22 EVERY 6 MONTHS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE PAGE

1-7-22.1 Main Rotor Blade 1-7-22-1 1-7-22.3 Portable Fire Extinguish- 1-7-22-1
ers
1-7-22.2 Ground Receptacle 1-7-22-1

INITIAL SETUP • PARA 5-3-8

References

• Appendix D

• PARA 2-6-39

1-7-22.1 Main Rotor Blade. Weigh portable fire extinguishers located in cockpit
and cabin. REPLACE FIRE EXTINGUISHER IF
Check main rotor blade spar pressure (PARA 5-3- GROSS WEIGHT HAS DECREASED 4 OUNCES
8). OR MORE FROM GROSS WEIGHT STAMPED
ON DATA RING.
1-7-22.2 Ground Receptacle.
Inspect and test ground receptacle (PARA 2-6-39).

1-7-22.3 Portable Fire Extinguishers.

NOTE
Fire extinguishers are weighed with
cylinder head and horn assembly in-
stalled.

1-7-22-1/(1-7-22-2 Blank)
PARA 1-7-23 TM 1-70-23

1-7-23 EVERY 12 MONTHS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE PAGE

1-7-23.1 Compass Indicators 1-7-23-2 1-7-23.4 Primary Servo Inspection 1-7-23-2

1-7-23.2 Pitot-Static System 1-7-23-2 1-7-23.5 Pivot Bolts Inspection 1-7-23-2

Inspection
1-7-23.6 Engine Cowling Inspec- 1-7-23-4
1-7-23.3 Free-Air Thermometer 1-7-23-2 tion
(FAT) Inspection

INITIAL SETUP • Dry-Cleaning Solvent, Item 124, Appendix D

Tools • Machinery Towel, Item 211, Appendix D

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit References

• Flashlight • Appendix D

• PARA 1-6-15
• Inspection Mirror
• PARA 1-6-16
• Magnifying Glass, 10X
• PARA 2-4-118
• Torque Wrench, 30 - 150 in. lbs
• PARA 2-4-122
• Torque Wrench, 150 - 750 in. lbs
• PARA 2-6-5
• Torque Wrench, 700 - 1600 in. lbs
• PARA 2-6-29
Materials/Parts
• PARA 8-2-1
• Antiseize Compound, Item 74, Appendix D
• PARA 8-4-7
• Cloth, Cleaning, Item 102, Appendix D
• PARA 8-4-30
• Corrosion Preventive Compound, Item 109, Ap- • PARA 11-4-87
pendix D
• PARA 11-4-90 through PARA 11-4-98
• Corrosion Preventive Compound, Item 114, Ap-
pendix D • TM 11-70-23

1-7-23-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-23

1-7-23.1 Compass Indicators. 1-7-23.3 Free-Air Thermometer (FAT)

Inspection.
a. Check gyromagnetic compass indicator for cor-
rect reading on all cardinal headings (TM 11- NOTE
70-23).
Inspect and test free-air thermometer
any time the FAT gage is replaced.
b. Check magnetic standby compass indicator for
correct reading on all cardinal headings (PARA Inspect and test free-air thermometer (FAT) (PARA
8-4-7). 8-4-30).
1-7-23.2 Pitot-Static System Inspection. 1-7-23.4 Primary Servo Inspection.

NOTE a. Turn off all hydraulic and electrical power

(PARA 1-6-15 and PARA 1-6-16).
If aircraft is operated in inclement
weather, drain ports should be checked b. Open main rotor pylon sliding cover.
more frequently.
c. Rotate main rotor head to position blades to al-
low best working conditions.
a. From under cockpit, remove caps from pitot
and static drain ports underneath pilot’s and d. Using clean machinery towel, Item 211, Ap-
copilot’s seats. pendix D, thoroughly clean the output end of
each servo assembly.
b. Drain water from lines. Check drain holes for
blockage. e. With servos installed on the aircraft and using
a flashlight and mirror, visually inspect the bot-
c. Coat caps with antiseize compound, Item 74, tom side of the rod end. Pay particular attention
Appendix D. to the area under the piston nuts and the output
lug area. NO CRACKS ALLOWED. Replace
d. Install caps. TORQUE TO 40 - 60 INCH- servo if damage is discovered (PARA 11-4-87).
POUNDS.
f. Close and latch main rotor pylon sliding cover.
e. Perform an inspection and operational check of 1-7-23.5 Pivot Bolts Inspection.
the pitot-static system to include the altimeter,
vertical velocity indicator, and the airspeed a. Pivot bolts, 70400-08159, listed in Table 1-7-
indicator as applicable (PARA 8-2-1). 23-1, are to be inspected.

Table 1-7-23-1. Pivot Bolt, 70400-08159, Inspection

Bolt Dash Number Quantity Location

-101 8 70400-08155 control rod ends

-102 2 70400-08110 swashplate link

lower pivot

-103 1 70400-08104 walking beam

pivot

1-7-23-2
PARA 1-7-23 TM 1-70-23

Table 1-7-23-1. Pivot Bolt, 70400-08159, Inspection (Cont)

Bolt Dash Number Quantity Location

-104 1 70400-08151 swashplate link

lower pivot

-105 1 70400-08150/08166 lateral

bellcrank pivot

-106 1 70400-08102 aft bellcrank pivot

-107 1 70400-08101 forward bellcrank

pivot (when 70400-08116
bellcrank support is installed)

-108 1 70400-08101 forward bellcrank

pivot (when 70400-08162
bellcrank support is installed)

b. Turn on all hydraulic and electrical power actuated, do not apply corrosion preven-
(PARA 1-6-15 and PARA 1-6-16). tive compound to free the mechanism.
The inner core of the bolt is corroded
c. Raise collective stick up to raise swashplate. and must be rejected.
d. Install three 1-1/2 inch thick wood blocks g. Clean special self-retaining bolt using a clean-
equally spaced between swashplate and main ing cloth, Item 102, Appendix D, moistened
gear box, lower swashplate onto wood blocks with dry-cleaning solvent, Item 124, Appendix
to support swashplate while removing pivot D.
bolt(s).
NOTE

CAUTION Use wrench on bolthead to rotate bolt a

full 360° during inspection.

Damage to swashplate will result if col- (1) Inspect special self-retaining bolt for
lective stick is lowered while wood evidence of corrosion in the area of
blocks are installed. Do not apply down retaining balls, threads, cotter pin hole,
collective with wood blocks installed. retaining pin hole in bolthead, and hole in
threaded end of special self-retaining bolt.
e. Turn off all hydraulic and electrical power
(2) Visually inspect special self-retaining bolt
(PARA 1-6-15 and PARA 1-6-16).
for cracks in area of retaining balls and
f. Remove cotter pin and mating nut. threads.
(3) Replace any special self-retaining bolt
CAUTION with visible corrosion or cracks (PARA
11-4-90, PARA 11-4-91, PARA 11-4-92,
PARA 11-4-93, PARA 11-4-94, PARA
If resistance or binding of the retaining 11-4-95, PARA 11-4-97, and PARA 11-
ball mechanism is observed when pin is 4-98).

1-7-23-3
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-23

h. Release retaining balls by holding retaining pin without disturbing cotter pin, and
in. Apply corrosion preventive compound, Item without restraining bolthead.
114, Appendix D, to special self-retaining bolt
as follows: j. Apply tightening torque (proof load) as
follows:
(1) Work corrosion preventive compound
through one retaining ball hole until (1) TORQUE NUT INSTALLED ON -101
excess is seen at opposite ball hole. Rotate THROUGH -106 BOLTS IN TIGHTEN-
bolt 180° and repeat procedure. ING DIRECTION TO 400 - 420 INCH-
POUNDS.
(2) While working retaining pin, spray corro-
sion preventive compound, Item 114, Ap- (2) TORQUE NUT INSTALLED ON -107
pendix D, into hole in bolthead and hole AND -108 BOLTS IN TIGHTENING
in end of special self-retaining bolt. DIRECTION TO 630 - 650 INCH-
POUNDS.
(3) Wipe excessive corrosion preventive
compound from bolt using cleaning cloth, (3) If bolt rotates, remove special self-
Item 102, Appendix D, prior to installa- retaining bolt, washer(s), nut, and cotter
tion. pin (PARA 11-4-90, PARA 11-4-91,
PARA 11-4-92, PARA 11-4-93, PARA
(4) Apply corrosion preventive compound, 11-4-94, PARA 11-4-95, PARA 11-4-97,
Item 109, Appendix D, to the exterior and PARA 11-4-98).
retaining ball area and threads.
(4) Adjust washer thicknesses or add washers
i. Install nut. Torque nut as follows: and reinstall special self-retaining bolt,
washer(s), nut, and cotter pin (PARA 11-
(1) TORQUE NUT INSTALLED ON -101 4-90, PARA 11-4-91, PARA 11-4-92,
THROUGH -106 BOLTS TO 600 INCH- PARA 11-4-93, PARA 11-4-94, PARA
POUNDS. IF SLOT IN NUT DOES NOT 11-4-95, PARA 11-4-96, PARA 11-4-97,
LINE UP WITH COTTER PIN HOLE, and PARA 11-4-98).
SET TORQUE WRENCH TO 900
INCH-POUNDS AND TIGHTEN NUT k. Apply torque stripe (PARA 2-6-5).
UNTIL SLOT IN NUT AND COTTER
l. If any bolt is removed for suspected cracks, the
PIN HOLE LINE UP. DO NOT EX-
bolt/nut and all applicable information (aircraft
CEED MAXIMUM TORQUE. Install
model, nut installed, bolt dash number, and
cotter pin.
TSN (calendar time) for the bolt) shall be
(2) TORQUE NUT INSTALLED ON -107 submitted to Sikorsky Aircraft Corporation.
AND -108 BOLTS TO 925 INCH-
m. Turn on all hydraulic and electrical power
POUNDS. IF SLOT IN NUT DOES NOT
(PARA 1-6-15 and PARA 1-6-16).
LINE UP WITH COTTER PIN HOLE,
SET TORQUE WRENCH TO 1350 n. Raise collective stick and remove wood blocks
INCH-POUNDS AND TIGHTEN NUT from between swashplate and main gear box.
UNTIL SLOT IN NUT AND COTTER
PIN HOLE LINE UP. DO NOT EX- o. Turn off all hydraulic and electrical power
CEED MAXIMUM TORQUE. Install (PARA 1-6-15 and PARA 1-6-16).
cotter pin.
1-7-23.6 Engine Cowling Inspection.
NOTE
a. Using 10X magnifying glass, inspect fiberglass
If unable to torque bolthead, use a top ply for damage at hinge-rib location on
crowfoot attachment to torque nut, both ends of engine cowling (Figure 1-7-23-1).

1-7-23-4
PARA 1-7-23 TM 1-70-23

b. On engine cowling assemblies, 70302-02141- DAMAGE IS ALLOWED THROUGH

041, -042, -044, -045, -048, and -049, NO FIRST TWO FIBERGLASS LAYERS. NO
DAMAGE ALLOWED. If cracks are found DAMAGE ALLOWED TO THIRD LAYER.
through either of the first two fiberglass layers or If damages does not extend into third layer,
there is evidence of exposed fiber, replace fit- repair cowling (PARA 2-6-29). If damage
tings (PARA 2-4-122) and repair engine cowling extends into third layer, replace cowling (PARA
(PARA 2-6-29). If damage extends into third 2-4-118).
layer, replace cowling (PARA 2-4-118).

c. On engine cowlings assemblies, 70070-30308-

041 thru -046, and 70302-02141-052 and -053,

1-7-23-5
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-23

SUPPORT
FITTING

AREA TO BE
INSPECTED

EFFECTIVITY ENGINE
COWLING
ENGINE COWLING ASSEMBLIES,
70302−02141−041, −042, −044, −045,
−048, AND −049.

SUPPORT
FITTING

AREA TO BE
INSPECTED

ENGINE
COWLING

EFFECTIVITY

ENGINE COWLING ASSEMBLIES,

70070−30308−041 THRU −046, AND
70302−02141−052 AND −053.
FB3751
SA

FIGURE 1-7-23-1 ENGINE COWLING INSPECTION

1-7-23-6
PARA 1-7-24 TM 1-70-23

1-7-24 AFTER DUAL-ENGINE OPERATION WITH GUST LOCK ENGAGED.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-7-24.1 After Dual-Engine Opera- 1-7-24-1

tion with Gust Lock
Engaged

INITIAL SETUP • PARA 6-4-2

Tools
• PARA 6-4-8
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• Fluorescent Penetrant Inspection Kit
References
• MIL-STD-6866
• PARA 1-6-16

1-7-24.1 After Dual-Engine Operation with areas for cracks. If required, replace main
Gust Lock Engaged. transmission tail takeoff flange (PARA 6-4-2)
or gust lock rod and lever (PARA 6-4-8).
a. Turn off all electrical power (PARA 1-6-16).
d. Using fluorescent penetrant inspection kit,
b. Squeeze pin levers together at each hinge on
fluorescent penetrant inspect area on main
oil cooler compartment access door. Remove
module attaching point for gust lock and output
door.
housing (MIL-STD-6866).
c. Inspect tail takeoff flange for broken or
deformed teeth, check pawl and surrounding e. Install oil cooler compartment access door.

1-7-24-1/(1-7-24-2 Blank)
PARA 1-7-25 TM 1-70-23

1-7-25 AFTER EXCEEDING 145 KIAS WITH CABIN DOORS OPENED.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-7-25.1 After Exceeding 145 1-7-25-1

KIAS with Cabin Doors
Opened

INITIAL SETUP
Tools
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit

1-7-25.1 After Exceeding 145 KIAS with a. Check doors and windows for distortion and
Cabin Doors Opened. damage.

NOTE b. Check door tracks, rollers and latching

mechanism for damage.
Do the following before next flight after
exceeding 145 KIAS with cabin doors
open. c. Check door for proper operation.

1-7-25-1/(1-7-25-2 Blank)
PARA 1-7-26 TM 1-70-23

1-7-26 AFTER FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM DISCHARGE (HALON-

TYPE).

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-7-26.1 After Fire Extinguishing 1-7-26-1

System Discharge (Halon-
Type)

INITIAL SETUP • PARA 12-4-4

Tools
• PARA 12-4-6
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• Protection, Eye
References
• PARA 12-2-2
• PARA 12-4-1

1-7-26.1 After Fire Extinguishing System

Discharge (Halon-Type). CAUTION

a. Remove discharged extinguishing agent

container (PARA 12-4-1). Damage to equipment will result if
system is flushed with water. Halon
becomes corrosive when in contact with
b. If extinguishing agent was discharged through
water. Use filtered, dry compressed air
directional valve to No. 1 engine or APU,
when purging system.
remove directional valve (PARA 12-4-6).
c. Purge directional valve using filtered, dry
compressed air. Check flapper for freedom of
WARNING movement.

d. Purge discharge tubes using filtered, dry

Injury to personnel will result if precau- compressed air.
tions are not taken while using e. If necessary, install directional valve (PARA
compressed air. Do not point hose 12-4-6).
towards personnel when blowing
compressed air through hose. Make sure f. Purge engine compartments and APU compart-
all personnel are wearing safety glasses ment where extinguishing agent has been
when compressed air is being used. discharged using filtered, dry compressed air.

1-7-26-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-26

h. Inspect rubber materials and insulations for

WARNING damage. Replace damaged parts.

i. Replace thermal disc (PARA 12-4-4).

Injury to personnel and damage to
equipment will result, unless stresses,
j. Replace discharged extinguishing agent
thermal effects, and other damage, to
container with a fully charged container.
which parts are subjected as a result of a
fire, can be evaluated and determined to
be within design parameters. Any parts k. Install extinguishing agent container (PARA
of the component that may affect safe 12-4-1).
operation shall be assumed to be da-
maged beyond acceptable limits and will l. Perform operational check of fire extinguishing
not be reused on airworthy helicopters. system (PARA 12-2-2).

g. Inspect engine compartments and components

for damage. Replace damaged parts.

1-7-26-2
PARA 1-7-27 TM 1-70-23

1-7-27 AFTER FIRING CHAFF DISPENSER.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-7-27.1 After Firing Chaff 1-7-27-1

Dispenser

INITIAL SETUP References

Tools
• Appendix D
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• PARA 1-4-15
Materials/Parts
• Machinery Towel, Item 211, Appendix D • PARA 12-4-52 through PARA 12-4-55
• Methyl Ethyl Ketone, Item 217, Appendix D

1-7-27.1 After Firing Chaff Dispenser. c. Clean any accumulated chaff from slipring and
brush holder with methyl ethyl ketone, Item
a. Inspect tail rotor deice slipring and brush as- 217, Appendix D, and machinery towel, Item
sembly for accumulation of chaff. 211, Appendix D (PARA 1-4-15).
b. If disassembly of slipring is required to remove
chaff, refer to PARA 12-4-52, PARA 12-4-53,
PARA 12-4-54, and PARA 12-4-55.

1-7-27-1/(1-7-27-2 Blank)
PARA 1-7-28 TM 1-70-23

1-7-28 AFTER FIRING EJECTOR RACK, BRU-22A/A.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-7-28.1 After Firing Ejector Rack, 1-7-28-1

BRU-22A/A

INITIAL SETUP References

Tools
• Appendix D
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• PARA 1-4-16
Materials/Parts
• Corrosion Preventive Compound, Item 114, Ap- • PARA 16-4-36
pendix D

1-7-28.1 After Firing Ejector Rack, BRU- d. Visually inspect piston assembly for straight-
22A/A. ness.

e. Replace breech, gun, or piston assembly as

required.
WARNING
f. Replace missing or broken bearing ring and
pressure rings on piston or breech as required
Breech cannot be removed or installed (PARA 16-4-36).
with stores loaded on ejector rack. If
breech is removed with stores on ejector g. Spray breech, gun, and piston assembly lightly
rack, stores will be released. using corrosion preventive compound, Item
114, Appendix D.
a. Clean breech, gun, and piston assembly
(PARA 1-4-16). NOTE

Make certain breech is fully forward and

b. Visually inspect breech, gun, and piston as- locked. Close hooks and leave latched at
sembly for cracks or breaks (PARA 16-4-36). all times when ejector unit is not in use.

c. Visually inspect breech and piston assembly h. Assemble breech, gun, and piston assembly
for missing or broken rings. (PARA 16-4-36).

1-7-28-1/(1-7-28-2 Blank)
PARA 1-7-29 TM 1-70-23

1-7-29 AFTER ENGINE OUTPUT SHAFT MAINTENANCE.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-7-29.1 After Engine Output Shaft 1-7-29-1

Maintenance

INITIAL SETUP References

Tools • Appendix D
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• PARA 4-4-1
• Powerplant Repairer’s Toolkit
• PARA 4-4-4
• Torque Wrench, 30 - 150 in. lbs

Materials/Parts • PARA 4-4-6

• Sealing Compound, Item 286, Appendix D • TM 1-70-VIB

1-7-29.1 After Engine Output Shaft REPLACE ALL BOLTS OR STUDS

Maintenance. AND ASSEMBLY HARDWARE CON-
NECTING DISC PACK TO INPUT
a. Remove air inlet assembly (PARA 4-4-4). FLANGE (PARA 4-4-6). IF INPUT
MODULE FLANGE, 70351-08206-041
WITH NUTPLATES IS USED, RE-
WARNING PLACE WITH INPUT MODULE
FLANGE, 70351-08206-102, IF AVAIL-
FSCAP ABLE. IF INPUT MODULE FLANGE,
70351-08206-041 IS USED, AFTER
Verification of minimum torque of bolts TORQUE HAS STABILIZED, PLACE
is a critical characteristic. A DROP OF SEALING COMPOUND,
ITEM 286, APPENDIX D, TO
b. Check torque on three bolts or studs connecting
THREADS OF BOLTS ADJACENT TO
flexible coupling to input module flange while
NUTPLATES. MAKE SURE COM-
holding nuts as follows:
POUND SEEPS INTO NUTPLATES.
(1) Initially check bolts in tightening direc- Perform engine output shaft vibration check
tion. If input module flange, 70351- if shaft was disconnected (TM 1-70-VIB).
08206-102, is used, check torque while
holding nuts. TORQUE MUST NOT BE (3) Check bolts or studs in tightening direc-
LESS THAN 90 INCH-POUNDS. tion. If input module flange, 70351-
08206-102, is used, check torque while
(2) IF TORQUE ON ANY ONE BOLT OR holding nut. TORQUE MUST NOT BE
STUD IS BELOW 90 INCH-POUNDS, LESS THAN 130 INCH-POUNDS.

1-7-29-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-29

(4) IF TORQUE ON ANY BOLT OR STUD (1) Initially check nuts in tightening direction
IS BELOW 130 INCH-POUNDS, RE- while holding bolts. TORQUE MUST
TORQUE BOLTS TO 130 - 140 INCH- NOT BE LESS THAN 90 INCH-
POUNDS. Repeat torque check after each POUNDS.
1 to 3 flight hours until torque stabilizes.
(2) IF TORQUE ON ANY ONE NUT IS
(5) If torque does not stabilize after third BELOW 90 INCH-POUNDS, REPLACE
consecutive torque check, replace three ENGINE OUTPUT SHAFT. Perform an
bolts or studs and assembly hardware con- engine output shaft balance check if shaft
necting disc pack to input module flange was disconnected (TM 1-70-VIB).
(PARA 4-4-1). If input module flange,
70351-08206-041 with nutplates is used, (3) Check nuts in tightening direction while
replace with input module flange, 70351- holding bolts. TORQUE MUST NOT BE
08206-102, if available. If input module LESS THAN 130 INCH-POUNDS.
flange, 70351-08206-041 is used, after (4) IF TORQUE ON ANY BOLT OR STUD
torque has stabilized, place a drop of seal- IS BELOW 130 INCH-POUNDS, RE-
ing compound, Item 286, Appendix D, to TORQUE TO 130 - 140 INCH-
threads of bolts adjacent to nutplates. POUNDS. Repeat torque check after each
Make sure compound seeps into nutplates. 1 to 3 flight hours until torque stabilizes.
Balance engine output shaft (TM 1-70-
VIB). (5) If torque does not stabilize after third
consecutive torque check, replace engine
c. Check torque on three nuts securing flexible output shaft assembly. Balance engine
coupling to engine output shaft by torquing output shaft (TM 1-70-VIB).
nuts in tightening direction only while holding
bolts as follows: d. Install air inlet assembly (PARA 4-4-4).

1-7-29-2
PARA 1-7-30 TM 1-70-23

1-7-30 AFTER LAST FLIGHT/BEFORE FIRST FLIGHT OF DAY.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-7-30.1 Aft Avionics Cooling 1-7-30-1

System Filter

INITIAL SETUP
Tools
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit

1-7-30.1 Aft Avionics Cooling System Filter. c. Install filter cap on bottom of aft avionics cool-
ing system filter.
a. Remove cap from bottom of aft avionics cool-
ing system filter.

b. Clean and check filter for condition and

security.

1-7-30-1/(1-7-30-2 Blank)
PARA 1-7-31 TM 1-70-23

1-7-31 AFTER MAIN ROTOR BLADE CONTACT WITH TAIL ROTOR

PYLON OR TAIL CONE.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-7-31.1 After Main Rotor Blade 1-7-31-1

Contact with Tail Rotor
Pylon or Tail Cone

INITIAL SETUP References

Tools • PARA 1-7-50

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• PARA 5-3-11
Materials/Parts
• PARA 5-4-5
• Tags

1-7-31.1 After Main Rotor Blade Contact TAIL PYLON/TAIL CONE". Also, explain the
with Tail Rotor Pylon or Tail Cone. severity of damage to tail cone or tail pylon.

NOTE b. Inspect the hub arm inside diameter (4 places)

for damage caused by spindle retention nut
• The following inspection is required contact. If evidence of contact is found, replace
when any turning main rotor blades hub. Clearly tag hub "DAMAGE OCCURRED
come in contact with tail rotor pylon or DUE TO BLADE STRIKING TAIL PYLON/
tail cone, this includes tail drive shaft TAIL CONE". Also, explain the severity of
and covers, and intermediate gear box damage to tail cone or tail pylon.
and fairing.
c. Inspect main rotor blade(s) paying particular
• Other inspections may apply depending attention to the inboard five foot section. If
on circumstances. damage to blade(s) is less than accept/reject
criteria, repair blade(s) and return to service. If
• Inspect spindle bearings on spindle be- damage is greater than accept/reject criteria
ing replaced to determine if bearing is remove blade(s) and return to an authorized
serviceable. If bearing is serviceable, it overhaul facility. Clearly tag blade(s) "BLADE
may be used on replacement spindle. DAMAGE OCCURRED DUE TO BLADE
STRIKING TAIL PYLON/TAIL CONE".
a. REPLACE ALL SPINDLES REGARDLESS Also, explain the severity of damage to tail
OF THE EXTENT OF DAMAGE TO cone or tail pylon (PARA 5-3-11).
BLADE(S), TAIL PYLON OR TAIL CONE
(PARA 5-4-5). Clearly tag spindles "DAMAGE d. Perform sudden stoppage inspection (PARA
OCCURRED DUE TO BLADE STRIKING 1-7-50).

1-7-31-1/(1-7-31-2 Blank)
PARA 1-7-32 TM 1-70-23

1-7-32 AFTER MAIN ROTOR BLADE CONTACT WITH IR JAMMER, ALQ-

144.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-7-32.1 After Main Rotor Blade 1-7-32-1

Contact with IR Jammer,
ALQ-144

INITIAL SETUP • PARA 5-4-1

Tools • PARA 5-4-5

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• PARA 5-4-31
Materials/Parts

• Tags • PARA 5-5-4

References • TM 11-70-23
• PARA 1-7-50

• PARA 5-3-11

1-7-32.1 After Main Rotor Blade Contact (3) If damage to blades exceeds limits,
with IR Jammer, ALQ-144. perform sudden stoppage inspection
(PARA 1-7-50).
NOTE
b. Inspect droop stop ears for cracks. If cracks are
found, replace spherical bearing (PARA 5-5-4).
The following inspection is required
Clearly tag bearing "DAMAGE OCCURRED
when main rotor blades come in contact
DUE TO EXCESSIVE BLADE FLAPPING."
with IR jammer, ALQ-144, for any
Note on tag what components were hit and
reason other than hard landing.
severity of damage to helicopter parts.
a. Inspect main rotor blades for damage as c. Inspect hub arm inside diameter for damage
follows: caused by spindle retention nut contact. If
evidence of contact is found, replace spindle
(1) Inspect main rotor blades (PARA 5-3-11). and hub (PARA 5-4-5 and PARA 5-4-1).
Clearly tag spindle "DAMAGE OCCURRED
(2) If damage to blades is within limits, repair DUE TO EXCESSIVE BLADE FLAPPING."
blades (PARA 5-4-31), and continue this Note on tag what components were hit and
inspection. severity of damage to helicopter parts.

1-7-32-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-32

d. Remove IR jammer, ALQ-144, and perform

functional check (TM 11-70-23).

1-7-32-2
PARA 1-7-33 TM 1-70-23

1-7-33 AFTER OPERATING TRANSMISSION AT HIGH TEMPERATURE OR

LOW/NO OIL PRESSURE.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-7-33.1 After Operating Transmis- 1-7-33-1

sion at High Temperature
or Low/No Oil Pressure

INITIAL SETUP • PARA 6-4-1

Tools
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
References
• PARA 6-2-2
• PARA 6-3-5

1-7-33.1 After Operating Transmission at more than 1 minute during ground run, re-
High Temperature or Low/No Oil Pressure. place all five main transmission modules
(PARA 6-4-1).
a. Before replacing component(s), troubleshoot
the appropriate indicating system(s) to make
(3) With no oil pressure for less than 30
sure of proper operation (PARA 6-2-2).
seconds in flight, or no oil pressure for
b. Transmission operated: less than 1 minute during ground run,
perform serviceability inspection (PARA
(1) With oil temperature at or above 284°F 6-3-5).
(140°C) for less than 30 seconds, perform
serviceability inspection (PARA 6-3-5). (4) With oil pressure below 20 psi but greater
(2) With no oil pressure for more than 30 than 0 psi, perform serviceability inspec-
seconds in flight, or no oil pressure for tion (PARA 6-3-5).

1-7-33-1/(1-7-33-2 Blank)
PARA 1-7-34 TM 1-70-23

1-7-34 AFTER SINGLE-ENGINE OPERATION ABOVE IDLE WITH GUST

LOCK ENGAGED.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-7-34.1 After Single-Engine 1-7-34-1

Operation Above Idle
with Gust Lock Engaged

INITIAL SETUP • PARA 2-4-113

Tools • PARA 5-3-4

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• PARA 6-4-2
• Fluorescent Penetrant Inspection Kit
• PARA 6-4-8
References
• PARA 6-4-38 through PARA 6-4-42
• MIL-STD-6866

• PARA 1-3-15 • PARA 6-4-50

• PARA 1-6-16 • TM 1-70-VIB

1-7-34.1 After Single-Engine Operation e. Visually inspect oil cooler shaft couplings
Above Idle with Gust Lock Engaged. (PARA 6-4-42).

a. Turn off all electrical power (PARA 1-6-16). f. Perform runout check on oil cooler (PARA
6-4-50).
b. Remove oil cooler compartment access doors
(PARA 2-4-113). g. Visually inspect tail rotor drive shaft (PARA
6-4-38, PARA 6-4-39, PARA 6-4-40 and
c. Inspect tail takeoff flange for broken or PARA 6-4-41).
deformed teeth, check pawl and surrounding
areas for cracks. If required, replace main h. Visually inspect and service main rotor head
transmission tail takeoff flange (PARA 6-4-2) dampers (PARA 1-3-15).
or gust lock rod and lever (PARA 6-4-8).
i. Perform vibration check on oil cooler drive
d. Using fluorescent penetrant inspection kit, shaft and engine output shaft (TM 1-70-VIB).
fluorescent penetrant inspect area on main
module attaching point for gust lock and output j. Inspect main rotor head dampers for leakage
housing (MIL-STD-6866). (PARA 5-3-4).

1-7-34-1/(1-7-34-2 Blank)
PARA 1-7-35 TM 1-70-23

1-7-35 BEFORE LOADING STORES - INSPECT EJECTOR RACK, BRU-

22A/A.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-7-35.1 Before Loading Stores - 1-7-35-1

Inspect Ejector Rack,
BRU-22A/A

INITIAL SETUP References

Tools • PARA 16-4-36

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit

• Protection, Eye

1-7-35.1 Before Loading Stores - Inspect LEVER MUST GO TO LOCKED POSITION

Ejector Rack, BRU-22A/A. (SAFETY STOP LEVER BALL PLUNGER
DROPS INTO SAFETY BUSHING DE-
a. Place ejector unit safety stop lever to unlocked TENT). If safety stop lever does not move into
position. Open aft suspension hook and close the locked position, repair ejector rack (PARA
forward suspension hook. Turn safety stop 16-4-36).
lever toward locked position. SAFETY STOP
LEVER MUST NOT GO TO LOCKED d. Pull forward on manual release lever.
POSITION. If safety stop lever moves into the SUSPENSION HOOKS MUST NOT OPEN.
locked position, repair ejector rack (PARA 16-4- If suspension hooks open, repair ejector rack
36). (PARA 16-4-36).

b. Place safety stop lever to unlocked position. e. Place safety stop lever to unlocked position.
Open forward suspension hook and close aft Pull forward on manual release lever. BOTH
suspension hook. Turn safety stop lever toward SUSPENSION HOOKS SHALL SNAP
locked position. SAFETY STOP LEVER OPEN. If suspension hooks do not open, repair
MUST NOT GO TO LOCKED POSITION. If ejector rack (PARA 16-4-36).
safety stop lever moves into the locked position,
repair ejector rack (PARA 16-4-36). f. Inspect all visible ejector unit wiring for frayed
or burned insulation and broken wires. NONE
c. Place safety stop lever to unlocked position. ALLOWED. If frayed or burned insulation or
Close both suspension hooks. Turn safety stop broken wires are found, repair ejector rack
lever toward locked position. SAFETY STOP (PARA 16-4-36).

1-7-35-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-35

corrosion is found, repair ejector rack (PARA

WARNING 16-4-36).

i. I n s p e c t e j e c t o r u n i t a s s e m b l y f o r d e e p
Injury to personnel will result if precau- scratches, dents, or fractures to housing and
tions are not taken while using swaybraces that may affect structural integrity
compressed air. Do not point hose of the ejector unit. NONE ALLOWED. If deep
towards personnel when blowing scratches, dents, or fractures to housing and
compressed air through hose. Make sure swaybraces are found to affect the structural
all personnel are wearing safety glasses integrity of the unit, repair ejector rack (PARA
when compressed air is being used. 16-4-36).
g. Inspect electrical connectors and receptacles
for dirt, moisture or other contaminants. j. Inspect ejector unit for damage that may affect
Remove dirt, moisture, or contamination using proper latching and unlatching of hooks.
dry, compressed air. NONE ALLOWED. If damage is found that
may affect proper latching and unlatching of
h. Inspect electrical connectors and receptacles hooks, repair ejector rack (PARA 16-4-36).
for broken or damaged pins, thread damage,
cracked or deformed shell, cracked or loose k. Inspect ejector unit for loose swaybrace attach-
potting, and corrosion. NONE ALLOWED. If ing hardware. NONE ALLOWED. If loose
broken or damaged pins, thread damage, cracked swaybrace/attaching hardware is found,
or deformed shell, cracked or loose potting, or TIGHTEN HARDWARE.

1-7-35-2
PARA 1-7-36 TM 1-70-23

1-7-36 BEFORE EVERY FLIGHT - INSPECT HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

COMPONENTS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-7-36.1 Inspect Hydraulic System 1-7-36-1

Components

INITIAL SETUP • PARA 7-4-51

Tools
• PARA 7-4-65
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
References
• PARA 1-3-8
• PARA 7-4-12

1-7-36.1 Inspect Hydraulic System (1) Drain a small amount of hydraulic fluid
Components. from pump module bleed/relief valve.
Check hydraulic fluid for discoloration.
NOTE

The following inspection is for (2) If hydraulic fluid is red in color, add same
helicopters operating in desert environ- amount of fluid removed to hydraulic
ment or for helicopters whose tempera- reservoir (PARA 1-3-8).
ture label shows black to 270°F
(132°C)/Tempilabel shows black to (3) If hydraulic fluid is brownish, drain entire
275°F (135°C). reservoir. Flush fluid from affected
system, and reservice reservoir (PARA
a. Inspect bleed valve drain line on hydraulic 1-3-8 and PARA 7-4-65).
pump. If drain line shows signs of melting, re-
place drain line and hydraulic pump (PARA
7-4-12 and PARA 7-4-51). c. Check hydraulic system components for leak-
age. Replace seals or components as required if
b. Inspect hydraulic fluid as follows: leakage is excessive.

1-7-36-1/(1-7-36-2 Blank)
PARA 1-7-37 TM 1-70-23

1-7-37 ENGINE OUTPUT SHAFT INSPECTION - AFTER DISCONNECT.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-7-37.1 Engine Output Shaft 1-7-37-1

Inspection - After Discon-
nect

INITIAL SETUP • Torque Wrench, 150 - 750 in. lbs

Tools References

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit • PARA 4-4-6

• Hardware Kit, 70000-30100-043 • PARA 6-4-27

• Powerplant Repairer’s Toolkit • TM 1-70-VIB

1-7-37.1 Engine Output Shaft Inspection - NOTE

After Disconnect.
Hardware used to secure disc pack
coupling to input module flange is a bal-
NOTE
anced set. If any individual piece of
hardware is to be replaced, replace all
The following step will be done
hardware with the correct balanced
whenever the engine output shaft is
hardware kit. If kit is not available,
removed or bolts are untorqued.
hardware is to be selected in sets of
t h r e e s o t h a t d iff e r e n c e i n w e i g h t
a. Remove engine output shaft from input module between individual bolts, individual
(PARA 4-4-6). washers, and individual nuts per set is
not over 0.025-gram.
b. Inspect input module input flange (PARA 6-4-
27). d. Inspect engine output shaft installation bolts as
follows:
c. PERFORM TORQUE CHECK ON THE (1) Visually inspect bolts for signs of burrs or
INPUT MODULE INPUT FLANGE evidence of binding. NONE ALLOWED.
RETAINING NUT. TORQUE RETAINING Replace all bolts and washers with correct
NUT IN TIGHTENING DIRECTION. MINI- hardware kit if burrs or evidence of binding
MUM TORQUE IS 646 INCH-POUNDS. IF is found.
TORQUE IS LESS THAN 646 INCH-
POUNDS, TORQUE RETAINING NUT TO (2) Inspect bolts for binding in disc pack
646 - 714 INCH-POUNDS. coupling by inserting bolts into disc pack

1-7-37-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-37

only and checking for freedom of rota- (1) Thread bolt into nut.
tion. BOLTS MUST ROTATE FREELY
WHEN TURNED BY HAND. Replace all (2) If any one of the three bolts can be fully
bolts and washers with correct hardware kit threaded by hand into nut, replace bolts
if bolts do not rotate freely. If replacement and nuts.
bolts still do not rotate freely, replace
engine output shaft assembly (PARA 4-4-
f. Perform engine output shaft vibration level
6).
check prior to next flight (TM 1-70-VIB).
e. If input module input flange, 70351-08206-
102, is installed, inspect engine output shaft g. Record vibration data for each shaft on
hardware as follows: component log card (SA Form 7343-21).

1-7-37-2
PARA 1-7-38 TM 1-70-23

1-7-38 ENGINE WHINE/HIGH FREQUENCY VIBRATION INSPECTION.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-7-38.1 Engine Whine/High Fre- 1-7-38-1

quency Vibration Inspec-
tion

INITIAL SETUP • SEI 671

Tools
• TM 1-2840-248-23
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
References
• PARA 4-4-6
• PARA 6-4-27

1-7-38.1 Engine Whine/High Frequency (2) Make entry on appropriate forms.

Vibration Inspection.
b. If whine does not increase, shutdown opposite
a. If a loud whine or high frequency vibration can engine. Increase throttle of the affected engine
be identified as coming from No. 1 or No. 2 to fly position. Increase and decrease collective
gear box input area, do this: pitch. If the whine changes pitch at the same
time Ng speed changes, perform borescope
(1) Reduce the suspected engine power to inspection (SEI 671 and TM 1-2840-248-23).
ground idle with opposite engine driving
the main rotor at 100% Nr. If whine c. If borescope inspection shows no signs of
increases in volume at about 85% Ng, re- foreign object damage to engine compressor,
place the suspected engine output shaft replace the engine output shaft assembly
assembly (PARA 4-4-6) and input module (PARA 4-4-6) and input module flange (PARA
flange (PARA 6-4-27). 6-4-27).

1-7-38-1/(1-7-38-2 Blank)
PARA 1-7-39 TM 1-70-23

1-7-39 HARD LANDING.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-7-39.1 Hard Landing 1-7-39-2

INITIAL SETUP • PARA 1-3-4

Tools • PARA 2-4-71

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit • PARA 2-4-94

• Dial Indicating Scale, 643J • PARA 2-4-97

• PARA 2-4-131
• Flashlight
• PARA 2-6-12
• Fluorescent Penetrant Inspection Kit
• PARA 2-6-40
• Inspection Mirror
• PARA 5-4-1
• Powerplant Repairer’s Toolkit
• PARA 5-4-2
• Torque Wrench, 30 - 150 in. lbs
• PARA 5-4-5
Materials/Parts
• PARA 5-5-4
• Soap
• PARA 6-4-39
• Tags
• PARA 6-4-50
References • PARA 10-4-18

• MIL-STD-6866 • PARA 16-2-2

• PARA 1-3-2 • PARA 16-4-21

1-7-39-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-39

1-7-39.1 Hard Landing. j. Remove drag beam support fairing (PARA

2-4-94).

WARNING k. Remove screws and washers that secure access

covers to rear section of tail cone at STA
640.0.
Injury to personnel and damage to
equipment will result unless stresses, l. Inspect skins and stringers in the area of the
thermal effects, and other damage to yoke support and shock strut support fittings
which parts are subjected as a result of a for cracks, nicks, dents, corrosion, deforma-
hard landing can be evaluated and tion, and loose, missing, or sheared fasteners.
determined to be within design
parameters, any parts of the component m. Inspect tail cone skins and stringers for cracks,
that may affect safe operation shall be nicks, dents, corrosion, deformation, and loose,
assumed to be damaged beyond accept- missing, or sheared fasteners.
able limits and shall not be reused on
airworthy helicopters. n. Open tail cone drive shaft covers and inspect
drive shaft supports (PARA 2-4-131).
a. Inspect main landing gear attachment,
hardware, and surrounding structure. o. Inspect lower shear deck web and corner long-
erons between yoke support and fold point as
b. Visually inspect the axle, wheel, drag beam as- follows (Figure 1-7-39-1, Sheet 1, Detail A and
sembly, drag beam support fitting, bolts, and Sheet 2, Detail B):
pins for cracks, deformation, or loose
hardware. NOTE

c. Remove drag beam support fairing assemblies Damage could be very fine and difficult
and floor panels (PARA 2-4-94 and PARA 2-4- to see. Inspection areas may have to be
71). cleaned.

d. Inspect skins and stringers in the area of the (1) Clean inspection areas as necessary using
drag beam support fitting for cracks, deforma- soap and water, and/or appropriate de-
tion, and loose or sheared rivets. greaser, if necessary.
e. Inspect tub interior, especially in area of land- NOTE
ing gear, for damage, distortion, foreign matter,
and corrosion. Make sure nested areas are carefully
inspected (longerons, -103 and -105).
f. Repair or replace components that show
evidence of cracks, looseness, or permanent (2) Using flashlight and inspection mirror as
deformation (PARA 2-6-12). necessary, inspect tail landing gear shear
g. Inspect tail landing gear attachment points and deck assembly, 70211-05010-041, for
surrounding structure. cracks, nicks, dents, corrosion, and loose
or missing fasteners. Pay particular atten-
h. Visually inspect the axle, wheel, fork as- tion to web, -101, channels, -107 and
sembly, shock strut, yoke support fitting, shock -108, and longerons, -103, -104, -105, and
strut support fitting, bolts, and pins for cracks, -106. If web, -101, is damaged, repair
deformation, or loose hardware. web. If channels are damaged, repair
channels. If damage is severe in these
i. Remove tail landing gear fairing (PARA 2-4- areas, contact Sikorsky Aircraft Corpora-
97). tion engineering for disposition. Damage

1-7-39-2
PARA 1-7-39 TM 1-70-23

to longerons, -103 through -106, is a seri- 5-5-4). Tag removed elastomeric spherical
ous matter. Contact Sikorsky Aircraft bearing "DAMAGE OCCURRED DUE TO
Corporation engineering for disposition. EXCESSIVE BLADE FLAPPING".

p. Inspect tail cone bulkhead fitting tension joint w. Inspect radar warning system blade antenna,
ears, 70219-05001-107 or -113 as follows AN/APR-39, for damage and distortion.
(Figure 1-7-39-2, Detail A):
x. Inspect fuel system breakaway valves for vis-
NOTE ible yellow line around center of valve. If yel-
low line is visible, replace valve (PARA 10-4-
Damage could be very fine and difficult 18).
to see. Inspection areas may have to be
cleaned. y. If main rotor blades contacted tail cone, pylon,
or IR jammer with or without blade tip dam-
(1) Clean inspection areas as necessary using age, do this:
soap and water, and/or appropriate de-
greaser, if necessary. (1) Replace spindles (PARA 5-4-5). Tag
spindle "POSSIBLE DAMAGE OC-
(2) Using flashlight and inspection mirror as CURRED DUE TO BLADE STRIKE".
necessary, inspect bulkhead fitting tension Also note what blade contacted.
joint ears for cracks, nicks, dents, corro-
sion, and loose or missing fasteners. Dam- (2) Inspect hub for damage (PARA 5-4-2). If
age to bulkhead fitting is a serious matter. hub will be replaced, tag damaged hub
Contact Sikorsky Aircraft Corporation "DAMAGE OCCURRED DUE TO
engineering for disposition. EXCESSIVE BLADE FLAPPING".

q. Fluorescent penetrant inspect tail cone fold fit- z. Check oil cooler drive shaft for preloading, as
ting aft side between the centerlines of upper follows:
shear pins and upper lightening holes (MIL-
STD-6866). (1) Disconnect tail rotor drive shaft section II
near No. 1 viscous damper bearing
r. Repair or replace components that show (PARA 6-4-39).
evidence of cracks, leakage, or deformation
(PARA 2-6-40). (2) Remove bolts attaching rear oil cooler
support.
s. Install access covers on rear section of tail cone
at STA 640.0 with screws and washers. (3) Using dial indicating scale, make sure that
no more than 10 pounds of force is
t. Service main and tail landing gear struts needed to align rear oil cooler support
(PARA 1-3-2 and PARA 1-3-4). boltholes with boltholes in bearing flange.

u. Inspect inside of main rotor hub arm for signs (4) I F P R E L O A D I S M O R E T H A N 1 0

of contact with spindle retention nut. If POUNDS, REPLACE OIL COOLER
evidence of contact is found, replace spindles (PARA 6-4-50).
(PARA 5-4-5) and main rotor hub (PARA 5-4-
1). Tag components "DAMAGE OCCURRED (5) If preload is 10 pounds or less, install oil
DUE TO EXCESSIVE BLADE FLAPPING". cooler rear support to bearing support
with bolts, washers, shims and nuts.
v. Inspect droop stop ears for cracks. If ear is TORQUE NUTS TO 115 - 125 INCH-
cracked, remove spindle (PARA 5-4-5), and re- POUNDS. Make sure shimming
place elastomeric spherical bearing (PARA procedures in PARA 6-4-50 are followed.

1-7-39-3
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-39

−106 LONGERON

−104 LONGERON

−105 LONGERON

−101 WEB
B

−103 LONGERON

FE0663_1
SA

FIGURE 1-7-39-1. TAIL LANDING GEAR SHEAR DECK ASSEMBLY, 70211-05010-041

(SHEET 1 OF 2)

1-7-39-4
PARA 1-7-39 TM 1-70-23

FR −107 CHANNEL
ON
T

−108 CHANNEL

FE0663_2
SA

FIGURE 1-7-39-1. TAIL LANDING GEAR SHEAR DECK ASSEMBLY, 70211-05010-041

(SHEET 2 OF 2)

(6) Reconnect tail rotor drive shaft section II age, deformation, delamination, or
(PARA 6-4-39). any indication of movement.

aa. If ESSS was installed, inspect as follows: (b) I F D A M A G E I S L O C A T E D

WITHIN 6 INCHES OF THE
(1) Remove upper and lower ESSS fairings LUGS, TANK MUST BE
(PARA 16-4-21). RETURNED TO CONTRACTOR.

(2) Inspect upper and lower attachment fit- (c) If no damage is found, perform
tings, surrounding structure, and struts for functional check (PARA 16-2-2). If
damage, deformation, and cracks. tank passes functional check, it may
be returned to service.
(3) If 230 gallon external fuel tanks were in-
stalled, inspect as follows: (4) Install upper and lower ESSS fairings
(PARA 16-4-21).
(a) Inspect external tank suspension
lugs, suspension lug bushings, and ab. Evaluate operational readiness and recommend
the structure around lugs for dam- corrective action.

1-7-39-5
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-39

BULKHEAD FITTING
TENSION JOINT
EARS ( TYPICAL 4 PLACES)
T
ON
FR

FE0662
SA

FIGURE 1-7-39-2. TAIL CONE FOLD BULKHEAD, 70219-05001-044 OR -046

1-7-39-6
PARA 1-7-40 TM 1-70-23

1-7-40 HELICOPTER SUBJECT TO EXCESSIVE SPIN RATE.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-7-40.1 Helicopter Subject to 1-7-40-1

Excessive Spin Rate

INITIAL SETUP • PARA 6-4-54

Tools
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
References
• PARA 5-4-38
• PARA 6-4-52

1-7-40.1 Helicopter Subject to Excessive b. If helicopter has spun more than two complete
Spin Rate. turns, and did so at a rate exceeding normal
hovering turn rate, replace the following at
a. At next 10 hour/14 day inspection, visually next 500 hour periodic inspection:
inspect the following:
(1) Tail rotor blades (PARA 5-4-38).
(1) Pylon/tail cone fold frame at hinge points,
plus longeron attachment adjacent to fit-
tings. (2) Inboard retention plate (PARA 6-4-54).

(2) Tail gear support structure at STA 605.0. (3) Tail gear box (PARA 6-4-52).

1-7-40-1/(1-7-40-2 Blank)
PARA 1-7-41 TM 1-70-23

1-7-41 HELICOPTER SUBJECT TO SALT WATER IMMERSION OR DRY

CHEMICAL AND FOAM-TYPE FIRE EXTINGUISHING AGENTS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE PAGE

1-7-41.1 General 1-7-41-2 1-7-41.5 Foam-Type Fire 1-7-41-7

Extinguishing Agents
1-7-41.2 Salt Water Immersion - 1-7-41-3
Primary Method 1-7-41.6 Main Transmission or 1-7-41-8
Gear Boxes Internal
1-7-41.3 Salt Water Immersion - 1-7-41-5 Surfaces Contaminated
Alternate Method with Salt Water or Fire
Extinguishing Agents
1-7-41.4 Dry Chemical Fire 1-7-41-5
Extinguishing Agents

INITIAL SETUP • Foam Liquid, Fire Extinguishing, Item 141A, Ap-

pendix D
Tools
• Machinery Towel, Item 211, Appendix D
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• Sponge
• Drill
• Tiedown Straps
• Protection, Eye
References
• Static Ground Cable
• Appendix D
• Wet/Dry Vacuum
• PARA 1-5-1
Materials/Parts
• PARA 1-7-26
• Brush, Acid, Item 84, Appendix D
• PARA 2-4-44
• Brush, Bristle
• PARA 2-6-2
• Cleaning Compound, Solvent, Item 100, Appendix
D • PARA 4-4-1

• Corrosion Preventive Compound, Item 114, Ap- • PARA 6-4-1

pendix D
• PARA 6-4-31
• Corrosion Preventive Compound, Item 115, Ap-
pendix D • PARA 6-4-52

• Dry-Cleaning Solvent, Item 124, Appendix D • PARA 15-4-1

1-7-41-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-41

• SEI 671 • TM 1-2840-248-23

1-7-41.1 General. housings, contact Sikorsky ILS. Im-

mediately decontaminate these internal
surfaces (PARA 1-7-41.6), pending
WARNING Sikorsky ILS recommendations.

c. Removal of components other than those listed

Injury to personnel and damage to
below may be accomplished depending upon
equipment will result unless stresses,
severity of exposure to salt water or fire
thermal effects, and other damage to
extinguishing agents. Remove the following
which parts are subjected as a result of a
components to make sure decontamination is
fire can be evaluated and determined to
thorough:
be within design parameters, any parts
of the component that may affect safe
(1) Main transmission (PARA 6-4-1).
operation shall be assumed to be da-
maged beyond acceptable limits and (2) Intermediate gear box (PARA 6-4-31).
shall not be reused on airworthy
helicopters. (3) Tail gear box (PARA 6-4-52).
a. This paragraph describes decontamination
(4) Engines (PARA 4-4-1).
procedures to be followed after incidents
involving exposure to large amounts of salt
(5) APU (PARA 15-4-1).
water or fire extinguishing agents other than
Halon. Refer to PARA 1-7-26 for (6) Pilot’s and copilot’s seats (PARA 2-4-44).
decontamination of areas exposed to Halon-
type fire extinguishing agents. (7) Avionics and electrical equipment.
b. Helicopters exposed to salt water, dry chemical
and foam-type fire extinguishing agents require d. A priority list shall be created to aid in
immediate action to prevent serious corrosion recovery and treatment of salvageable equip-
damage. ment. The priority is recommended as follows:

(1) Main rotor head, main transmission,

CAUTION intermediate gear box, tail gear box.

(2) Engines and accessories, main and tail ro-

Magnesium parts such as main transmis- tor components, hydraulic pumps, genera-
sion and gear box housings are very tors.
susceptible to corrosion attack when
exposed to salt water or fire extinguish- (3) Instruments.
ing agents. Magnesium parts will begin
to corrode very rapidly after contamina- (4) Airframe structure.
tion. Removal of these components is
recommended to make sure (5) Fuel and hydraulic systems (after systems
decontamination is thorough. are drained).
NOTE
(6) Main and tail landing gear.
If salt water or fire extinguishing agents
get inside main transmission or gear box (7) Safety and survival equipment.

1-7-41-2
PARA 1-7-41 TM 1-70-23

(8) Avionic and electrical equipment. present in joints, faying surfaces, etc. Halon
will leave no visible trace. Carbon dioxide will
(9) Rescue equipment. leave no visible trace and does not require
decontamination. After determining which fire
(10) Fixed equipment (seats, etc.). extinguishing agent was used, refer to the ap-
propriate decontamination procedures as listed
(11) Miscellaneous equipment. below:

(1) Dry chemical agents refer to PARA 1-7-

WARNING 41.4.

(2) Foam-type agents refer to PARA 1-7-

Injury to personnel and damage to 41.5.
equipment will result if helicopter is not
grounded properly before starting (3) Halon-type agents refer to PARA 1-7-26.
decontamination procedures. In
instances where fuel cells have ruptured g. Decontaminate engines (SEI 671 and TM
and fuel or fuel vapor are present, make 1-2840-248-23).
sure that fuel spills are cleaned up and
vapors are purged. Make sure that 1-7-41.2 Salt Water Immersion - Primary
helicopter has been certified as fire and Method.
explosion safe by qualified personnel.
NOTE
e. Connect static ground cable to main landing
gear lower stage air valve and ground. If salt water gets inside main transmis-
sion or gear box housings, internal
surfaces must be decontaminated, in ad-
CAUTION dition to performing the following
procedures.

Damage to equipment will result if areas a. If necessary, decontaminate internal surfaces

contaminated with Halon-type fire (PARA 1-7-41.6).
extinguishing agents are flushed with
water. Halon becomes corrosive when b. Open or remove access and inspection panels,
contacted by water. If Halon-type fire doors, floor panels, soundproofing panels, etc.
extinguishing agents were used, refer to Allow salt water to drain off where possible. If
PARA 1-7-26 for decontamination salt water is trapped in undrainable areas inside
procedures. cockpit or cabin tub, do this:

f. Determine which fire extinguishing agent was (1) Drill out fasteners at low points.
used. Traces of foam-type agents may not be
present, however, moist residues often indicate (2) If salt water is still trapped, drill hole in
foam application. Dry chemical agents may be skin at low points.

1-7-41-3
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-41

c. Remove tiedown straps and clamps from wire (2) Electric fans or hand fans.
bundles and cables to make sure flushing is
thorough. (3) Hot air blowers.

NOTE f. Inspect area for evidence of salt. If salt still

remains, do this:
• Electrical switches and circuit breakers
are normally enclosed in a sealed case. (1) M i x a s o l u t i o n o f 1 p a r t c l e a n i n g
Decontamination of switches and circuit compound solvent, Item 100, Appendix D
breakers is not possible. Contaminated (Type I or II), with 9 parts clean, fresh
switches and circuit breakers shall be re- water.
placed.
(2) Apply solution to affected areas and scrub
• Terminal boards, junction boxes, relay with bristle brush and sponge.
panels, and circuit breaker panels not
(3) Rinse thoroughly with clean, fresh water.
normally removed from helicopter shall
Allow to drain.
be decontaminated in their installed
position.

• Disassemble electrical connectors and WARNING

receptacles prior to decontamination.
Injury to personnel will result if precau-
d. Flush all areas thoroughly with clean fresh
tions are not taken while using
water. Components which have been removed
compressed air. Do not point hose
should be immersed in fresh water and then
towards personnel when blowing
thoroughly flushed with clean fresh water. Al-
compressed air through hose. Make sure
low to drain.
all personnel are wearing safety glasses
when compressed air is being used.
e. Dry areas by vacuuming excess water and blot-
ting with machinery towels, Item 211, Ap- (4) Dry areas by vacuuming excess water and
pendix D. Complete drying in a room with blotting with machinery towels, Item 211,
temperature of 130°F (54°C) maximum or in a Appendix D. Complete drying by blowing
low humidity, well ventilated room by one of compressed air, not to exceed 10 psi.
the following methods:
(5) Inspect for evidence of salt. If salt still
remains, repeat scrubbing procedure.
WARNING
NOTE

Injury to personnel will result if precau- Do not apply corrosion preventive

tions are not taken while using compound to electrical connectors or
compressed air. Do not point hose electrical and avionic components.
towards personnel when blowing
compressed air through hose. Make sure g. Apply generous amounts of corrosion preven-
all personnel are wearing safety glasses tive compound, Item 114, Appendix D, to all
when compressed air is being used. areas that cannot be properly drained or contain
recesses which are difficult to reach. Make sure
(1) Compressed air, not to exceed 10 psi. all surfaces are coated.

1-7-41-4
PARA 1-7-41 TM 1-70-23

NOTE or not available, or when time prevents

immediate flushing with water. Primary
Corrosion preventive compound method of decontamination shall be per-
deposits a thin, nonconductive film formed when time permits and/or fresh
which must be removed from electrical water is available.
connectors and mounting surfaces for
proper operation of electrical and avi- a. Open or remove access and inspection panels,
onic components. doors, floor panels, soundproofing panels, etc.
Allow salt water to drain off where possible.
h. Treat electrical and avionic components as
follows: b. Method I - Apply generous amounts of corro-
sion preventive compound, Item 114, Ap-
(1) Apply corrosion preventive compound, pendix D, to all affected areas and components.
Item 115, Appendix D, to electrical con- Make sure all surfaces are coated.
nectors and electrical and avionic
components. c. Method II:
(2) Remove corrosion preventive compound (1) M i x a s o l u t i o n o f 1 p a r t c l e a n i n g
from electrical contact points and mount- compound, Item 100, Appendix D (Type I
ing surfaces using machinery towel, Item or II), with 9 parts clean, fresh water.
211, Appendix D, dampened with dry-
cleaning solvent, Item 124, Appendix D. (2) Apply solution to affected areas and scrub
Use a small brush to remove corrosion with bristle brush and sponge. Scrub until
preventive compound from inside electri- contaminants become intermixed with
cal connectors. cleaning solution.

i. Repair any holes drilled in skin (PARA 2-6-2) (3) Wipe area thoroughly with clean towels.
or reinstall fasteners that were removed to
(4) Apply generous amounts of corrosion
drain salt water.
preventive compound, Item 114, Ap-
j. Replace tiedown straps and clamps to wire p e n d i x D , t o a l l aff e c t e d a r e a s a n d
bundles and cables. components. Make sure all surfaces are
coated.
k. Lubricate affected areas (PARA 1-5-1). If
component has pressure fittings, apply enough d. Lubricate affected areas (PARA 1-5-1). If
lubricant to displace all contaminated lubricant. component has pressure fittings, apply enough
lubricant to displace all contaminated lubricant.
NOTE
e. Close or install access and inspection panels,
To make sure of future inspection, all doors, floor panels, soundproofing panels, etc.
affected areas must be entered in log-
book and noted as corrosion prone. 1-7-41.4 Dry Chemical Fire Extinguishing
l. Enter affected areas in logbook. Agents.

m. Close or install access and inspection panels, NOTE

doors, floor panels, soundproofing panels, etc.
If dry chemical fire extinguishing agents
get inside main transmission or gear box
1-7-41.3 Salt Water Immersion - Alternate
housings, decontaminate internal
Method.
surfaces (PARA 1-7-41.6) in addition to
NOTE the following procedures.

This procedure is to be used only when a. Open or remove access and inspection panels,
fresh water supply is in limited supply doors, floor panels, soundproofing panels, etc.

1-7-41-5
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-41

b. Remove tiedown straps and clamps from wire (2) Electric fans or hand fans.
bundles and cables to make sure powder
residue is completely removed. (3) Hot air blowers.

c. Vacuum powder residue from affected areas. NOTE

Use a soft bristle brush and air pressure not to
exceed 10 psi to dislodge powder from recesses Do not apply corrosion preventive
and close-fitting areas. compound to electrical connectors or
electrical and avionic components.
d. Mix a solution of 1 part solvent, cleaning
compound, Item 100, Appendix D (Type I or h. Apply generous amounts of corrosion preven-
II), with 9 parts clean, fresh water. tive compound, Item 114, Appendix D, to all
areas that cannot be properly drained or contain
NOTE recesses which are difficult to reach. Make sure
all surfaces are coated.
• Terminal boards, junction boxes, relay
panels, and circuit breaker panels not i. Treat electrical and avionic components as
normally removed from helicopter shall follows:
be decontaminated in their installed
position. NOTE
• Disassemble electrical connectors and Corrosion preventive compound
receptacles prior to decontamination. deposits a thin, nonconductive film
which must be removed from electrical
e. Apply solution to affected areas and scrub with connectors and mounting surfaces for
bristle brush and sponge. proper operation of electrical and avi-
onic components.
f. Rinse thoroughly with clean, fresh water. Al-
low to drain.
(1) Using acid brush, Item 84, Appendix D,
g. Dry areas by vacuuming excess water and blot- apply corrosion preventive compound,
ting with machinery towels, Item 211, Ap- Item 115, Appendix D, to electrical con-
pendix D. Complete drying in a room with nectors and electrical and avionic
temperature of 130°F (54°C) maximum or in a components.
low humidity, well ventilated room by one of
the following methods: (2) Using machinery towel, Item 211, Ap-
pendix D, dampened with dry-cleaning
solvent, Item 124, Appendix D, remove
corrosion preventive compound from
WARNING electrical contact points and mounting
surfaces. Use small brush to remove cor-
Injury to personnel will result if precau- rosion preventive compound from inside
tions are not taken while using electrical connectors.
compressed air. Do not point hose
towards personnel when blowing j. Replace tiedown straps and clamps to wire
compressed air through hose. Make sure bundles and cables.
all personnel are wearing safety glasses
when compressed air is being used. k. Lubricate affected areas (PARA 1-5-1). If
component has pressure fittings, apply enough
(1) Compressed air, not to exceed 10 psi. lubricant to displace all contaminated lubricant.

1-7-41-6
PARA 1-7-41 TM 1-70-23

NOTE removed should be immersed in fresh

water and then thoroughly flushed with
To make sure of future inspection, all clean fresh water. Allow to drain.
affected areas must be entered in log-
book and noted as corrosion prone. (2) Mix a solution of 1 pint of foam with 10
gallons of fresh water.
l. Enter affected areas in logbook.
(3) Apply solution to affected areas using
m. Close or install access and inspection panels, spray equipment. Keep areas wet for 3 to
doors, floor panels, soundproofing panels, etc. 5 minutes.
1-7-41.5 Foam-Type Fire Extinguishing (4) Proceed to step e.
Agents.
d. If a mixture of fresh water and fire extinguish-
NOTE ing foam liquid, Item 141A, Appendix D, was
used, do this:
If foam-type fire extinguishing agents
get inside main transmission or gear box (1) Flush all areas thoroughly with clean
housings, decontaminate internal fresh water. Components which have been
surfaces (PARA 1-7-41.6) in addition to removed should be immersed in fresh
the following procedures. water and then thoroughly flushed with
clean fresh water. Allow to drain.
a. Open or remove access and inspection panels,
doors, floor panels, soundproofing panels, etc. (2) Proceed to step e.
b. Remove tiedown straps and clamps from wire e. Mix a solution of 1 part cleaning compound,
bundles and cables to make sure flushing is Item 100, Appendix D (Type I or II), with 9
thorough. parts clean, fresh water.
NOTE f. Apply solution to affected areas and scrub with
• Electrical switches and circuit breakers bristle brush and sponge.
are normally enclosed in a sealed case.
g. Dry areas by vacuuming excess water and blot-
Decontamination of switches and circuit
ting with machinery towels, Item 211, Ap-
breakers is not possible. Contaminated
pendix D. Complete drying in a room with
switches and circuit breakers shall be re-
temperature of 130°F (54°C) maximum or in a
placed.
low humidity, well ventilated room by one of
• Terminal boards, junction boxes, relay the following methods:
panels, and circuit breaker panels not
normally removed from helicopter shall
be decontaminated in their installed WARNING
position.

• Disassemble electrical connectors and Injury to personnel will result if precau-

receptacles prior to decontamination. tions are not taken while using
compressed air. Do not point hose
c. If a mixture of salt water and fire extinguishing towards personnel when blowing
foam liquid, Item 141A, Appendix D, was compressed air through hose. Make sure
used, do this: all personnel are wearing safety glasses
when compressed air is being used.
(1) Flush all areas thoroughly with clean
fresh water. Components which have been (1) Compressed air, not to exceed 10 psi.

1-7-41-7
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-41

(2) Electric fans or hand fans. NOTE

(3) Hot air blowers. To make sure of future inspection, all

affected areas must be entered in log-
NOTE book and noted as corrosion prone.

Do not apply corrosion preventive l. Enter affected areas in logbook.

compound to electrical connectors or m. Close or install access and inspection panels,
electrical and avionic components. doors, floor panels, soundproofing panels, etc.
h. Apply generous amounts of corrosion preven- 1-7-41.6 Main Transmission or Gear Boxes
tive compound, Item 114, Appendix D, to all Internal Surfaces Contaminated with Salt
areas that cannot be properly drained or contain Water or Fire Extinguishing Agents.
recesses which are difficult to reach. Make sure
all surfaces are coated. a. If internal surfaces of main transmission or
gear boxes are contaminated, immediately
NOTE contact Sikorsky ILS. Step b. through step j.
make up an interim decontamination process.
Corrosion preventive compound This interim decontamination process is to be
deposits a thin, nonconductive film used as temporary measure until Sikorsky
which must be removed from electrical Engineering can evaluate extent of damage.
connectors and mounting surfaces for
proper operation of electrical and avi- b. Drain all fluids. Partial disassembly not
onic components. normally performed at field level maintenance
may be done to ensure that all contaminants are
i. Treat electrical and avionic components as drained.
follows:
c. Flush all internal surfaces and passages with
(1) Apply corrosion preventive compound, fresh water.
Item 115, Appendix D, to electrical con-
nectors and electrical and avionic d. Mix a solution of 1 part solvent, cleaning
components. compound, Item 100, Appendix D (Type I or
II), with 9 parts clean, fresh water.
(2) Remove corrosion preventive compound e. Flush all internal surfaces and passages with
from electrical contact points and mount- cleaning solution.
ing surfaces using machinery towel, Item
211, Appendix D, dampened with dry- f. Rinse thoroughly with fresh water. Allow to
cleaning solvent, Item 124, Appendix D. drain.
Use a small brush to remove corrosion
preventive compound from inside electri- g. Fill housing with corrosion preventive
cal connectors. compound, Item 114, Appendix D.

h. Rotate main transmission shaft or gear box

j. Replace tiedown straps and clamps to wire
input shaft five turns.
bundles and cables.
i. Allow corrosion preventive compound to
k. Lubricate affected areas (PARA 1-5-1). If remain in housing for 4 hours.
component has pressure fittings, apply enough
lubricant to displace all contaminated lubricant. j. Drain corrosion preventive compound.

1-7-41-8
PARA 1-7-42 TM 1-70-23

1-7-42 MAIN ROTOR BLADES DROPPED DURING BLADE FOLD.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-7-42.1 Main Rotor Blades 1-7-42-1

Dropped During Blade
Fold

INITIAL SETUP • PARA 11-4-28

Tools • PARA 11-4-42 through PARA 11-4-48

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit • PARA 11-4-50

• PARA 11-4-51 through PARA 11-4-58

References
• PARA 11-4-63 through PARA 11-4-70
• PARA 5-3-1
• PARA 11-4-73 through PARA 11-4-75
• PARA 5-4-18
• PARA 11-4-77
• PARA 5-4-22
• PARA 11-4-80 through PARA 11-4-87
• PARA 11-4-8
• PARA 11-4-90 through PARA 11-4-98
• PARA 11-4-11
• PARA 11-4-100
• PARA 11-4-13
• PARA 11-4-101
• PARA 11-4-14 • PARA 11-4-110
• PARA 11-4-16 • PARA 11-4-112

• PARA 11-4-27 • PARA 11-4-113

1-7-42.1 Main Rotor Blades Dropped During a. Inspect elastomeric bearing (PARA 5-3-1).
Blade Fold.
b. Inspect the following parts for looseness,
NOTE distortion, misalignment, cracks, nicks, bearing
abnormality, and elongated rivets. Special at-
This inspection only pertains if the pitch tention should be given to linkages between
control rods were connected when blade stationary swashplate. Replace damaged parts.
folding was attempted and the blade fell
from the spindle. (1) Pitch control rods (PARA 5-4-18).

1-7-42-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-42

(2) Swashplate (PARA 5-4-22). (16) Pilot’s and copilot’s directional and cyclic
control rods (PARA 11-4-42 and PARA
(3) Pilot’s and copilot’s yaw control pedals 11-4-43).
(PARA 11-4-8).
(17) Pilot’s and copilot’s collective control
(4) Pilot’s and copilot’s yaw control pedal rods (PARA 11-4-44 and PARA 11-4-45).
adjuster (PARA 11-4-11).
(18) Cabin control rods (PARA 11-4-46).
(5) Pilot’s and copilot’s cyclic stick (PARA
11-4-16). (19) Collective, pitch/trim, lateral, and yaw
boost input control rods (PARA 11-4-63,
(6) Pilot’s and copilot’s collective stick PARA 11-4-64, PARA 11-4-65, and
(PARA 11-4-27 and PARA 11-4-28). PARA 11-4-66).

(7) Yaw trim and roll trim servos (PARA 11- (20) Trim servo control rod (PARA 11-4-54).
4-52 and PARA 11-4-53).
(21) Collective, roll trim, and yaw boost servo
(8) Yaw boost servo, pitch/trim assembly, to mixer control rods (PARA 11-4-73,
collective boost assembly, and roll actua- PARA 11-4-75, and PARA 11-4-85).
tor (PARA 11-4-67, PARA 11-4-68,
PARA 11-4-69, and PARA 11-4-70) (22) Pitch/trim to mixer link (PARA 11-4-74).

(9) Mixer (PARA 11-4-77). (23) Mixer to forward, aft, and lateral primary
servo control rods (PARA 11-4-80,
(10) Primary servos (PARA 11-4-87). PARA 11-4-81, and PARA 11-4-82).

(11) Collective, pitch, lateral, and yaw torque (24) Mixer to yaw lever pushrod (PARA 11-4-
shaft and levers (PARA 11-4-55, PARA 83).
11-4-56, PARA 11-4-57, and PARA 11-
(25) Yaw lever to forward quadrant control rod
4-58).
(PARA 11-4-84).
(12) Midsection bellcranks and shaft (PARA
(26) Forward, aft, lateral, and long control rods
11-4-50).
(PARA 11-4-90, PARA 11-4-91, PARA
11-4-92, and PARA 11-4-94).
NOTE
(27) Swashplate links (PARA 11-4-95).
If damage is found in area of yaw lever
adjustable pedal stops, inspect tail rotor (28) Cockpit bellcranks and levers (PARA 11-
servo to tail rotor quadrant pushrod 4-47).
(PARA 11-4-112), tail rotor servo
(PARA 11-4-113), and tail rotor (29) Cabin bellcranks and bellcrank support
quadrant (PARA 11-4-110). (PARA 11-4-48).

(13) Yaw lever and support (PARA 11-4-85). (30) Upper cabin links and levers (PARA 11-
4-51).
(14) Forward quadrant and supports (PARA
11-4-86). (31) Walking beam (PARA 11-4-93).

(15) Pilot’s and copilot’s yaw pedals and (32) Forward, lateral, and aft bellcranks
adjuster control rods (PARA 11-4-13 and (PARA 11-4-96, PARA 11-4-97, and
PARA 11-4-14). PARA 11-4-98).

1-7-42-2
PARA 1-7-42 TM 1-70-23

(33) Forward and aft bellcrank supports

(PARA 11-4-100 and PARA 11-4-101).

1-7-42-3/(1-7-42-4 Blank)
PARA 1-7-43 TM 1-70-23

1-7-43 MAIN ROTOR BLADES SUBJECT TO HIGH WINDS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-7-43.1 Main Rotor Blades 1-7-43-1

Subject to High Winds

INITIAL SETUP • PARA 5-3-11

Tools
• PARA 5-4-2
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• PARA 5-4-5
• Fluorescent Penetrant Inspection Kit
Materials/Parts • PARA 5-4-9
• Tags
• PARA 5-5-4
References
• MIL-STD-6866 • PARA 11-4-4

• PARA 5-3-1

1-7-43.1 Main Rotor Blades Subject to High (4) Inspect elastomeric bearing for rubber
Winds. disbond.
a. If main rotor blades are subjected to winds (5) Inspect droop stop attachment ears for
great enough to break antiflap bracket, do this: cracks. NO CRACKS ALLOWED. If
NOTE crack is found, replace elastomeric bearing
assembly with spindle (PARA 5-4-5). Tag
Refer to PARA 5-4-9 for maintenance bearing "DAMAGE OCCURRED DUE TO
procedures and damage limitations. EXCESSIVE WINDS".

(1) Remove and replace spindle, without elas- (6) Inspect main rotor blades for abnormal
tomeric bearings (PARA 5-4-5), and twists and bends (pay particular attention
return to approved overhaul facility with to inboard 5-foot section of blade).
tag stating "DAMAGE OCCURRED
DUE TO EXCESSIVE WINDS". (7) Coin-tap inboard 5-foot section of blade
(2) Inspect inside of main rotor hub for over spar to check bonding (PARA 5-3-
evidence of contact by spindle nut (PARA 11).
5-4-2).
(8) Visually inspect flight control rods and
(3) Inspect elastomeric bearing assembly end- linkages between main rotor head and
plate for nicks and gouges (PARA 5-5-4). pilot-assist servos (pay particular attention

1-7-43-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-43

to mixer, mixer limiter bearings, and (4) Inspect elastomeric bearing endplate for
cams). nicks and gouges.

(9) Perform main rotor rig check (PARA 11- (5) Inspect elastomeric bearing for rubber
4-4). disbond (PARA 5-3-1).

b. If main rotor blades are subjected to winds (6) Inspect droop stop attachment ears for
great enough to roll over and/or peen antiflap cracks. NO CRACKS ALLOWED. If
stop, but not break antiflap bracket, do this: crack is found, replace elastomeric bearing
assembly with spindle (PARA 5-4-5). Tag
NOTE bearing "DAMAGE OCCURRED DUE TO
EXCESSIVE WINDS".
Refer to PARA 5-4-9 for maintenance
procedures and damage limitations.
(7) Inspect main rotor blades for abnormal
(1) Remove antiflap bracket. twists and bends (pay particular attention
to inboard 5-foot section of blade).
(2) Inspect inside of main rotor hub for
evidence of contact by spindle nut (PARA (8) Coin tap inboard 5-foot section of blade
5-4-2). over spar to check bonding (PARA 5-3-
11).
(3) Using fluorescent penetrant inspection kit,
fluorescent penetrant inspect, Type II, (9) Visually inspect flight control rods and
Method C, antiflap bracket (MIL-STD- linkages between main rotor head and
6866). If antiflap bracket is broken, pilot-assist servos (pay particular attention
remove and replace spindle, without elas- to mixer, mixer limiter bearings, and
tomeric bearing (PARA 5-4-5), and anti- cams).
fl a p b r a c k e t a s s e m b l y . T a g p a r t s
"DAMAGE OCCURRED DUE TO (10) Perform main rotor rig check (PARA 11-
EXCESSIVE WINDS". 4-4).

1-7-43-2
PARA 1-7-44 TM 1-70-23

1-7-44 MAIN ROTOR DROOP STOP POUNDING.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-7-44.1 Main Rotor Droop Stop 1-7-44-1

Pounding

INITIAL SETUP Materials/Parts

Tools • Tag
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit

1-7-44.1 Main Rotor Droop Stop Pounding. remove and scrap spindle and return hub to an
authorized overhaul facility with tag stating
a. If droop stop pounding is experienced, inspect "DAMAGE DUE TO EXCESSIVE SPINDLE
droop stop ears (on elastomeric bearing end FLAPPING".
plate) for cracks. If one or two ears are
cracked, remove and replace elastomeric bear- c. If main rotor blades contact tail cone/pylon,
ing. remove and scrap spindle and return hub to an
authorized overhaul facility with tag stating
b. Inspect inside of hub arm for signs of contact "DAMAGE DUE TO EXCESSIVE BLADE
with spindle retention nut. If contact is found, FLAPPING".

1-7-44-1/(1-7-44-2 Blank)
PARA 1-7-45 TM 1-70-23

1-7-45 OPERATING HELICOPTER IN EROSIVE CONDITIONS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-7-45.1 Erosive Conditions 1-7-45-1

INITIAL SETUP • PARA 1-4-6

Tools
• PARA 1-4-7
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• PARA 5-3-6
References
• PARA 1-4-3
• PARA 1-4-4

1-7-45.1 Erosive Conditions. c. Clean main rotor blade expandable pins

(PARA 1-4-6).
NOTE

Items in this section are minimum d. Clean helicopter exterior (PARA 1-4-3).
requirements for helicopters operating in
erosive environments. Areas to be NOTE
inspected and frequency of inspection
will depend on severity of erosive Wash engines of aircraft operated within
environment. 200 miles of an active volcano, or oper-
a. Clean swashplate guide and spherical bearing ated within 10 miles of salt water after
(PARA 1-4-7). last flight of the day.

b. Inspect swashplate guide and spherical bearing e. Clean engines (PARA 1-4-4).
(PARA 5-3-6).

1-7-45-1/(1-7-45-2 Blank)
PARA 1-7-46 TM 1-70-23

1-7-46 OPERATING HELICOPTER IN HEAVY RAINFALL 70583−702374 .

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-7-46.1 Operating Helicopter in 1-7-46-1

Heavy Rainfall

INITIAL SETUP References

Tools • PARA 9-4-34

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit

1-7-46.1 Operating Helicopter in Heavy b. Inspect battery case for collection of water
Rainfall. (PARA 9-4-34).
NOTE
c. Remove all water that collected in battery case
Perform this inspection after helicopter and battery vent tubes.
has flown in heavy rainfall.
a. Inspect battery vent tubes for collection of
water.

1-7-46-1/(1-7-46-2 Blank)
PARA 1-7-47 TM 1-70-23

1-7-47 POST LIGHTNING STRIKE INSPECTION.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE PAGE

1-7-47.1 Preliminary Inspection 1-7-47-2 1-7-47.8 Intermediate Gear Box, 1-7-47-6

Tail Gear Box, and Tail
1-7-47.2 Main Rotor and Flight 1-7-47-3 Rotor Drive Shaft
Controls
1-7-47.9 Oil Cooler 1-7-47-6
1-7-47.3 Main Transmission and 1-7-47-4
Tail Rotor Drive Shaft 1-7-47.10 Engine 1-7-47-6

1-7-47.4 Tail Rotor System 1-7-47-5 1-7-47.11 APU 1-7-47-7

1-7-47.5 Main Landing Gear 1-7-47-5 1-7-47.12 Electrical/Avionics 1-7-47-7

1-7-47.6 Tail Landing Gear 1-7-47-5 1-7-47.13 Fuel System 1-7-47-7

1-7-47.7 Tail Rotor Pylon 1-7-47-6 1-7-47.14 External Fuel Tank 1-7-47-7

INITIAL SETUP • PARA 3-4-25

Tools • PARA 4-2-1

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit • PARA 4-4-5

Materials/Parts • PARA 4-4-6

• Tags • PARA 5-3-11

References • PARA 5-3-12

• PARA 1-3-2 • PARA 5-4-5

• PARA 1-3-4 • PARA 5-4-13

• PARA 1-6-9 • PARA 5-4-18

• PARA 2-3-14 • PARA 5-4-22

• PARA 2-3-15 • PARA 5-4-27

• PARA 3-4-1 • PARA 5-4-38

• PARA 3-4-7 • PARA 6-4-1

• PARA 3-4-22 • PARA 6-4-25

1-7-47-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-47

• PARA 6-4-31 • PARA 11-4-68 through PARA 11-4-70

• PARA 6-4-38 through PARA 6-4-43 • PARA 11-4-73 through PARA 11-4-75

• PARA 6-4-47 • PARA 11-4-77

• PARA 6-4-50 • PARA 11-4-85

• PARA 11-4-87
• PARA 6-4-52
• PARA 11-4-90 through PARA 11-4-98
• PARA 9-1-1
• PARA 11-4-100
• PARA 10-2-4
• PARA 11-4-101
• PARA 11-4-13
• PARA 15-2-1
• PARA 11-4-14
• PARA 15-2-2
• PARA 11-4-42 through PARA 11-4-45
• PARA 15-4-1
• PARA 11-4-47
• PARA 16-4-72
• PARA 11-4-48 • SEI 671

• PARA 11-4-54 through PARA 11-4-58 • TM 1-2840-248-23

• PARA 11-4-63 through PARA 11-4-65 • TM 11-70-23

1-7-47.1 Preliminary Inspection. a. Inspect visible surfaces of main rotor blades

and main rotor hub assembly including pitch
NOTE horns, spindles, hub, dampers, bifilar, main ro-
tor shaft extension, controls, and swashplate
• Following a known or suspected
assembly for evidence of lightning damage.
lightning strike, the visual and
operational checks listed below must be b. Inspect visible surfaces of tail rotor blades and
done before next flight. tail rotor assembly, including inboard and
• Lightning strike damage can be outboard retention plates, pitch horn, pitch
distinguished from other damage, such change beam and shaft, and control linkages
as physical gouging, denting, or erosion, for evidence of lightning damage.
because it normally appears as a c. Visually inspect helicopter flight controls for
blackened surface, pit, or hole with a evidence of lightning damage. Check for
burned rim. Since lightning is attracted freedom of movement of all flight controls.
to sharp objects, pay close attention to
protrusions, sharp corners, outer d. Visually inspect entire helicopter surface for
surfaces such as main and tail rotor arc burns, burn holes, burn runners, paint
blade tips and trailing edges, pitot heads, discoloration, lost or eroded metal, torn metal,
main and tail landing gear, electrostatic bulged or delaminated skin, pits, or punctures,
discharger, and antennas. no matter how slight.

1-7-47-2
PARA 1-7-47 TM 1-70-23

e. Visually inspect exposed electrical wiring, tion and puncture marks. NONE
including wiring in nose compartment and ALLOWED. Return blade to an authorized
under main rotor pylon fairing. overhaul facility if damage is found.

f. Inspect all electrical, AFCS, and avionic (2) Tip cap, tip cap nickel abrasion strip, tip
components, including antennas for damage. cap attaching screws, and trailing edge of
trim tab for arc burns or discoloration.
g. Visually inspect gravity refueling ports, pres- NONE ALLOWED.
sure refueling port, and fuel cell vent port.
(3) Ends of blade leading edge nickel abra-
h. Visually inspect APU for damage. sion strip or titanium strip for arc burns.
NONE ALLOWED.
i. If no visible damage is found, do a complete
operational check of the electrical, avionics, (4) Remove one expandable pin at a time
and automatic flight controls systems and all from blade and check for discoloration.
aircraft subsystems with electrical controls and/ NONE ALLOWED. Replace expandable
or wiring; e.g. engine fire detection and pin if damage is found. Partially fold blade
extinguishing systems, caution and advisory and check for damage.
warning system, and hydraulic system (TM 11-
70-23). Include measurement of VSWR on all c. Remove spindle assembly of damaged blade
antenna systems and a check of the magnetic and send to an authorized overhaul facility
compass accuracy. (PARA 5-4-5). After removal of spindle as-
sembly, inspect the following:
j. If no damage was found after completing
operational checks, lightning energy level was (1) Check liner on main rotor hub in spindle
very low or was a near miss, then no further attach area for damage and disbonding.
inspection is required. NONE ALLOWED. If damage or dis-
bonding is found, send hub assembly to an
k. If any type of damage was found, refer to authorized overhaul facility.
DAMAGE INSPECTION below. Document
fully all damage found and list all components (2) Check spindle attachment bolts for dam-
needing replacement. age and discoloration. NONE AL-
LOWED. If damage or discoloration is
1-7-47.2 Main Rotor and Flight Controls. found, replace spindle attachment bolts.

a. Tag all components being sent to an authorized (3) Check outboard damper attaching bolt
overhaul facility with "LIGHTNING and upper pitch control rod attaching bolt
STRIKE". for damage or discoloration. NONE AL-
LOWED. Replace bolts if damage is
b. Inspect entire top and bottom length of main found.
rotor blades for the following (PARA 5-3-11):
(4) Disconnect pitch control rod end from
NOTE swashplate (PARA 5-4-18). Inspect upper
and lower pitch control rod end bearings
If minor external damage is found, for arc burns. NO ARC BURNS AL-
major internal damage may have oc- LOWED. If arc burns are found, replace
curred. control rod (PARA 5-4-18).

(1) Entire blade length and trailing edge for (5) Inspect rotating scissors for damage.
arc burns, burn holes, burn runners, arc- NONE ALLOWED. If damage is found,
ing, paint discoloration, voids, delamina- replace scissors (PARA 5-4-27).

1-7-47-3
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-47

(6) Disconnect servo control rods (PARA 11- supports if arc burns are found (PARA 11-
4-90, PARA 11-4-91, and PARA 11-4- 4-100 and PARA 11-4-101).
92). Check swashplate for proper rotation
and cyclic and collective movement. RE- f. After any lightning strike, check the following:
PLACE SWASHPLATE IF ROTATING (1) Check primary servo input and output
OR STATIONARY PARTS ARE DA- linkage bearings for arc burns. Fully
MAGED AND IF PITCH CONTROL extend pistons and check for roughness,
ROD OR DAMPER ATTACHING pitting, or arc burns. Check rubber bel-
BOLTS WERE DAMAGED (PARA 5-4- lows for damage. NO DAMAGE AL-
22). LOWED. Send servo to an authorized
overhaul facility if damage is found (PARA
(7) Inspect entire hub assembly for direct
11-4-87).
lightning attachment.
(2) If burn marks were found on input link-
d. After main rotor blade lightning strike, remove age, check mixer, yaw boost servo output
damper (PARA 5-4-13). Inspect as follows: rod, pitch/trim output rod, collective boost
output rod, roll actuator output rod, yaw
(1) Check damper attaching bolts for arcing boost servo, pitch/trim servo, collective
burns or pitting. NONE ALLOWED. If boost servo, and roll actuator for arc
damage is found, replace bolts. burns. NO ARC BURNS ALLOWED. If
arc burns are found, send servo to an
(2) Inspect bearings for arc burns or pitting. authorized overhaul facility and replace
Fully extend damper control rod and burned components (PARA 11-4-67,
check for arc burns. Check for leaks PARA 11-4-68, PARA 11-4-69, PARA 11-
around indicator and control rods. NO 4-70, PARA 11-4-73, PARA 11-4-74,
DAMAGE OR LEAKS ALLOWED. If PARA 11-4-75, PARA 11-4-77, and PARA
damage or leaks are found, send damper to 11-4-85).
an authorized overhaul facility.
(3) Check yaw boost servo input rod, pitch/
(3) Check damper bracket lugs and bushings trim input rod, collective boost input rod,
for arc burns. NO ARC BURNS AL- roll actuator input rod, and torque shafts
LOWED. If damage is found, send hub as- for arc burns. If arc burns are found,
sembly to an authorized overhaul facility. check upper cabin control rods, control
rods on right and left sides of cabin, all
e. A f t e r b l a d e l i g h t n i n g s t r i k e , c h e c k t h e bellcranks and control rods in cockpit for
following: arc burns. NO ARC BURNS ALLOWED.
If arc burns are found, replace damaged
(1) Check bearings, bushings and attaching components (PARA 11-4-13, PARA 11-4-
bolts on flight control rods, bellcranks, 14, PARA 11-4-42, PARA 11-4-43, PARA
and levers between servo output rods and 11-4-44, PARA 11-4-45, PARA 11-4-46,
swashplate for arc burns. NO ARC PARA 11-4-47, PARA 11-4-48, PARA 11-
BURNS ALLOWED. Replace parts show- 4-51, PARA 11-4-54, PARA 11-4-55,
ing arc burns (PARA 5-4-22, PARA 11-4- PARA 11-4-56, PARA 11-4-57, PARA 11-
90, PARA 11-4-91, PARA 11-4-92, PARA 4-58, PARA 11-4-63, PARA 11-4-64, and
11-4-93, PARA 11-4-94, PARA 11-4-95, PARA 11-4-65).
PARA 11-4-96, PARA 11-4-97, and PARA
11-4-98). 1-7-47.3 Main Transmission and Tail Rotor
Drive Shaft.
(2) Check forward and aft bellcrank support
attaching fittings for arc burns. NO ARC a. Visually inspect main gear box mounting
BURNS ALLOWED. Replace bellcrank points, attaching bolts, and exposed portion of

1-7-47-4
PARA 1-7-47 TM 1-70-23

main rotor shaft for arc burns or leakage. NO (3) Check pitch control rod and retention
DAMAGE ALLOWED. If damage is found, plate attaching bolts for damage. NO
remove main transmission and send to an DAMAGE ALLOWED. Replace damaged
authorized overhaul facility (PARA 6-4-1). bolts.

b. If any main rotor component shows signs of (4) Check inboard retention plate (paying
lightning strike, remove main module and send particular attention to corners) for dam-
to an authorized overhaul facility (PARA 6-4- age. NO DAMAGE ALLOWED. If dam-
1). age is found, send plate to an authorized
overhaul facility.
c. Visually inspect input drive shafts, gimbals,
and support tubes for arc burns or leakage. NO 1-7-47.5 Main Landing Gear.
DAMAGE ALLOWED. If damage is found,
send components to an authorized overhaul facil- a. Check strut lower stage piston, axle, drag
ity (PARA 6-4-25). beam, and attaching parts of main landing gear
for damage. Check landing gear dimension for
1-7-47.4 Tail Rotor System. proper servicing and leaks (PARA 1-3-2).

a. Inspect entire inboard and outboard surfaces of b. If damage was found, remove main landing
tail rotor blades for the following (PARA 5-3- gear drag beam and shock strut (PARA 3-4-1
12): and PARA 3-4-7) and do the following:

(1) Entire blade length for arc burns, burn (1) Check drag beam attaching bolt and pivot
holes, burn runners, paint discoloration, pins for arc burns. NO ARC BURNS AL-
voids, and delaminations. LOWED. Replace if arc burns are found
(PARA 3-4-1).
(2) Blade tip and trailing edge for arc burns,
disbonding, and loose rivets in tip cap. (2) Check ground wire (left side only) and
bonding jumper from fuselage to drag
(3) Leading edge abrasion strip and skin-to- beam for damage. NO DAMAGE AL-
horn joint for arc burns. LOWED. If damaged, replace components
(PARA 3-4-1).
(4) Pull boot from horn and check spar and
pivot bearing for arc burns. (3) Fully extend lower stage shock strut and
check for pitting and roughness on
(5) NO DAMAGE ALLOWED. chrome-plated surface. NONE AL-
LOWED. If pitting or roughness is found,
b. If damage was found, do this:
send shock strut to an authorized overhaul
(1) Remove outboard retention plate and facility.
outboard tail rotor blade (PARA 5-4-38).
Check spar retention plate area for fuzzy 1-7-47.6 Tail Landing Gear.
appearance and/or loose fibers. NO DAM- a. Check tail landing gear for damage, proper
AGE ALLOWED. If damage is found, servicing dimension, and leaks (PARA 1-3-4).
return blade to an authorized overhaul facil-
ity. b. If damage was found, remove tail landing gear
shock strut and yoke (PARA 3-4-22 and PARA
(2) Check pitch control rod end bearings, 3-4-25) and do the following:
pitch change beam clevis ends and inside
taper, and outboard retention plate corners (1) Check yoke and landing gear shock strut
for damage. NO DAMAGE ALLOWED. attaching bolts for arc burns. NO ARC
If damage is found, return components to BURNS ALLOWED. If arc burns are
an authorized overhaul facility. found, replace bolts.

1-7-47-5
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-47

(2) Check inside diameter of bushings in (4) Check hinge fittings on tail cone for arc
yoke for arc burns. NO ARC BURNS AL- burns. NO ARC BURNS ALLOWED.
LOWED. If arc burns are found, replace
bushings. (5) Remove tail rotor and intermediate gear
box fairings. Check tail rotor control
(3) Check bearings in shock strut for arc cables for blown plastic covering. NO
burns. NO ARCING ALLOWED. If arc DAMAGE ALLOWED. If damage is
burns are found, send shock strut to an found, check all sections of cable and re-
authorized overhaul facility. place any damaged section.

(4) Fully extend lower stage shock strut and 1-7-47.8 Intermediate Gear Box, Tail Gear
check for pitting and roughness on Box, and Tail Rotor Drive Shaft.
chrome-plated surface. NONE AL-
a. Visually inspect intermediate and tail gear box
LOWED. If pitting or roughness is found,
mounting points and attaching hardware for arc
send shock strut to an authorized overhaul
burns or leakage (PARA 6-4-52). NO DAM-
facility.
AGE ALLOWED. If damage is found, remove
tail gear box and send to an authorized overhaul
1-7-47.7 Tail Rotor Pylon.
facility. Replace attaching hardware.
a. Check surface of tail rotor pylon, pylon fold b. If no visual damage was found on intermediate
joint, stabilator, and electrostatic dischargers gear box, but any one of the couplings, viscous
for lightning passage. damper bearings, hardware, or shafts adjacent
to gear box are damaged, remove intermediate
b. If damage was found, do the following: gear box (PARA 6-4-31) and send to an
authorized overhaul facility.
(1) Remove stabilator and inspect attaching
bolts, bearings, attachment fittings, actua- c. I n s p e c t t a i l r o t o r d r i v e s h a f t s , fl e x i b l e
tor attaching bolts, and bearings for dam- couplings, and viscous damper bearings for arc
age (PARA 2-3-15). NONE ALLOWED. burns or leakage. NO DAMAGE ALLOWED.
If damage is found, send stabilator to an If damage is found, remove component and send
authorized overhaul facility. Replace at- to an authorized overhaul facility (PARA 6-4-38,
taching hardware. PARA 6-4-39, PARA 6-4-40, PARA 6-4-41,
PARA 6-4-42, PARA 6-4-43).
(2) Check stabilator attachment fittings, bear-
ings, bushings, and stabilator actuator at- d. If no visual damage was found on tail rotor
tachment bearing and fitting on tail pylon gear box, but there was evidence of a lightning
for arc burns. NO ARC BURNS AL- strike on tail rotor, remove tail gear box
LOWED. If damage is found on stabilator (PARA 6-4-52) and servo and send to an
attachment fitting or actuator fitting, send authorized overhaul facility.
stabilator and tail rotor pylon to an
authorized overhaul facility. 1-7-47.9 Oil Cooler.

Visually inspect oil cooler for arc burns or leaking

(3) Fold tail rotor pylon (PARA 1-6-9) and (PARA 6-4-47). NO DAMAGE ALLOWED. If
check fold joint, attaching bolts, surface damage is found, remove oil cooler fan and send to
of joints, shearpins, barrel-nuts, and hinge an authorized overhaul facility (PARA 6-4-50).
fittings on tail rotor pylon for arc burns
(PARA 2-3-14). NO ARC BURNS AL- 1-7-47.10 Engine.
LOWED. If arc burns are found, replace
attaching hardware and send pylon to an a. Visually inspect engine compartment, output
authorized overhaul facility. drive shaft, and engine mounting points for

1-7-47-6
PARA 1-7-47 TM 1-70-23

signs of arc burns. NO ARC BURNS AL- 1-7-47.13 Fuel System.

LOWED. If damage is found, replace damaged
components (PARA 4-4-5 and PARA 4-4-6). a. Visually inspect exposed electrical wiring,
including wiring in nose compartment, and
b. Inspect engines (SEI 671 and TM 1-2840-248- under main rotor pylon, for burns or charring.
23). NONE ALLOWED. Repair or replace damaged
wiring.
c. I f n o v i s u a l d a m a g e i s f o u n d , p e r f o r m
operational check (PARA 4-2-1). b. Visually inspect gravity refueling ports, pres-
sure refuel port, and fuel cell vent port for arc
1-7-47.11 APU. burns. NO ARC BURNS ALLOWED. Replace
any damaged component. During next refueling,
a. Visually inspect APU for damage. NO DAM-
check pressure refuel/defuel high-level shutoff
AGE ALLOWED. If damage is found, remove
valves and vent valve for proper operation
APU (PARA 15-4-1).
(PARA 10-2-4).
b. Send APU to an authorized overhaul facility. If
no damage is found, perform operational check 1-7-47.14 External Fuel Tank.
(PARA 15-2-2 and PARA 15-2-1).
a. Inspect refueling port, air, fuel, and electrical
1-7-47.12 Electrical/Avionics. interfaces for arc burns.

a. Visually inspect electrical (PARA 9-1-1), b. Inspect for any indication of damage to
AFCS, and avionic components (TM 11-70-23) composite structure (PARA 16-4-72).
for damage. NO DAMAGE ALLOWED.
c. IF THE DAMAGE EXCEEDS MAXIMUM
b. Remove and bench check components that are ALLOWABLE TOLERANCES, THE TANK
damaged. Replace all damaged components MUST BE RETURNED TO THE
found during bench test or inspection. CONTRACTOR.

1-7-47-7/(1-7-47-8 Blank)
PARA 1-7-48 TM 1-70-23

1-7-48 HYDRAULIC RESCUE HOIST INSPECTION.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE PAGE

1-7-48.1 Before Each Rescue Hoist 1-7-48-1 1-7-48.3 Hoist Overload 1-7-48-4
Mission

1-7-48.2 After Each Rescue Hoist 1-7-48-3

Mission Use

INITIAL SETUP • Cheesecloth, Item 90, Appendix D

Tools • Corrosion Preventive Compound, Item 114, Ap-

pendix D
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• Lockwire, Item 195, Appendix D
• Chocks
References
• Gloves
• Appendix D
Materials/Parts • PARA 1-6-15
• Alcohol, Isopropyl, Item 72, Appendix D • PARA 1-6-16

• Barrier Material, Item 80, Appendix D • PARA 14-4-4

1-7-48.1 Before Each Rescue Hoist Mission. b. On upper console, set RESCUE HOIST switch
to ALL.
NOTE
CAUTION
• This inspection is only required if rescue
hoist is going to be used during a mis-
sion.
If hoist system is under backup power,
system limit switches will be bypassed.
• Prior to performing this inspection, Check that system will operate in
make sure that helicopter is parked on a normal power before reeling cable.
flat and level surface, tail wheel is
locked, parking brake set, gust lock or c. In cabin, check that cabin RESCUE HOIST
rotor brake engaged, and wheels control box NORMAL POWER light is on. If
chocked. BACKUP CONTROL POWER switch light is
on, open switch guard assembly, and press
a. Connect external hydraulic and electrical switch. BACKUP CONTROL POWER switch
power (PARA 1-6-15 and PARA 1-6-16). light should go off and NORMAL POWER

1-7-48-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-48

light should come on. Close switch guard as- SEPARATION STANDING OUT FROM
sembly and lockwire, Item 195, Appendix D, BODY OF CABLE IS ALLOWED.
switch guard assembly to screws.
g. Inspect cable for kinks, broken wire or shock
load (strong jerk) to cable. NO DAMAGE AL-
LOWED.
WARNING
h. Replace hoist cable if required (PARA 14-4-4).
• To prevent injury to personnel or dam-
age to equipment, rescue hoist cable
CAUTION
must be kept clear of all parts of the
aircraft and free from other external
obstacles. Cable abrasion during hoist Do not run backup control with hoist in
operation can lead to cable failure. If down position. Doing so will result in
c a b le co n t act or snaggi ng occurs, back winding cable on drum.
inspect cable for damage immediately.
NOTE
• Injury to personnel may occur if protec-
tive gloves are not worn when reeling While cable is reeling in, visually
cable in or out. Use protective gloves inspect cable for kinks, separated
when reeling cable in or out. strands beyond specified tolerance, or
broken wires. Any evidence of the listed
damage is cause for cable replacement.
CAUTION
i. Slowly reel hoist cable onto cable drum, while
assistant applies firm drag on cable with gloved
Damage to cable may occur if cable is hand. On Breeze-Eastern hoist (BL27100
kinked when reeling cable in or out. Use series), wipe cable with cheesecloth, Item 90,
care not to kink cable when reeling Appendix D, dampened with isopropyl alcohol,
cable in or out. Item 72, Appendix D. On Lucas Aerospace
hoist (42315 series), wipe cable with
d. Place barrier material, Item 80, Appendix D, cheesecloth, Item 90, Appendix D, dampened
under hoist area to lay cable on during hoist with corrosion preventive compound, Item 114,
operation. Appendix D.
e. In cabin, operate rescue hoist and cargo hook j. Turn off all switches.
pendant, while assistant walks out the first 10
to 20 feet of cable. k. Disconnect external hydraulic and electrical
power (PARA 1-6-15 and PARA 1-6-16).
f. While running gloved hand slowly and very
lightly over cable, inspect cable for separated l. Make sure area is clean and free of foreign
strands. N O M O R E T H A N 0 . 0 0 5 I N C H material.

1-7-48-2
PARA 1-7-48 TM 1-70-23

1-7-48.2 After Each Rescue Hoist Mission must be kept clear of all parts of the
Use. aircraft and free from other external
obstacles. Cable abrasion during hoist
operation can lead to cable failure. If
CAUTION
cable c ontact or snagging o ccurs,
inspect cable for damage immediately.
This inspection is required after each
use of the rescue hoist. The entire length • Injury to personnel may occur if protec-
of cable must be inspected. tive gloves are not worn when reeling
cable in or out. Use protective gloves
NOTE when reeling cable in or out.

Prior to performing this inspection,

make sure that helicopter is parked on a CAUTION
flat and level surface, tail wheel is
locked, parking brake set, gust lock or
rotor brake engaged, and wheels Damage to cable may occur if cable is
chocked. kinked when reeling cable in or out. Use
a. Connect external electrical and hydraulic care not to kink cable when reeling
power (PARA 1-6-15 and PARA 1-6-16). cable in or out.

b. On upper console, set RESCUE HOIST switch d. Place barrier material, Item 80, Appendix D,
to ALL. under hoist area to lay cable on during hoist
operation.
CAUTION
NOTE

If hoist system is under backup power, If hoist was used in salt water condi-
system limit switches will be bypassed. tions, rinse cable with cold, clean fresh
Check that system will operate in water.
normal power before reeling cable.
e. In cabin, operate rescue hoist and cargo hook
c. In cabin, check that cabin RESCUE HOIST pendant, while assistant walks out entire length
control box NORMAL POWER light is on. If of cable.
BACKUP CONTROL POWER switch light is
on, open switch guard assembly, and press f. While running gloved hand slowly and very
switch. BACKUP CONTROL POWER switch lightly over cable, inspect entire length of cable
light should go off and NORMAL POWER for separated strands. NO MORE THAN
light should come on. Close switch guard as- 0.005-INCH SEPARATION STANDING
sembly and lockwire, Item 195, Appendix D, OUT FROM BODY OF CABLE IS AL-
switch guard assembly to screws. LOWED.

g. Inspect cable for kinks, broken wire or shock

WARNING load (strong jerk) to cable. NO DAMAGE AL-
LOWED.
• To prevent injury to personnel or dam-
age to equipment, rescue hoist cable h. Replace hoist cable if required (PARA 14-4-4).

1-7-48-3
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-48

1-7-48.3 Hoist Overload.

CAUTION
a. When rescue hoist weight limits are exceeded,
inspect rescue hoist backup structure and fit-
Do not run backup control with hoist in
tings for cracks or loose attach bolts. Repair or
down position. Doing so will result in
replace components as required.
back winding cable on drum.

NOTE NOTE

While cable is reeling in, visually • The rescue hoist incorporates a slip
inspect cable for kinks, separated clutch designed to slip at not less than
strands beyond specified tolerance, or 1200 pounds but before 1800 pounds. If
broken wires. Any evidence of the listed an overload occurs, it will cause slip-
damage is cause for cable replacement. page of the cable hoist clutch.
i. Slowly reel hoist cable onto cable drum, while
assistant applies firm drag on cable with gloved • If an overload occurs while cable is
hand. On Breeze-Eastern hoist (BL27100 extended to extreme position, the cable
series), wipe cable with cheesecloth, Item 90, will unreel to end of terminal on drum
Appendix D, dampened with isopropyl alcohol, and fall free from winch.
Item 72, Appendix D. On Lucas Aerospace
hoist (42315 series), wipe cable with b. If cable hoist clutch slips due to overload, no
cheesecloth, Item 90, Appendix D, dampened corrective action is required.
with corrosion preventive compound, Item 114,
Appendix D. c. If cable unreels and falls free from rescue hoist,
do this:
j. Turn off all switches.
(1) Inspect cable terminal on drum for obvi-
k. Disconnect external hydraulic and electrical
ous damage.
power (PARA 1-6-15 and PARA 1-6-16).
l. Make sure area is clean and free of foreign (2) Install new cable on rescue hoist drum
material. (PARA 14-4-4).

1-7-48-4
PARA 1-7-49 TM 1-70-23

1-7-49 ROTOR BRAKE INSPECTION.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE PAGE

1-7-49.1 Rotor Brake Slippage on 1-7-49-1 1-7-49.2 Rotor Brake Nut Torque 1-7-49-1
Start-Up Stabilization Check

INITIAL SETUP Materials/Parts

Tools • Alcohol, Isopropyl, Item 72, Appendix D

• Cheesecloth, Item 90, Appendix D

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
References
• Rotor Brake Wrench, 70700-77117-041
• Appendix D
• Torque Reactor, 70700-20688-041
• PARA 1-6-16
• Torque Wrench, 30 - 150 in. lbs
• PARA 6-4-2
• Torque Wrench, 150 - 750 in. lbs • PARA 6-4-38

• Torque Wrench, 700 - 1600 in. lbs • PARA 6-4-70

1-7-49.1 Rotor Brake Slippage on Start-Up. 1-7-49.2 Rotor Brake Nut Torque Stabiliza-
tion Check.
NOTE
NOTE
Use the following procedures when ro-
tor brake is properly broken-in and slip- Every 5 to 15 rotor brake stops, nut
page still occurs during engine start-up. torques must be checked until stabilized.

a. Clean rotor brake disc using cheesecloth, Item a. Turn off all electrical power (PARA 1-6-16).
90, Appendix D, saturated with isopropyl
b. Engage gust lock and release rotor brake.
alcohol, Item 72, Appendix D.
c. Open engine cowlings.
b. If brake still slips after cleaning, check puck
clearance (PARA 6-4-70). d. Open oil cooler compartment access doors.

c. If brake still slips, check that static pressure is e. Remove tail rotor drive shaft section I (PARA
at least 480 psi. 6-4-38).

1-7-49-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-49

f. Remove bolt, washers, and nuts holding shield THAN 912 INCH-POUNDS. IF TORQUE IS
to rotor brake and main transmission. Remove BELOW 912 INCH-POUNDS, RETORQUE
shield (Figure 1-7-49-1). TO 912 - 1008 INCH-POUNDS. Repeat torque
check every 5 to 15 rotor brake stops until torque
NOTE stabilizes.

Check torque in tightening direction j. Check torque on rotor brake disc nut, SS5089-
only. 06. TORQUE MUST NOT BE LESS THAN
385 INCH-POUNDS. IF TORQUE IS
g. Perform torque stabilization check of retaining BELOW 385 INCH-POUNDS, RETORQUE
nut, SS5081-10, every 5 to 15 rotor brake TO 385 - 425 INCH-POUNDS. Repeat torque
stops, until torque stabilizes as follows: check every 5 to 15 rotor brake stops until torque
stabilizes.
(1) Install torque reactor, and check retaining
nut torque. CHECK TORQUE AT 840 k. Inspect rotor brake disc for contamination. If
INCH-POUNDS. If torque is at or below disc is contaminated, clean using cheesecloth,
840 inch-pounds, remove main transmis- Item 90, Appendix D, saturated with isopropyl
sion tail takeoff flange and inspect splines alcohol, Item 72, Appendix D.
and mating surfaces for wear (PARA 6-4-
2). l. Install tail rotor drive shaft section I (PARA
6-4-38).
(2) CHECK TORQUE AT 1344 INCH-
POUNDS. If torque is at 1344 inch-pounds m. Install shield on studs and shim as required us-
or more, no further action is required. ing washers. Install unused washers under nuts.
TORQUE NUTS TO 105 - 115 INCH-
h. Using rotor brake wrench, check torque on ro- POUNDS.
tor brake mounting bracket nuts, SS5086-06.
n. Install shield to upper bracket with bolt, wash-
TORQUE MUST NOT BE LESS THAN 261
ers and nut. TORQUE NUT TO 105 - 115
INCH-POUNDS. IF TORQUE IS BELOW
INCH-POUNDS.
261 INCH-POUNDS, RETORQUE TO 261 -
289 INCH-POUNDS. Repeat torque check o. Make sure area is clean and free of foreign
every 5 to 15 rotor brake stops until torque material.
stabilizes.
p. Close oil cooler compartment access doors.
i. Check torque on rotor brake housing nuts,
SS5086-08. TORQUE MUST NOT BE LESS q. Close engine cowlings.

1-7-49-2
PARA 1-7-49 TM 1-70-23

0.80 IN.

BOLT,
WASHERS,
NUT (TORQUE A
105−115 IN. LBS)

UPPER
BRACKET
(SEE NOTE)
ROTOR
NUT BRAKE
(TORQUE 0.80 IN.
912−1008 IN. LBS)

NUT BOLT, NUT

(TORQUE (TORQUE
261−289 IN. LBS) 385−425 IN. LBS)

NUT, WASHER
(TORQUE
105−115 IN. LBS)

SHIELD

NUT (TORQUE
105−115 IN. LBS)
STUD

A NUT WASHER
NOTE (TORQUE
1283−1418
UPPER BRACKET REMOVED FOR IN. LBS) FB2260A
CLARITY. SA

FIGURE 1-7-49-1. ROTOR BRAKE INSPECTION

1-7-49-3/(1-7-49-4 Blank)
PARA 1-7-50 TM 1-70-23

1-7-50 SUDDEN STOPPAGE.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE PAGE

1-7-50.1 Main Rotor Blades 1-7-50-1 1-7-50.2 Tail Rotor Blades 1-7-50-2

INITIAL SETUP • PARA 5-4-40

Tools • PARA 6-3-15

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit • PARA 6-4-1

Materials/Parts
• PARA 6-4-31
• Tags
• PARA 6-4-38 through PARA 6-4-41
References
• PARA 6-4-50
• PARA 5-3-11
• PARA 6-4-52
• PARA 5-3-13
• PARA 6-4-54
• PARA 5-4-5

• PARA 5-4-31 • SEI 671

• PARA 5-4-38 • TM 1-2840-248-23

1-7-50.1 Main Rotor Blades. c. If damage to blades includes severing blades

inboard of tip cap, remove transmission and ro-
NOTE tor head assembly (PARA 6-4-1) and send to
overhaul facility. Clearly tag all components
The following inspections are required "BLADE DAMAGE OCCURRED WHILE
whenever a blade is damaged by striking ROTOR HEAD IN MOTION". Also explain
an object. what the blades hit, if known, and how badly
helicopter parts were damaged.
a. If damage to blades is less than the accept/
d. If damage to blades is greater than main rotor
reject criteria per PARA 5-3-11, repair blades
blade accept/reject criteria per PARA 5-3-11,
and return to service (PARA 5-4-31).
and includes damage to primary structural
components (cuff, spacer assembly, and spar
b. Inspect droop stop ears for cracks. If ear is assembly), do this:
cracked, replace spindle (PARA 5-4-5). Tag
removed spindle "DAMAGE OCCURRED (1) Remove blades and spindles (PARA 5-4-
DUE TO EXCESSIVE BLADE FLAPPING". 31 and PARA 5-4-5). Clearly tag all

1-7-50-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-50

components "BLADE DAMAGE OC- g. Perform sudden stoppage inspection for

CURRED WHILE ROTOR HEAD IN engines (SEI 671 and TM 1-2840-248-23).
MOTION". Also explain what the blades
hit, if known, and how badly helicopter 1-7-50.2 Tail Rotor Blades.
parts were damaged.
a. If damage to blades is less than tail rotor blade
(2) Inspect elastomeric bearings for damage accept/reject criteria per PARA 5-3-13, do this:
(PARA 5-4-5).
(1) Inspect all four tail gear box mounting
(3) Inspect blade attachment lugs and damper lugs.
lugs on spindle for damage. Crazing of
paint on lugs is evidence of damage. (2) Visually inspect intermediate gear box
mounting, all drive shaftings, flexible
(4) Inspect hub arm inside diameter (4 places) couplings, drive shaft bearings, oil cooler
for damage caused by elastomeric bearing axial fan, and drive shaft supports for
contact. cracks and distortion.

(5) Inspect dampers, control horns, pitch (3) Perform oil cooler spline wear inspection
control rods, and swashplate for damage. (PARA 6-3-15).

(6) Inspect airframe attachment points for (4) Inspect tail rotor blade damage per accept/
deformation and damage. reject criteria (PARA 5-3-13), and repair
as necessary (PARA 5-4-38).
(7) Visually inspect input drive shafts, tail
drive shafts, oil cooler shaft area, all as- b. If damage to blades is greater than tail rotor
sociated flexible couplings, bearings, and blade accept/reject criteria (PARA 5-3-13) and
supports for cracks and distortion. includes damage to spar and/or severing blade
inboard of tip weights, dents or gouges in lead-
(8) Send removed blades and spindles to ing edge over 1/4 inch deep in either polyure-
overhaul an authorized overhaul facility. thane or nickel abrasion strips, or damage to
attachment block, do this:
e. If damage to blades is greater than main rotor
accept/reject criteria per PARA 5-3-11, but (1) Remove the following components:
damage is limited to pocket skin assembly,
trim tab, abrasion strip, and balance block and (a) Tail rotor pitch beam (PARA 5-4-
does not include damage to primary structural 40).
components, remove blades and send to ap-
proved overhaul facility. Clearly tag all (b) Tail rotor pitch control rods (PARA
components "BLADE DAMAGE OC- 5-4-38).
CURRED WHILE ROTOR HEAD IN MO-
TION". Also explain what blades hit, if known, (c) Tail rotor blades (PARA 5-4-38).
and how badly helicopter parts were damaged.
(d) Inboard retention plate (PARA 6-4-
f. If damage to tip cap is greater than tip cap 54).
accept/reject criteria per PARA 5-3-11, remove
tip cap (PARA 5-4-31) and inspect adjacent (e) Tail gear box (PARA 6-4-52).
blade structure (tip block, tip block Rosan
inserts, tip weights, weight studs, tip rib and (f) Intermediate gear box (PARA 6-4-
skin adjacent tip rib) for damage. Disposition 31).
of blade shall be based on repairability of these
components. (g) Oil cooler fan (PARA 6-4-50).

1-7-50-2
PARA 1-7-50 TM 1-70-23

(h) Tail rotor drive shafts (PARA 6-4-38 (1) Inspect all four tail gear box mounting
through PARA 6-4-41). lugs.

(2) Send components, with all attaching (2) Visually inspect intermediate gear box
hardware, to overhaul facility for detail mounting, all drive shafting, flexible
inspection and overhaul. Clearly tag all couplings, drive shaft bearings, oil cooler
components "DAMAGE OCCURRED axial fan, and drive shaft supports for
WHILE TAIL ROTOR IN MOTION". cracks and distortion.
Explain what the blades hit, if known, and
how badly the helicopter parts were da-
(3) Perform oil cooler spline wear inspection
maged.
(PARA 6-3-15).
(3) Visually inspect tail pylon for possible
structural damage such as loose rivets, (4) Remove blades from helicopter and send
cracks, etc. Inspect gear box attachment to overhaul facility. Clearly tag all
points for deformation and other signs of components "DAMAGE OCCURRED
damage. WHILE TAIL ROTOR IN MOTION".
Also explain what blades hit, if known,
c. If damage to blades is greater than tail rotor and how badly helicopter parts were da-
blade accept/reject criteria per PARA 5-3-13, maged.
but is limited to damage to tip weights or tip
block studs, and/or skin and honeycomb in d. Perform sudden stoppage inspection for
Region A, Region B, or Region C, do this: engines (SEI 671 and TM 1-2840-248-23).

1-7-50-3/(1-7-50-4 Blank)
PARA 1-7-51 TM 1-70-23

1-7-51 TAIL ROTOR OUT OF BALANCE - LOSS OF MATERIAL.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-7-51.1 Tail Rotor Out of Balance 1-7-51-1

- Loss of Material

INITIAL SETUP References

Tools • PARA 1-6-9

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit • PARA 6-4-41

• Torque Wrench, 150 - 750 in. lbs • PARA 6-4-52

1-7-51.1 Tail Rotor Out of Balance - Loss of (2) Check tail gear box mounting bolts for
Material. torque (PARA 6-4-52).
NOTE
(3) Visually inspect tail gear box fitting inside
Loss of material may be the result of and outside. Remove drive shaft to get
lightning strike, ballistic damage, or loss through access hole (PARA 6-4-41).
of rotor heater mat/abrasion strip. Carefully examine airframe for cracks.

a. If tail rotor becomes unbalanced causing severe

(4) Inspect both sides of tail cone and pylon
vibration through loss of material or loosening
hinge fittings. Fold pylon to examine
of rotor plug (centering bushing), or inboard
inside surfaces for cracks (PARA 1-6-9).
boot support touches outboard retention plate,
do inspections as follows:
(5) Inspect stringers near barrel-nuts for
(1) Check torque on nuts and studs that hold cracks. NO CRACKS ALLOWED.
both sections of tail gear box together. Do
not loosen nuts before checking torque. (6) Inspect intermediate gear box mounting
TORQUE MUST BE 171 - 189 INCH- fitting for cracks. NO CRACKS AL-
POUNDS. Replace gear box if torque is LOWED.
below minimum (PARA 6-4-52).

1-7-51-1/(1-7-51-2 Blank)
PARA 1-7-52 TM 1-70-23

1-7-52 TRANSMISSION SYSTEM - OVERSPEED.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE PAGE

1-7-52.1 Up to 126% Nr 1-7-52-1 1-7-52.3 Between 137% to 141% 1-7-52-2

Nr
1-7-52.2 Between 127% to 136% 1-7-52-1
Nr 1-7-52.4 Above 141% Nr 1-7-52-2

INITIAL SETUP • PARA 5-4-22

Tools • PARA 5-4-31

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit • PARA 5-4-38

Materials/Parts
• PARA 5-4-41
• Tags
• PARA 6-3-6
References
• PARA 6-3-11
• PARA 1-3-29
• PARA 6-3-17
• PARA 4-4-4
• PARA 6-4-38 through PARA 6-4-41
• PARA 5-3-11

• PARA 5-3-13 • PARA 6-4-50

• PARA 5-4-1 • PARA 7-4-12

1-7-52.1 Up to 126% Nr. around tip rib for above conditions (PARA 5-3-
11).
No special inspection required.
c. Inspect main rotor blade root laminated areas
1-7-52.2 Between 127% to 136% Nr. for cracks, bond separations, delamination of
plies, and crazing of paint at bond interface
a. Inspect main rotor blade tip caps for security,
with blade skin (PARA 5-3-11).
cracks, bond separations, elongation of holes,
erosion, or other damage (PARA 5-3-11).
d. Inspect main rotor blade cuffs and attaching
b. Inspect main rotor blade cover skins for cracks, hardware for signs of movement from attach-
bond separations, crazing of paint, erosion, or ing hardware. Check sealing compound around
other damage. Pay close attention to area boltheads for damage (PARA 5-3-11).

1-7-52-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-52

e. Test main rotor blade pressure indicator d. Inspect engine drive shaft assemblies for loose
(PARA 1-3-29). Check indicator for damage fasteners and for yielding flexible couplings.
and security.
e. Inspect ends of tail drive shaft sections for
f. Inspect main rotor head elastomeric bearings, signs of yielding, indicated by loose lockbolts,
spindle modules, hub, and bifilar for general elongated lockbolt holes, and paint flaking near
condition. or between lockbolts (PARA 6-4-38 through
PARA 6-4-41).
g. Inspect tail rotor blades for signs of cracks,
bond separations, crazing, or skin delamina- f. Inspect flexible couplings for yielding, and for
tions (PARA 5-3-13). distortion of segments (PARA 4-4-4).

h. Inspect tail rotor blade from mid-span to g. Inspect drive shaft tubes for any signs of bend-
control horn for bond separations and delami- ing.
nations of trailing edge skins. Check areas
between control horn and trailing edge skins 1-7-52.4 Above 141% Nr.
for above condition (PARA 5-3-13).
a. Remove main (PARA 5-4-31) and tail rotor
i. Remove tail rotor boots and inspect for security blades (PARA 5-4-38) from helicopter and
of pivot retainer (PARA 5-4-41). Check boot send to overhaul facility. Tag all components,
support for above condition (PARA 5-3-13). explaining reason for removal. Record amount
of Nr overspeed on tags.
j. Inspect engine drive shaft assemblies for loose
fasteners and for yielding flexible couplings. b. Remove main rotor head (PARA 5-4-1),
swashplate (PARA 5-4-22), and tail rotor as-
k. Inspect ends of tail drive shaft sections for
sembly from helicopter and send to overhaul
signs of yielding, indicated by loose lockbolts,
facility.
elongated lockbolt holes, and paint flaking near
or between lockbolts (PARA 6-4-38 through c. Remove all tail drive shafting, Thomas
PARA 6-4-41). couplings, and support bearings from
helicopter and send to overhaul facility (PARA
l. Inspect flexible couplings for yielding, and for
6-4-38 through PARA 6-4-41). Tag all
distortion of segments (PARA 4-4-4).
components, explaining reason for removal.
m. Inspect drive shaft tubes for any signs of bend- Record amount of Nr overspeed on tags.
ing.
d. Remove both engine drive shaft assemblies
1-7-52.3 Between 137% to 141% Nr. from helicopter and send to overhaul facility.

a. Remove main and tail rotor blades from e. Remove oil cooler assembly from helicopter
helicopter and send to overhaul facility and send to overhaul facility (PARA 6-4-50).
whenever rotor speed readings are above Tag components, explaining reason for
136%. Tag all components, explaining reason removal. Record amount of Nr overspeed on
for removal. Record amount of Nr overspeed tag.
on tags.
f. Visually inspect main transmission chip detec-
b. Inspect main rotor head elastomeric bearings, tors and screens for contamination (PARA 6-3-
spindle modules, hub, and bifilar, for general 6).
condition.
g. Visually inspect intermediate and tail gear box
c. Inspect tail rotor blades for evidence of crazing chip detectors and screens for contamination
or delamination of skin (PARA 5-3-13). (PARA 6-3-11 and PARA 6-3-17).

1-7-52-2
PARA 1-7-52 TM 1-70-23

h. Remove both main generators and send to 7-4-12). Tag components explaining reason for
overhaul facility. Tag components explaining removal. Record amount of Nr overspeed on
reason for removal. Record amount of Nr over- tags.
speed on tags.

i. Remove No. 1 and No. 2 hydraulic pump

modules and return to overhaul facility (PARA

1-7-52-3/(1-7-52-4 Blank)
PARA 1-7-53 TM 1-70-23

1-7-53 TRANSMISSION SYSTEM - OVERTEMPERATURE S70−I .

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-7-53.1 Transmission System - 1-7-53-1

Overtemperature

INITIAL SETUP • PARA 6-3-6

Tools
• PARA 6-4-1
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• PARA 6-4-20
• Borescope Kit, 6650-T700-003
Materials/Parts • PARA 6-4-25
• Tags
• PARA 6-4-28
References
• PARA 1-3-12
• PARA 6-3-5

1-7-53.1 Transmission System - Overtem- (1) Inspect oil cooler, lines, and interior of
perature. duct for blockage and debris. Remove any
blockage or debris.
a. MAIN TRANSMISSION OIL TEMPERA-
TURE MUST NOT EXCEED 280°F (140°C), (2) R e p l a c e a l l fi v e m a i n t r a n s m i s s i o n
OR MUST NOT BE BETWEEN 248°F modules (PARA 6-4-1).
(120°C) AND 280°F (140°C) FOR OVER 60
MINUTES. If oil temperature exceeds limits, do c. If main transmission oil temperature was 248° -
this: 280°F (120° - 140°C) for less than 60 minutes
and MAIN XMSN OIL TEMP caution light
did not illuminate, do this:
(1) Inspect oil cooler, lines, and interior of
duct for blockage and debris. Remove any (1) Perform serviceability inspection. Inspect
blockage or debris (Figure 1-7-53-1). all strainers, chip detectors, and oil filter
(PARA 6-3-5, PARA 6-4-1, PARA 6-4-
(2) R e p l a c e a l l fi v e m a i n t r a n s m i s s i o n 25, and PARA 6-4-28).
modules.
(2) Inspect both input and accessory modules
b. If main transmission oil temperature exceeds for evidence of temperature discoloration
248°F (120°C) and main transmission oil tem- or paint blistering. NONE ALLOWED. If
perature caution light is illuminated, do this: discoloration or paint blistering is found,

1-7-53-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-53

SCAVENGED OIL FROM

INPUT MODULE
INSPECT THIS AREA

INSPECT THIS AREA

SCAVENGED
OIL DUMPED
INTO SUMP

POSSIBLE
BLOCKAGE

OIL TO FILTER

REGULATOR VALVE

FN2137
SA

FIGURE 1-7-53-1. TRANSMISSION CORE HOLE INSPECTION

1-7-53-2
PARA 1-7-53 TM 1-70-23

GEAR
GEAR
END
END

SLOT SLOT
FULLY PARTIALLY
BLOCKED BEARING
OPEN SLEEVE

ACCEPTABLE NOT ACCEPTABLE

FN2138
SA

FIGURE 1-7-53-2. TRANSMISSION BEARING SLEEVE INSPECTION

replace that sides input and accessory NOTE

modules (PARA 6-4-25 and PARA 6-4-
28). Bearing sleeve is bronze in color.

(3) Drain main gear box oil (PARA 1-3-12). (8) Check both upper slots to make sure bear-
ing sleeve has not rotated and caused
(4) Remove both input module chip detectors partial blockage. NO BLOCKAGE AL-
and strainer assemblies. Using borescope LOWED. If blockage is found, replace oil
with light source, inspect both strainer pump (PARA 6-4-20).
sleeves for blockage of the core hole oil
passage in the sump housing. If blockage (9) If no cause has been found, replace both
exists, measure amount chip detector input modules.
sleeve overlaps core hole oil passage.
MAXIMUM OVERLAP 0.030 INCH (10) IF OVERTEMP CONTINUES, RE-
(PARA 6-3-6). PLACE MAIN MODULE AND
RETURN TO DEPOT. Clearly tag
(5) Using borescope with light source, inspect
components with removal reason, maxi-
core hole oil passage between input
mum oil temperature reached, and duration
module chip detectors and pumps for
of time at high temperature.
blockage (Figure 1-7-53-2). NO BLOCK-
AGE ALLOWED. If blockage is found,
d. If main transmission oil temperature was 221° -
replace main module (PARA 6-4-1).
248°F (105° - 120°C), do this:
(6) Remove oil pumps (PARA 6-4-20).
(1) Inspect oil cooler, lines and interior of
(7) Check for damaged packings. Replace da- duct for blockage and debris. Remove
maged packings. blockage and debris.

1-7-53-3
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-53

(2) Inspect input module drain tubes for (7) Using borescope with light source, inspect
blockage and debris. Remove blockage core hole oil passage between input
and debris. module chip detectors and pumps for
blockage.NO BLOCKAGE ALLOWED.
(3) Perform serviceability inspection. Inspect If blockage is found, replace main module
all strainers, chip detectors, and oil filter. (PARA 6-4-1).
IF CHIPS ARE BEYOND ACCEPT-
ABLE LIMITS, REPLACE MODULES
(8) Remove oil pumps (PARA 6-4-20).
SHOWING SIGNS OF CHIPS (PARA
6-3-5, PARA 6-4-1, PARA 6-4-25 and
(9) Check for damaged packings. Replace da-
PARA 6-4-28).
maged packings.
(4) Inspect input and accessory modules for
evidence of temperature discoloration or NOTE
paint blistering. NONE ALLOWED. If
discoloration or paint blistering is found, Bearing sleeve is bronze in color.
replace that sides input and accessory
modules (PARA 6-4-25 and PARA 6-4- (10) Check both upper slots to make sure bear-
28). ing sleeve has not rotated and caused
partial blockage (Figure 1-7-53-2). NO
(5) Drain main gear box oil (PARA 1-3-12).
BLOCKAGE ALLOWED. If blockage is
(6) Remove both input module chip detectors found, replace oil pump (PARA 6-4-20).
and strainer assemblies (PARA 6-3-6).
Using borescope with light source, inspect (11) If no cause has been found, replace both
both strainer sleeves for blockage of the input modules.
core hole oil passage in the sump housing.
If blockage exists, measure amount chip (12) IF OVERTEMP CONTINUES, RE-
detector sleeve overlaps core hole oil pas- PLACE MAIN MODULE AND SEND
sage. CHIP DETECTOR SLEEVE TO DEPOT. Clearly tag components with
SHALL NOT OVERLAP CORE HOLE removal reason, maximum oil temperature
OIL PASSAGE BY MORE THAN 0.030 reached, and duration of time at high tem-
INCH. perature.

1-7-53-4
PARA 1-7-54 TM 1-70-23

1-7-54 TRANSMISSION SYSTEM - OVERTEMPERATURE S70−II .

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-7-54.1 Transmission System - 1-7-54-1

Overtemperature

INITIAL SETUP • PARA 6-4-1

Tools
• PARA 6-4-25
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• PARA 6-4-28
References
• PARA 6-2-2
• PARA 6-3-5

1-7-54.1 Transmission System - Overtem- c. If main transmission oil temperature is in

perature. precautionary range 221° - 280°F (105° -
140°C), for less than 60 minutes, do this:
NOTE
(1) Remove oil return tubes from input
Prior to replacing any component, modules and main transmission sump
perform operational check of the oil (PARA 6-4-25).
temperature indicating system.
(2) Inspect tubes for blockage or debris.
a. If required, perform operational check of the NONE ALLOWED. Remove any block-
oil temperature indicating system (PARA 6-2- age or debris.
2).
(3) Inspect oil cooler, lines, and interior of
b. MAIN TRANSMISSION OIL TEMPERA- duct for blockage and debris. Remove any
TURE MUST NOT EXCEED 280°F (140°C), blockage or debris.
OR MUST NOT REMAIN IN PRECAU-
TIONARY RANGE 221° - 280°F (105 - (4) Perform a serviceability inspection.
140°C), FOR LONGER THAN 60 MINUTES. Inspect all strainers, chip detectors, and
If oil temperature exceeds limits, do this: oil filter (PARA 6-3-5, PARA 6-4-1,
PARA 6-4-25, and PARA 6-4-28).
(1) Inspect oil cooler, lines, and interior of
duct for blockage and debris. Remove any (5) Inspect both sides of input and accessory
blockage or debris. modules for evidence of temperature
discoloring or paint blistering. NONE
(2) R e p l a c e a l l fi v e m a i n t r a n s m i s s i o n ALLOWED. If discoloration or blistering
modules (PARA 6-4-1). is found, replace both input and accessory

1-7-54-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-54

modules on that side (PARA 6-4-25 and (7) If overtemp condition persists, replace
PARA 6-4-28). main module (PARA 6-4-1).
(6) If no cause for overtemp can be found, re-
place both input modules (PARA 6-4-25).

1-7-54-2
PARA 1-7-55 TM 1-70-23

1-7-55 TRANSMISSION SYSTEM - OVERTORQUE S70−I .

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE PAGE

1-7-55.1 Between 107% - 127%, 1-7-55-1 1-7-55.3 Between 127% - 144%, 1-7-55-1
More Than 10 Seconds, More Than 10 Seconds,
Both Engines Operating One or Both Engines
Operating
1-7-55.2 Between 121% - 127%, 1-7-55-1
More Than 10 Seconds, 1-7-55.4 Above 144%, One or 1-7-55-2
One Engine Operating Both Engines Operating

INITIAL SETUP • PARA 6-4-1

Tools
• PARA 6-4-25
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• PARA 6-4-28
• Feeler Gage
Materials/Parts • TM 1-70-VIB
• Tags
References
• PARA 4-4-1
• PARA 6-3-5

1-7-55.1 Between 107% - 127%, More Than 1-7-55.3 Between 127% - 144%, More Than
10 Seconds, Both Engines Operating. 10 Seconds, One or Both Engines Operating.

Perform serviceability inspection on main trans- a. Replace main module (PARA 6-4-1).
mission. Inspect all strainers, chip detectors, and oil
filter (PARA 6-3-5, PARA 6-4-1, PARA 6-4-25, b. Visually inspect input shafts and flexible
and PARA 6-4-28). couplings for cracks or buckling (PARA 4-4-
1). USING FEELER GAGE, A GAP OF NO
1-7-55.2 Between 121% - 127%, More Than MORE THAN 0.030 INCH BETWEEN
10 Seconds, One Engine Operating. COUPLING LAMINATIONS IS ACCEPT-
ABLE.
Perform serviceability inspection on main trans-
mission. Inspect all strainers, chip detectors, and oil c. Perform engine output shaft vibration level
filter (PARA 6-3-5, PARA 6-4-1, PARA 6-4-25, check on No. 1 and No. 2 engines (TM 1-70-
and PARA 6-4-28). VIB).

1-7-55-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-55

1-7-55.4 Above 144%, One or Both Engines 6-4-1). Accessory modules do not have to be re-
Operating. placed. Tag components stating reason for removal.
Record amount of overtorque on tag.
Remove main transmission and input shafting from
helicopter and send to overhaul facility (PARA

1-7-55-2
PARA 1-7-56 TM 1-70-23

1-7-56 TRANSMISSION SYSTEM - OVERTORQUE S70−II .

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE PAGE

1-7-56.1 121% to 150%, More 1-7-56-1 1-7-56.3 150%, One or Both 1-7-56-2
Than 10 Seconds, Both Engines Operating
Engines Operating

1-7-56.2 135% to 150%, More 1-7-56-1

Than 10 Seconds, One
Engine Operating

INITIAL SETUP References

Tools
• PARA 6-3-5
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• TM 1-70-VIB
Materials/Parts
• Tags

1-7-56.1 121% to 150%, More Than 10 1-7-56.2 135% to 150%, More Than 10
Seconds, Both Engines Operating. Seconds, One Engine Operating.

a. Perform serviceability check on main transmis- a. Perform serviceability check on main transmis-
sion whenever transient torque readings are sion whenever transient torque readings are
between 121% to 150% for more than 10 between 135% to 150% for more than 10
seconds (PARA 6-3-5). seconds (PARA 6-3-5).

b. Visually inspect input shafts and flexible b. Visually inspect input shafts and flexible
couplings for cracks or buckling whenever couplings for cracks or buckling whenever
transient torque readings are between 121% to transient torque readings are between 135% to
150% for more than 10 seconds. A GAP OF 150% for more than 10 seconds. A GAP OF
NO MORE THAN 0.030-INCH BETWEEN NO MORE THAN 0.030 INCH BETWEEN
COUPLING LAMINATIONS IS ACCEPT- COUPLING LAMINATIONS IS ACCEPT-
ABLE. ABLE.

c. Perform engine output shaft vibration level c. Perform engine output shaft vibration level
check on No. 1 and No. 2 engines (TM 1-70- check on No. 1 and No. 2 engines (TM 1-70-
VIB). VIB).

1-7-56-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-56

1-7-56.3 150%, One or Both Engines authorized overhaul facility whenever transient
Operating. torque readings go above 150% regardless of time.
Accessory modules do not have to be replaced. Tag
Remove main module, input modules, and engine components stating reason for removal. Record
output shafts from helicopter and send to an amount of overtorque on tag.

1-7-56-2
PARA 1-7-57 TM 1-70-23

1-7-57 AFTER TAIL ROTOR BLADE REMOVAL.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-7-57.1 Tail Rotor Boot Support 1-7-57-1

Inspection

INITIAL SETUP References

Tools • PARA 5-4-38

• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit

1-7-57.1 Tail Rotor Boot Support Inspec- Perform tail rotor boot support inspection
tion. (PARA 5-4-38).

NOTE

This inspection must be performed

whenever the tail rotor blades are
removed from aircraft.

1-7-57-1/(1-7-57-2 Blank)
PARA 1-7-58 TM 1-70-23

1-7-58 ELECTRIC RESCUE HOIST INSPECTIONS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-7-58.1 Before Each Mission Use 1-7-58-2

1-7-58.2 Inspection and 1-7-58-3

Maintenance

INITIAL SETUP References

Tools
• Appendix D
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
Materials/Parts
• Cloth, Cleaning, Item 102, Appendix D
• Container, 55-Gallon

1-7-58-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-58

1-7-58.1 Before Each Mission Use. cable payout on a clean ground without
interference and proceed with the following:
1-7-58.1.1. Preflight Check.
NOTE
NOTE
Make sure cable is wrapping smoothly
• This inspection is only required if rescue and evenly without birdcages or gaps.
hoist is going to be used during a mis-
sion. (1) Allow cable to reel out at full speed.
• Preflight check requires ac power ap- (2) Midway of total payout, operate pilot
plied. control in lower direction. Cable speed
a. Place HOIST POWER switch to ON position. shall reduce to approximately 200 ft/min.
Verify override function by rotating
pendant thumbwheel in both directions
with no change.
WARNING
(3) Set pilot control switch to off.
• Injury to personnel and damage to
equipment will occur if work gloves are (4) Hoist shall decelerate then stop.
not used whenever handling rescue hoist
cable with broken cable strands. Care (5) Operate pendant in lower direction.
should be taken not to damage cable by
(6) Cable shall reduce speed to approximately
kinking when handling on ground.
33 ft/min at 10 6 2 ft.
• Electronic controller contains internal
circuitry that monitors status of "up (7) Cable stops with 4 6 1/2 wraps on drum.
slow" limit switches. The "up slow"
(8) Verify cable payout display reads 290 6
limit switch, when actuated, slows
5 and full-out lamp indicators illuminate.
retracting cable speed to 50 ft per
minute fixed. This limit switch is actu-
(9) Perform load cable inspection (PARA
ated when retracting cable is 10 6 2 ft
1-7-58.2).
from fully reeled in position. If
Electronic Controller detects a "full in" (10) Repeat above procedure in hoisting direc-
switch actuation with no "up slow" tion.
actuation the electronic controller
inhibits hoist operation. This feature is (11) R e p e a t p i l o t c o n t r o l f u n c t i o n s a s
needed because of the high speed described in step 2 to verify override
capabilities of hoist and will prevent function in hoisting mode.
possibility of breaking cable. It is
important that ground testing full in (12) Be sure that cable reduces speed and stops
limit switch be done after "up slow" at full in position.
switch is actuated. In the event that "up
stop" switch is actuated manually with (13) Check cable payout displays, both should
no "up slow" actuation the system can read 000 +2/-0 and full-in lamp indicators
be reset by turning master hoist switch illuminate.
"OFF", and then "ON". This will reset
system. c. Visually check for oil leaks.

b. Using rescue hoist pendant, rotate thumbwheel d. Visually check wiring and electrical connectors
downward to maximum position and hold. Let for damage.

1-7-58-2
PARA 1-7-58 TM 1-70-23

e. Check hook assembly for freeness of swivel

and latch. If hook was exposed to salt water or WARNING
if swivel does not operate freely, disassemble
and clean hook assembly.
It is important that there is no retarding
f. Check crushable bumper. load on the cable while reeling out. If
the action of the tension roller is
1-7-58.1.2. Flightline Cable Handling retarded, the cable will immediately
Techniques. loosen on the drum and foul.

a. The following ground procedures are vital in (2) Reeling Out:

achieving reliable rescue hoist operation: The rescue hoist unit incorporates a ten-
sion roller system, the purpose of which is
to make sure that there is always tension
on the cable. During reeling out, the
WARNING peripheral speed of the tension roller is
slightly higher than that of the drum so
the cable is always under tension between
Do not wind load cable from hoist drum
the roller and the drum. The load is in the
onto a take-up reel. This can induce
order of seventeen pounds. When reeling
twist into the load cable and cause mis-
out, the cable may be allowed to coil on
wrapping when winding back onto the
the ground. It may also be coiled in a
drum.
drum, however, caution must be exercised
while reeling in to avoid kinks.
(1) Reeling In:
It is important that cable is reeled in under 1-7-58.2 Inspection and Maintenance.
a reasonably heavy, even pull so that it
does not wrap loosely on the drum. A a. In order to be effective, cable inspection must
drag load must be applied using a gloved be performed on a regularly scheduled basis.
hand or clean heavy cloth on the cable to Cable used for personnel lifting should be
achieve tight, even layers on the drum. inspected carefully and frequently and rigid
Reeling in should be accomplished at a standards of acceptance and rejection require-
slow speed so that when loops form they ments must be adhered to. Cable inspection
can be straightened out and not form should include careful visual checks for the fol-
kinks. A kink in the cable is caused by a lowing defects:
loop in the cable being pulled up tight,
resulting in a sharp, permanent bend in (1) Evidence of Dragging Over Obstacles or
the cable. Kinks can lead to fouling Worn Cable Guides:
failures as they cause a retarding force on Abrasion of cable is caused by contact
the cable when the kink gets hung up go- with other cable sections or any material
ing through the cable guide, especially that may contact the cable such as aircraft
when reeling out with no load. If it is structural members, auxiliary equipment,
required to reel in the cable at full speed or almost any abrasive surface. Abrasion
for acceptance test purposes, the cable removes metal from the external wires in
should be reeled out in a straight line for the outer strands and thus weakens the
it’s full length so that no kinks or cable. Nicking, scarring, and scrubbing
permanent cable damage occur reeling in. are also referred to as abrasion. Severe
If the purpose of the test is to measure abrasion resulting from dragging a cable
hoist speed, timing of a specified shorter across an aircraft structural member can
length is advisable. result in catastrophic cable failure and

1-7-58-3
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-7-58

possibly loss of life. Severe abrasion as up tight, resulting in a sharp, permanent

evidenced by a worn or damaged rough bend in the cable. Kinks are identified as
surface cable texture resulting in multiple "open" or "closed". An "open" kink is
broken wires in an outer strand in any sec- caused by pulling a cable loop tight, creat-
tion requires immediate cable replace- ing a sharp permanent bend which tends
ment. to open the lay of the cable. A "closed"
kink is caused in the same manner, but
(2) Improperly Adjusted or Defective Cable creates a sharp permanent bend which
Guide: tends to close the lay of the cable.
Cables evidencing damage such as broken Continued use of a kinked cable can result
wires at the turnaround or at cable in the kink being caught in the cable guide
crossovers are an indication that the hoist assembly upon paying out and will result
needs to have the levelwind readjusted or in cable fouling. A kinked cable should
repaired. Smiles (gaps between adjacent not be run back onto a hoist for any
turns of cable) are the result of the cable reason.
not being tightly and evenly wrapped and/
or the levelwind leading the cable too (5) Internal Wear Caused by Grit or Dirt
much. If the levelwind is adjusted to lag Penetration:
the cable too much, excessive abrasion of Internal wear caused by grit, dirt, sand,
the cable as it wraps on the drum occurs, etc., embedded between cable strands is
particularly at the crossovers. If loud extremely difficult to detect. Preventive
snapping is heard, shimming of the level- maintenance is the best procedure. The
wind shafts relative to the drum may be cable should be carefully wiped to remove
improper. All of the above inspections are gritty material as it is reeled in during
subjective and require an experienced inspection. Prolonged use of a cable
inspector to make the inspection and loaded with gritty material will result in
readjustment if required. If the condition broken wires.
is corrected prior to excessive damage oc-
(6) I m p r o p e r l y A t t a c h e d o r D e f e c t i v e
curring, the cable can be continued in
Fittings:
service if no more than one wire break is
Carefully inspect the cable in the area of
discovered and snipped and the necessary
the hook ball end attachment. Do not bend
adjustments are properly carried out.
the cable in the process of the inspection.
(3) Severe Overload: The ball end of the cable must not
A cable that has been severely overloaded evidence any broken wires at the swaged
may or may not show immediate results ball fitting. Any necking down, broken
of the overload. Broken strands are the wires, loose wires in the immediate vicin-
most obvious defects. However, broken ity of the ball end is a cause for cable
core wires may also result from overload. replacement. This condition may have
"Necking Down" of a section of cable is resulted from the cable not being snugged
an indication of broken core wires. A up against the cable guide bell mouth
cable that has been knowingly overloaded properly or a full-in limit switch that is
should be replaced immediately even if no activating too fast. The continual vibra-
obvious physical damage is detected. Any tion of a helicopter and a loosely "homed"
obvious reduction in diameter that is hook can result in a fatigue failure of the
noted is cause for immediate cable cable immediately above the ball end fit-
replacement. ting. This inspection should be performed
prior to every flight. If a loose hook is
(4) Kinking: noted, the necessary adjustment to the
Kinks are man-made defects in cables full-in limit switch shall be performed
caused by a loop in a cable being pulled after the cable inspection.

1-7-58-4
PARA 1-7-58 TM 1-70-23

(7) Broken Wires: problem, since the cable is not broken in

The number of broken wires on the yet and is still inflexible. If no other
outside of a wire rope is an index of it’s problems are noted, the next step is to run
general condition and whether or not it several cycles under a light load at a
must be considered for replacement. Tests reduced speed. This procedure allows the
have shown that a large number of broken component parts of the new rope to make
wires can exist without significant reduc- a gradual adjustment to the actual operat-
tion on the cable’s braking strength. ing conditions of the hoist.
Wires that are broken may cause some
other problems that may lead to more (10) A f t e r E a c h U s e i n S a l t W a t e r
severe situations. It is for this reason that Environments:
no broken wires are allowed for the hoist Cable will be reeled out and washed with
cable. If broken wires are detected, the fresh water. Cable may be reeled out into
cable shall be removed and replaced as a 55-gallon container filled with fresh
soon as possible. If it is required to oper- water, and dried by passing cable through
ate with broken wires, the operator should a cleaning cloth, Item 102, Appendix D,
pay extra attention to the hoist operation when reeling in.
with broken protruding wires from the
cable.
WARNING
(8) Bird Caging:
Bird caging results from torsional imbal-
Injury to personnel and damage to
ance that occurs because of abuse such as
equipment will occur if lubricant is ap-
sudden stops, the rope being worked
plied to cable or hoist. Tension roller
through tight sheaves, or a hook bearing
system works on basis of friction. If oil
that is not rotating. Any evidence of bird
or grease gets on cable, clean it with a
caging requires immediate replacement of
cleaning cloth and fresh water. Solvents
the load cable.
may be detrimental to tension roller, so
(9) Breaking in a New Wire Rope: a cable cleaned in this manner must be
In the event a wire rope needs to be re- dry before reeling in.
placed, the new rope requires careful NOTE
installation and close adherence to all the
appropriate procedures previously noted. Cloth should be held firmly to impart a
After a new cable has been installed, the steady, reasonably heavy tension load to
hoist should be run through a cycle of cable.
operation with no load at slow speed.
During this trial operation, a very close (11) During final rewind of hoist cable, a
watch should be kept of all working parts cleaning cloth, Item 102, Appendix D,
to make sure the cable runs freely, the should be held firmly around cable. Cloth
levelwind is adjusted properly, and the will help remove foreign particles (grit,
tensioning system is operating as it dirt, etc.) and, in event a broken wire was
should. One may witness some tendency overlooked during visual inspection, wire
for the cable to twist, which may result in end will snag on cloth, preventing break
a smile(s) developing. This may not be a from being overlooked.

1-7-58-5/(1-7-58-6 Blank)
PARA 1-7-59 TM 1-70-23

1-7-59 EVERY 60 MONTHS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-7-59.1 Inspect Fire Extinguishing 1-7-59-1

System Agent Container

INITIAL SETUP
References
• Manufacturer Maintenance Manual

1-7-59.1 Inspect Fire Extinguishing System

Agent Container.
Perform hydrostatic test of fire extinguishing
system agent container in accordance with manu-
facturer’s maintenance manual.

1-7-59-1/(1-7-59-2 Blank)
PARA 1-7-60 TM 1-70-23

1-7-60 EVERY 500 HOURS.

PARAGRAPH BREAKDOWN

PAGE

1-7-60.1 Pitch Control Rod Lock- 1-7-60-1

nut Torque Check

INITIAL SETUP References

Tools
• Appendix D
• Aircraft Mechanic’s Toolkit
• PARA 5-4-20
• Torque Wrench, 150 - 750 in. lbs
Materials/Parts
• Lockwire, Item 197, Appendix D

1-7-60.1 Pitch Control Rod Locknut Torque d. If torque is equal to or greater than 238 inch-
Check. pounds, perform the following:

a. Remove lockwire from upper and lower lock- (1) FOR PITCH CONTROL RODS WITH
nuts. SPHERICAL BEARINGS, TORQUE
LOCKNUTS TO 250 - 300 INCH-
NOTE POUNDS.
To prevent improper torque of upper (2) FOR PITCH CONTROL RODS WITH
locknut on pitch control rod, make sure ELASTOMERIC BEARINGS,
torque wrench is not in contact with lock TORQUE LOCKNUTS TO 325 - 375
key when torquing. INCH-POUNDS.
b. Check torque on upper and lower locknuts. e. Lockwire, Item 197, Appendix D, lower lock-
TORQUE MUST NOT BE LESS THAN 238 nut to link, and then back to lower locknut
INCH-POUNDS. (double-safety).

c. If torque is less than 238 inch-pounds, inspect f. Lockwire, Item 197, Appendix D, upper lock-
upper and/or lower rod end, link, and lock- nut to lock key, and then back to opposite side
nut(s) (PARA 5-4-20). of upper locknut (double-safety).

1-7-60-1/(1-7-60-2 Blank)
 TM 1-70-23

SECTION 1-8

RETIREMENT SCHEDULE

SECTION OVERVIEW

PARAGRAPH TITLE

1-8-1 Calendar Retirement

1-8-2 Life Limited Components

1-8-1/(1-8-2 Blank)
PARA 1-8-1 TM 1-70-23

1-8-1 CALENDAR RETIREMENT.

1-8-1.1 Retirement Schedule. and is always computed to the last day
of the month involved.
NOTE
• If the date the sealed container was
opened is not available, the installed life
• Installed life is the period of time an
shall be computed from the date of man-
impulse cartridge, explosive cartridge,
ufacture as determined from the lot
or cartridge activated device (CAD) is
number.
allowed to be used after its hermetically-
sealed container is opened; however, the The calendar retirement schedule, Table 1-8-1-1, lists
installed life expiration date shall never units of operating equipment that are to be retired at
exceed the shelf life expiration date. In- the period specified.
stalled life is never added to shelf life.
1-8-1.2 Retirement Schedule Definition.
• The installed life expiration date is
computed from the date the The operating time or calendar interval specified
hermetically-sealed container is opened for removal, condemnation, and disposal of parts.

Table 1-8-1-1. Calendar Retirement Schedule

Installed Life Shelf Life

Part No. Nomenclature (Mo) (Yrs) Notes

ARD863-1 Ejector Rack 15 10 1 through 4

Impulse
Cartridge

BL9280, Rescue Hoist 60 10 1 through 4

MK44 MOD 0 Impulse
Cartridge

CCU-44/B Ejector Rack 36 10 1 through 4

Impulse
Cartridge

CCU-90/A, Fire Extinguis- 36 12 1 through 4

1512AS105, her Cartridge
30903824-1

CCU-92/A, Cargo Hook 54 12 1 through 4

FE7590-95, Impulse
FE7590-168, Cartridge
103377-3,
103377-107

MARK 44 MOD 0 Cable Cutter 66 11 1 through 4

Cartridge

1-1-8-1
TM 1-70-23 PARA 1-8-1

Table 1-8-1-1. Calendar Retirement Schedule (Cont)

Installed Life Shelf Life

Part No. Nomenclature (Mo) (Yrs) Notes

MK 2 MOD 1 Ejector Rack 12 21.5 1 through 4

Impulse
Cartridge

SS30DF07F322000 Fuel System On Condition 8

SS30DN15F206000 Hoses,
SS30DN15F242000 Nonmetallic
SS30DF07F214000
SS30DN41G276000
SS30DN40G252000
SS30DN40G243000

T04/51 Battery, Digital 12 10

Clock

300078-1 Internal Rescue 36 6 1 through 4

Hoist Cartridge

70310-03101-109, Fire Extinguis- 120 10 1 through 5

897899-1 her Cartridge
(Walter Kidde)

931160 Chaff 12 11.5 1 through 4

M796 Dispenser
Impulse
Cartridge

NOTES

1. Shelf life is the maximum calendar time a cartridge can reach before it must be retired, whether
installed or not. Container storage life shall not be exceeded.

2. The computed cartridge replacement date, installation date, and lot number shall be recorded in
helicopter logbook for each installed cartridge.

3. Age life retired cartridges shall be returned to the supporting ammunition supply activity in the
container used to transport the replacement cartridge.

4. Unserviceable cartridges shall be tagged with the reason for removal, installation date, lot
number, helicopter serial number and Aviation Unit designation.

5. Installed life and shelf life are identical (120 months/10 years).

1-1-8-2
PARA 1-8-2 TM 1-70-23

1-8-2 LIFE LIMITED COMPONENTS.

Life limited components are identified in TM 1-70-23AW-1 for Sikorsky Quality Assurance Board certified
helicopters and TM 1-70-23AW-2 for Federal Aviation Administration certified helicopters.

1-8-2-1/(1-8-2-2 Blank)